Nothing Special   »   [go: up one dir, main page]

WO2002089222A1 - Light source coupler, illuminant device, patterned conductor, and method for manufcturing light source coupler - Google Patents

Light source coupler, illuminant device, patterned conductor, and method for manufcturing light source coupler Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2002089222A1
WO2002089222A1 PCT/JP2002/004100 JP0204100W WO02089222A1 WO 2002089222 A1 WO2002089222 A1 WO 2002089222A1 JP 0204100 W JP0204100 W JP 0204100W WO 02089222 A1 WO02089222 A1 WO 02089222A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
light source
connection
patterned conductor
led
light
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2002/004100
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
Hideo Moriyama
Munehiko Yanagida
Original Assignee
Moriyama Sangyo Kabushiki Kaisha
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Moriyama Sangyo Kabushiki Kaisha filed Critical Moriyama Sangyo Kabushiki Kaisha
Priority to JP2002586413A priority Critical patent/JP3880522B2/en
Priority to KR10-2003-7013880A priority patent/KR100537897B1/en
Priority to US10/475,816 priority patent/US7380961B2/en
Priority to CNB028088506A priority patent/CN1306621C/en
Publication of WO2002089222A1 publication Critical patent/WO2002089222A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
    • G09F9/30Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements
    • G09F9/33Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements being semiconductor devices, e.g. diodes
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21SNON-PORTABLE LIGHTING DEVICES; SYSTEMS THEREOF; VEHICLE LIGHTING DEVICES SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR VEHICLE EXTERIORS
    • F21S4/00Lighting devices or systems using a string or strip of light sources
    • F21S4/20Lighting devices or systems using a string or strip of light sources with light sources held by or within elongate supports
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21KNON-ELECTRIC LIGHT SOURCES USING LUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING ELECTROCHEMILUMINESCENCE; LIGHT SOURCES USING CHARGES OF COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL; LIGHT SOURCES USING SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AS LIGHT-GENERATING ELEMENTS; LIGHT SOURCES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F21K9/00Light sources using semiconductor devices as light-generating elements, e.g. using light-emitting diodes [LED] or lasers
    • F21K9/20Light sources comprising attachment means
    • F21K9/27Retrofit light sources for lighting devices with two fittings for each light source, e.g. for substitution of fluorescent tubes
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F21LIGHTING
    • F21YINDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES F21K, F21L, F21S and F21V, RELATING TO THE FORM OR THE KIND OF THE LIGHT SOURCES OR OF THE COLOUR OF THE LIGHT EMITTED
    • F21Y2115/00Light-generating elements of semiconductor light sources
    • F21Y2115/10Light-emitting diodes [LED]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L25/00Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof
    • H01L25/03Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof all the devices being of a type provided for in the same subgroup of groups H01L27/00 - H01L33/00, or in a single subclass of H10K, H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes
    • H01L25/10Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof all the devices being of a type provided for in the same subgroup of groups H01L27/00 - H01L33/00, or in a single subclass of H10K, H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices having separate containers
    • H01L25/13Assemblies consisting of a plurality of individual semiconductor or other solid state devices ; Multistep manufacturing processes thereof all the devices being of a type provided for in the same subgroup of groups H01L27/00 - H01L33/00, or in a single subclass of H10K, H10N, e.g. assemblies of rectifier diodes the devices having separate containers the devices being of a type provided for in group H01L33/00
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L2924/00Indexing scheme for arrangements or methods for connecting or disconnecting semiconductor or solid-state bodies as covered by H01L24/00
    • H01L2924/0001Technical content checked by a classifier
    • H01L2924/0002Not covered by any one of groups H01L24/00, H01L24/00 and H01L2224/00
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H01ELECTRIC ELEMENTS
    • H01LSEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES NOT COVERED BY CLASS H10
    • H01L33/00Semiconductor devices having potential barriers specially adapted for light emission; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof
    • H01L33/48Semiconductor devices having potential barriers specially adapted for light emission; Processes or apparatus specially adapted for the manufacture or treatment thereof or of parts thereof; Details thereof characterised by the semiconductor body packages
    • H01L33/62Arrangements for conducting electric current to or from the semiconductor body, e.g. lead-frames, wire-bonds or solder balls
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K1/00Printed circuits
    • H05K1/02Details
    • H05K1/0286Programmable, customizable or modifiable circuits
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K3/00Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits
    • H05K3/10Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which conductive material is applied to the insulating support in such a manner as to form the desired conductive pattern
    • H05K3/20Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which conductive material is applied to the insulating support in such a manner as to form the desired conductive pattern by affixing prefabricated conductor pattern
    • H05K3/202Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits in which conductive material is applied to the insulating support in such a manner as to form the desired conductive pattern by affixing prefabricated conductor pattern using self-supporting metal foil pattern
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K3/00Apparatus or processes for manufacturing printed circuits
    • H05K3/30Assembling printed circuits with electric components, e.g. with resistor
    • H05K3/32Assembling printed circuits with electric components, e.g. with resistor electrically connecting electric components or wires to printed circuits
    • H05K3/325Assembling printed circuits with electric components, e.g. with resistor electrically connecting electric components or wires to printed circuits by abutting or pinching, i.e. without alloying process; mechanical auxiliary parts therefor
    • H05K3/326Assembling printed circuits with electric components, e.g. with resistor electrically connecting electric components or wires to printed circuits by abutting or pinching, i.e. without alloying process; mechanical auxiliary parts therefor the printed circuit having integral resilient or deformable parts, e.g. tabs or parts of flexible circuits

Definitions

  • Light source connector Light emitting device, patterned conductor, and method for manufacturing light source connector
  • the present invention relates to a light source connected body formed by electrically connecting a plurality of light sources, a light emitting device using such a light source connected body, a patterned conductor for forming the light source connected body, and a manufacturing of the light source connected body.
  • a light source connected body formed by electrically connecting a plurality of light sources, a light emitting device using such a light source connected body, a patterned conductor for forming the light source connected body, and a manufacturing of the light source connected body.
  • Light-emitting devices having a configuration in which a number of light sources are arranged in a row on the surface of a holder are used not only for lighting but also for advertising, decoration, and signage.
  • a gun-shaped LED light source with a lead wire, a through hole into which the lead wire of this light source is inserted, and a conductor for supplying power to the light source
  • a printed circuit board on which a pattern is formed, and to connect the conductor pattern of the printed circuit board and the lead wire of the light source by one-piece soldering.
  • the connection is troublesome, resulting in a disadvantage that the cost increases.
  • the printed circuit board has a problem that it is extremely difficult to recycle it when it is no longer needed because the wiring is integrated with the support plate.
  • Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 7-106634 describes that a plurality of LEDs are connected between an anode bus bar and a cathode bus bar by mechanical coupling connection. Is disclosed. Also, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H08-3161631 discloses that a plurality of bus bar pairs, a plurality of LEDs mounted on each bus bar pair, and an electrical and mechanical connection between adjacent bus bar pairs. There is disclosed a light emitting module that includes a flexible joint coupled to the light emitting device and facilitates three-dimensional molding.
  • a light source connection body in which various light source connection patterns can be easily selected and which can be manufactured with high production efficiency, and a method of manufacturing the same. Disclosure of the invention
  • the present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems of the prior art, and a main object of the present invention is to provide a plurality of light sources that can be manufactured efficiently and at low cost without using a printed circuit board.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a light source connected body having the same and a method for manufacturing the same.
  • a second object of the present invention is to provide a light source assembly capable of eliminating or greatly reducing the amount of solder used, and a method of manufacturing the same.
  • a third object of the present invention is to provide a light source assembly capable of easily coping with various arrangements of light sources, and a method for manufacturing the same.
  • a fourth object of the present invention is to provide a light source assembly as described above using a chip type LED as a light source, and a method for manufacturing the same.
  • a fifth object of the present invention is to provide a light-emitting device using the above-described light source connector.
  • a sixth object of the present invention is to provide a tape-shaped conductor that can be used to form the above-described light source connector.
  • a light source assembly in which a plurality of light sources are electrically connected, wherein the light source assembly is configured to connect a plurality of the light sources.
  • a connection conductor structure extending in a direction in which the light sources are arranged, wherein the connection conductor structure is formed by cutting off a required portion of a substantially flat patterned conductor on which a predetermined pattern is formed.
  • a special light source assembly is provided.
  • the patterned conductor can be formed by pressing a conductive flat plate material. According to this, the light source connector can be formed without using a printed circuit board, so that solder used for connection with the printed circuit board can be eliminated, and there is no need to pay attention to environmental pollution. No risk of LED damage due to heat during soldering.
  • connection conductor structure having various light source connection patterns on a single production line using the same patterned conductor. Even when a small number of light source connected bodies are manufactured in small quantities, they can be manufactured efficiently and at low cost.
  • the patterned conductor when the patterned conductor is formed from a conductive flat plate material, it can be appropriately deformed into a required shape by giving appropriate flexibility, and it can be used in various arrangements of light sources. It can be easily handled. Furthermore, since no printed circuit board is used, recycling when it becomes unnecessary is easy.
  • the patterned conductor is in the form of a long tape, it can be transported on a production line while mounting a light source, pressing, etc. Therefore, the light source connected body can be continuously produced, which is preferable. By cutting the patterned conductor into an appropriate length, it is possible to easily obtain a light source connected body having a desired length.
  • the plurality of light sources include a chip LED, and a socket for mounting the chip LED is attached to the connection conductor structure by insert molding.
  • the socket has a bottom wall and side walls to define a cavity having an opening at the top, and the chip-type LED is housed in this cavity. In this way, even when a chip-type LED having no lead wire is used as the light source, it is possible to easily attach the chip-type LED to the connection conductor structure and obtain a light source connected body. Become.
  • a hole is provided in the bottom wall of the socket, from which the LED mounted on the socket can be pushed to remove the LED from the socket. In this way, a failed LED can be quickly replaced with a working LED.
  • a part of the connection conductor structure is exposed in the cavity of the socket, and the chip-type LED comes into contact with the electrical terminals of the chip-type LED with the chip-type LED mounted on the socket. It is preferable from the viewpoint of realizing quick mounting to the socket. More preferably, a portion of the connection conductor structure exposed in the cavity of the socket has a projection for contacting an electric terminal of the LED. By doing so, the electrical connection between the LED and the connection conductor can be further ensured.
  • connection conductor structure if a part of the connection conductor structure is bent so as to engage with the LED mounted on the socket and prevent the LED from dropping out of the socket, if the light source connector is mounted upside down, Is also preferable because the LED does not drop off undesirably.
  • a chip type LED has a light emitting portion on a side surface. It is of a side view type, and at least a part of the side wall of the socket has an opening for passing light from the light emitting portion of the LED. This makes it possible to use side-view type LEDs.
  • the plurality of light sources includes a light source having leads, and the connecting conductor structure has holes corresponding to the leads of the light sources.
  • the portion defining the hole of the connecting conductor structure includes a protrusion protruding toward the inside of the hole.
  • the lead wire of the light source is inserted into a hole in the connecting conductor structure, thereby making an electrical-mechanical connection between the light source and the connecting conductor structure.
  • the lead wire of the light source be caulked by the portion of the connection conductor structure close to the hole of the connection conductor structure, thereby holding the light source from the viewpoint of preventing undesired light source from falling off.
  • each of the plurality of light sources includes a pair of leads extending substantially parallel to each other, the plurality of light sources being arranged in a direction substantially orthogonal to the leads.
  • the connecting conductor structure is arranged so that its main surface extends substantially along the leads, and is assembled to these leads to connect the light source.
  • the patterned conductor has a long tape shape and has a plurality of connection portions to the lead wires of the light source, and these connection portions correspond to the arrangement of the plurality of light sources held by radial taping. It is preferable that they are arranged side by side. According to this, when assembling the light source and the patterned conductor, the work can be performed in a state where a plurality of light sources are integrally held by radial taping, so that workability can be improved. After attaching the light source to the patterned conductor, place the leads In addition to cutting at a fixed location, a required portion of the patterned conductor is cut off to form a connection conductor structure, thereby obtaining a light source assembly.
  • connection conductor structure is bent.
  • the connection conductor structure is exposed without being covered with the insulating material, it is possible to prevent undesired contact between the connection conductor structure and the lead wire and to prevent an unintended short circuit in the circuit. Can be avoided.
  • the connecting conductor structure without covering it with an insulating material, the heat dissipation effect of the connecting conductor structure is enhanced, and the advantage that the light source can be suitably accommodated even when the light sources are arranged at high density is obtained. Further, since the bending in the longitudinal direction is restricted, the workability when mounting to the holder can be improved.
  • the patterned conductor is preferably in the form of a long tape, and has a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with a light source; A communication path portion to be connected; at least one trunk path portion extending in the longitudinal direction separated from the connection path portion and the light source mounting portion in the width direction; And a branch portion.
  • a connection conductor structure capable of connecting the light source in various connection patterns by cutting off a predetermined portion of the branch, the communication, or the trunk.
  • the trunk path can be used to connect the light source to the power source, and in that case, it is not necessary to provide a separate wiring. Benefits are also obtained.
  • the uncut part of the trunk corresponds to the corresponding branch through the corresponding branch. If it is left connected to the light source mounting part, the unremoved part of the trunk will act as a heat radiating part to dissipate the heat generated from the light source. Excessive rise in ambient temperature of the source can be prevented.
  • a resistor is connected between at least a pair of adjacent light sources, and a communication path portion is formed between a pair of adjacent light sources connected between the resistors. It can be as if it were fragmented. This makes it possible, for example, to connect a resistor to the light source to prevent overvoltage from being applied to the light source.
  • the light source connector extends in the width direction of the connection conductor structure. And a connecting member for integrally holding the communication path and the trunk road.
  • connection conductor structure when a required portion of the patterned conductor is cut off to form the connection conductor structure, each part of the connection conductor structure can be prevented from falling apart, and the formed connection conductor structure can be prevented.
  • Mechanical strength can be increased.
  • Such a connecting member can preferably be formed by an insert mold. When the connecting member is formed by an insert mold, a widthwise recess or a through hole is provided in the trunk road portion, and if the connecting member extends through the widthwise recess or the through hole, the connecting member and This is preferable because the engagement with the main road can be strengthened.
  • a hole exposing the communication path is provided at a position where the connection path is aligned with the communication path of the connecting member, and the exposed communication path can be divided through the hole.
  • the portion of the communication path exposed by the hole of the connecting member may have a smaller width than other parts of the communication path to facilitate resection.
  • the connecting member may include one or a plurality of insulating sheets.
  • a plurality of insulating sheets may extend in the width direction of the connecting conductor structure at a predetermined place, or may be a single insulating sheet extending over substantially the entire length of the connecting conductor structure. Good.
  • Such an insulating sheet By using the light source, it is possible to reduce the size (thickness) of the light source connected body manufactured as compared with the case where the connecting member is formed by the insert mold.
  • the insulating sheet is attached to the light source mounting surface of the connection conductor structure, the part to which the power supply voltage is applied is not exposed to the light source mounting surface that is relatively easy for workers to touch, improving safety.
  • the insulating sheet reflects the light from the light source to increase the lighting efficiency. If the light source connected body does not have the connecting member by the insert mold or the light source is connected to the connecting conductor structure When such a connecting member is removed, for example, after installation, the branch road connecting the trunk road and the communication road is bent so that the main surface of the trunk road is substantially perpendicular to the main surface of the communication road. You may. By doing so, the light source connector can be easily attached to the holder by inserting the trunk road into the matching recess or hole formed in the holder.
  • a socket for mounting the chip-type LED extends in the width direction of the connecting conductor structure so that the communication path and the main path are integrally held. Can also.
  • the light source mounting part corresponding to the chip-type LED has a terminal connection part corresponding to a terminal of the chip-type LED, and at least one of these terminal connection parts has an extension part.
  • the extension may be bent to form a wall for positioning or holding the chip type LED.
  • the terminal connection portion of the light source attachment portion corresponding to the chip type LED has a pair of extension portions facing each other. By doing so, the socket formed by insert molding or the like can be omitted.
  • the light source may not be attached to at least one of the light source attachment portions.
  • the spacing between the light sources can be flexibly changed. For example, when the light sources are connected in series or in series / parallel, the terminal connection portions included in each light source mounting portion are connected at the time of forming the patterned conductor (that is, at the time of primary processing), and the This can be achieved by separating the terminal connection part only at the light source mounting part where the light source is mounted during the secondary processing.
  • the pair of terminals of the light source may be arranged in the width direction of the light source assembly.
  • the light source mounting portion to which the light source having the pair of terminals is mounted has a pair of terminal connection portions corresponding to the pair of terminals, and the pair of terminal connection portions are arranged in the width direction of the patterned conductor. This is realized by being arranged.
  • the patterned conductor preferably has a pattern that can be used for connecting the light sources in series, in parallel, or in series / parallel. By doing so, even if the light sources are connected in series, in parallel, or in series / parallel, the light sources can be formed from the same patterned conductor, thereby improving production efficiency and reducing production costs. Can be.
  • the patterned conductor has an elongated tape shape and a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source; Connecting section in the longitudinal direction, a pair of trunk sections disposed on both sides of the connecting section and the light source mounting section in the width direction, and extending in the longitudinal direction; the trunk section and the connecting path And a plurality of branch portions connecting the portions in the width direction.
  • a common putter can be cut off by cutting off the required branch road, connecting road, or trunk road. Since a connection conductor structure having various light source connection patterns can be easily and efficiently manufactured from a single conductor on a single production line, the production cost can be kept low even in a small-scale production.
  • each of the light source mounting portions has a pair of terminal connection portions corresponding to a pair of terminals of the light source, and the communication path portion connects the terminal connection portions included in the adjacent light source mounting portions to each other. Including a plurality of connection paths.
  • the patterned conductor has a long tape shape, and is electrically connected to the light source.
  • a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in the longitudinal direction for connecting the light source mounting portion, a communication path portion connecting the light source mounting portion in the longitudinal direction, and a length disposed on both sides of the communication path portion and the light source mounting portion in the width direction. It has a pair of trunk roads extending in the hand direction, and a plurality of branch roads that connect the trunk road and the connecting road in the width direction, and each of the light source mounting parts has three terminals of a three-pole LED lamp.
  • connection path portion has three terminal connection portions arranged in the width direction corresponding to each other, and the connection path portion includes a plurality of connection paths connecting the terminal connection portions aligned in the width direction of the adjacent light source mounting portions to each other. It is good to do so. By doing so, it is possible to realize a light source connected body using a three-pole LED lamp as a light source, and it is possible to variously change the emission color by connecting an appropriate power supply and switch.
  • the plurality of light sources include a four-pole LED lamp including first and second LED chips of different colors and having four terminals, wherein two of the four terminals are connected to the first LED chip. Connected, the other two being connected to the second LED chip, the patterned conductor has a long tape shape, and is disposed in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source.
  • Each of the light source mounting portions has four terminals of a 4-pole LED lamp.
  • connection path portion is A plurality of connection paths for connecting the terminal connection portions aligned in the width direction included in the adjacent light source attachment portions, and the plurality of connection paths aligned in the longitudinal direction are branches extending in the width direction.
  • Parts, and the patterned conductors are first and second A third trunk road extending in the longitudinal direction outward of any one of the trunk roads in the width direction, and a third trunk road and any one of the first and second trunk roads extending in the width direction. And a branch that communicates in the direction.
  • a light source combination using a four-pole LED lamp as a light source can be realized, and the emission color can be variously changed by connecting an appropriate power supply and switch.
  • the buttered conductor consists essentially of aluminum. It is preferable to attach the light source to the connection conductor structure by laser welding because the attachment can be easily performed with high reliability. Further, a resistor constituting a predetermined circuit together with the light source can be attached to the connection conductor structure by laser welding.
  • the light source thus attached to the connection conductor structure by laser welding is typically a chip type LED (surface mount type LED), and such a resistor is a chip type resistor (surface mount type resistor).
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and can be used for a light source having a lead wire as a terminal for electrical connection.
  • the patterned conductor includes a pair of trunks extending substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of branches connecting the pair of trunks to each other.
  • a light source is connected between the pair of trunk roads, and the cut portion of the patterned conductor includes a branch.
  • This embodiment is particularly suitable for implementing a light source assembly in which a plurality of light sources are connected in parallel between a pair of trunk roads. Since the pair of trunk roads is connected by a plurality of branch roads, handling of the patterned conductor is extremely easy, and the production efficiency can be improved.
  • the light source (LED) mounted between the pair of trunk roads is attached only in the longitudinal direction. It can be easily adjusted not only in the width direction but also in the width direction, for example, when the light source assembly is used to form an in-vehicle lamp, and when a different LED arrangement pattern is required depending on the vehicle type, Great economic benefits can be achieved by sharing parts.
  • each of the plurality of light sources is composed of a plate-shaped LED having a cathode terminal and an anode terminal
  • the portion of the patterned conductor to which the power source terminal of each LED is attached has a larger area than the portion to which the anode terminal of the LED is attached. Good to do. This is because, in such an LED, the LED chip, which is usually sealed in a package, is mounted on the cathode terminal and connected to the anode terminal by a thin lead wire, etc.
  • Patterned conductor is longitudinal When each LED is connected between a pair of trunk roads, the width of the trunk road to which the cathode terminal of the LED is attached is determined by the anode terminal of the LED. It should be larger than the width of the trunk road to be attached.
  • a light-emitting device including a light source connector that electrically connects a plurality of light sources and a holder that holds the light source connector, wherein the light source connector includes a plurality of light sources. It includes a connecting conductor structure extending in the arrangement direction of the light sources to connect the light sources, and the connecting conductor structure is formed by cutting out a required portion of a generally flat patterned conductor having a predetermined pattern formed thereon.
  • the patterned conductor has a long tape shape, and has a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with a light source;
  • a pair of trunk roads which are disposed on both sides of the communication passage and the light source mounting portion in the width direction and extend in the longitudinal direction, and the trunk road and the communication passage are arranged in the width direction.
  • the branch section connecting the trunk section and the communication path section is bent so that the main surface of the trunk section is substantially orthogonal to the main surface of the connection path section.
  • the light emitting device is characterized in that the light source device is attached to the holder by inserting the light source into the corresponding hole or recess provided in the holder. In such a light emitting device, the light source connector can be attached to the holder simply by inserting the trunk road into the recess or hole of the holder, so that the efficiency of the attaching operation is improved.
  • a plurality of light sources each including a lead wire are electrically connected to each other in a direction substantially perpendicular to the lead wire, and a holding body that holds the light source connected body includes: Having a plurality of light sources connected by a connection conductor structure extending in the arrangement direction. By holding one or both of the lead wire and the connecting conductor structure to the holder side and inserting them into corresponding holes or recesses provided in the holder, the light source connector is held.
  • a light-emitting device characterized by being attached to a body is provided.
  • a hole or a concave portion may be provided in the holder, and complicated processing is not required, so that various types of light sources having different positions can be easily manufactured.
  • the light source connected body can be securely fixed to the holder with a simple configuration.
  • the connecting conductor structure is arranged between the holder and the light source main body, and the light source main body is held in a state separated from the surface of the holder, so that the heat dissipation can be improved.
  • a tape-shaped patterned conductor having a predetermined pattern for electrically connecting a plurality of light sources to form a light source connected body, the tape-shaped patterned conductor being electrically connected to the light source.
  • a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in the longitudinal direction for connection, a communication path portion connecting these light source mounting portions in the longitudinal direction, and a longitudinal direction separated from the communication path portion and the light source mounting portion in the width direction.
  • a tape-shaped patterned conductor having at least one trunk road portion extending in the direction, and a plurality of branch road portions that connect the trunk road portion and the connecting road portion in the width direction.
  • Cutting (secondary processing) of such a patterned conductor can be efficiently performed at low cost by performing press processing using a progressive press machine. Therefore, it is engaged with the pilot pin of the progressive press machine on the trunk road and positioned. It is preferable that a plurality of holes (pilot holes) that can be used for carrying the patterned conductors be formed at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction.
  • the communication path section may include a plurality of connection paths that connect the terminal connection sections included in the adjacent light source mounting sections.
  • a hole for inserting a lead wire of an electric element having a lead wire such as a resistor may be provided in at least one of the connection paths or Z and the trunk road. If the pair of terminal connection parts of each light source mounting part are separated from each other, there are few places to cut out during the secondary processing of the patterned conductor, while if they are connected to each other, as necessary The portion connecting the terminal connections can be cut off, improving flexibility.
  • a resistance mounting portion may be provided between at least one pair of adjacent light source mounting portions. Also, at least one of the branch portions may be replaced by a resistor mounting portion. By doing so, the resistor can be easily incorporated into the circuit. Further, the main road may have a convex curved portion in the width direction.
  • a convex curved portion at the root portion By bending such a convex curved portion at the root portion, it can be used for connection with a holder or the like.
  • a tape-shaped patterned conductor When unwinding a coiled tape-shaped patterned conductor using a progressive press machine and assembling with multiple light sources held by radial tubing, a tape-shaped patterned conductor is used.
  • the trunk road may interfere with the main body of the light source.
  • the tape-shaped patterned conductor may be damaged.
  • the pair of trunk roads extends the light source mounting part and the communication path in a width direction. It is provided on both sides across the direction.
  • a light source connected body that connects the light sources in any of a series-parallel, a parallel, and a series by cutting off a predetermined portion of the branch path and the Z or the communication path. That is, since light source couplings having various connection patterns can be produced from the same patterned conductor on the same production line, it is extremely useful in improving production efficiency and lowering production costs.
  • a tape-shaped patterned conductor having a predetermined pattern for electrically connecting a plurality of light sources to form a light source assembly comprising: The conductor is cut off at a required portion by a progressive press to form a connecting conductor structure that connects the light sources.
  • the patterned conductor has multiple holes used for transport or positioning by the progressive press in the longitudinal direction.
  • a tape-shaped patterned conductor characterized by being formed at a predetermined interval is provided.
  • a plurality of light sources having leads are arranged in a direction substantially perpendicular to the leads, and are electrically connected to form a predetermined light source for forming a light source assembly.
  • a patterned conductor is provided, wherein a plurality of holes used for transport or positioning by a progressive press are formed at predetermined intervals in a longitudinal direction in a communication path portion.
  • a method for manufacturing a light source assembly having a plurality of light sources and a connection conductor structure for electrically connecting the plurality of light sources comprising: Almost flat patterning with patterns Forming a conductor, assembling the patterned conductor with a light source, and cutting a required portion of the patterned conductor to form a connection conductor structure.
  • a light source connected body including a connection conductor structure having various light source connection patterns by changing the cutout location of the patterned conductor.
  • such a method eliminates the need for a printed circuit board and the solder normally used for connection with the printed circuit board.
  • the step of forming the tape-shaped patterned conductor includes a step of pressing a conductive flat material. Further, it is more preferable in terms of working efficiency if the step of cutting off a required portion of the patterned conductor and the step of assembling the Z or patterned conductor to the light source are performed by a progressive press.
  • the method further includes attaching a connecting member to the tape-shaped patterned conductor so as to integrally hold each part of the connection conductor structure formed from the patterned conductor.
  • the connection conductor structure is formed after the mounting process, the individual portions of the formed connection conductor structure can be prevented from falling apart. In that case, it is preferable that at least one hole is provided in the connecting member to expose a required portion of the patterned conductor.
  • the portion of the patterned conductor exposed by the hole can be cut off as needed.
  • the light source includes a chip-type LED and the method includes attaching a socket for mounting the chip-type LED to the patterned conductor, the step of cutting off a required portion of the patterned conductor is performed after the socket attaching process. It may be done.
  • assembling the patterned conductor to the light source may include inserting a lead wire of the light source into a corresponding hole provided in the connection conductor structure. .
  • the process of cutting the patterned conductor may be performed after the process of assembling the patterned conductor to the light source. According to this, each part of the connection conductor structure formed by cutting off a required portion of the patterned conductor can be prevented from being separated without using a connecting member.
  • the use of solder is eliminated if the assembling step includes a step of caulking the leads at predetermined portions of the patterned conductor. This is preferable because it can be performed.
  • Such a joining method by staking is also suitable from the point that it is suitable for performing by a progressive press.
  • Folding the patterned conductor along a longitudinally extending fold line may further include undesired connection between the patterned conductor (or the connecting conductor structure formed therefrom) and the light source leads. Can prevent contact
  • a method for manufacturing a light source assembly in which a plurality of light sources having leads are electrically connected in a direction substantially orthogonal to the leads.
  • the work of connecting the light sources is performed in a state where a plurality of light sources are integrated, so that the workability at the time of manufacturing the light source assembly can be improved.
  • a light emitting device having a light source connected body in which a plurality of light sources are electrically connected, and a light-transmitting tubular member for housing the light source connected body; A pair of cap members attached to both ends of the tubular member, wherein the light source connector includes a connection conductor structure extending in an arrangement direction of the light sources so as to connect a plurality of light sources; , Prescribed A luminous body device is provided, which is formed by cutting off a required portion of a substantially flat patterned conductor on which the above pattern is formed.
  • connection conductor structure can be made much thicker (0.1 to 0.3 mm) than the copper foil (typically 35 m) for forming a circuit on a printed circuit board to improve the heat conduction characteristics.
  • the heat generated from the light source and other elements can be transferred quickly, preventing the ambient temperature of the light source and other elements from becoming excessively high, and preventing damage to the light source and other elements due to heat.
  • the patterned conductor is in the form of a long tape, and a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in the longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source, and these light source mounting portions are connected in the longitudinal direction.
  • a communication path portion at least one trunk path portion extending in the longitudinal direction separated from the connection path portion and the light source mounting portion in the width direction, and a plurality of the communication paths connecting the trunk path portion and the connection path portion in the width direction. And a branch portion.
  • a conductive pin for electrical connection to an external device is held on at least one of the pair of cap members, if the trunk path is connected to the conductive pin, wiring can be performed separately. This is not required and is desirable from the viewpoint of improving work efficiency.
  • a light emitting device having a light source connected body in which a plurality of light sources are electrically connected, wherein the light source connected body includes a plurality of light sources.
  • a connection conductor structure extending in the arrangement direction, wherein the connection conductor structure is formed by cutting off a required portion of a substantially flat patterned conductor on which a predetermined pattern is formed; Is characterized by having a housing for accommodating the light source connector, and a heat transfer member for contacting the connection conductor structure of the light source connector and the inner surface of the housing and transmitting heat therebetween.
  • An illuminator device is provided.
  • the heat generated from the light source and the like is transmitted from the connection conductor structure to the housing, and further radiated from the housing to the outside.
  • the use of the heat transfer member allows the housing to function as a heat sink.
  • the heat transfer member can also function as a support for supporting the light source assembly in the housing, in which case a separate support need not be provided.
  • heat transfer member has elasticity and is pressed against the inner surface of the housing, heat transfer to the housing becomes good and the light source connector is stably held in the housing without rattling.
  • the housing is preferably made of a material having good heat conductivity such as glass.
  • a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with a light source, and a communication path for connecting the light source mounting portion in a longitudinal direction, in which the patterned conductor has a long tape shape.
  • At least one trunk road portion extending in the longitudinal direction while being spaced apart in the width direction from the communication path portion and the light source mounting portion; and a plurality of branch paths connecting the trunk road portion and the communication path portion in the width direction.
  • the heat transfer member can be connected to the trunk road.
  • a light-emitting device including a light source connector that electrically connects a plurality of light sources and a holder that holds the light source connector, wherein the light source connector includes a plurality of light sources.
  • a connection conductor structure extending in the arrangement direction of the light sources to connect the light sources, wherein the connection conductor structure is formed by cutting off a required portion of a substantially flat patterned conductor on which a predetermined pattern is formed;
  • the patterned conductor is in the form of a long tape, and a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in the longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source, and the light source mounting portion is connected in the longitudinal direction.
  • the body is provided with a groove on at least one surface thereof,
  • a guide groove extending in the longitudinal direction corresponding to the pair of trunk roads is provided on the side wall, and the pair of trunk roads is slid and fitted into the guide grooves, so that the light source connector is attached to the holder.
  • a luminous body device is provided. In such a light emitting device, attachment of the light source connector to the holder can be easily performed.
  • Grooves are provided on both sides of the holding body, and guide grooves extending in the longitudinal direction corresponding to the pair of trunk roads are provided on opposing side walls of each groove. By fitting into the groove, it is possible to attach the light source connector to each of both sides of the holder and to emit light to both sides of the holder.
  • a tape-shaped patterned conductor having a predetermined pattern for electrically connecting a plurality of light sources to form a light source connection body, comprising: Three or more trunks that are spaced apart from each other in the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of light source mounting portions for electrical connection with a light source, which are arranged in the longitudinal direction between the adjacent trunks, A communication path for connecting the light source mounting section in the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of branch sections extending in the width direction so as to communicate with the trunk path sandwiching each of the connection paths in the width direction.
  • a tape-shaped patterned conductor is provided.
  • a light emitting device including a plurality of light source connected bodies each of which is electrically connected to a plurality of light sources, wherein each of the light source connected bodies is a light source for connecting a plurality of light sources.
  • the connection conductor structure includes a connection conductor structure extending in the direction in which the light sources are arranged, and the connection conductor structure connects the light sources in parallel with each other by cutting off a required portion of a substantially flat patterned conductor on which a predetermined pattern is formed.
  • the plurality of light source connected bodies are arranged in the width direction, and are adjacent to each other.
  • a light emitting device characterized in that a plurality of light source connected bodies are connected in series by connecting the connection conductor structures of the light source connected bodies. In this way, it is possible to form a light emitter device in which light sources are connected in a matrix using the light source connector.
  • a luminous device is suitable for, for example, a signal light, because even if one light source fails and current stops flowing, the influence on other light sources is small.
  • each of the light sources consists of LEDs, and if a resistor is connected in series with each LED, even if one LED is short-circuited, the voltage is maintained by the resistor connected in series with it, resulting in a short-circuit failure
  • the LED connected in parallel with the LED can also continue to emit light, preventing a significant decrease in light quantity.
  • a light source connector formed by electrically connecting a plurality of light sources, wherein the light source connector is a connection conductor structure extending in a direction in which the light sources are arranged to connect the plurality of light sources.
  • the connection conductor structure is formed by cutting off a required portion of a substantially flat patterned conductor on which a predetermined pattern is formed, and the patterned conductor has a long tape shape.
  • a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with a light source; a communication path portion connecting the light source mounting portions in a longitudinal direction; and a communication path portion and a light source mounting portion.
  • a pair of trunk roads each of which has a pair of trunk roads disposed on both sides of the width direction and extending in the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of branch roads connecting the trunk roads and the communication roads in the width direction;
  • Light source parallel connection including multiple light sources connected in parallel between sections A part of the branch path and a part of the communication path are cut off so that a plurality of bodies are formed, and a part of a pair of trunk paths is cut so that these light source parallel connection bodies are connected in series.
  • a light source connected body characterized in that: According to this, it is possible to provide a light source connected body including light sources that are electrically connected in a matrix and spatially arranged in a line. You.
  • each of the light sources consists of LEDs
  • the connection direction of the LEDs included in the adjacent light source parallel connection is reversed, so that the light source parallel upstream of the adjacent light source parallel connection is electrically connected.
  • the cathode of the LED included in the connection body and the anode of the LED included in the parallel connection of the light source on the downstream side are connected via one of the pair of trunk roads, and the pair of trunk roads are adjacent to each other.
  • the anode of the LED included in the upstream parallel light source is separated from the power source of the LED included in the downstream parallel light source, and both ends of each LED are not short-circuited.
  • a pair of trunk routes connect the LED cathode included in the light source parallel connection electrically upstream of the adjacent light source parallel connection and the anode of the LED included in the downstream light source parallel connection.
  • a pair of trunk roads are connected to the LED included in the upstream light source parallel connection among the adjacent light source parallel connection.
  • a luminous body device including a plurality of light source connected bodies formed by connecting a plurality of light sources arranged in a substantially linear manner, wherein the plurality of light source connected bodies is a light emitting device.
  • a luminous body device is provided, wherein the luminous body device is arranged so as to form a spiral from respective starting points arranged at substantially equal intervals in a circumferential direction at a peripheral portion of the surface toward a center portion.
  • the surface light emitter can be easily formed by using a light source connected body formed by connecting a plurality of light sources arranged linearly.
  • the plurality of light source assemblies include at least two light source assemblies that emit light of different light colors. In such a case, it is possible to arrange the light sources of these different light colors almost uniformly mixedly.
  • a light emitting device comprising: a plurality of LED parallel connected bodies each having a plurality of LEDs connected in parallel, wherein the plurality of LED parallel connected bodies are connected in series.
  • a luminous device is provided, wherein resistors associated with each LED are connected in series.
  • a tape-shaped patterned conductor having a predetermined pattern for forming a light source connection by electrically connecting a plurality of light sources, the tape-shaped patterned conductor having a predetermined lengthwise direction.
  • a patterned conductor characterized by having a stretchable portion at the position (1). According to this, even after the light source connector is formed, the arrangement position of the light source can be adjusted by deforming the extendable portion.
  • various light sources can be easily arranged, for example, by offsetting or bending the arrangement direction of the light sources as well as straight lines. It is more preferable to have a deformation preventing portion for selectively allowing deformation of the extendable portion.
  • the stretchable portion and the deformation preventing portion are formed by a punching process (also referred to as a punching process) because they can be easily and efficiently formed.
  • the deformable portion be deformable by removing the deformation preventing portion, because the deformable portion can be easily deformed.
  • the stretchable portion and the deformation preventing portion are formed by a pair of trunks. Trunk road A predetermined portion of the portion can be formed by punching.
  • the stretchable portion may have at least one pleated portion extending in the width direction of the patterned conductor.
  • FIG. 1 is a sectional view showing a light emitting device according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view along the line II-II in FIG.
  • FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the light source assembly shown in FIG.
  • 4a and 4b are front views showing examples of the tape-shaped patterned conductor, respectively.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a situation in a manufacturing process of the light emitting device shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 6 is a view showing a procedure of the secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor for forming the serial / parallel light emitting device shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a procedure of secondary processing of a tape-shaped patterned conductor to form a parallel light emitting device.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a procedure of secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor to form a serial light emitting device.
  • FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view showing a light emitting device in which a series light source connected body obtained by the secondary processing shown in FIG. 8 is mounted on a mounting pod (holding body).
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another embodiment of the secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor to form a serial light emitting device.
  • FIG. 1la and FIG. 1lb are cross-sectional views showing different examples of the attachment form of the light source connector to the holder.
  • FIG. 12 is a front view showing an example in which the light sources are arranged on a plane.
  • FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view showing an example in which light sources are arranged on a curved surface.
  • FIG. 14 is a front view showing an embodiment of a tape-shaped patterned conductor suitable for forming a serial light emitting device.
  • FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the procedure of the secondary processing of the patterned conductor shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 16 is a perspective view showing an embodiment of the light source assembly according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 17a is a cross-sectional view taken along line XVI-XVII of FIG. 16, and
  • FIG. 17b is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 17a showing an embodiment using socket pins.
  • FIG. 18 is a plan view of a patterned conductor used to form the light source assembly shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a procedure of secondary processing of the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 18 for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in series and parallel.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a procedure of the secondary processing of the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 18 for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in parallel.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a procedure of secondary processing of the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 18 for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in series.
  • FIG. 22 is a perspective view showing another embodiment of the light source assembly according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 23 is a top view showing the socket where no LED is mounted.
  • FIG. 24 is a side sectional view showing the socket with the LED mounted.
  • FIG. 25 is a plan view of a patterned conductor used to form the light source assembly shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a procedure of secondary processing of the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 25 for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in series and parallel.
  • FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a procedure of secondary processing of the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 25 for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in parallel.
  • FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a procedure of secondary processing of the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 25 for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in series.
  • FIG. 29 is a perspective view showing a modified example of the light source assembly shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing another modified example of the light source assembly shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 31 is a perspective view showing still another modified example of the light source assembly shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 32 is a plan view of a patterned conductor used to form the light source assembly shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 33 is a plan view showing a modification of the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 18 suitable for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in series.
  • FIG. 34 is a plan view showing a modified embodiment of the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 25, which is suitable for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in series.
  • FIG. 35 is a perspective view similar to FIG. 16 showing another embodiment of the connecting member.
  • FIG. 36 is a perspective view similar to FIG. 16 showing still another embodiment of the connecting member.
  • FIG. 37 is a bottom view of the light source assembly shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 38 is a perspective view showing an embodiment in a case where the light source connector shown in FIG. 36 is attached to a holder.
  • FIG. 39 is a perspective view of a light emitting device using the light source assembly shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view along a line XL-XL in FIG.
  • FIG. 41 is a top view schematically showing the light emitting device shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 42a is a perspective view showing an embodiment of a light source assembly using a light emitting element assembly as a light source
  • FIG. 42b is a circuit diagram of the light emitting element shown in FIG. 42a.
  • FIG. 43 a is a perspective view showing another embodiment of a light source assembly using a light emitting device assembly as a light source
  • FIG. 43 b is a circuit diagram of the light emitting device assembly shown in FIG. 43 a. .
  • FIG. 44 is a plan view showing another embodiment of the tape-shaped patterned conductor according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing a light source connected body using the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 44 together with a holder for supporting the light source connected body.
  • FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram showing a state where the light source assembly shown in FIG. 45 is bent in the longitudinal direction.
  • FIG. 47 a is a partial plan view showing another embodiment of the tape-shaped patterned conductor according to the present invention
  • FIG. 47 b is a cross-sectional view taken along line A—A of FIG. 7c is a partial plan view of a light source connector formed by attaching a chip-type LED and a chip-type resistor to a connection conductor structure formed by cutting out a required portion of the patterned conductor of FIG. 47a.
  • Fig. 48a is a front view of the three-pole LED lamp
  • Fig. 48b is a circuit diagram of the three-pole LED lamp shown in Fig. 48a.
  • FIG. 49 is a plan view of a tape-shaped patterned conductor suitable for forming a light source connector by connecting a plurality of the three-pole LED lamps shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B.
  • FIG. 50 is a plan view showing an example of a cutting procedure when the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 49 is subjected to secondary processing to produce a connection conductor structure having a predetermined circuit pattern.
  • FIG. 51 shows the connection conductor structure formed according to the secondary processing procedure shown in Fig. 50.
  • FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram of a light source assembly formed using the light source assembly.
  • Fig. 52a is a top perspective view of the 4-pole LED lamp
  • Fig. 52b is a bottom perspective view of the 4-pole LED lamp shown in Fig. 52a
  • Fig. 52c is a circuit diagram thereof.
  • FIG. 53 is a plan view of a tape-shaped patterned conductor suitable for connecting a plurality of the 4-pole LED lamps shown in FIGS. 52a to 52c to form a light source assembly.
  • FIG. 54 is a plan view showing an example of a cutting procedure when the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 53 is subjected to secondary processing to produce a connection conductor structure having a predetermined circuit pattern.
  • FIG. 55 is a circuit diagram of a light source assembly formed using the connection conductor structure formed according to the secondary processing procedure of the patterned conductor shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 56 is a partial plan view showing another embodiment of the patterned conductor according to the present invention.
  • Fig. 57 shows the procedure for the secondary application of the patterned conductor shown in Fig. 25, which can form a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in series and can use the trunk road for heat dissipation.
  • Figure 58a is a plan view showing a patterned conductor suitable for forming a narrow light source assembly
  • Figure 58b is a diagram showing conductive pins at the ends of the patterned conductor shown in Figure 58a.
  • FIG. 3 is a plan view showing an end conductor for enabling connection.
  • FIG. 59 is a perspective view showing a light source connected body in which an insulating sheet is attached to a light source mounting surface.
  • FIG. 60a is a partial perspective view showing a procedure for attaching the light source connector to the holder
  • FIG. 60b is a cross-sectional view of the light source connector attached to the holder
  • FIG. 61 is a cross-sectional view showing another embodiment of attachment of the light source connector to the holder.
  • FIGS. 62A to 62C are schematic diagrams for explaining a method of manufacturing a patterned conductor and a light source assembly using photoetching.
  • Fig. 63a is a partial plan view of a patterned conductor suitable for forming a light source assembly having light sources arranged in two rows
  • Fig. 63b is a partial plan view showing an example of the secondary processing. It is.
  • FIG. 64 is a partial plan view of a patterned conductor suitable for forming a light source assembly having light sources arranged in four rows.
  • FIG. 65 is a circuit diagram showing a preferred embodiment of an LED circuit suitable for use in a signal light.
  • FIG. 66 is a circuit diagram showing another preferred embodiment of an LED circuit suitable for use in a signal light.
  • FIG. 67 is a schematic view showing a method of forming a surface light-emitting body having an electrical connection form as shown in FIG. 66 by using a light source connection body.
  • FIG. 68 is a schematic partial plan view showing one embodiment of a light source connecting body having the electric connection form shown in FIG. 65 and providing a linear light emitting body in which LEDs are arranged in a row. is there.
  • FIG. 69 is a schematic partial plan view showing another embodiment of the light source connecting body having the electric connection form shown in FIG. 65 and providing a line light emitting body in which LEDs are arranged in a row. It is.
  • FIG. 70 is a partial plan view showing another embodiment of the patterned conductor.
  • FIG. 71 is a partial plan view showing an example of a light source assembly formed using the patterned conductor shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 72A is a schematic diagram of a light emitting device formed using the light source assembly shown in FIG. 71, and FIG. FIG.
  • FIG. 73 is a partial plan view showing another example of the secondary processing method of the patterned conductor shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 74 is a partial plan view of a light source assembly formed using the patterned conductor that has been subjected to the secondary processing in the manner shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 75 is a schematic partial plan view showing an embodiment of a light source assembly that provides a line light emitter having two rows of LEDs each having the electrical connection configuration shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram showing a preferred arrangement example of the light source couplers when a surface light emitter is formed by using a plurality of light source couplers.
  • FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram showing another preferred arrangement example of the light source couplers when the surface light emitter is formed by using a plurality of light source couplers.
  • FIG. 78 is a schematic diagram showing still another preferred arrangement example of the light source couplers when the surface light emitter is formed by using a plurality of light source couplers.
  • FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram showing an example of using the light source assembly.
  • FIG. 80 is a perspective view showing an embodiment of a light emitting device for forming a vehicle-mounted lamp using the light source connector according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 81 is a perspective view showing a state before the bending process of the light source unit used in the light emitting device of FIG.
  • FIG. 82 is an end view of the light source assembly shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 83 is a partial plan view of one embodiment of a patterned conductor suitable for forming the light source assembly shown in FIG.
  • Fig. 84a is a partial plan view showing another embodiment of the patterned conductor that enables the adjustment of the LED position. It is a figure similar to 4a.
  • FIG. 4 is a partial plan view showing an example of a deformed state of a formed light source assembly.
  • FIG. 86a is a partial plan view showing still another embodiment of a patterned conductor having a stretchable portion
  • FIG. 86b shows an example of a deformed state of a light source assembly formed using the same. It is a partial plan view.
  • FIG. 87a is a partial plan view showing still another embodiment of a patterned conductor having a stretchable portion
  • FIG. 87b is a front view of FIG. 87a
  • FIG. FIG. 5 is a partial plan view showing an example of a deformed state of a light source assembly using a conductive conductor.
  • FIG. 88 a is a partial plan view showing still another embodiment of a patterned conductor having a stretchable portion
  • FIG. 88 b is a front view of FIG. 88 a
  • FIG. FIG. 4 is a partial plan view showing an example of a deformed state of a light source assembly using a conductor.
  • FIG. 89a is a partial plan view showing still another embodiment of the patterned conductor
  • FIG. 89b is a partial plan view showing a light source assembly using the patterned conductor of FIG. 89a.
  • FIG. 1 is a front sectional view showing a preferred embodiment of a light emitting device according to the present invention.
  • the light emitting device includes a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) 1 as light sources, each LED 1 having two parallel leads 3 as terminals for electrical connection.
  • the package part (body part) 1a is a so-called shell-type LED (or lamp-type LED) with a gun-shaped configuration.
  • These light sources 1 are arranged side by side in a direction orthogonal to the lead wire 3 on the surface of a mounting port (holding body) 2.
  • the plurality of light sources 1 are connected in series by the connecting conductor structure 4 extending in the arrangement direction. Are connected in series to form a light source connector 6.
  • connection conductor structure 4 is connected to the lead wire 3 of the predetermined light source 1.
  • connecting pieces 5 for connecting the lead wires 3 of the adjacent light source 1 with first and second trunk paths 11 and 12 extending in the longitudinal direction to which the power supply voltage is applied. are doing.
  • Each connecting piece 5 has a pair of connecting portions 9 at both ends, and is connected to the base 3 a of the lead wire 3 of the adjacent light source 1 via the pair of connecting portions 9.
  • the first and second trunk roads 11 1 and 12 are connected to the base 3 a of the lead wire 3 of the associated light source 1 via the branch roads 13 and 14 and the connection 9 connected thereto, respectively.
  • a slit 15 extending in the width direction is provided in the first main road section 11 on the main body section 1a side of the light source 1, and the main road section 11 is meandering.
  • a portion corresponding to the mounting position of the light source and the longitudinal direction is convexly curved.
  • the tip 3b of the lead wire 3 is inserted into the mounting hole 7 formed in the mounting port 2.
  • FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II-II of FIG. 1
  • FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the light source assembly 6 shown in FIG.
  • the main body 1a of the light source 1 is shown by a broken line for easy viewing.
  • the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 which is the basis of the connection conductor structure 4 described in detail later is also indicated by a broken line.
  • each connecting portion 9 has a plate-like portion, and the plate-like portion is folded so as to sandwich the corresponding lead wire 3. It is fixed to the lead wire 3 by bending and caulking.
  • the connecting portion 9 can take various forms other than caulking, such as engagement by an elastic engagement piece and spot welding.In the case of caulking, it can be processed continuously by a progressive press. This has the advantage that the use of solder can be eliminated and there is no fear that the light source (LED) 1 will be adversely affected by heat.
  • the connecting conductor structure 4 has a position substantially corresponding to the bottom of the cut 15 of the first trunk section 11 and the branch section 14 and the connecting piece 5. Are bent along a bending line extending in the longitudinal direction at a position substantially corresponding to the boundary of the arrow.
  • the first and second trunk roads 11 1 and 12 form a predetermined angle in the cross section of FIG. 2 with respect to the connection 9 along the lead wire 3.
  • the first and second trunk sections 1 1, 1 2 can be directly connected to the lead 3 of the light source 1 even in a simple configuration without insulation treatment on the connection conductor structure 4.
  • Unintended short circuit in the circuit due to contact can be avoided.
  • the connecting conductor structure 4 By leaving the connecting conductor structure 4 exposed without covering it with an insulating material, the heat dissipation effect of the connecting conductor structure 4 is enhanced, and it is possible to suitably cope with the case where the light sources 1 are densely arranged. Benefits are also obtained.
  • the bending in the longitudinal direction is restricted, the workability when mounting to the mounting pod 2 can be improved. Further, the tip 3b of the lead wire 3 projects toward the mounting board 2, so that the mounting pod 2 can be inserted into the mounting hole 7.
  • connection conductor structure 4 as described above is preferably a tape in which a circuit pattern that can be used in series, parallel, and series / parallel is formed in advance by pressing (piercing) a conductive flat plate material.
  • the patterned conductor 16 is assembled with the light source 1, can get.
  • the light source 1 can be connected in series, in parallel, or in series-parallel by changing the cut portion of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16.
  • FIG. 4A is a front view showing one embodiment of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 before the secondary processing.
  • the same reference numerals are given to portions corresponding to the above-described connection conductor structure.
  • FIG. 4 a the plurality of connection portions 9 connected to the lead wire 3 of the light source 1 are shown before being bent to be connected to the lead wire 3.
  • These connecting parts 9 are connected by a connecting path part 10 extending in the longitudinal direction.
  • the first and second connecting parts 9 and the connecting part 9 are sandwiched in the width direction (vertical direction in the figure).
  • the trunk sections 11 and 12 are arranged on both sides of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16.
  • the first and second trunk roads 11 and 12 and the communication road 10 are connected in the width direction by a plurality of branch roads 13 and 14.
  • the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 is subjected to the secondary processing of cutting out a required portion according to the use as described above, thereby forming a connection conductor structure 4 having a circuit of a predetermined connection pattern. It is preferable that the subsequent processing be performed at the same time when the light source 1 held by radial taping and the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 are assembled by a progressive press machine, because the manufacturing process can be simplified. For this reason, in the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 shown in Fig. 4a, the light source 1 and the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 are aligned so that the light source 1 can be properly assembled at a predetermined position of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16.
  • a pilot hole 18 for engaging with a pilot pin of a progressive press (not shown) is provided in the second main path section 12 on the side opposite to the light source body section 1a.
  • a cross section 19 connected to the second main road section 12 via a connecting section 20 is provided. Pilot hole 18 to be engaged with pilot pin of progressive press machine Although it may be made, more material is required for the edge 19 than in the case of Fig. 4a.
  • the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 can be obtained by pressing (more specifically, punching) a conductive flat plate material. Specifically, first, the connecting portion 9 is formed so as to protrude from the connecting portion 10 in the direction along the lead wire 3, and the connecting portion 10 and the first trunk portion 11 are defined. A cutout hole 21 defining a branch 13 connecting them is formed. The cutout hole 21 secures a space into which the tool for caulking the connection portion 9 is inserted. A cut 15 is formed in the first trunk road 11. Further, a cutout hole 22 that defines the connection path portion 10 and the second main road portion 12 and defines a branch path portion 14 that connects them is formed.
  • the branch sections 13 and 14 connecting the first and second trunk sections 11 and 12 and the communication section 10 are displaced from the lead 3 so as not to cut the lead 3 when cutting. It is preferable to form it at the position.
  • the lead wire 3 is made to protrude, for example, toward the mounting port 2 having an appropriate length, and inserted into the mounting hole 7 provided in the mounting port 2 when the completed light source connector 6 is mounted on the mounting board 2. To stabilize the mounting (see Fig. 1).
  • the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 is flexible and bendable, it can be wound into a coil or folded in a zigzag manner, and can be easily stored, transported, and packed.
  • FIG. 5 shows a situation in a manufacturing process of the light emitting device shown in FIG.
  • the light source 1 is a gun-shaped LED lamp in which a pair of lead wires 3 are drawn in the same direction, and is arranged side by side in a direction perpendicular to the lead wires 3 by radial taping.
  • the carrier tape 25 for radial taping consists of a pair of tapes 25a and 25b that are attached to each other. Is made.
  • the carrier tape 25 is provided with pilot holes 26 in the same manner as the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16, and the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 and the pilot holes 18, 2 of the carrier tape 25 are provided.
  • connection portion 9 formed on the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 and the lead wire 3 of the light source 1 held by the carrier tape 25 are aligned in the axial direction.
  • the connection portion 9 is engaged with the lead wire 3 held in the tape 25, and the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 is subjected to the secondary processing.
  • the main body 1 a of the light source 1 and the first trunk 11 of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 do not interfere with each other. It is necessary to bend the loop-shaped patterned conductor 16 along the longitudinal bending line.
  • connection between the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 and the light source 1 as described above is performed while preparing a coil-shaped tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 and unwinding it in a progressive press machine. This is preferable in terms of work efficiency and ease of handling.
  • the notch 15 in the width direction is formed in the first trunk road portion 11, and the first trunk road portion 11 has a plurality of convex portions. Even if it is wound in a coil shape, only the convex curved portion of the part that is unwound to engage with the lead wire 3 of the light source 1 is individually bent because it has a curved shape. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the main body 1a of the light source 1 from interfering with the first trunk road 11 of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16.
  • FIG. 6 is a view showing a procedure of secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 for making the serial-parallel light emitting device shown in FIG.
  • the resected part is shown with diagonal lines.
  • a portion 27 of the communication path portion 10 between a pair of connection portions 9 to which the lead wires 3 of the same light source 1 are connected is cut off.
  • the range in which light source 1 is connected in series (series block The remaining branches 13 and 14 except for the branches 13 and 14 located at the end of (h) are cut off, and the connection 10 that connects the adjacent series blocks 2 8 is resected.
  • the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 (or the connection conductor structure 4) is bent along the longitudinal bending lines on both sides of the communication path 10, and preferably, the connection 9 Is fixed to the lead wire 3 by swaging.
  • a notch along the bending line may be formed in advance on the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 so as to facilitate bending.
  • the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 is preferably cut at an appropriate location so that the formed light source connector 6 has an appropriate length that is easy to handle.
  • the secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 which can include such processing steps as cutting, bending, caulking, and cutting can be performed by a progressive press machine.
  • the bending of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 on the side of the second main path section 12 provided with the pilot hole 18 for engaging with the pilot pin of the progressive press machine may be performed in the final step. Alternatively, it may be performed after taking out the completed light source assembly 6 from the progressive press.
  • the part 27 of the connecting part 10 between the connecting part 9 to the lead wire 3 of the same light source 1 must be separated in any connection form, and this part 27 is processed at the stage of processing the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16. However, leaving this portion 27 has an advantage of stabilizing the connection portion 9 in the step of fixing the connection portion 9 to the lead wire 3.
  • FIG. 7 is a view showing a procedure of secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 to form a parallel-type light emitting device.
  • the cut portion is shown with diagonal lines in the same manner as described above.
  • the portion 29 of the connecting portion 10 connecting the connecting portion 9 to the lead wire 3 of the adjacent light source 1 is cut off.
  • the connection path 10 is bent along the bending lines in the longitudinal direction on both sides, and the connection section 9 is fixed to the lead wire 3 by caulking. In this connection mode, the branch portions 13 and 14 are left without being cut off.
  • FIG. 8 is a view showing a procedure of secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 to form a serial light emitting device.
  • connection pieces 5 are shown with diagonal lines, and in addition to cutting off the portion 27 of the communication path portion 10 between the pair of connection portions 9 for the lead wire 3 of the same light source 1, a pair of stems
  • the roads 11 and 12 and the branches 13 and 14 are all cut off, leaving connection pieces 5 separate from each other.
  • Each connecting piece 5 has a form in which a pair of connecting parts 9 protrude from both ends of the main body extending in a direction orthogonal to the lead wire 3 in a direction along the lead wire 3.
  • the one lead wire 3 is electrically connected to the adjacent lead wire 3 of the light source 1 and connected to each other to obtain a light source connected body.
  • the connection conductor structure 4 that connects the light sources 1 only by the connection pieces 5 is formed.
  • FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view showing a light emitting device in which a series light source connector 32 obtained by the secondary processing shown in FIG. 8 is mounted on a mounting board (holder) 2.
  • the connection pieces 5 are not joined to the lead wires 3 at both ends, and the lead wires 3 except for both ends are cut off at the same time when the connection pieces 5 are separated, and do not protrude to the mounting board 2 side.
  • Lead wires 3 at both ends are cut to a required length, inserted into mounting holes 33 formed in mounting board 2, and connected to wiring for applying a power supply voltage.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another embodiment of the secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 to form a serial light emitting device.
  • the cut portion is shown with diagonal lines in the same manner as above, and the portion of the communication path portion 10 between the lead wires 3 of the same light source 1 is shown.
  • all other parts are cut off except that the branch 13 connected to the first trunk 11 is located at the other end (right side in the figure). Is done.
  • the second trunk road section 12 is cut off together with the branch road section 14 except for a portion connected to the connection section 9 located at the other end (left side in the figure).
  • the power supply voltage can be applied thereto.
  • FIG. 11a is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a different attachment form of the light source connector to the holder.
  • the connecting piece 35 of the light source connector 37 in this embodiment has projecting portions facing the mounting port 2 at both ends thereof, and the end of the lead wire 3 is also aligned therewith.
  • the end of the lead wire 3 and the projecting portion of the connection piece 35 are both inserted into the mounting hole 36 formed in the mounting board 2, so that the light source connector 37 is supported on the mounting board 2.
  • Such a connecting piece 35 extends the branch portion 14 of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 shown in FIG. 4a not only to one of the pair of connecting portions 9 associated with each light source 1, but also to both of them.
  • the branch portion 14 together with the lead wire 3 of the light source 1 coupled to the tape-shaped patterned conductor is provided. It can be formed by cutting at the root of the second trunk road section 12 side. In addition, it is good also as a structure which protrudes every two or more and inserts it into the mounting hole 36.In this case, the number of the lead wires 3 inserted into the mounting hole 36 is such that the light source connector 37 is appropriately held on the mounting board 2. It is set in consideration of the rigidity of the lead wire 3 and the connection piece 35 so as to be set. Further, as shown in FIG. 11b, the mounting hole 36 may be a recess 36 ′ like a groove instead of the through hole.
  • FIGS. 12 and 13 are diagrams showing examples in which the light source 1 is arranged on a holder.
  • FIG. 12 shows an example in which the plurality of light sources 1 are connected to the surface of a flat holding member (mounting board) 41 via the connection conductor structure 4. 2 forms a loop by appropriately bending the connection conductor structure 4, and is arranged so that the light source row by the light source connector 42 indicates the outline of the character.
  • FIG. 13 shows an example in which the light sources 1 are arranged on a curved surface. It is wound. Note that a configuration in which light sources are densely arranged on the surface of the holder to form a surface light emitter is also possible.
  • FIG. 14 is a front view showing a modified embodiment of a patterned conductor suitable for forming a series connection of light sources
  • FIG. 15 is a view of a secondary processing when assembling the patterned conductor with the light source 1.
  • This is a diagram showing the outline (removed parts are indicated by oblique lines). In these figures, the same parts as those in FIG. 4A or FIG. 6 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted.
  • the patterned conductor 16 ⁇ for forming a series connection has a pilot hole 18 'for positioning or transport on the production line formed in the communication path section 10'.
  • the first and second trunk roads 11 and 12 shown in FIG. 4 and branch roads 13 and 14 connecting these trunk roads 11 and 12 to the communication road 10 are provided. However, the width is narrowed accordingly. In this manner, unnecessary materials can be saved when the light source assembly is completed, and the cost can be significantly reduced.
  • the LED is used as a light source.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and can be similarly applied to a baseless bulb having a lead wire.
  • a tape-shaped patterned conductor in which a predetermined circuit pattern capable of commonly using various light source connected bodies having different light source connection patterns is formed in advance. From the same production line Therefore, the productivity can be improved and the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and a great effect can be obtained in reducing the manufacturing cost of the light emitting device using such a light source connector. Further, since the light source is integrated as a light source connected body and then fixed to the holder, various arrangements of the light source can be easily handled. Further, since the holder does not require complicated processing, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing cost even when a large number of types are manufactured in small quantities.
  • the light source has a pair of generally parallel extending lead wires, and these lead wires extend substantially along the main surface of the connection conductor structure (the multi-turn conductor).
  • connection conductor structure the multi-turn conductor
  • the light source leads extend substantially perpendicular to the main surface of the connecting conductor structure, or where the light source is a so-called chip LED without leads. Conceivable.
  • the following embodiments of the present invention are suitable for such a case.
  • FIG. 16 is a partial perspective view showing another preferred embodiment of the light source assembly according to the present invention.
  • the light source assembly 101 uses a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) 102 as light sources, and each LED 102 has two parallel leads as terminals for electrical connection. It is a so-called bullet-type LED (or lamp-type LED) with a line 103.
  • the plurality of LEDs 102 are arranged in a direction orthogonal to the lead wires 103, and are electrically connected by a substantially flat connecting conductor structure 104 extending in the arrangement direction.
  • the LEDs 102 are connected in series / parallel (that is, a plurality of LEDs 102 connected in series and further connected in parallel). Other connections such as series connection and parallel connection are also possible depending on the configuration of the conductor structure 104.
  • connection conductor structure 104 has first and second trunk sections 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 extending in the longitudinal direction to which the power supply voltage is applied.
  • a light source mounting portion 105 for connecting to the lead wire 103 of the second device 102 and a communication path 110 connecting the light source mounting portion 105 in the longitudinal direction are arranged.
  • each light source mounting portion 105 has a pair of terminal connection portions 109 coupled to a pair of lead wires (terminals) 103 of one LED 102.
  • the pair of terminal connection portions 109 are separated from each other in the longitudinal direction.
  • the first and second trunk roads 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 are connected to the connecting road 1 1 10 at predetermined locations by branch roads 1 1 3 and 1 1 4 extending in the lateral direction (width direction). It is electrically connected, and in the example shown, forms a conductor pattern that connects the LEDs 102 in series and parallel.
  • the communication path section 110 and the first and second main path sections 111, 112 are preferably formed by an insulating connecting member 115 extending in the width direction formed by insert molding. They are mechanically connected and held together.
  • Each terminal connection portion 109 of the connection conductor structure 104 is preferably formed with a cross-shaped hole 1 16, and the hole 1 16 is provided with a lead wire 10 of the corresponding LED 102.
  • a mechanical Z electrical connection between the connection conductor structure 104 and the LED 102 is made. Due to the cross shape of the hole 1 16, four protrusions are formed inward, and when the lead wire 103 is pushed in, these four protrusions bend and the lead wire 103 is bent. It works to hold tightly.
  • Fig. 17a which is a cross-sectional view along the line XV II -XV II in Fig.
  • Lead 10 as shown 3 can be used to attach the light source connector 101 to the holder 123 by inserting it into the corresponding recess or hole 124 provided in the mounting board (holder) 123.
  • connection between the terminal connection part 109 and the lead wire 103 is made by inserting the lead wire 103 into the hole 116 and crimping the lead wire 103 by the extension part 117.
  • Spot welding, ultrasonic welding, laser welding, etc. but with the connection method described above, it is possible to continuously process by progressive press, eliminate the use of solder, LED by heat There is an advantage that there is no fear of adversely affecting 102.
  • the insertion of the lead wire 103 into the hole 116 and laser welding may be used in combination.
  • the hole 116 has an inward protrusion as shown in the figure, and when the lead wire 103 is pushed into the hole 116, the protrusion warps and is pressed against the lead wire 103.
  • a notch is formed in a portion of the communication path portion 110 adjacent to the hole 1 16 of the terminal connection portion 109 to form a tongue piece, and the tongue piece is bent to form the pair of extension portions described above.
  • the lead wire 103 may be swaged from three directions together with 1 17.
  • a socket pin is a pin that includes a conductor (concave portion or female portion) formed on the back side of a pin portion (a convex portion or a female portion), and is, for example, sold by Mac Eight Co., Ltd. You can use the PD series, etc.
  • connection conductor structure 104 as described above preferably has a circuit pattern that can be used in series, in parallel, and in series in parallel, preferably by pressing (drilling) a conductive flat plate material. It can be obtained by subjecting the patterned conductor formed by processing to secondary processing for cutting out the required portions. By doing so, it is possible to connect the LEDs 102 in series, parallel, or series-parallel by changing the cutouts for the patterned conductor.
  • FIG. 18 is a partial plan view showing a preferred embodiment 120 of the patterned conductor before the secondary processing.
  • the portions corresponding to the connection conductor structure 104 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.
  • the patterned conductor 120 is in the form of a long tape having self-supporting properties (that is, each part is integrated), and the communication path 110 is formed in the longitudinal direction. It extends to connect the light source mounting part 105.
  • the first and second trunk roads 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 are arranged on both sides of the patterned conductor 1 20 with the light source mounting section 1 05 and the communication path 1 1 10 sandwiched in the width direction. .
  • each terminal connection section 109 of each light source mounting section 105 is connected to the first and second trunk sections 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 by the corresponding branch sections 1 1 3 and 1 1 4 respectively.
  • the communication path section 110 is connected to the lead wire 103 of the adjacent different LED 102 (that is, included in the adjacent light source mounting section 105).
  • 9 includes a plurality of connection paths 1 2 1 respectively connecting the 9.
  • the connecting member 115 formed by insert molding can be formed on this connecting path 121 (see FIG. 16).
  • a hole 1 19 is provided at a position of the connecting member 1 15 which is aligned with the connection path 1 21 so as to expose the connection path 1 2 1 (the connection path 1 2 exposed by the hole 1 19).
  • the portion 1 is referred to as a bridge portion 12 21 A (see FIGS. 19 to 21).
  • a punch (not shown) of the press machine is inserted through the hole 119 to form the bridge portion 112.
  • By cutting off 1 A it becomes possible to cut off the terminal connection section 109 connected via the connection path 121.
  • the patterned conductor 120 becomes a connection conductor structure 104 having a circuit of a predetermined connection pattern by performing secondary processing for cutting out a required portion according to the application as described above.
  • the connection is preferably performed after connecting the trunk roads 111, 112 and the communication road 110 with a connecting member 115, preferably formed by an insert mold. By doing so, it is possible to prevent each part of the formed connection conductor structure 104 from being separated.
  • the formation of the connecting member 115 and the secondary processing of the patterned conductor 120 by such an insert mold are efficient if performed on a continuous production line. Therefore, a pilot hole 1 18 for engaging with a pilot pin of, for example, a progressive press machine (not shown) is provided in the second main road section 112 for positioning of the transport Z in the production line. .
  • the patterned conductor 120 described above can be preferably obtained by pressing (more specifically, punching) a conductive plate material made of a metal such as aluminum or copper.
  • Aluminum is not used for printed circuit boards because it is unsuitable for soldering, but it has the advantage of being low in specific gravity (about 1 Z3 of copper) and suitable for weight reduction of products. It is also preferable that the thermal conductivity is high (several times that of copper) and the conductivity is high.
  • the printed conductor has a thickness of about 35 xm, while the patterned conductor can be made as thick as 100 to 3 OO m, which has the advantage that the allowable current value can be increased. It is also preferable from the viewpoint of.
  • the patterned conductor 120 it is also possible to form the patterned conductor 120 by photo-etching the conductive plate material or cutting it by wire cutting, laser or electric discharge machining. It can also be formed by die casting such as magnesium molding. Since the patterned conductor 120 is flexible and bendable, the coil It can be rolled up or folded in a zigzag, making it easy to store, transport and pack.
  • FIG. 19 to FIG. 21 are diagrams showing the procedure of secondary processing of the patterned conductor 120 when the LEDs 102 are connected in series, parallel, and series, respectively.
  • the resected part is shown with diagonal lines.
  • a connecting member 1 15 having a hole 1 19 is shown by a dotted line so that the position of the cut portion can be easily understood.
  • connection conductor structure that can connect a plurality of series-connected bodies (series blocks) each including three LEDs 102 in parallel between the trunk sections 1 1 1 and 1 1 2.
  • the bridge section 1 2 1 A of the connection path 1 2 1 located between the adjacent series blocks is disconnected, and the connection path 1 2 1 connecting the terminal connection sections 1 0 9 in the series block remains unchanged. Is done.
  • the branch sections 113, 114 included in each series block include a branch section 113 connected to the first trunk section 111 at one end and a second branch section 113 at the other end. All of them are removed except for the branch 1 114 connected to the trunk 1 1 2.
  • the number of LEDs 102 that can be included in each series block can be changed by changing the branch sections 113, 114 and the bridge section 121A to be cut, and is not limited to three. Please understand that there is no. Further, in the example of FIG. 19, adjacent LEDs 102 included in the same series block are connected to each other (that is, terminal connections included in adjacent light source mounting portions 105 are connected to each other).
  • the bridge portion 121A is left uncut, but as shown by a dotted line in the perspective view of FIG. 16, for example, a resistor 122 is inserted between adjacent LEDs 102, for example, as a spot.
  • the bridge section 121 A located between both terminals of the resistor 122 may be cut off.
  • the resistance 1 2 2 between the communication path 1 110 and the second main path 1 1 2 To do this, it is advisable to cut off the branch section 114 at the corresponding position.
  • connection between the road section 110 and the first trunk section 111 all the bridge portions 121 A are cut off, and the branch portions 113, 114 are connected to each LED 102 (ie, in each light source mounting portion 105).
  • One of the terminal connection portions 109 is cut off so as to be connected to the main road portion 111, and the other is connected to the main road portion 112.
  • a connection conductor structure is provided in which a plurality of LEDs 102 attached to the light source mounting section 105 are connected in parallel between the trunk sections 1 1 1 and 1 1 2. .
  • the power supply may be connected directly to the lead wire 103 of the LED 102 located, but the trunk roads 1 1 1 and 1 1 can be obtained by leaving appropriate branches 1 13 and 1 14 2 is connected to the LED series, and the trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 are connected to the power supply, and the voltage from the power supply is supplied to the series D via the trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2. You can also make it. Only one of the trunk roads 111 and 112 may be used for connection to such a power source.
  • connection conductor structure 104 As described above, according to the preferred embodiment of the present invention, by changing the branch portions 113, 114, and the bridge portion 121A to be cut, various connection patterns can be formed from the common patterned conductor 120. It is understood that it is possible to form the connecting conductor structure 104 having the following (and the light source connecting body 101 having the same). Will be.
  • the formation of the connection conductor structure 104 by the secondary processing of the patterned conductors 120 can be suitably performed by press working. At that time, when the connection conductor structure 104 of a different connection pattern is formed,
  • the selection of the branch section 1 13, 1 1 4 and the bridge section 1 21 A to be cut off can be made by, for example, computer control, and there is no need to change the die of the press machine.
  • FIG. 22 is a partial perspective view showing another embodiment of the light source assembly according to the present invention.
  • the light source connector 15 1 shown in FIG. 22 includes a pair of electrical connection terminals 15 3 extending from the side surface to the bottom surface in place of the lead wire 103, and a light emitting portion 15 5 on the upper surface.
  • a normal type chip LED (or LED for surface mounting) 152 having 2 A is used as a light source.
  • Such chip-type LEDs are extremely small, with a vertical, horizontal, and height dimension of several mm or less, and are commercially available. The dimensions of the light source assembly 151 manufactured using them are also reduced. .
  • the LED 152 is electrically connected to a connection conductor structure 150 obtained by secondary processing of a generally flat conductor 170 (see FIG. 25).
  • the connection conductor structure 15 4 includes first and second trunk sections 16 1 and 1 1 extending in the longitudinal direction to which the power supply voltage is applied.
  • the first and second trunk paths 161, 162 are electrically connected to the communication path section 160 at predetermined locations by branching sections 163, 164 extending in the width direction.
  • a conductor pattern for connecting the LEDs 152 in series and parallel is configured.
  • the second trunk section 162 is provided with a pilot hole 168 for easy handling by a progressive press.
  • the communication path section 160 and the first and second trunk paths 161, 162 are mechanically connected by a connecting member 1 65 extending in the width direction formed by insert molding. ing.
  • a generally box-shaped socket 172 having an opening on the upper surface for mounting the chip-type LED 155 is positioned at a position aligned with the light source mounting portion 155 of the connection conductor structure 154. Is formed.
  • a socket 172 can be preferably formed by an insert mold.
  • Fig. 23 is a top view showing the socket 1 72 (the second from the left in Fig. 22) without the LED 15 2 installed, and Fig. 24 shows the socket with the LED 152 installed.
  • 3 is a side sectional view showing a socket 17 2 (for example, the left end in FIG. 22) of FIG.
  • each light source mounting portion 155 of the connection conductor structure 154 has a pair of terminal connection portions 159 which are separated from each other in the longitudinal direction. Portion 159 is exposed on the bottom wall of socket 172, and when LED 153 is inserted into socket 172, terminals 153 and connection conductor of LED 155 are connected.
  • the terminal connection portion 159 of the structure 154 is in contact with the structure.
  • each terminal connection portion 159 small projections 1667 are provided on the surface of each terminal connection portion 159 so that the terminal 153 of the LED 155 and the terminal connection portion 159 are surely in contact with each other.
  • a hole 1 73 was formed in the bottom wall of the socket 1 72, from which the socket 1 72 was mounted. The LED l52 can be removed from the socket 172 by pressing the LED l52. This allows the failed LED 152 to be replaced with a working one.
  • connection conductor structure 154 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 22 to FIG. 24 also has the same structure as the embodiment of FIG. It is preferably formed by performing a secondary processing of cutting off the portion.
  • FIG. 25 is a plan view showing a patterned conductor 170 before secondary processing suitable for use in the embodiment of FIGS. In this figure, parts corresponding to those in FIGS. 22 to 24 are denoted by the same reference numerals.
  • the patterned conductor 170 is also a long tape, and the connecting portion 16 connects the light source mounting portion 15 5 in the longitudinal direction. 0 extends in the longitudinal direction.
  • the first and second trunk roads 1 6 1, 1 5 5 and the connecting road 1 6 0 are sandwiched in the width direction.
  • each terminal connection section 159 of each light source mounting section 155 is connected to the first and second main path sections 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 by the corresponding branch sections 16 3 and 16 4. Have been.
  • the communication section 160 is connected to the terminals 153 of the adjacent different LEDs 155 (that is, included in the adjacent light source mounting section 155), and connects the pair of terminal connections 159 respectively. Includes multiple connections 1 7 1.
  • the connecting member 165 formed by the insert mold is formed substantially at the center in the longitudinal direction of the connecting path 171 (see FIG. 22).
  • a hole 169 is provided at a position of the connecting member 165 which is aligned with the connection path 171 so as to expose the connection path 171 (the connection path 171 exposed by the hole 169).
  • the part of 1 is called the bridge part 17 1 A).
  • a punch (not shown) of the press machine is inserted through the hole 169 to cut off the bridge portion 171A, and the connection is made via the connection path 171.
  • Terminal connection part 1 5 9 It becomes possible to divide.
  • the bridge portion 17 1 A exposed through the hole 16 9 is relatively wide so that the hole 16 9 of the connecting member 16 5 can be reliably exposed and easily cut off. It is formed narrow.
  • the shape of the bridge portion 1771A is arbitrary, and may include, for example, two narrow paths crossing a cross. Also, perforations may be made at appropriate locations on the connection path 17 1 to facilitate resection.
  • a tongue piece 174 extending in the longitudinal direction is formed by cutting at a portion of the connection path 171 adjacent to the terminal connection portion 159 of the light source mounting portion 155. As shown in the perspective view of FIG. 22 and the cross-sectional view of FIG. 24, in the assembled state, the tongue piece 17 4 is bent, and the LED 15 2 attached to the socket 17 2 is held down from above. It serves to prevent 52 from undesirably dropping out of socket 17 2.
  • FIGS. 26 to 28 show that the patterned conductors 170 are secondarily formed from the patterned conductors 170 shown in FIG. 25 to form connection conductor structures 154 for series-parallel, parallel, and series connection. This shows the procedure for processing. As in FIGS. 19 to 21, the part to be resected is indicated by oblique lines. In addition, the sockets 172 and the connecting members 16.5 are shown by dotted lines so that the position of the cut portion can be easily understood. The description for FIGS. 26 to 28 is substantially the same as the description for FIGS. 19 to 21, and therefore will be omitted. As can be seen from these figures, various connection patterns can be obtained from the patterned conductor 170. It is possible to form the connection conductor structure 154.
  • FIG. 29 is a partial perspective view showing a modified embodiment of the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the light source connector 15 1 ′ differs from the embodiment shown in FIG. 22 in that a so-called side-view type LED 15 2 ′ having a light emitting portion 15 2 on the side is used as a light source. .
  • LED 1 5 2 ' The socket 17 2 ′ in which the LED is mounted has a part of the side wall cut away to form an opening 17 6 so as not to obstruct the light emitted from the LED 15 2 ′.
  • An opening is provided on both sides of the socket 17 2 ′ so that the LED 15 2 ′ can be mounted with its orientation changed, and light can be applied to both sides.
  • FIG. 30 is a partial perspective view showing another modified example of the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the same parts as those in FIGS. 22 and 29 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted.
  • the socket 172 "extends over the entire width of the connection conductor structure 154, and also serves as a connection member. In this way, it is possible to reduce the number of insert molds to reduce the manufacturing cost, and to use the side-view type LED 1 52 ′ as the light source as in the embodiment of FIG.
  • a part of the side wall of the socket 172 ⁇ is cut out to form an opening 176. Since the openings 176 are provided on both sides of the socket 172 ⁇ , FIG. It is also possible to mount the LED 152 'in the opposite direction to that shown in Fig. 2. It is of course possible to use a normal LED 152 as a light source.
  • FIG. 31 is a perspective view showing still another modified embodiment of the embodiment shown in FIG. In this figure, the same parts as those in FIG.
  • Each terminal connection portion 15 9 ′ of each light source attachment portion 15 5 ′ of the connection conductor structure 1 54 ′ of the light source connection body 15 1 a has a pair of extension portions 17 5 extending in the width direction.
  • the widthwise extending portion 175 is bent by a press machine so as to be substantially perpendicular to the main surface of the connecting conductor structure 154 ′ to form a wall facing to the connecting conductor structure 154 ′.
  • LED 15 2 can be assembled to the connection conductor structure 1 54 f .
  • the formed socket 172 becomes unnecessary, and the manufacturing cost and work time can be reduced accordingly.
  • the chip type LED 152 electrically connected to the light source mounting portion 15 5 'of the connection conductor structure 1 54'
  • the tongue 174 formed in the connection path 171 is raised and bent by a notch extending in the longitudinal direction in the vicinity of the connection part 159 ', and is pressed and urged from above by the tongue 174. This is preferable because undesired falling off can be prevented.
  • the LED 152 is not attached to the pair of terminal connection portions 15 9 ′ of the second light source attachment portion 15 5 ′ from the right.
  • the sections 159 ' are connected to each other by a bridge section 159A, and the two LEDs, the second LED 152 from the left and the LED 152 on the right, are connected in series.
  • a bridge part 159 A connecting the connection part 159 ′ is formed, and in the secondary processing, only the bridge part 159 A in the light source mounting part 155 ′ to which the LED 152 is mounted is cut off. However, this can be realized by leaving the bridge portion 159 A of the light source mounting portion 155 ′ to which the LED 155 is not connected as it is.
  • the LEDs 15 2 are all mounted on the same side (upper surface in the figure) of the connection conductor structure 15 4 ′, but the extension 17 5 and the tongue 17 By reversing the bending direction of 4, it is also possible to attach LED 152 to the other surface (the lower surface in the figure).
  • connection conductor structure 150 4 ′ of FIG. 31 includes the connection path section 160 at the connection path section 160 to which the resistor 156 is connected and the second trunk path section 16 2. And a pair of resistance terminal connection portions 178 extending from the trunk portion 162 toward each other. That is, a resistance mounting portion 177 is formed by the pair of resistance terminal connection portions 178.
  • each resistance terminal connection section 17 8 is also bent by a press machine to form a pair of extension sections 17 It has nine.
  • the chip-type resistor 156 is inserted between the opposed walls 179, and the pair of terminals 157 of the chip-type resistor 156 are welded to the resistor terminal connection portion 178 by, for example, laser welding (bonding). ) Is done.
  • Laser welding is preferably performed by irradiating laser light to one or more points on the opposite side to which the resistor 156 of the resistor terminal connection 178 is attached. It is also possible to apply laser light from the side of the surface to be attached. By welding, it is possible to prevent the chip resistor 156 from undesirably dropping off from the connecting conductor structure 154 ′. It is preferable that the connection conductor structure 154 ′ be made of aluminum because such laser welding can be performed with high reliability.
  • the terminal 157 of the chip-type resistor 156 is usually very thin and easily damaged. Laser welding is preferred to reduce as much as possible.
  • a conductive adhesive containing, for example, aluminum nitride powder can be used instead of welding, welding is generally preferred from the viewpoint of mechanical strength. In this way, by allowing the resistor 156 to be connectable between the communication path section 160 and the second trunk section 162, the resistor 156 is connected in series to the LED 152. It can be connected to prevent overvoltage from being applied to LED 152. In the embodiment shown in FIG.
  • the insert is formed so as to extend in the width direction of the connection conductor structure 15 4 ′ so as to connect the communication path section 160 and the pair of trunk sections 16 1, 16 2.
  • the connecting member 165 'formed by the mold has the same length as the width of the connecting conductor structure 154'.
  • a widthwise depression 1666A or a through hole 1666B is formed in a part of the pair of trunk roads 161 and 162 later, as shown in FIG.
  • a part of the connecting member 16 5 ′ formed by the sensor mold extends in the vertical direction in the figure through 66 A or the through hole 16 B, and the trunk roads 16 1 and 16 2 It is made possible by firmly connecting the connecting member and preventing the connecting member 165 'from shifting in the longitudinal direction.
  • FIG. 32 is a plan view of a patterned conductor 170 ′ used to form the light source assembly 151a of FIG. In this figure, the same parts as those in FIG. As shown, this patterned conductor 170 ′ has a plurality of light source mounting portions 155 ′, each of which can be mounted with a chip type LED 152, and each of the light source mounting portions 155 ′.
  • the reference numeral 15 5 ′ has a pair of terminal connection portions 15 9 ′ corresponding to the pair of electric connection terminals 15 3 of the chip type LED 15 2.
  • Each terminal connecting portion 15 9 ′ has a pair of widthwise extending portions 17 5 extending in opposite directions, and is a patterned conductor 17 5 when forming the connecting conductor structure 15 4 ′.
  • connecting conductor structure 1 5 4 ′ Connected by 5 9 A to form a connecting conductor structure 1 5 4 ′ During the secondary processing of the patterned conductor 17 CT, only the bridge section 15 9 A of the light source mounting section 15 5 ′ to which the LED 15 2 is connected can be cut off. Further, in the patterned conductor 170 ', a part of the branch section 164 connecting the connecting path section 160 and the second trunk section 162 is partially connected to the connecting path section 160 and the trunk section. It has been replaced by a resistor mounting part 177 for connecting a chip type resistor 156 to the road part 162.
  • Each resistor mounting portion 1 7 7 has a pair of resistor terminal connection portions 1 7 8 corresponding to a pair of electrical connection terminals 1 5 7 of the chip type resistor 1 5 6, and the patterned conductor 1 7 before secondary processing
  • the pair of resistance terminal connection portions 178 are connected to each other by the bridge portion 178 A, and only when the resistance 156 is actually connected, the bridge portion 178 in the secondary processing. 8 A is removed. If the resistor 156 is not connected and the bridge section 178 A is left, just like the normal branch section 164, the connection section 160 and the second trunk section 162 are simply connected. It will be understood that it functions as a conductor connecting the two.
  • a part of the plurality of branch portions 164 is a resistor mounting portion 177, but all of the branch portions 164 may be a resistor mounting portion 177.
  • the resistance mounting portion 1777 for mounting the resistor 156 is provided between the communication path portion 160 and the second main road portion 162. However, it is of course possible to provide between the connecting path section 160 and the first trunk section 161.
  • the patterned conductor 17 (T in FIG. 32 corresponds to the semi-circular width direction of the first main road 161 at a position corresponding to the position where the connecting member 16 5 ′ is provided.
  • a recess 1666A is provided, and a through hole 1666B is formed in the second trunk section 162.
  • the connecting member 1 formed by the insert mold is formed.
  • 6 5 ′ extends through these widthwise recesses 1 66 A and through holes 16 6 B, and the connecting member 16 5 ′ has the same width or the same width as the patterned conductor 170 ′. Concatenation, even for shorter lengths
  • the member 16 5 ′ and the trunk roads 16 1, 16 2 can be firmly connected.
  • FIG. 32 corresponds to the semi-circular width direction of the first main road 161 at a position corresponding to the position where the connecting member 16 5 ′ is provided.
  • a recess 1666A is provided, and a through hole 1666B is formed in the second trunk section 162.
  • the first trunk road portion 161 having a relatively small width is provided with a recess in the width direction
  • the second trunk road portion 162 having a relatively large width is provided with a through hole. It is, of course, possible to do so. It is sufficient that a part of the connecting member 16 5 ′ can penetrate a part of these trunk roads 16 1 and 16 2 in the vertical direction.
  • the shape of the widthwise recess 1666A and the through hole 1666B is arbitrary, and is not limited to a semicircle or a circle.
  • FIG. 33 is a partial plan view showing a modified embodiment of the patterned conductor of FIG. 18 suitable for forming a series connection of LEDs.
  • the patterned conductor 120 ′ is connected to the first trunk section 111 and the first trunk section 111 shown in FIG. It does not have the branch section 113 to be connected, and its width is narrowed accordingly. By doing so, unnecessary materials can be saved when the light source assembly is completed, and costs can be reduced.
  • this patterned conductor 1 20 ′ is the same as the patterned conductor 120 of FIG. 18 except that it does not have the trunk section 1 1 1 and the branch section 1 13, and therefore, FIG. It can be processed by the same progressive press machine used for the patterned conductor 120 of FIG.
  • FIG. 34 is a partial plan view showing a modified example of the patterned conductor of FIG. 25 suitable for forming a series connection of LEDs.
  • this patterned conductor 170 ° also does not have the first trunk portion 161 and the branch portion 163, and is made of material. Costs are being reduced through reductions.
  • FIG. 35 is a partial perspective view similar to FIG. 16 showing another embodiment of the connecting member. In this figure, the same parts as those in FIG. Description is omitted.
  • a connecting conductor structure 104 or a patterned conductor 120
  • a plurality of insulative sheets 184 made of, for example, vinyl chloride are used.
  • the insulating sheet 184 can be attached to the patterned conductor 120 including the main roads 111, 112 and the communication path 110 before the secondary processing. It is preferable to use an adhesive for such attachment, but it is also possible to attach by any other appropriate method such as heat welding or UV curing of a resin.
  • the formed light source connecting body can be made smaller or thinner.
  • the insulating sheet 184 can be punched together by a press machine during the secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 120.
  • FIG. 36 is a partial perspective view similar to FIG. 16 showing still another embodiment of the connecting member
  • FIG. 37 is a bottom view thereof.
  • a connecting conductor structure 104 (or a patterned conductor 120) is used as a connecting member for connecting the two main road sections 111, 112 and the connecting path section 110.
  • An insulating sheet 184 ′ made of, for example, vinyl chloride is used which extends over a predetermined length in the length direction.
  • the insulating sheet 184 ' may extend, for example, over the entire length of the patterned conductor 120.
  • Such an insulating sheet 184 ' is also attached to the patterned conductor' 120 using a suitable means such as an adhesive before the secondary processing of the patterned conductor '120.
  • a hole may be formed in a predetermined portion of the insulating sheet 184 '(for example, a portion matching the pilot hole 118 and a portion where the lead wire 103 of the LED 102 is inserted).
  • the terminal for the connecting conductor structure 104 (or light source mounting) is connected so that the laser for laser welding can be applied from below.
  • An opening 180 is provided to expose the part 105).
  • FIG. 36 similarly to the embodiment using a plurality of insulating sheets 184 shown in FIG. Can be smaller or thinner.
  • the work of attaching to the patterned conductor 120 can be performed relatively easily and in a short time as compared with the case where a plurality of insulating sheets 184 are used.
  • the insulating sheet 18 4 ′ extends over the entire width of the connecting conductor structure 104 in the width direction, but the two trunk roads 1 1 1, 1 1 2 and the connecting road 1 As long as it can be connected to 110, it is not always necessary to extend over the entire width direction.
  • the width may be such that the pilot hole 118 is not closed.
  • the two main road sections 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Fold the branch roads 1 1 3 and 1 1 4 so that the main surface is perpendicular to the main surface of the connecting road 1 1 10 and attach the trunk roads 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 to the board (holding body) 1 8
  • the light source connector 101 can easily be mounted on the mounting board 180.
  • a groove or a hole may be provided in the mounting board 180 so as to receive, for example, the lead wire 103 of the LED 102 projecting from the lower surface of the light source connector 101 ⁇ .
  • the mounting port 180 may be formed integrally with the light source connector 101 by molding. Further, it is also possible to form a surface light source by arranging a plurality of light source connected bodies 101 on the mounting port 180 side by side in the width direction. At this time, it is preferable to adjust the pitches of the LEDs 102 in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction so that they are the same.
  • the light source shown in Fig. 16 In the connecting body 101, the trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 of the connecting conductor structure 104 and the connecting path 1 110 were connected by the connecting member 1 15 formed by insert molding. After installation on the connecting conductor structure 104 of 02, the two trunk roads 1 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 and the connecting road 1 110 are connected via the LED 102 and the branch roads 1 13 and 1 14. The connecting member 1 15 can be removed because of the body. In such a case, the light source connector 101 can be mounted on the mounting board in the same manner as shown in FIG. The same applies to the light source assembly shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 39 is a perspective view showing an embodiment 190 of a light emitting device using a light source connector 101 using, for example, the insulating sheet 184 ′ shown in FIG. 36 as a connecting member.
  • FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view along the line XL—XL
  • FIG. 41 is a schematic top view.
  • the same parts as those shown in FIG. 36 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted.
  • each of the N LED series blocks 1 ⁇ to LN included in the light source assembly 101 ⁇ is composed of four LEDs 102 and these LEDs 1 Includes a chip-type resistor 1 56 (see Figure 31) connected in series to 0 2.
  • the chip-type resistor 156 cuts a part of the communication path 110 (or connection path 121) between the adjacent LEDs 102, and the resistor 156 spans the cut part. 6 can be mounted and the terminal of the resistor 156 can be attached by laser welding to the connection path 121.
  • the number of LEDs 102 included in each of the series blocks L i to L N can of course be variously changed.
  • the illustrated light-emitting device 190 has a light-transmitting cylindrical tubular member 191, such as a glass tube, as a housing for accommodating the light source connector 101 '.
  • a light-transmitting cylindrical tubular member 191 such as a glass tube
  • the tubular member 191 has a diameter of 0.5 to 2 cm. And a thin thing can be used.
  • the translucent tubular member 191 can be made of plastic or the like, but as described later in detail, a glass tube having good heat transfer characteristics is preferable for efficient heat dissipation.
  • Cap members 192 are attached to both ends of the tubular member 191, and each cap member 192 holds a pair of conductive pins 1993.
  • One of a pair of conductive pins 193 provided at each end of the tubular member 191 is connected to the first trunk section 111 of the light source connector 101, and the other is connected to the first It is connected to 2 main roads 1 1 2.
  • the light source connector is connected via the trunk roads 111, 112.
  • the power supply voltage can be supplied to the LED 101 of 101 ⁇ .
  • the trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 of the light source assembly 100 1 ⁇ ⁇ ⁇ can be used as wiring (or electric circuit) for connecting the LED 102 to the power supply.
  • the work efficiency of assembling and the like can be greatly improved as compared with the case of wiring separately.
  • the conductive pin 193 at one end is formed into a female shape and the conductive pin 193 at the other end is female so that the light emitting device 190 can be easily connected to each other. It may be a type.
  • the first and second trunks 1 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 of the light source connector 15 1 are connected to one end of the tubular member 19 1.
  • it may be configured to be connected only to the conductive pin 193 provided in the device.
  • the tubular member 19 1 is Since both ends of the tubular member 1912 are sealed by the cap member 192, when the diameter of the tubular member 191 is as small as 0.5 to 2 cm, heat convection hardly occurs. Therefore, when a printed circuit board is used, the copper foil used to form the circuit is usually as thin as 35 m and has poor heat transfer efficiency (that is, the heat transfer speed is low). The heat generated from elements such as 2 remained in the surrounding area, and the temperature around the element was excessively increased, which could damage the element or reduce its performance. However, the light emitting device 190 shown in FIGS.
  • connection conductor structure 104 (FIG. 1) which can be formed by pressing (primary and secondary) a conductive flat plate material.
  • the light source connected body 101) with (38) is used, and the thickness of the flat plate material is usually about 0.1 to 0.3 mm, which can be much larger than the copper foil of the printed circuit board. . Therefore, the heat conduction characteristics are extremely good compared to the printed circuit board, the heat generated in each element is released, and the temperature around the element is prevented from rising excessively, and the heat conduction is substantially uniform in the tubular member 19 1. A temperature distribution can be realized.
  • the heat transfer plate 194 also functions as a support for supporting the light source connector 101 in the tubular member 191.
  • the heat transfer plate 1994 has a cross-sectional shape substantially along the inner surface of the tubular member 191, and is pressed against the tubular member 191 in close contact.
  • the tubular member 19 1 made of glass is formed. Since heat is dissipated from the outside to the outside, the temperature rise in the tubular member 19 1 can be further suppressed. That is, the use of the heat transfer plate 1994 allows the tubular member 1911 itself to act as a heat sink. In addition, tubular members made of glass other than 19 1 In addition, when the light source connector 101 is housed in a housing (housing) made of an insulator having good heat transfer properties, such as ceramic, the heat transfer plate 1994 described above is used. Can be used to transfer heat to the housing and dissipate heat from the housing to the outside.
  • a heat transfer plate 194 extending over substantially the same length as the tubular member 191 may be used.
  • the shape of the housing is not limited to a tubular shape, and the shape of the heat transfer plate 194 can be variously changed according to the shape of the housing.
  • the individual light sources consisted of a single light-emitting element, such as a bullet-type LED 102 with two leads or a so-called chip-type LED 152 without leads.
  • one light source may be formed of a light emitting element assembly including a plurality of light emitting elements.
  • FIG. 42a is a perspective view for explaining an embodiment using such a light emitting element assembly 195 as a light source.
  • the connection conductor structure 104 as shown in FIG. 20, a tape-shaped patterned conductor 120 subjected to secondary processing for parallel connection of light sources can be used.
  • FIG. 42A the same parts as those in the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
  • a circuit for parallel connection is configured in this manner, a pair of terminal connection portions 109 of each light source attachment portion 105 of the connection conductor structure 104 are connected to the corresponding branch portion 1 13 or 1 respectively. Since each of them is connected to the trunk 1 1 1 or 1 1 2 through 1 4, each part of the connecting conductor structure 104 is separated
  • the connecting member 115 is not required by the insert mold to prevent the occurrence.
  • the light-emitting element assembly 195 as a light source is composed of six chip-type LEDs arranged in a row on a support 198 made of, for example, a printed circuit board and electrically connected. 196 and one chip-type resistor 197. Further, the light emitting element assembly 195 is separated at a distance corresponding to the pair of terminal connection portions 109 of each light source mounting portion 105 of the connection conductor structure 104, and serves as a terminal for electrical connection. It has a pair of leads or conductive pins 199 extending downward.
  • the LED 196 and the resistor 197 of the light emitting element assembly 195 can be connected in series, for example, as shown in the circuit diagram of FIG.
  • the light emitting element assembly 195 as a light source can be connected to the connection conductor structure 104.
  • the light-emitting element assembly 195 By allowing the light-emitting element assembly 195 to be attached to the connection conductor structure 104 as a light source in this manner, it is possible to widen the parallax of the lighting effect.
  • a plurality of light-emitting element assemblies 195 are used as light sources, and adjacent light-emitting elements are arranged so as to be close to each other in the longitudinal direction. By eliminating dark areas, more uniform and even illumination can be achieved.
  • the light-emitting element assembly 1995 may be connected to the light source assembly 15 shown in FIG. 22 or FIG. 31, for example. It is also possible to form using 1, 1 5 1 '.
  • FIGS. 43a and 43b show examples using another light emitting element assembly.
  • Figure 43a shows such a light-emitting device assembly 1 95 'as the light source.
  • FIG. 43B is a perspective view for explaining an embodiment of the light source assembly, and
  • FIG. 43B is a circuit diagram of the light emitting element assembly 195 ′.
  • This light-emitting element assembly 195 ' is composed of a series connection of 6 LEDs 1960 and one resistor 197 connected in series, for example, 5 on a support 198' with a printed circuit board. It has a two-dimensional light emission.
  • the LED 19 of the support 1 98 ′ is used as an electric connection terminal connected to the terminal connection portion 109 of the connection conductor structure 104.
  • a pair of lead wires or conductive pins 199 extending substantially in parallel at predetermined intervals.
  • the light emitting element assembly 1 95 ′ may have the same width as the connecting conductor structure 104. In this way, when the light source assemblies using the light-emitting element assemblies 1 95 ′ are arranged side by side in the width direction, the distance between adjacent light source assemblies is appropriately adjusted to provide uniform illumination as a whole. be able to.
  • the plurality of light emitting element assemblies 1 95 ′ are arranged without a gap in the longitudinal direction, because a dark portion between the light sources can be eliminated.
  • the shape of the light emitting element assembly 195 ' is not limited to a square or a rectangle, but may be any other shape such as a circle.
  • the tape-shaped patterned conductor 120 subjected to secondary processing for parallel connection of the light source was used as the connection conductor structure 104, but the connection method of the light emitting element in the light emitting element assembly and the size of the resistance were large. By appropriately selecting the size and the like, it is of course possible to use those that have been subjected to secondary processing for other connections such as series-parallel connection and series connection (Figs. 19 and 21).
  • connection conductor structure 154 ′ is substantially flat and flexible. Therefore, it is possible to bend and use in the longitudinal direction.
  • the pair of electrical connection terminals 15 3 of each chip type LED 15 2 (and the corresponding pair of terminal connection portions 15 9 ′ of the connection conductor structure 154 ′) are light sources.
  • the connecting body 15 1 a (that is, the connecting conductor structure 1 5 4 ′) is arranged to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction, when the light source connecting body 15 1 a is bent, the connecting conductor structure 1 A force can be exerted to separate the terminal connection part 15 9 ′ of 54 ′ and the terminal 15 3 of the LED 152.
  • the LED 155 is held down from above by the tongue piece 174, but they are separated from the electrical contacts (that is, the terminal 153 and the terminal connection 159 ′). It is not preferable that such a force acts from the viewpoint of preventing poor connection. It is conceivable that the LED 155 and the connection conductor structure 154 'are welded by, for example, laser welding or the like, but it is similarly undesirable that such force acts.
  • this patterned conductor 200 can also be formed by press working so as to have a predetermined pattern, similarly to the above-described embodiment, and is subjected to a secondary processing for cutting out an appropriate portion.
  • a connection conductor structure having a required circuit configuration can be formed. That is, this patterned conductor 200 is composed of first and second trunk roads 211 and 212 extending substantially in parallel in the longitudinal direction, and a chip type LED 200 as a light source.
  • a plurality of light source mounting portions 2 15 arranged in the longitudinal direction between the trunk roads 2 11 1 and 2 12 for electrical connection with the light source mounting portion 2 (see FIG.
  • connection conductor structure for connecting D 202 can be formed.
  • each of the light source mounting portions 2 15 has a pair of light source terminal connections spaced apart in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the patterned conductor 200 (ie, in the width direction). It has a part 2 16. With this, when each chip type LED 202 used as a light source is mounted on the corresponding light source mounting part 215, as shown in FIG. 203 will be spaced apart in a direction generally perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the patterned conductor 200 (ie, of the connecting conductor structure formed therefrom).
  • Each terminal connection portion 2 16 has a pair of extension portions 2 17 extending in the longitudinal direction of the patterned conductor 200.
  • the extension portion 217 is bent perpendicularly to the main surface of the patterned conductor 200 similarly to the extension portion 175 of the embodiment shown in FIG. Form a wall for holding or positioning.
  • the pair of terminal connecting portions 2 16 of each light source mounting portion 2 15 are separated from each other. However, as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, they are connected to each other. In this case, the pattern conductor 200 may be cut off in the secondary processing only when the LED 202 is attached.
  • the resistor mounting part 2 25 for mounting the chip-type resistor 205 (see Fig. 45) between the two light source mounting parts 2 15 on the left side of the figure is shown. Is provided.
  • the resistance mounting part 225 has a pair of resistance terminal connecting parts 226 spaced apart in the width direction of the patterned conductor 200.
  • Each of the terminal connecting portions 226 has a pair of extending portions 227 extending in the longitudinal direction of the patterned conductor 200. This extension portion 227 is bent perpendicularly to the main surface of the patterned conductor 200 similarly to the extension portion 179 of the embodiment shown in FIG. Form a wall for retaining or positioning the anti-205.
  • the resistor mounting portion 2 25 By providing the resistor mounting portion 2 25 in this way, it is possible to easily realize the connection of the adjacent LED 202 via the resistor 205, and the pair of terminals 20 6 of the mounted resistor 205 is formed.
  • the patterned conductors 200 are spaced apart in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. It should be noted that, when forming the patterned conductor 200, the pair of resistance terminals 226 of the resistor mounting portion 222 is connected, and only when the resistor 205 is mounted, the patterned conductor 200 It is the same as the light source mounting part 215 that can be separated in the next processing.
  • the first and second trunk roads 211, 212 extend in the longitudinal direction while meandering. More specifically, the trunk roads 2 11 1 and 2 1 2 are arranged such that a portion substantially aligned in the longitudinal direction with the light source mounting portion 2 15 to which the LED 202 is mounted is directed outward in the width direction (that is, the communication path portion). (In a direction away from 210) to form a convex curved portion 211A, 212A.
  • each of the convex curved portions 211A and 212A is curved in a substantially U-shape in the drawing, it may be curved in an arc shape, for example.
  • the convex curved portions 2 11 A and 2 12 A of the trunk roads 2 1 1 and 2 12 are bent at their roots to become substantially perpendicular to the main surface of the communication road 2 10 In this way, the bent part can be used for mounting on a support plate or the like (see Fig. 45).
  • a tape-shaped patterned conductor 200 progressive press machine (not shown)
  • the edge bar 219 provided with the pilot hole 218 engaging with the pilot pin of the progressive press machine is separately provided extending in the longitudinal direction. It is connected to the road section 212 by a plurality of connecting sections 220.
  • This edge cross section 219 is used, for example, in the final step of secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 200 by a press machine.
  • the connection part 220 is cut off from the second trunk road part 212 by cutting it off.
  • FIG. 45 is a perspective view of a light source connected body 201 formed by using the patterned conductor 200 shown in FIG. 44 and a holding body 230 for holding the same.
  • the light source coupling body 201 is formed by cutting a predetermined portion of the patterned conductor 200 shown in FIG. 44 and forming a connection conductor having a required circuit configuration.
  • a chip type LED 202 and a chip type resistor 205 are assembled to the structure 204. More specifically, a pair of longitudinally extending portions 217 of each light source terminal connecting portion 216 of the connection conductor structure 204 are bent to form opposing walls, and a chip type LED 202 as a light source is interposed therebetween. Inserted and attached.
  • terminal connecting portions 2 16 for each LED 202 are arranged apart from each other in the width direction of the light source connected body 201, a pair of electric connection of each LED 202 in the mounted state is provided. It will be understood that terminals 203 are also located along the width direction.
  • the tongue piece 174 as shown in FIG. 31 for suppressing the LED 202 from the upper side is not provided, the connection between the terminal connection part 2 16 and the terminal 203 of the LED 202 is not performed. For example, it may be performed by welding such as laser welding.
  • the chip-type resistor 205 is attached to a resistor attachment portion 225 provided between the light source attachment portions 215.
  • each of the resistor terminal connection portions 2 26 of the resistor mounting portion 2 25 are also bent to form opposing walls, and the chip-type resistor 205 is formed of these opposing walls 2 2 Inserted between 27.
  • the connection between the terminal 206 of the chip-type resistor 205 and the terminal connection part 222 can also be performed by welding such as laser welding, similarly to the chip-type LED 202.
  • the laser can be applied only from one side, which simplifies the manufacturing apparatus, which is preferable. Note that in FIG.
  • connection conductor structure 204 formed by cutting out the required portion of the patterned conductor 200
  • the LED 202 and the resistor 205 are shown.
  • the required portions (branch portions 2 13 and 21) of the patterned conductor 200 are cut off to form a connection conductor structure.
  • Each part of the conductor structure 204 does not have to be separated.
  • the insulating sheets 18 4 and 18 4 ′ may be connected to the patterned conductors 2, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, so that the parts of the connecting conductor structure 204 are not separated.
  • a required portion of the patterned conductor 200 may be cut off.
  • the first and second trunk road portions 211, 212 of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 200, the convex curved portions 211A, 212A are located at the roots thereof. It is bent substantially perpendicularly to the main surface of the light source unit 201. As shown in FIG. 45, the bent convex curved portions 211 A and 212 A are, for example, tightly fitted in corresponding grooves 2 31 formed in a flexible holder 230. Thus, the light source connector 201 can be attached to the holder 230 to form the light emitting device 240.
  • FIG. 46 is a schematic perspective view showing a state in which the light emitting device 240 thus formed is bent in the longitudinal direction.
  • the connecting conductor structure 204 is not shown.
  • each LED 202 has a pair of terminals 203 arranged along the width direction of the light-emitting device 240, so that the light-emitting device 240 is elongated. It will be appreciated that flexing in the direction does not create a force that separates the terminal 203 of the LED 202 from the terminal connection 2 16 of the connecting conductor structure 204.
  • FIG. 47a is a plan view showing still another embodiment of the tape-shaped patterned conductor
  • FIG. 47b is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--A of FIG. 47a
  • FIG. 2 is a plan view of a light source assembly formed by attaching a chip-type LED and a chip-type resistor to a body structure.
  • the patterned conductor 250 shown in Fig. 47a is composed of a plurality of series blocks consisting of four chip-type LEDs 255 and one chip-type resistor 255 connected in series.
  • the structure is suitable for manufacturing a series-parallel light source connector 2 51 (see Fig. 47c) that is connected and configured.
  • the tape-shaped patterned conductor 250 is formed of the first and second trunk roads 2 extending substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction, similarly to the above-described embodiment.
  • a plurality of light source mounting portions 2 arranged longitudinally between these trunk routes 2 6 1 and 2 6 2 for electrical connection between 6 1, 2 62 and the chip type LED 25 2 as a light source 65, a communication path section 260 connecting these light source mounting sections 2 65 in the longitudinal direction, a communication path section 260, and the first and second trunk paths 2 61, 26 2. It has branch portions 26 3 and 26 4 connected in the width direction.
  • a resistor mounting portion 275 for mounting a chip-type resistor 255 is formed between the second and third light source mounting portions 265 from the left in the figure.
  • Each light source mounting section 2 65 has a pair of terminal connection sections 2 66 corresponding to a pair of terminals of the chip type LED 25 2, and the resistance mounting section 2 75 similarly has a pair of terminals of the resistance 2 5 5. It has a pair of terminal connection portions 276 corresponding to the above.
  • the adjacent light source mounting portion 265 and the resistor mounting portion 275 in the series block are connected by the communication path portion 260, and the adjacent light source mounting portions included in different series blocks are connected. The interval between 2 and 5 is divided in advance.
  • the pilot pins of the progressive press (not shown) for performing progressive press are used.
  • An edge bar 269 extending in the longitudinal direction having a pilot hole 268 to be engaged is provided, and the edge bar 269 is connected to the second trunk road by a connecting portion 270. 2 6 Connected to 2.
  • each terminal connection portion 266 of each light source mounting portion 265 is provided with a projection 267 for positioning the LED 252.
  • each terminal connection portion 276 of the resistor mounting portion 275 is provided with a protrusion 277 for positioning the resistor 255.
  • These projections 267 and 277 form, for example, widthwise cuts in the terminal connection portions 26 6 and 2776 at positions matching the ends of the LED 255 or the resistor 255 to be mounted.
  • the notch it can be suitably formed by raising the terminal connection part 26 6, 27 6 on the opposite side to the side where the LED 252 or the resistor 255 is attached with a press machine. 47b).
  • the LED 255 and the resistor 255 can be easily positioned on the patterned conductor 250. Then, after connecting the LED 252 and the resistor 255 to the patterned conductor 250 by, for example, laser welding, a required portion of the patterned conductor is cut off to form a connection conductor structure 254 having a required circuit pattern. Then, the light source connected body 25 1 can be formed (FIG. 47c). As another method, as in the embodiment shown in FIG. 36, an insulating tape 184 ′ is attached to the tape-shaped patterned conductor 250, and then a required portion of the patterned conductor 250 is formed.
  • connection conductor structure 254 May be cut off to form a connection conductor structure 254, and an LED 255 and a resistor 255 may be attached to the connection conductor structure 254. It is of course possible to use a connecting member extending in the width direction, such as the connecting member 115 shown in FIG. 16 or the like, to prevent the individual portions of the connection conductor structure 254 from being separated.
  • the light source is a bullet type LED 102 having two lead wires as terminals for electrical connection, or a chip type LED 152, 15 2 ′ having a pair of electrodes integrated with the main body.
  • a light emitting device assembly having two, two, two or two lead wires, a so-called "2"
  • the so-called “three-pole LED lamp” which has two or three LED terminals emitting light of different colors and has three or four electrical connection terminals, for example,
  • Also known as “4-pole LED lamps” are tape-shaped patterned conductors that can be applied to such 3-pole or 4-pole LED lamps and connection conductor structures formed from such patterned conductors.
  • FIG. 48a is a front view of a typical 3-pole LED lamp 302, and FIG. 48b is a circuit diagram thereof.
  • the three-pole LED lamp 302 includes two LED chips that emit light in different colors, for example, yellow and red, and the power sources of these two LED chips are connected to each other to form the first LED chip. It can be connected to the outside through the lead wire 303A.
  • the anode of one LED chip can be connected to the outside through the second lead wire 303B, and the anode of the other LED chip can be connected to the outside through the third lead wire 303C.
  • the power sources of the two LED chips are connected to each other, but the anodes may be connected to each other.
  • FIG. 49 is a partial plan view of a tape-shaped patterned conductor 300 suitable for forming a light source assembly using a plurality of three-pole LED lamps 302 shown in FIG. 48 as light sources.
  • the patterned conductor 300 has a plurality of light source mounting portions 3 15 arranged in the longitudinal direction for mounting a three-pole LED lamp 302 as a light source.
  • These light source mounting sections 3 15 are connected in the longitudinal direction by a communication path section 3 10.
  • each light source mounting part 3 1 5 is a 3 pole LED lamp
  • the first to third terminal connections 316A, 316B, 316C aligned in the width direction corresponding to the lead wires 303A, 303B, 303C A plurality of first connection paths 32 1 A for connecting the first terminal connection sections 3 16 A of the adjacent light source attachment sections 3 15 to each other; A plurality of second connection paths 3 2 1 B connecting the second terminal connection sections 3 16 B of the mounting section 3 15 to each other, and a third terminal connection section of the adjacent light source mounting section 3 15 And a plurality of third connection paths 321C connecting the 316Cs to each other.
  • the terminal connections 316 A, 316 B, and 316 C have the same lead wires 303 A, 3 A cross-shaped hole 317 for inserting and holding 03B and 303C is formed.
  • first and second trunk paths 311 and 312 are arranged in the longitudinal direction on both sides of the patterned conductor 300 with the light source mounting section 315 and the communication path section 310 sandwiched in the width direction. Extends. These first and second trunk roads 3 1 1 and 3 1 2 are positioned at both ends in the width direction of the light source mounting portion 3 15 by branching roads 3 13 and 3 14 extending in the width direction. Are connected to the second and third connection paths 321 B and 321 C connecting the terminal connection sections 316 B and 316 C to be connected. Further, a pilot hole 318 is formed in the second trunk road 312 so as to be able to be handled by a progressive press machine (not shown).
  • each resistor mounting section 3 25 faces each other from the terminal connection sections 3 16 B and 3 16 C of the light source mounting section 3 15 and the corresponding trunk sections 3 1 1 and 3 12.
  • each of the resistance terminal connections 3 26 is formed by a press machine. And a pair of extending portions 327 extending in opposite directions so as to be bent to form opposing walls.
  • connection conductor structure A required portion of the patterned conductor 300 having such a structure is cut out to form a connection conductor structure, and a three-pole LED lamp 302 as a light source is attached to the corresponding light source attachment part 3 15 and a connection conductor structure is formed as shown in FIG. Connect the chip resistor 3 05 (see the circuit diagram in Figure 51) similar to the resistor 205
  • FIG. 51 shows a circuit diagram of the formed light source unit 301. As shown by the dotted line in Fig. 51, connect the low voltage side of the DC power
  • the patterned conductor 300 shown in FIG. 49 is used to connect a shell type LED 102 having two leads as shown in FIG. 16 to form a light source assembly. You can also.
  • FIG. 52a is a top perspective view of a typical 4-pole LED lamp
  • FIG. 52b is a bottom perspective view thereof
  • FIG. 52c is a circuit diagram thereof.
  • this 4-pole LED lamp 402 is a chip-type LED (surface mounting LED) having no lead wire as a terminal. Further, it has a light emitting portion 402 A on the upper surface. 4 poles as shown in Fig. 5 2c
  • the LED lamp 402 includes first and second LED chips that emit light in different colors, for example, yellow and red, and a four-pole LED lamp 402 It has four terminals 403 connected to the sword, respectively.
  • Two of these terminals 403, which are connected to the cathodes of the first and second LED chips, are connected to one end of the 4-pole LED lamp 402 at the ends of the first and second LED chips.
  • the two terminals connected to the node are located at the other end.
  • the anode and cathode of each of the first and second 'LED chips included in the four-pole LED lamp 402 can be connected to the outside through the corresponding terminal 403.
  • FIG. 53 shows a tape-shaped patterned conductor that can be used to form a light source assembly using a plurality of 4-pole LED lamps 402 as shown in FIGS. 52 a to 52 c.
  • 3 is a partial plan view of FIG.
  • the patterned conductor 400 has a light source mounting portion 415 arranged in a longitudinal direction for mounting a 4-pole LED lamp 402 as a light source.
  • the section 4 15 is communicated in the longitudinal direction by the communication section 4 10.
  • each light source mounting portion 41 5 has four terminal connection portions 4 16 corresponding to the four terminals 403 of the four-pole LED lamp 402, and two of these terminal connection portions 4 16
  • the two poles are arranged longitudinally so as to be connected to a pair of terminals 403 corresponding to the first LED chip included in the four-pole LED lamp 402, and the other two are included in the second pole included in the four-pole LED lamp 402.
  • the communication path section 4 10 includes a plurality of first and second connection paths 42 1 A and 42 1 B for connecting the terminal connection sections 4 16 aligned in the width direction included in the adjacent light source mounting sections 4 15. To Have.
  • the first connection path 42 1 A connects the terminal connection sections 4 16 corresponding to the first LED chips included in the 4-pole LED lamp 402 in the longitudinal direction
  • the second connection path 42 1 B The terminal connection portions 4 16 corresponding to the second LED chips included in the 4-pole LED lamp 402 are connected in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the first connection path 421A and the second connection path 421B are separated in the width direction. Further, the first connection path 421A and the second connection path 421B which are aligned with each other in the longitudinal direction are connected in the width direction by the branch path 422.
  • first and second trunk road sections 41 1 and 41 2 extend in the longitudinal direction with the light source mounting section 4 15 and the communication path section 410 interposed therebetween in the width direction.
  • These first and second main roads 4 1 1 and 4 1 2 are divided into first and second connection paths 42 1 A and 42 1 by branch paths 4 13 and 4 14 extending in the width direction, respectively.
  • the second trunk path portion 4 1 2 in c yet this embodiment the pilot holes 41 8 for enabling the handling of the progressive press machine (not shown) is formed, the first stem A third trunk road portion 419 is provided outside the road portion 411 in the width direction, and is connected to the first trunk road portion 411 by a branch passage portion 420 extending in the width direction.
  • a required portion of the patterned conductor 400 having such a structure is cut off to form a connection conductor structure, and a four-pole LED lamp 402 as a light source is attached to the corresponding light source attachment part 415 and the resistance is reduced.
  • a light source connected body 401 using the four-pole LED lamp 402 can be obtained.
  • An example of such an ablation pattern is shown in FIG. In this figure, the part to be resected is indicated by oblique lines. Also, the attached 4-pole LED lamp 402 and chip-type resistor 405 are shown by dotted lines.
  • FIG. 55 is a circuit diagram of the light source connected body 401 thus formed.
  • three 4-pole LED lamps 402 and two resistors 405 form one circuit unit, and one end of each circuit unit has first and second connection paths 4. 21A and 421B are both coupled to the first trunk 411, and at the other end, one of the two resistors 405 is connected to the first connection 421A and the third trunk. The other of the two resistors 405 is connected between the second connection path 42 1 B and the second trunk section 4 12. It should be understood that the number of 4-pole LED lamps 402 that can be included in each circuit unit is not limited to three.
  • the high-voltage side of the DC power supply is connected to the first trunk road section 411 and the low-voltage side is connected to the third trunk path section 4 19 via the switch SW1.
  • the LED chip (first LED chip) on the upper side of the figure of each 4-pole LED lamp 402 is shown.
  • the LED chip (the second LED chip) on the lower side of the figure of each 4-pole LED lamp 402 can emit light when the switch SW2 is closed. Therefore, when the light emission color of the upper LED chip and the light emission color of the lower LED chip of each LED 402 are different, the light emission color can be changed by controlling the switches SW1 and SW2.
  • FIG. 56 is a partial plan view showing still another embodiment of the tape-shaped patterned conductor according to the present invention.
  • the patterned conductor 500 has light source mounting portions 515 arranged in a longitudinal direction for mounting a light source, and these light source mounting portions 515 are formed in a longitudinal direction by a communication path portion 510. Has been contacted.
  • Each light source mounting portion 5 15 has a pair of terminal connection portions 5 19 corresponding to a pair of terminals of the light source, and the pair of terminal connection portions 5 19 are separated from each other in the longitudinal direction.
  • Each terminal connection 5 19 has a cross-shaped hole for inserting the lead wire 103 when the light source is, for example, a gun-type LED 102 as shown in FIG. 5 1 6 is formed.
  • connection path section 5 10 has a plurality of connection paths 5 21 for connecting the terminal connection sections 5 19 included in the adjacent light source mounting section 5 15. It can also be said that a connection piece is formed by one connection path 521 and a pair of terminal connection parts 519 connected thereby. A part of each connection path 5 21 has a relatively narrow bridge portion 5 21 A for easy cutting, and the bridge portion 5 21 A is cut off to connect. The terminal connection portion 5 19 connected by the path 5 21 can be separated.
  • first and second trunk roads 5 1 1 and 5 1 2 are arranged on both sides of the patterned conductor 500 with the light source mounting section 5 15 and the communication path 5 110 sandwiched in the width direction. ing.
  • Each terminal connection portion 5 19 of each light source mounting portion 5 15 is either the first trunk portion 5 1 1 or the second trunk portion 5 1 2 depending on the corresponding branch portion 5 13 3 5 1
  • One of the pair of terminal connections 5 19 in each light source mounting section 5 15 is connected to the first trunk section 5 11 1, and the other is connected to the second trunk section 5 12. It is connected.
  • the branch sections 5 13 and 5 14 may be provided so that each terminal connection section 5 19 is connected to both the first and second trunk sections 5 11 and 5 12.
  • the connecting path 52 1 and the second trunk section 5 12 A cross-shaped hole 5 23 for inserting a lead wire of a resistor is formed.
  • the lead wire 52 2 A of the resistor 52 2 is inserted into these holes 52 3 (preferably further laser-welded) so that the resistance 52 2 2 Between the terminal connection section 5 19 and the second trunk section 5 12 or between adjacent terminal connection sections 5 19 included in any adjacent light source mounting section. be able to. If a resistor 5 2 2 is installed, the corresponding bridge 5 2 1 A or branch 5 1 4 Needless to say resection.
  • the bridge portion 52 1 A is shifted from the widthwise center of the connection portion 52 1 so that the bridge portion 52 21 A or the branch portion 514 can be cut after the connection of the resistor 52 2.
  • the resistor mounting holes 5 2 3 are arranged so that when the resistor 5 2 2 is mounted, the resistor 5 22 does not overlap with the bridge 5 2 1 A or branch 514. Is formed.
  • connection conductor structure in which the tape-shaped patterned conductor 120 of Fig. 18 is secondary-processed for serial connection of the light source (Fig. 21), each terminal mounting portion 109 and both trunk roads 1 1 Branches 1 13 and 1 14 connecting 1 and 1 12 have been removed. Therefore, when the LED 102 (Fig. 16) is connected by such a connecting conductor structure and a current flows through the LED 10, the heat generated by the connection will cause the heat generated by both trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 And the ambient temperature of the LED 102 may be undesirably high.
  • FIG. 57 enables the heat dissipation through the trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 while connecting the LEDs in series. This is to prevent the ambient temperature from rising.
  • the same parts as those in FIG. 18 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted.
  • each terminal connection 1 Although 09 is connected to both trunk roads 111 and 112, it may be connected to only one of them.
  • patterned conductors with narrow trunks must be used.
  • a patterned conductor 550 is shown in Figure 58a.
  • the patterned conductor 550 is a terminal connecting portion 569 that forms a light source mounting portion 565 for mounting a light source (not shown), and a communication connecting the light source mounting portion 565 in a longitudinal direction.
  • the point that it has a plurality of branch portions 563 and 564 extending in the width direction that connects 65 to the trunk roads 561 and 562 is the same as the above-described embodiment.
  • the feature is that the width of the main roads 561, 562 is becoming narrower. Therefore, it can be housed in a glass tube with a small inside diameter.However, the ends of these trunk roads 561, 562 can be connected to an external power source such as the conductive pin 93 shown in Fig. 39. It is difficult to attach an electrode pin for use.
  • the end conductor 570 is a pair of narrow portions 571, 572 for connection with the trunks 561, 562 of the patterned conductor 5550, and It has a pair of wide portions 573, 574 connected to the narrow portions 571, 572, respectively. Holes 573 A and 574 A that can be used for attaching electrode pins are formed in each of the pair of wide portions 573 and 574.
  • the end conductor 570 is laser welded with its pair of narrow portions 571, 572 superimposed on the corresponding trunks 561, 562 of the patterned conductor 550.
  • the pair of wide portions 573 and 574 of the end conductor 570 are connected to each other by a bridge portion 575, but are separated by cutting off the bridge portion 575 before use. .
  • the narrow trunk road portion 561 An electrode pin can be easily attached to the personalized conductor 550 having 562 as well.
  • the parts of the connecting conductor structure 104 obtained by the secondary processing of the patterned conductor 120 are prevented from being separated or the mechanical strength of the connecting conductor structure 104 is increased.
  • an insulating sheet 18 4 ′ was attached to the surface of the patterned conductor 120 opposite to the light source mounting surface.
  • the insulating sheet 18 4 ′ is attached to the light source mounting surface of the patterned conductor 120 (connection conductor structure 104). It can also be attached by heat welding.
  • the same parts as those in FIG. 36 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted.
  • the insulating sheet 18 4 ′ is formed with an opening 18 5 at a predetermined position, as in FIG. 36, and the light source (LED) 2 and the patterned conductor are formed. Connection with the terminal connection section 109 of 120 is possible.
  • the opening 185 may be formed before the insulating sheet 184 ′ is attached to the patterned conductor 120, or may be formed by pressing, laser processing, or the like after the attachment. It can also be formed by the method described above. In this way, when the insulating sheet 18 4 ′ is attached to the light source mounting surface of the patterned conductor 120, the portion to which the power supply voltage is applied is exposed on the light source mounting surface that is relatively easy for an operator to touch. The safety can be improved because it is not performed, and the lighting efficiency can be increased by reflecting the light from the light source 102 with the insulating sheet 18 4 ′.
  • connection conductor formed by the secondary processing of the patterned conductor When using the insulating sheets 184 and 184 'to prevent the parts of the body structure 104 from falling apart, the mechanical strength of the obtained light source unit 1001', 101 ⁇ and 101a is obtained. It is preferable to attach to the holder to compensate for. In addition, when assembling the light source 102 to the patterned conductor 120 and then cutting out the required portions to form the connecting conductor structure 104 to obtain a light source connected body, connecting the insulating sheet 184 'etc. It is not necessary to use a member, but it is more preferable to use a holder because the mechanical strength of the light source connection body is further reduced.
  • FIG. 60a shows a preferred embodiment of such attachment of the light source assembly to the holder.
  • FIG. 60B is a cross-sectional view showing a state where the light source connector is attached to the holder.
  • the holder 580 has a groove 582 extending in the longitudinal direction at the center, and opposing side walls 583, 583 of the groove.
  • the connected light source 101b is formed using a patterned conductor 120 as shown in FIG. 18 but does not have a connecting member and has an extension 1 1b.
  • the lead wire 103 is not caulked by bending the 7 and the lead wire 103 is connected to the patterned conductor 120 by laser processing, and the bottom surface is almost flat (Fig. 60b). .
  • the pair of trunk roads 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 of the light source assembly 101 b are fitted into the corresponding guide grooves 583A and 583A.
  • the portion to which the power supply voltage is applied is exposed on the light source mounting surface of the light source connection body 101b, and undesired short-circuiting due to dust or the like is prevented.
  • a force bar member 585 made of an insulator is attached. An opening is provided in advance in the power par member 585 in accordance with the position of the light source 102.
  • the cover member 585 may be omitted.
  • FIG. 61 is a cross-sectional view showing another embodiment of the holder.
  • the connected light source 101b is the same as that shown in FIGS. 60a and 60b.
  • This holding body 590 has grooves 592 and 596 extending in the longitudinal direction on both the upper surface and the lower surface, and has a substantially H-shaped cross section. Opposing side walls 593, 593 and 597, 597 of each groove 592, 596 have a pair of trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 of the associated light source assembly. Guide grooves 593 A, 593 A, 597 A, and 5977 A to be fitted are formed.
  • the patterned conductor (120, 200, etc.) according to the present invention can be preferably formed by a progressive press machine, but can also be formed by photoetching.
  • a preferred method of forming a patterned conductor by such photoetching to obtain a light source assembly is shown in FIGS.
  • a heat welding sheet 63 is sandwiched between a conductive plate 601 made of phosphor bronze and an insulating plate 602 having substantially the same size, and pressed at a high temperature. Then, the conductive plate 601 is bonded to the insulating plate 602. Then, using photoetching, a plurality of long patterned conductors 6 04-1, 6 0 4 — each having a pattern as shown in FIG. 56, for example.
  • FIG. 62B detailed illustration of the formed pattern is omitted.
  • a punching process for inserting a light source or a lead wire of a resistor may be performed by a press process or the like.
  • all of the plurality of patterned conductors 604-1, 604-2,..., 604-N are attached to the insulating plate 602.
  • each patterned conductor 6 0 4—1, 6 0 4- Cut off the appropriate portion of 264-N to form the desired connecting conductor structure, attach light source 606 (and resistor if necessary) to the connecting conductor structure as shown in Figure 62c, 6 0 5— 1, 6 0 5-2 6 0 5—
  • a plurality of light source connected bodies 655-1, 655-2,..., 655-N connected by an insulating plate 62 form a surface light source. You can see that. After or before mounting the light source 606, cut off the insulating plate 602 and connect the light source (connection conductor structure) 605—1, 605—2,..., 605—N Can of course be separated from one another.
  • FIG. 63a is a partial plan view showing one embodiment of a patterned conductor capable of forming a light source assembly including two rows of light sources as an example.
  • the patterned conductor 610 is a patterned conductor (patterned conductor for arranging light sources in one row) for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are arranged in one row as described above.
  • the patterned conductors 6 10 for arranging the light sources 10 and 2 rows are composed of first to third trunk paths 6 1 1, 6 1 2, and 6.
  • a pilot hole 6 14 for facilitating the positioning of the transport Z by the progressive press machine is formed in the central second trunk road 6 12.
  • a plurality of light source mounting portions 6 15 are arranged in the longitudinal direction between the first main road portion 6 11 and the second main road portion 6 12, and each light source mounting portion 6 15 extends in the width direction.
  • branch paths 6 16 and 617 and adjacent light source mounting sections 6 15 are mutually connected. Linked by 6 1 8 ing.
  • each light source mounting portion 6 25 is arranged in the longitudinal direction between the second trunk portion 6 12 and the third trunk portion 6 13, and are connected in the longitudinal direction by the communication path portion 628.
  • each light source mounting portion 6 25 is connected to the second trunk portion 6 12 and the third trunk portion 6 13 by the corresponding branch portions 6 26 and 6 27 extending in the width direction.
  • the central second trunk section 6 12 is shared by two patterned conductors for arranging the light sources in a line.
  • Each light source mounting portion 6 15 arranged between the first trunk portion 6 11 and the second trunk portion 6 12 is a pair of terminal connecting portions 6 1 corresponding to a pair of terminals of the corresponding light source.
  • each pair of terminal connecting portions 6 19, 6 19 are connected to each other by two bridge portions 6 19 A, 6 19 A, and a light source is connected.
  • the bridge portions 6 19 A and 6 19 A are cut off, and the pair of terminal connection portions 6 19 and 6 19 in each light source mounting portion 6 15 are separated from each other.
  • each terminal connection portion 619 is formed with a hole 620 for inserting a lead wire when the light source has the lead wire.
  • each light source mounting section 6 25 arranged between the second trunk section 6 11 and the third trunk section 6 13 has a pair of terminal connections corresponding to a pair of terminals of the corresponding light source.
  • each pair of terminal connecting portions 629 and 629 is connected to each other by two bridge portions 629A and 629A.
  • each terminal connection portion 629 has a hole 630 for inserting a lead wire when the light source has the lead wire.
  • FIG. 63 b is a diagram showing an example of the secondary processing procedure of the patterned conductor 610 in FIG. 63 a.
  • the light source 635 and the resistor 636 to be attached are indicated by a dotted line, and a portion to be cut off is indicated by a diagonal line.
  • the light source 635 and the resistor 636 may have leads similar to the LED 102 and the resistor 122 shown in FIG. 16, but a chip type without a lead wire. It may be.
  • the polarity of the applied power supply voltage is indicated by a symbol.
  • the patterned conductors 6 10 are subjected to secondary processing so that each row of the light sources 6 3 5 forms a light source series-parallel body in which a plurality of series blocks each including 4 light sources 6 3 5 are connected in parallel. It will be understood that. Of course, it is also possible to subject the patterned conductors 6 10 to secondary processing so that the light sources 635 of each row are connected in series or in parallel.
  • FIG. 64 is a plan view showing an embodiment of a patterned conductor in which light sources can be arranged in four rows.
  • This patterned conductor 640 has a configuration in which two patterned conductors shown in FIG. 63A are connected in the width direction.
  • a light source in each column is applied by applying a power supply voltage. It will be understood that it is possible to supply power properly.
  • a plurality of light sources can be arranged in a plurality of rows, and by changing the cut portions in the secondary processing, the light sources can be arranged in various modes such as parallel, series, and series-parallel in each row.
  • a patterned conductor to which a light source can be coupled is provided.
  • LEDs have the advantages of low power consumption and long life, it has been proposed to use multiple LEDs as a light source to form a signal light, when LEDs are connected in series or series-parallel. If one LED breaks down and no longer conducts current, no current will flow through the LED connected in series with that LED, and the overall brightness of the signal light will drop significantly. It is known that a plurality of LEDs are connected in parallel, and a plurality of parallel-connected bodies are connected in series to form a matrix circuit (for example, FIG. 9 of Japanese Utility Model Application Laid-Open No. 4-8454). . In such a circuit, even if one LED fails and stops supplying current, current can flow through the LEDs connected in parallel with it, so that the light quantity does not decrease significantly.
  • FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram showing an LED circuit suitable for a signal lamp that can prevent a large decrease in the total light quantity even in the case of such a LED short-circuit failure.
  • the LED circuit 650 in FIG. 65 is a matrix-shaped circuit in which eight light source parallel connected bodies 652 each consisting of five LEDs 651 connected in parallel are connected in series. Is similar to the conventional one, but is characterized in that each LED 651 has an associated resistor 653 connected in series. As a result, even if one LED 651 is short-circuited, a voltage is generated across the resistor 653 connected in series with the LED 651, so that the LED 651 Both ends of the other LED 651 connected in parallel are not short-circuited, and light emission is maintained. Therefore, even if a short-circuit failure of one LED 651 occurs, it is possible to prevent a large decrease in the total light quantity.
  • the number of LEDs 651 connected in parallel and the number of parallel light sources 652 connected in series can be arbitrarily changed.
  • FIG. 66 a circuit configuration in which a plurality of light source parallel connected bodies 626 are connected in series and light sources 661 are connected in a matrix like the LED circuit 650 shown in FIG. 65
  • a separate LED circuit 660 is added and connected to independent power supplies (first and second power supplies), and the light sources 651 and 661 are almost overlapped. May be arranged to constitute the light emitting device 670.
  • a light emitting device 670 having a circuit configuration as shown in FIG. 66 uses a light source connector 670 formed using a patterned conductor according to the present invention. It can be easily formed.
  • the light emitter device 670 of FIG. 67 includes a plurality of light source connected bodies 671 arranged in the width direction, and is different. Light source connected bodies 671 connected to power supplies (first power supply and second power supply) are alternately arranged in the width direction. The LEDs included in each light source connected body 671 are connected in parallel with each other between a pair of trunk paths 672 and 673 extending in the longitudinal direction. Connected to 3. Such a connected light source can be easily formed, for example, by subjecting the patterned conductor 500 shown in FIG.
  • the light source assemblies 6 7 1 are connected by alternate jumpers — lines 6 7 6 and 6 7 6 to form two matrix-like LED circuits as shown in Figure 65, with light source connections located at both ends.
  • the body 671 is connected to the first power source or the second power source. In this manner, a highly reliable surface light emitting device suitable for a signal light can be formed by using the light source connector 670 formed using a patterned conductor (such as 500).
  • FIG. 68 shows another embodiment of a light source combination according to the invention having a plurality of light sources electrically connected to one another in a matrix and spatially arranged in a row as shown in FIG. It is a typical partial top view showing an example.
  • the mounting direction of each LED is indicated by a symbol.
  • This connected light source can also be formed by using a connection conductor structure formed by cutting off a required portion of the patterned conductor 500 shown in FIG.
  • the same parts as those in FIG. 56 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted.
  • This light source connected body 700 has a plurality of LEDs 701 as a plurality of light sources arranged in a line in the longitudinal direction, similarly to the above-described embodiment, and in this embodiment, each is connected in parallel.
  • a plurality of light source parallel connected bodies including three LEDs 701 are connected in series.
  • the number of LEDs 701 included in each parallel connection is not limited to three, and another number of LEDs 701 can be included.
  • the light source assembly 700 is also an LED 7 0 1 has first and second trunk roads 5 1 1 and 5 1 2 extending in the longitudinal direction, and each LED 701 is between these trunk roads 5 1 1 and 5 1 2 Are connected via a branch section 5 13 and a resistor 7202, but the directions of the LEDs 701 included in the adjacent parallel connection are reversed, and the first and second trunks are connected to each other.
  • the difference from the above embodiment is that a part of the road sections 511 and 5112 is cut off.
  • a current generally flows from the left side to the right side of the figure.
  • the LED 701 included in the adjacent parallel-connected body since the direction of the LED 701 included in the adjacent parallel-connected body is reversed, it is included in the upstream parallel-connected body among the adjacent parallel-connected bodies.
  • the cathode of the LED 701 is connected to the anode of the LED 701 included in the downstream parallel connection body.
  • the first and second trunk roads 5 1 1 and 5 1 2 are connected to the anode of the LED 701 included in the upstream parallel connection and the downstream parallel connection of the adjacent parallel connection.
  • the LED 701 is disconnected between the adjacent parallel connections so that the power source of the LED 701 is separated from the LED 701 and the two ends of each LED 701 are not short-circuited (reference numerals 73, 7). 04).
  • the light emitting device has a circuit structure in which a parallel connection body including a plurality of light sources 7 01 connected in parallel is connected in series, and the light sources 7 0 1 are arranged in a straight line. A line emitter can be obtained.
  • FIG. 69 is a schematic partial plan view showing another embodiment of the light source assembly having the same electric circuit structure and light source arrangement structure. Even in this light source connected body 700a, the power supply voltage is applied as indicated by the symbol, and the current generally flows from left to right in the figure.
  • the LED 701 used as a light source has the same orientation, but the power sword of the LED 701 included in the upstream parallel connection among adjacent parallel connections (or connected to it).
  • the trunk roads 5 1 2 To connect one of the trunk roads 5 1 2) to the anode of LED 701 included in the downstream parallel connection (or the other trunk road 5 1 1 connected to it).
  • FIG. 70 shows a patterning suitable for forming a light source assembly having a plurality of light sources electrically connected to each other in a matrix as shown in FIG. 65 and spatially arranged in a line.
  • FIG. 9 is a partial plan view showing another example of the conductor. 70.
  • the patterned conductor 500a in FIG. 70 is a modified example of the patterned conductor 500 shown in FIG. 56.
  • FIG. 70 the same parts as those in FIG. Description is omitted.
  • FIG. 71 is a partial plan view showing an example of a light source connected body 700b formed using the patterned conductor 500a shown in FIG.
  • the LED 701 is schematically shown so that the connection direction can be understood, but it can be either a shell type LED or a chip type LED.
  • the same parts as those in FIG. 68 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted.
  • each of the bridge portions 52 1A further connecting the bridge portion 5 21 A to the first and second trunk portions 5 11 1, 5 12
  • branch portions 5 17 and 5 18 are provided.
  • the central portion and the branch portions 5 17, 5 5 By leaving LED 18 as shown in Fig. 71, when LED 701 as the light source is assembled, the LED 7 included in the electrically upstream side of the adjacent parallel connection of light sources is installed. It is possible to communicate the power source of 01 and the anode of LED 701 contained in the downstream one.
  • the patterned conductor 500a in FIG. 70 extends in the width direction from the second trunk road 512
  • An edge bar that is provided with a plurality of pilot holes 5 26 that extend in the longitudinal direction at a distance from each other and engage with a pilot pin of a press machine to enable progressive Z positioning of the patterned conductor 500 a. It has a part 5 2 4.
  • the edge section 52 4 is connected to the second trunk section 5 12 by a plurality of connecting sections 5 25 extending in the width direction.
  • the edge cross section 5 24 is formed by bending the connecting section 5 25 to form a space for accommodating connection wires and the like between the second main road section 5 12 and the back surface. Can be used to form
  • the first and second trunk roads 511 and 512 and the edge crossing section 524 are adjacent to each other as in the above-described embodiment.
  • the anode of the LED 701 included in the upstream parallel light source unit and the power source of the LED 701 included in the downstream parallel connection unit are separated from each other. 01 Both ends of 1 are cut at appropriate places to prevent short circuit.
  • FIG. 72 a is a schematic diagram of a light emitting device formed using the light source connected body 700 b shown in FIG. 71, and FIG. 72 b is a line b—b of FIG. 72 a.
  • FIG. 72 a As shown, in the light source connected body 700b included in the light emitting device 7110 of FIG. 72a, three light source parallel connected bodies each including three LEDs 701 are connected in series. I have. Of course, the number of LEDs 701 included in each light source parallel connection body and the number of light source parallel connection bodies connected in series can be arbitrarily changed. In Fig. 72a, the cross section 524 is not shown.
  • the luminous body device 7110 includes a glass tube 711, which accommodates the light source connected body 700b, and a pair of caps 712, 713 provided at both ends of the glass tube 7111.
  • the light source connector 700b can be protected from dust and the like.
  • Each of the caps 7 12 and 7 13 is provided with a pair of conductive pins 7 14, 7 14 and 7 15 and 7 15 for electrical connection. You.
  • the pair of conductive pins 711 and 714 of the cap 712 on the left side of the figure (left side of the figure) pass through the cap 712 and are connected to a pair of diode bridges 716 provided inside the glass tube 711. Connected to input terminal.
  • the pair of conductive pins 7 14 and 7 1 4 of the cap 7 1 2 are connected to the pair of conductive pins 7 1 5 and 7 1 5 of the other cap 7 13 by the corresponding crossovers 7 1 7 and 7 1 8. Are connected to the corresponding ones.
  • the power supply voltage is applied to the other illuminant devices 7l7, 7l8 and the conductive pins 7l5, 7l5. It can be easily supplied to the luminous device 7110a.
  • One of the pair of output terminals of the diode bridge 7 16 (in this example, the high voltage side) is connected to the anode of the LED 7 0 1 of the light source parallel connected body located on the most upstream side in the light source connected body 700 b.
  • the other side (the low-voltage side in this example) is connected via the crossover 7 19 to the LED 7 0 of the electrically downstreammost light source parallel connection in the light source connection 7 00 b. 1 force connected to the sword side.
  • FIG. 73 shows a light source assembly having a plurality of light sources electrically connected to each other in a matrix as shown in FIG. 65 and spatially arranged in a line.
  • FIG. 21 is a partial plan view showing another secondary processing method of the patterned conductor 500 shown in FIG.
  • the same parts as those in FIG. 56 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted.
  • Figure 74 is patterned as shown in Figure 73.
  • FIG. 4 is a partial plan view of a light source connection body formed using a connection conductor structure formed by secondary processing of a conductor.
  • the LED 701 is schematically shown so that the connection direction can be understood.
  • the LED 701 is connected in parallel between the first main road 511 and the second main road 512. At this time, the entire bridge 5 21 A is cut off. Further, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the first and second trunk roads 5 11 1 and 5 12 are cut at a position substantially between the adjacent light source parallel connection bodies.
  • the branch sections 5 13 and 5 14 are left uncut, and these branch sections 5 13 and 5 14 are the first and second trunk sections 5 1 1 , 512 are bent at the positions indicated by arrows C and D such that the main surfaces of the communication paths 5110 are substantially perpendicular to the main surfaces.
  • Arrows A and B are shown so that the free ends 511A and 512A formed by cutting the first and second trunk roads 511 and 512 are in contact with each other. In this position, the trunk roads 5 11 and 5 12 are bent toward the center, and the free ends 5 11 A and 512 A that have come into contact with each other are connected, for example, by welding to form a conductive path (FIG. 74). ).
  • FIG. 74 conductive path
  • the conductive paths electrically connect the adjacent light source parallel connection bodies.
  • the power source of LED701 included in the upstream one (left side in the figure) and the anode of the LED701 included in the downstream one (right side in the figure) are connected to connect the light source parallel connection. They can be connected in series.
  • the LED 7 included in the electrically upstream side of the adjacent light source parallel-connected body is connected.
  • the node of 01 and the cathode of the LED 701 included in the downstream device are separated from each other, and a short circuit at both ends of each LED 701 is prevented.
  • the branch portions 5 13 and 5 14 are all However, it is also possible to cut out part or all and use a resistor having a lead wire instead.
  • Fig. 75 shows a light source assembly in which the light sources are connected in a matrix and formed using patterned conductors 61 suitable for arranging the light sources in two rows as shown in Fig. 63a.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic partial plan view showing In this figure, the same parts as those in FIG. The LEDs are indicated by symbols to indicate the connection direction.
  • the patterned conductor 6 10 is shown as having already been cut off (ie, as a connecting conductor structure).
  • Each LED 7 21 is connected between the first trunk 6 1 1 and the second trunk 6 1 2 via the corresponding branch 6 1 6 and 6 26 and the resistor 7 22 or It is connected between the trunk road section 6 12 and the third trunk road section 6 13.
  • each of the two rows of LEDs 721 a plurality of light source parallel connected bodies each formed by connecting three LEDs 721 in parallel are formed, and as shown by the symbol in the figure, adjacent parallel connected light sources are formed.
  • the LED 721 included in the connector has the opposite orientation.
  • a part of the first to third trunk roads 6 11 1 to 6 13 is cut off (reference numerals 72 3, 724, and 7 25).
  • each column of the LEDs 721 forms a matrix-like circuit, and when a voltage is applied with the polarity shown by the symbol, the current also flows from the left to the right in the circuit in this circuit as well.
  • 76 is a schematic view showing a preferred embodiment in which a surface light emitting device is formed using a plurality of light source connected bodies formed according to the present invention.
  • a green light source combination 732 including multiple green LEDs (G) and multiple blue LEDs (B) are connected.
  • the surface light emitting device 730 having a circular light emitting surface is formed by using the blue light source connected body 733 that includes the light emitting device.
  • these three light source connected bodies 731, 732, and 733 are separated from their starting points RS, GS, and BS, which are substantially equally spaced circumferentially at the periphery of the light emitting surface.
  • FIG. 77 shows an embodiment in which a square surface light emitting device 730a is formed by using the same method.
  • the shape of the surface light emitting body thus formed can be arbitrarily selected.
  • one light source connected body is used for each color. It is also possible to arrange. It is also possible to use not only three colors but also light sources (LEDs) of two colors or more than three colors. Of course, it is also possible to make the emission colors of the light sources included in all the light source connected bodies the same.
  • FIG. 78 is a schematic view showing another embodiment in which a surface light emitting device is formed using a plurality of light source connected bodies formed according to the present invention. As shown in the figure, in the surface emitting device 7400, a plurality of red, blue, and green light source connected bodies are concentrically arranged. It will be understood that such an arrangement is not limited to a circular shape, as in the above embodiment.
  • FIG. 79 is a schematic view showing a usage example of the light source assembly (for example, the light source assembly 101 shown in FIG. 36) according to the present invention.
  • the details of the connection conductor structure 104 are not shown. Since the light source assembly according to the present invention has flexibility, it can be used by being twisted as shown in the figure. Thus, the light sources 102 are arranged in a substantially spiral shape, and it is possible to illuminate the surrounding space substantially uniformly.
  • LEDs have a much longer life than incandescent lamps, etc. .
  • Such an in-vehicle lamp for example, when provided at a corner of a vehicle body, must have a three-dimensional structure to match the overall shape of the vehicle body. Therefore, the LED as a light source must be three-dimensionally arranged accordingly.
  • Such an in-vehicle lamp in which LEDs are arranged three-dimensionally is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H11-121807.
  • the on-vehicle lamp disclosed in this publication includes a plurality of LEDs, a base having a plurality of steps having a step shape, a holder fitted and supported by the plurality of steps, and holding a corresponding LED.
  • a light emitting unit having a light emitting unit, which is housed in a lamp chamber defined by the lens and the lamp pod.
  • An electrical cord is sandwiched between the LED and the holder, thereby making an electrical connection for the LED.
  • Each LED lead is provided with a slit with a width roughly corresponding to the diameter of the core so that the electric cord can be peeled off and the core of the electric cord exposed when the LED is mounted on the holder. Have been. Further, each holder is provided with an electric cord passage for temporarily holding an electric cord before mounting the LED.
  • a light-emitting unit which is a main component of the lamp, can be formed.
  • utilizing the fact that the holder is separate from the base first hold the electric cord and LED in the holder to form a light source assembly, and then attach the holder to the base. By doing so, a light emitting unit can be formed.
  • FIG. 80 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a light-emitting device for a vehicle-mounted lamp using a light source connected body according to the present invention in order to solve the above-described problem.
  • the luminous device 800 has a plurality of (in this example, nine) LEDs 802 as light sources, and has a stepped shape to arrange these LEDs 802 three-dimensionally.
  • a base (holding body) 830 having a plurality of steps.
  • Such a luminous body device 800 is housed in a lamp chamber defined by a housing (not shown) constituting a part of a vehicle body and a lens (not shown) attached to the housing, as in the prior art.
  • each LED 802 has a plate-shaped anode terminal 803a and a force source terminal 803b.
  • three LEDs 802 are connected in parallel to form one light source combination 811, and three such light source combinations 8001 are connected in series with three jumper members 815. They are connected to form a so-called matrix circuit (or parallel-series circuit).
  • the adjacent light source connected bodies 801 are connected by one jumper member 815 at their ends.
  • the connection may be made by two or more jumper members 8 15, and the number is arbitrary.
  • the jumper member 815 is formed by bending a plate-shaped conductor at an appropriate position, but a covered conductor or the like may be used.
  • the light source connector 801 has a connecting conductor structure 804 for electrically connecting a plurality of (three in this example) LEDs 802.
  • Connection conductor structure 804 has a pair of conductors (trunk portions) 811 and 812 extending substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction, and has an anode terminal 80.3a and a cathode terminal 800 of each LED802.
  • 3b is attached to the corresponding trunk roads 811 and 812, preferably by welding such as laser welding. That is, in this embodiment, it can be said that the pair of trunk roads 811 and 812 includes the light source mounting portion (or the light source terminal connection portion).
  • the width of the trunk section 8 1 2 to which the power sword terminal 8 0 3 b of each LED 802 is attached is wider than the trunk path 8 1 1 to which the anode terminal 8 0 3 a is attached, It is easier to conduct heat.
  • the LED chip (not shown) sealed in the LED package is directly mounted on the plate-shaped cathode terminal 803b, and the anode terminal 803a and Are connected by a lead wire, etc., and most of the heat generated from the LED chip is released to the outside via the force source terminal 803b.
  • the connected trunk section 812 By making the connected trunk section 812 wider, heat from the LED 802 can be more efficiently dissipated. Further, by narrowing the width of the main road section 8111 to which the anode terminal 803a that contributes little to heat radiation is connected, the width of the light source connected body 801 can be reduced.
  • FIG. 83 is a partial plan view of one embodiment of a patterned conductor suitable for forming such a light source connected body 81 having the LEDs 802 connected in parallel.
  • the patterned conductor 8 20 has a flat tape shape, and a pair of conductors (trunk portions) 8 11 and 8 1 2 extending in the longitudinal direction.
  • trunk section 8 1 2 to which the power source terminal 8 0 3 b of the LED 8 0 2 is attached is wider than the trunk section 8 11 1 to which the anode terminal 8 0 3 a is attached.
  • pilot holes 818 that can be used for conveyance / positioning by a progressive press machine (not shown) or the like are provided at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction in each trunk road section 811 and 812. It is provided.
  • the pair of trunk roads 8 1 1 and 8 1 2 After mounting the LED 802 between the pair of trunk roads 8 11 1 and 8 1 2 of the integrated conductor 8 20 by laser welding, for example, the pair of trunk roads 8 1 1 and 8 1 2 By cutting off the branch portions 8 13 connecting between them and further cutting the patterned conductors 8 20 to an appropriate length, the light source assembly 8 having an arbitrary number of parallel-connected LEDs 8 02 0 1 can be formed. Before mounting the LED 802, the pair of trunk roads 811 and 812 are mechanically connected by the branch road 813, so that the patterned conductor 8200 can be easily handled.
  • this allows the LED 802 to be attached to the patterned conductor 820 as described above, the branch 813 of the patterned conductor 820 to be cut off, and the trunk 811, 81
  • the work such as cutting can be automated on one production line including a progressive press machine to improve production efficiency.
  • the light source connected body 811 as shown in FIG. 81, formed in this manner is bent at a predetermined position and attached to the base 83, so that the light-emitting body for a vehicle-mounted lamp as shown in FIG. A device 800 can be formed.
  • a boss (not shown) is formed at a predetermined position of the base 830, and the light source is connected to these bosses. This can be achieved by fitting pilot holes 818 provided in trunk sections 811 and 812 of body 801 or by using an adhesive.
  • each LED 802 be placed at an appropriate position on the base 830.
  • FIG. 84a is a partial plan view illustrating another embodiment of a patterned conductor that enables such adjustment of the LED position.
  • FIG. 84b is a view similar to FIG. 84a, in which a portion to be cut off in a use state is illustrated by hatching.
  • the same parts as those in FIG. 83 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted.
  • a stretchable portion 8 21 is formed at a predetermined position in the longitudinal direction of each of the pair of trunk roads 8 11, 8 12, The LED position can be adjusted by the action of these extendable portions 8 2 1.
  • the extendable portion 8221 is formed between adjacent LED mounting locations.
  • each telescoping portion 821 includes a pair of generally U-shaped narrow connecting channels 822 formed in each trunk portion 811, 812, The pair of straight portions facing each other of the U-shaped connection path 8 2 2 extend in the width direction of the main road sections 8 1 1 and 8 1 2, and the bent bottom portion is located on the center axis side of the patterned conductor 82 0 ′ are doing.
  • the extendable portion 8 2 1 is It has a ridge portion 823 extending in the longitudinal direction at the widthwise ends of the trunk road portions 811 and 812 so as to connect both ends of the U-shaped connection passage 8222, whereby Normally, the deformation of the extensible portion 8 21 is prevented, and the bridge portion 8 23 functions as a deformation preventing portion.
  • the desired extensible portion 8221 can be deformed by cutting off the bridge portion 823.
  • the patterned conductors 82 0 ′ or the light source connected body formed using the same are relatively rigid, so that they can be easily handled. is there.
  • the stretchable portion 821 and the bridge portion 823 of the patterned conductor 820 ' can be formed easily and inexpensively preferably by stamping by press working.
  • FIGS. 85A and 85B are partial plan views showing an example of a deformed state of the light source connected body 8 0 1 ′ formed using the patterned conductor 8 20 ′ shown in FIG. .
  • the arrangement direction of the LEDs 802 (or the longitudinal axis of the light source assembly 801 ′) is changed by the deformation of the stretchable portions 8 2 1 at two places in the longitudinal direction. It is bent in a plane parallel to the main surface of 0 '(or the connecting conductor structure 8004), and as a result, the arrangement direction of the LEDs 802 is offset in the width direction (lateral direction) at the right and left ends of the figure. ing.
  • FIG. 85a the arrangement direction of the LEDs 802 (or the longitudinal axis of the light source assembly 801 ′) is changed by the deformation of the stretchable portions 8 2 1 at two places in the longitudinal direction. It is bent in a plane parallel to the main surface of 0 '(or the connecting conductor structure 8004), and as a result, the arrangement
  • the extendable portion 8 21 is deformed such that the distance between adjacent LEDs 8 0 2 extends in the longitudinal direction of the light source assembly 8 0 1 ′.
  • the arrangement position of the LED 8 0 2 is adjusted so that the LED 8 2 Not only can you place it in the right place, but also various LED arrangements Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the vehicle-mounted lamp can be greatly improved.
  • the same light source connector 8 0 1 ′ can be used for different bases as long as the difference can be absorbed by the deformation of the extendable portion 8 2 1 of the light source connector 8 0 1 ′. is there.
  • FIG. 86a is a partial plan view showing still another embodiment of a patterned conductor having a stretchable portion
  • FIG. 86b shows an example of a deformed state of a light source assembly formed using the same. It is a partial plan view.
  • the same parts as those shown in FIGS. 84a to 85b are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted.
  • the portion to be resected during use is indicated by hatching.
  • each extensible portion 821a extends in the width direction of the corresponding trunk road 811, 812. Including a pair of generally S-shaped narrow connection paths 8 22 a.
  • the patterned conductor 820a also has a stretchable portion 823a that functions as a deformation prevention portion that selectively enables deformation of the stretchable portion 821a. It is provided at the position corresponding to the nobu 821a at the widthwise outer end of each of the trunk roads 811 and 812.
  • the extendable portion 821a and the prism portion (deformation preventing portion) 823a of this embodiment can also be preferably formed by punching.
  • FIG. 87a is a partial plan view showing still another embodiment of the patterned conductor having a stretchable portion
  • FIG. 87b is a front view of FIG. 87a
  • Fig. 87c shows an example of the deformed state of the connected light source using this patterned conductor. It is a partial plan view.
  • the same parts as those shown in FIGS. 84a to 85b are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
  • the stretchable portion 821b of the patterned conductor 8200b has a bellows shape or a waveform, and a plurality of extending portions extending in the width direction of the patterned conductor 8200b.
  • Such a stretchable portion 8 21 b can be easily formed by press working. Even in the light source connected body 81b using such a patterned conductor 820b, by deforming the expandable / contractible portion 821b, for example, as shown in FIG.
  • the arrangement position of the LEDs 802 can be adjusted or changed, for example, by bending the arrangement direction in a plane parallel to the main surface of the patterned conductor 820b. Although not shown, it is of course possible to make a modification so as to adjust the distance between the adjacent LEDs 802.
  • FIG. 88 a is a partial plan view showing still another embodiment of a patterned conductor having a stretchable portion
  • FIG. 88 b is a front view of FIG. 88 a
  • FIG. FIG. 4 is a partial plan view showing an example of a deformed state of a light source assembly using a conductor.
  • the same parts as those shown in FIGS. 84a to 85b are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted.
  • the extendable portion 821c comprises a curved portion that rises in the thickness direction of the patterned conductor 820c. Each curved portion 821c has a narrow central portion in the longitudinal direction for easy deformation.
  • This embodiment can also be said to correspond to the case of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 87a to 87c with one fold.
  • the LED Adjusting the arrangement position of the LED 802, such as bending the array direction of 2 in a plane parallel to the main surface of the patterned conductor Can be adjusted or changed.
  • FIG. 89a is a partial plan view illustrating another embodiment of a patterned conductor suitable for forming a light source assembly including a plurality of light sources connected in parallel according to the present invention.
  • the patterned conductor 850 also has a substantially flat tape shape, and a pair of conductors (trunk portions) 851, 852 which are separated from each other and extend in the longitudinal direction. It has a plurality of branch roads 853 connecting these trunk roads 851, 852. In this example, it is intended to attach the LED anode terminal to the upper trunk road 851, and to attach the LED cathode terminal to the lower trunk road 852, as shown in Fig. 81.
  • the area of the trunk road 852 is larger than that of the trunk road 851.
  • a plurality of pilot holes 858 are provided at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction that can be used for transport positioning by a progressive press machine (not shown) or the like. ing.
  • the air gap 855 between the pair of trunk roads 851, 852 is bent not in a straight line but in a square wave shape.
  • irregularities are alternately formed in the longitudinal direction on the sides of the trunk roads 851, 852 that are close to each other, and the concaves formed on one of the trunk roads 851, 852 are on the other side.
  • the formed convex portions are arranged so as to enter and aligned in the longitudinal direction. With such a structure, it is possible to shift the pair of trunk roads 851, 852 with respect to each other, and to adjust the interval not only in the width direction but also in the longitudinal direction.
  • the patterned conductor 850 as described above can be easily formed by pressing a flat conductor.
  • FIG. 89b is a plan view of a light source assembly formed using the patterned conductor 850 of FIG. 89a.
  • the LED 861 is attached to the patterned conductor 850 by, for example, laser welding
  • the light source connected body 860 is formed by changing the interval between the pair of trunk roads 851, 852 in the width direction and the longitudinal direction. It is formed by cutting the branch portion 853.
  • the gap between the pair of trunk roads 851, 852 of the patterned conductor 850 is non-linear, and the portion extending in the width direction is formed.
  • the mounting position of the LED 861 can be largely adjusted not only in the longitudinal direction but also in the lateral direction (width direction).
  • This makes it possible to form a light source coupler 860 having various LED arrangement patterns using the same patterned conductor 850, for example, to form a vehicle-mounted lamp using the light source coupler 860. In this case, it is possible to cope with the case where a different LED array pattern is required depending on the vehicle type, and it is possible to obtain a great economic advantage by sharing parts.
  • a predetermined circuit pattern capable of commonly using various light source connected bodies having different light source connection patterns can be manufactured on the same manufacturing line from a patterned conductor formed in advance. This has a significant effect on improving productivity and reducing manufacturing costs.
  • a printed circuit board which eliminates the need for solder used to connect to the printed circuit board.Therefore, there is no need to worry about environmental pollution. There is no fear.
  • the connecting members 115 and 165 are formed by an insulator model, but the upper part and the lower part are formed. It is also possible to form the molded parts separately by bonding them together with an adhesive or the like with the patterned conductors 120 and 170 sandwiched therebetween.
  • the LED is used as the light source, the present invention can be applied to other light sources (for example, a base lamp).

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Led Device Packages (AREA)
  • Fastening Of Light Sources Or Lamp Holders (AREA)
  • Arrangement Of Elements, Cooling, Sealing, Or The Like Of Lighting Devices (AREA)

Abstract

To provide a light source coupler manufactured at a low cost even in the case of a small quantity production without using a printed wiring board, this light source coupler is characterized by comprising a plurality of light sources and a connection conductor structure extending in the direction of the light source array to couple these light sources, and in that the connection conductor structure is formed by cutting a required part of a generally flat conductor patterned as predetermined. Thus, changing the cut part of the patterned conductor makes it possible to form a light source coupler having any of various light source connection patterns in one manufacture line by using the same patterned conductor. Therefore, the light source coupler is manufactured at a low cost efficiently even in the case of a small quantity production.

Description

明 細 書 光源連結体、 発光体装置、 パターン化導体及び光源連結体の製造方法 技術分野  Description Light source connector, light emitting device, patterned conductor, and method for manufacturing light source connector
本発明は、 複数の光源を電気的に接続してなる光源連結体、 そのよう な光源連結体を用いた発光体装置、 光源連結体を形成するためのパター ン化導体及び光源連結体の製造方法に関する。 背景技術  The present invention relates to a light source connected body formed by electrically connecting a plurality of light sources, a light emitting device using such a light source connected body, a patterned conductor for forming the light source connected body, and a manufacturing of the light source connected body. About the method. Background art
多数の光源を保持体の表面に列設した構成の発光体装置が、 単なる照 明の他に広告 ·装飾 ·標示などの用途で使用されている。 この種の発光 体装置を形成するため、例えばリ―ド線を備えた砲弹型の L E D光源と、 この光源のリ一ド線が差し込まれるスル一ホール、 並びに光源に給電す るための導体パターンが形成されたプリント基板とを用い、 プリント基 板の導体パターンと光源のリ一ド線との接続をフ口一式はんだ付けによ り行うことが考えられる。  Light-emitting devices having a configuration in which a number of light sources are arranged in a row on the surface of a holder are used not only for lighting but also for advertising, decoration, and signage. To form this type of illuminator device, for example, a gun-shaped LED light source with a lead wire, a through hole into which the lead wire of this light source is inserted, and a conductor for supplying power to the light source It is conceivable to use a printed circuit board on which a pattern is formed, and to connect the conductor pattern of the printed circuit board and the lead wire of the light source by one-piece soldering.
ところが、このように光源の保持体にプリント基板を用いる構成では、 大量に製造する場合にはコスト上の利点が得られるものの、 光源の接続 パターンや配置などが異なる多品種のものを少量製造する場合には、 か えってコストが嵩む不都合が生じる。 さらに、 はんだ付けの際に溶融は んだとの接触によりプリント基板が高温に曝されるため、 熱に弱い L E Dには望ましくない。 また通常はんだは鉛を含んでおり、 その使用には 環 上の対策が必要である。無鉛はんだを使用することも考えられるが、 コスト高であるだけでなく融点が通常のはんだより高いため、 熱による L E Dへの影響が一層問題となる。 さらにプリント基板では、 曲面上に 光源を配置する場合には対処することが困難である。 可撓な導線を介し て光源を接続する構成とすると、 結線に手間を要することからコストが 嵩む不都合が生じる。 またプリント基板は配線が支持板と一体になつて いるため、 不用になったときのリサイクルが極めて困難であるという問 題がある。 However, in such a configuration using a printed circuit board as the holder for the light source, although there is a cost advantage in the case of mass production, a small number of various types with different light source connection patterns and arrangements are manufactured. In such a case, there is a disadvantage that the cost increases. Furthermore, printed circuit boards are exposed to high temperatures due to contact with molten solder during soldering, which is not desirable for heat-sensitive LEDs. In addition, solder usually contains lead, and its use requires environmental measures. Although the use of lead-free solder is conceivable, it is not only expensive but also has a higher melting point than ordinary solder, so the effect of heat on LEDs becomes even more problematic. Furthermore, on the printed circuit board, It is difficult to deal with the case where a light source is arranged. If the light source is connected via a flexible conductive wire, the connection is troublesome, resulting in a disadvantage that the cost increases. In addition, the printed circuit board has a problem that it is extremely difficult to recycle it when it is no longer needed because the wiring is integrated with the support plate.
プリント基板及び半田を用いない発光モジュールとして、 特開平 7— 1 0 6 6 3 4号公報には、 複数の L E Dをァノードバスバーとカソード バスバーとの間に機械的嚙み合わせ接続によって接続したものが開示さ れている。 また、 特開平 8— 3 1 6 5 3 1号公報には、 複数のバスバー 対と、各バスバ一対上に取り付けられた複数の L E Dと、瞵接するバス · バー対の間を電気的及び機械的に結合する可撓性継手とを備え、 三次元 成形を容易にした発光モジュールが開示されている。 しかしながら、 こ れら公報に開示された発明では、 様々な光源接続パターンが容易に選択 可能であり且つ高い生産効率で製造可能な光源連結体及びその製造方法 については何ら開示がない。 発明の開示  As a light emitting module that does not use a printed circuit board and solder, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 7-106634 describes that a plurality of LEDs are connected between an anode bus bar and a cathode bus bar by mechanical coupling connection. Is disclosed. Also, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H08-3161631 discloses that a plurality of bus bar pairs, a plurality of LEDs mounted on each bus bar pair, and an electrical and mechanical connection between adjacent bus bar pairs. There is disclosed a light emitting module that includes a flexible joint coupled to the light emitting device and facilitates three-dimensional molding. However, in the inventions disclosed in these publications, there is no disclosure of a light source connection body in which various light source connection patterns can be easily selected and which can be manufactured with high production efficiency, and a method of manufacturing the same. Disclosure of the invention
本発明は上記したような従来技術の問題を解決するべくなされたもの であり、 本発明の主な目的は、 プリント基板を用いることなしに効率よ く低コストに製造可能な、 複数の光源を有する光源連結体及びその製造 方法を提供することである。  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems of the prior art, and a main object of the present invention is to provide a plurality of light sources that can be manufactured efficiently and at low cost without using a printed circuit board. An object of the present invention is to provide a light source connected body having the same and a method for manufacturing the same.
本発明の第 2の目的は、 はんだの使用をなくすまたは使用量を大幅に 低減することができる光源連結体及びその製造方法を提供することであ る。  A second object of the present invention is to provide a light source assembly capable of eliminating or greatly reducing the amount of solder used, and a method of manufacturing the same.
本発明の第 3の目的は、 光源の多様な配置にも容易に対応することが 可能な光源連結体及びその製造方法を提供することである。 本発明の第 4の目的は、 光源としてチップ型 L E Dを用いた上記した ような光源連結体及びその製造方法を提供することである。 A third object of the present invention is to provide a light source assembly capable of easily coping with various arrangements of light sources, and a method for manufacturing the same. A fourth object of the present invention is to provide a light source assembly as described above using a chip type LED as a light source, and a method for manufacturing the same.
本発明の第 5の目的は、 上記したような光源連結体を用いた発光体装 置を提供することである。  A fifth object of the present invention is to provide a light-emitting device using the above-described light source connector.
本発明の第 6の目的は、 上記したような光源連結体を形成するのに用 いることのできるテープ状導体を提供することである。  A sixth object of the present invention is to provide a tape-shaped conductor that can be used to form the above-described light source connector.
上記のような目的を達成するために、 本願発明の一側面によると、 複 数の光源を電気的に接続してなる光源連結体であって、 この光源連結体 は、 複数の前記光源を連結するべく前記光源の配列方向に延在する接続 導体構造を含み、 接続導体構造は、 所定のパターンが形成された概ね平 板なパターン化導体の所要の部分を切除することで形成されたことを特 徵とする光源連結体が提供される。 パターン化導体は導電性平板材料の プレス加工によって形成することができる。 これによると、 プリント基 板を用いることなく光源連結体を形成することができるため、 プリント 基板との接続に用いられる半田を不要とすることができ、 環境汚染を心 配する必要がないだけでなく、 半田使用時の熱による L E Dの損傷の恐 れもなくなる。 またパターン化導体の切除部分を変えることで、 同じパ ターン化導体を用いて一つの製造ラインで、 様々な光源接続パターンを 有する接続導体構造を形成することができるので、 多様な光源接続バタ ーンの光源連結体を各々少量生産する場合でも効率良く低コストに製造 することができる。 また、 パターン化導体を導電性平板材料から形成す る際に適度な可撓性をもたせることで光源連結体を所要の形状に適宜に 変形可能とすることができ、 光源の多様な配置にも容易に対応すること ができる。 更にプリント基板を用いないため不用になったときのリサイ クルも容易である。 また、 パターン化導体が長寸のテープ状をなしてい ると、 製造ラインで搬送しつつ光源の取り付け、 プレス加工などの処理 をして光源連結体を連続的に生産できるため好適である。 パターン化導 体を適度な長さに切断することで所望の長さの光源連結体を得ることも 容易に可能である。 According to one aspect of the present invention, there is provided a light source assembly in which a plurality of light sources are electrically connected, wherein the light source assembly is configured to connect a plurality of the light sources. A connection conductor structure extending in a direction in which the light sources are arranged, wherein the connection conductor structure is formed by cutting off a required portion of a substantially flat patterned conductor on which a predetermined pattern is formed. A special light source assembly is provided. The patterned conductor can be formed by pressing a conductive flat plate material. According to this, the light source connector can be formed without using a printed circuit board, so that solder used for connection with the printed circuit board can be eliminated, and there is no need to pay attention to environmental pollution. No risk of LED damage due to heat during soldering. Also, by changing the cut portion of the patterned conductor, it is possible to form a connection conductor structure having various light source connection patterns on a single production line using the same patterned conductor. Even when a small number of light source connected bodies are manufactured in small quantities, they can be manufactured efficiently and at low cost. In addition, when the patterned conductor is formed from a conductive flat plate material, it can be appropriately deformed into a required shape by giving appropriate flexibility, and it can be used in various arrangements of light sources. It can be easily handled. Furthermore, since no printed circuit board is used, recycling when it becomes unnecessary is easy. In addition, if the patterned conductor is in the form of a long tape, it can be transported on a production line while mounting a light source, pressing, etc. Therefore, the light source connected body can be continuously produced, which is preferable. By cutting the patterned conductor into an appropriate length, it is possible to easily obtain a light source connected body having a desired length.
本発明の一実施例に基づくと、 複数の光源がチップ型 LEDを含み、 このチップ型 L EDを装着するためのソケットがィンサートモールドに より接続導体構造に取り付けられる。 典型的には、 ソケットは上部に開 口を有する空洞を画定するように底壁及び側壁を有しており、 チップ型 L EDはこの空洞内に収容される。 このようにすることにより、 光源と してリード線を有さないチップ型 L EDを用いた場合にも、 チップ型 L EDを接続導体構造に容易に取り付けて光源連結体を得ることが可能と なる。  According to one embodiment of the present invention, the plurality of light sources include a chip LED, and a socket for mounting the chip LED is attached to the connection conductor structure by insert molding. Typically, the socket has a bottom wall and side walls to define a cavity having an opening at the top, and the chip-type LED is housed in this cavity. In this way, even when a chip-type LED having no lead wire is used as the light source, it is possible to easily attach the chip-type LED to the connection conductor structure and obtain a light source connected body. Become.
好ましくは、 ソケットの底壁に穴が設けられており、 そこからソケッ 卜に装着された L E Dを押して前記ソケットから前記 L E Dを取り外す ことができるようになつている。 このようにすることにより、 故障した LEDを速やかに正常な L EDと交換することができる。 また、 接続導 体構造の一部が、 ソケットの空洞内において露出し、 チップ型 L EDを ソケットに装着した状態でチップ型 L EDの電気端子と接触するように なっていることが L EDのソケットへの速やかな装着を実現する上から 好ましい。 更に好ましくは、 接続導体構造のソケットの空洞内において 露出する部分が LEDの電気端子と接触するための突起を有している。 そのようにすることにより、 L EDと接続導体との電気的接続をより一 層確実にすることができる。 また、 接続導体構造の一部を折り曲げて、 ソケットに装着された LEDと係合させ、 LEDがソケットから脱落す るのを防止するようにすると、 光源連結体を逆さに取り付けたりした場 合にも不所望に L EDが脱落することがないため好適である。  Preferably, a hole is provided in the bottom wall of the socket, from which the LED mounted on the socket can be pushed to remove the LED from the socket. In this way, a failed LED can be quickly replaced with a working LED. Also, a part of the connection conductor structure is exposed in the cavity of the socket, and the chip-type LED comes into contact with the electrical terminals of the chip-type LED with the chip-type LED mounted on the socket. It is preferable from the viewpoint of realizing quick mounting to the socket. More preferably, a portion of the connection conductor structure exposed in the cavity of the socket has a projection for contacting an electric terminal of the LED. By doing so, the electrical connection between the LED and the connection conductor can be further ensured. Also, if a part of the connection conductor structure is bent so as to engage with the LED mounted on the socket and prevent the LED from dropping out of the socket, if the light source connector is mounted upside down, Is also preferable because the LED does not drop off undesirably.
本発明の別の実施例では、 チップ型 L EDが側面に光放出部を有する サイドビュ一タイプであり、 ソケッ 卜の側壁の少なくとも一部が L E D の光放出部からの光を通過させるための開口を有している。 このように することにより、 サイドビュータイプの L E Dを使用することも可能と なる。 In another embodiment of the present invention, a chip type LED has a light emitting portion on a side surface. It is of a side view type, and at least a part of the side wall of the socket has an opening for passing light from the light emitting portion of the LED. This makes it possible to use side-view type LEDs.
本発明の更に別の実施例に基づくと、 複数の光源がリード線を有する 光源を含んでおり、 接続導体構造はこれら光源のリ一ド線に対応する穴 を有する。 接続導体構造の穴を画定する部分が、 この穴の内部に向かつ て突出する突出部を含んでいることが好ましい。 典型的には、 光源のリ ード線が、 接続導体構造の穴に差し込まれ、 それによつて光源と接続導 体構造との電気的ノ機械的接続をなすことができる。 更に、 接続導体構 造の穴に近接した接続導体構造の部分によって光源のリード線がかしめ られ、 それによつて光源の保持がなされると、 不所望な光源の脱落を防 ぐ点から一層好ましい。 接続導体構造の穴に光源のリード線を直接差し 込む代わりに、接続導体構造の穴にソケットピンのピン部が差し込まれ、 ソケットピンのソケット部にリード線が差し込まれるようにしてもよい。 本発明の更に別の実施例に基づくと、 複数の光源の各々が概ね互いに 平行に延在する一対のリード線を備え、 これら複数の光源はリード線に 概ね直交する向きに配列されており、 接続導体構造はその主面がリード 線に概ね沿って延在するように配置され、 これらリード線に組み付けら れて光源を連結する。 このような場合、 パターン化導体が長寸のテ一プ 状をなし且つ光源のリード線に対する複数の接続部を有し、 これら接続 部が、 ラジアルテーピングにより保持された複数の光源の配列に対応し て並んで配置されていることが好ましい。 これによると、 光源とパター ン化導体とを組み付ける際に、 複数の光源がラジアルテーピングにより 一体に保持された状態で作業を行うことができるため、 作業性を高める ことができる。 光源をパターン化導体に取り付けた後に、 リード線を所 定箇所で切断するとともに、 パターン化導体の所要箇所を切除して接続 導体構造を形成し、 光源連結体を得ることができる。 また、 接続導体構 造の長手方向に対して垂直な平面で切ったときに現れる断面形状が屈曲 されているとよい。 それにより、 接続導体構造が絶縁材料で被覆される ことなく露出されたままの簡易な構成でも、 接続導体構造とリード線と の間の不所望な接触を防止し、 回路内の意図しない短絡を避けることが できる。 接続導体構造を絶縁材料で被覆せず露出させることで、 接続導 体構造による放熱効果が高まり、 光源を高密度に配置した場合にも好適 に対応することができるという利点も得られる。 さらに長手方向の湾曲 が規制されるため、 保持体に取り付ける際の作業性を高めることができ る。 According to yet another embodiment of the present invention, the plurality of light sources includes a light source having leads, and the connecting conductor structure has holes corresponding to the leads of the light sources. Preferably, the portion defining the hole of the connecting conductor structure includes a protrusion protruding toward the inside of the hole. Typically, the lead wire of the light source is inserted into a hole in the connecting conductor structure, thereby making an electrical-mechanical connection between the light source and the connecting conductor structure. Further, it is more preferable that the lead wire of the light source be caulked by the portion of the connection conductor structure close to the hole of the connection conductor structure, thereby holding the light source from the viewpoint of preventing undesired light source from falling off. Instead of directly inserting the lead wire of the light source into the hole of the connection conductor structure, the pin portion of the socket pin may be inserted into the hole of the connection conductor structure, and the lead wire may be inserted into the socket portion of the socket pin. According to yet another embodiment of the present invention, each of the plurality of light sources includes a pair of leads extending substantially parallel to each other, the plurality of light sources being arranged in a direction substantially orthogonal to the leads. The connecting conductor structure is arranged so that its main surface extends substantially along the leads, and is assembled to these leads to connect the light source. In such a case, the patterned conductor has a long tape shape and has a plurality of connection portions to the lead wires of the light source, and these connection portions correspond to the arrangement of the plurality of light sources held by radial taping. It is preferable that they are arranged side by side. According to this, when assembling the light source and the patterned conductor, the work can be performed in a state where a plurality of light sources are integrally held by radial taping, so that workability can be improved. After attaching the light source to the patterned conductor, place the leads In addition to cutting at a fixed location, a required portion of the patterned conductor is cut off to form a connection conductor structure, thereby obtaining a light source assembly. Further, it is preferable that the cross-sectional shape appearing when cut on a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the connection conductor structure is bent. As a result, even in a simple configuration in which the connection conductor structure is exposed without being covered with the insulating material, it is possible to prevent undesired contact between the connection conductor structure and the lead wire and to prevent an unintended short circuit in the circuit. Can be avoided. By exposing the connecting conductor structure without covering it with an insulating material, the heat dissipation effect of the connecting conductor structure is enhanced, and the advantage that the light source can be suitably accommodated even when the light sources are arranged at high density is obtained. Further, since the bending in the longitudinal direction is restricted, the workability when mounting to the holder can be improved.
パターン化導体は好適には、 長寸のテープ状をなし、 且つ、 光源との 電気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複数の光源取り付け部と、 こ れら光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、 連絡路部及び光 源取り付け部から幅方向に離間されて長手方向に延在する少なくとも一 つの幹路部と、 幹路部及び連絡路部を幅方向に連絡する複数の枝路部と を有する。 このようにすることにより、 枝路部、 連絡路部、 または幹路 部の所定部分を切除することで光源を多様な接続パターンで接続するこ とのできる接続導体構造を形成することができる。 また、 このようにし て形成された接続導体構造を有する光源連結体においては、 幹路部を光 源を電源に接続するのに用いることができ、 その場合、 別途配線を設け る必要がないという利点も得られる。 接続導体構造が光源を直列接続す るように、 パターン化導体の幹路部の一部が切除されている場合、 幹路 部の切除されなかった部分が対応する枝路部を介して対応する光源取付 部に接続されたままとなつているようにすると、 幹路部の切除されなか つた部分が光源から生成される熱を放散する放熱部として働くため、 光 源の周囲温度が過度に上昇するのを防止することができる。 The patterned conductor is preferably in the form of a long tape, and has a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with a light source; A communication path portion to be connected; at least one trunk path portion extending in the longitudinal direction separated from the connection path portion and the light source mounting portion in the width direction; And a branch portion. By doing so, it is possible to form a connection conductor structure capable of connecting the light source in various connection patterns by cutting off a predetermined portion of the branch, the communication, or the trunk. Further, in the light source connected body having the connection conductor structure formed in this way, the trunk path can be used to connect the light source to the power source, and in that case, it is not necessary to provide a separate wiring. Benefits are also obtained. When a part of the trunk of the patterned conductor is cut off so that the connecting conductor structure connects the light sources in series, the uncut part of the trunk corresponds to the corresponding branch through the corresponding branch. If it is left connected to the light source mounting part, the unremoved part of the trunk will act as a heat radiating part to dissipate the heat generated from the light source. Excessive rise in ambient temperature of the source can be prevented.
このようなパターン化導体を用いて形成された光源連結体において、 少なくとも一対の隣接する光源の間に抵抗が接続され、 この抵抗が間に 接続された一対の隣接する光源間において連絡路部が分断されているよ うにすることができる。 このようにすることにより、 例えば光源に過電 圧が加わるのを防止するための抵抗を光源に接続することが可能となる < 更に好ましくは、 光源連結体は、 接続導体構造の幅方向に延在して連 絡路部と幹路部とを一体に保持する連結部材を更に有する。 このように することにより、 パターン化導体の所要部分を切除して接続導体構造を 形成する際に、 接続導体構造の各部がばらばらになるのを防止すること ができるとともに、 形成された接続導体構造の機械的強度を高めること ができる。 このような連結部材は好ましくはィンサートモ一ルドにより 形成することができる。 連結部材がィンサートモ一ルドにより形成され る場合、 幹路部に幅方向凹部または貫通孔が設けられ、 連結部材がこれ ら幅方向凹部または貫通孔を通って延在するようにすると、 連結部材と 幹路部との係合を強固にすることができ好適である。 更に、 連結部材の 連絡路部と整合する位置に、 連絡路部を露出する穴が設けられており、 この穴を通じて露出された連絡路部を分断することが可能となっている ことが好ましい。 そのようにすることにより、 連結部材を形成した後に 連絡路部を分断して所望の光源接続パターンを有する接続導体構造を形 成することが可能となる。 連結部材の穴によって露出される連絡路部の 部分は、 切除が容易なように、 連絡路部の他の部分より小さい幅を有し ていてもよい。 また、 連結部材は 1または複数の絶縁性シートを含んで いても良い。 絶縁性シートは複数のものが所定の場所において接続導体 構造の幅方向に延在していても、 或いは、 接続導体構造の概ね全長に渡 つて延在する一つの絶縁シ一トであってもよい。 そのように絶縁性シ一 トを使用することにより、 連結部材がィンサートモ一ルドによって形成 される場合と比べて製造される光源連結体を小型化 (薄型化) できる。 絶縁性シ一トが接続導体構造の光源取付面に取り付けられていると、 電 源電圧が印加される部分が、 比較的作業者が触りやすい光源取付面側に 露出されないため安全性を向上することができるとともに、 絶縁性シー トが光源からの光を反射することにより照明効率を上げることができる, 光源連結体がィンサートモ一ルドによる連結部材を有さない場合また は接続導体構造に光源を取り付けた後などにおいてそのような連結部材 を除去した場合、幹路部の主面が連絡路部の主面と概ね直交するように、 幹路部と連絡路部とを結ぶ枝路部を折り曲げてもよい。 このようにする ことにより、 幹路部を保持体に形成された整合する凹部または穴に挿入 することによって、 光源連結体を容易に保持体に取り付けることができ る。 In the light source connected body formed using such a patterned conductor, a resistor is connected between at least a pair of adjacent light sources, and a communication path portion is formed between a pair of adjacent light sources connected between the resistors. It can be as if it were fragmented. This makes it possible, for example, to connect a resistor to the light source to prevent overvoltage from being applied to the light source. <More preferably, the light source connector extends in the width direction of the connection conductor structure. And a connecting member for integrally holding the communication path and the trunk road. In this manner, when a required portion of the patterned conductor is cut off to form the connection conductor structure, each part of the connection conductor structure can be prevented from falling apart, and the formed connection conductor structure can be prevented. Mechanical strength can be increased. Such a connecting member can preferably be formed by an insert mold. When the connecting member is formed by an insert mold, a widthwise recess or a through hole is provided in the trunk road portion, and if the connecting member extends through the widthwise recess or the through hole, the connecting member and This is preferable because the engagement with the main road can be strengthened. Further, it is preferable that a hole exposing the communication path is provided at a position where the connection path is aligned with the communication path of the connecting member, and the exposed communication path can be divided through the hole. By doing so, it is possible to form a connection conductor structure having a desired light source connection pattern by dividing the communication path after forming the connection member. The portion of the communication path exposed by the hole of the connecting member may have a smaller width than other parts of the communication path to facilitate resection. Further, the connecting member may include one or a plurality of insulating sheets. Regarding the insulating sheet, a plurality of insulating sheets may extend in the width direction of the connecting conductor structure at a predetermined place, or may be a single insulating sheet extending over substantially the entire length of the connecting conductor structure. Good. Such an insulating sheet By using the light source, it is possible to reduce the size (thickness) of the light source connected body manufactured as compared with the case where the connecting member is formed by the insert mold. When the insulating sheet is attached to the light source mounting surface of the connection conductor structure, the part to which the power supply voltage is applied is not exposed to the light source mounting surface that is relatively easy for workers to touch, improving safety. In addition, the insulating sheet reflects the light from the light source to increase the lighting efficiency.If the light source connected body does not have the connecting member by the insert mold or the light source is connected to the connecting conductor structure When such a connecting member is removed, for example, after installation, the branch road connecting the trunk road and the communication road is bent so that the main surface of the trunk road is substantially perpendicular to the main surface of the communication road. You may. By doing so, the light source connector can be easily attached to the holder by inserting the trunk road into the matching recess or hole formed in the holder.
連結部材を用いる代わりに、 またはそれに加えて、 チップ型 L E Dを 装着するためのソケットを接続導体構造の幅方向に延在させ、 連絡路部 と幹路部とを一体に保持するようにすることもできる。  Instead of, or in addition to, using a connecting member, a socket for mounting the chip-type LED extends in the width direction of the connecting conductor structure so that the communication path and the main path are integrally held. Can also.
複数の光源がチップ型 L E Dを含む場合、 チップ型 L E Dに対応する 光源取り付け部はチップ型 L E Dの端子に対応した端子接続部を有し、 これら端子接続部の少なくとも一つは延出部を有し、 該延出部は折り曲 げられてチップ型 L E Dの位置決めまたは保持のための壁を成すように することができる。 好適には、 チップ型 L E Dに対応する光源取り付け 部の端子接続部は互いに対向する一対の延出部を有する。 このようにす ることにより、 インサートモ一ルドなどにより形成されるソケットを不 用とすることができる。  When a plurality of light sources include a chip-type LED, the light source mounting part corresponding to the chip-type LED has a terminal connection part corresponding to a terminal of the chip-type LED, and at least one of these terminal connection parts has an extension part. However, the extension may be bent to form a wall for positioning or holding the chip type LED. Preferably, the terminal connection portion of the light source attachment portion corresponding to the chip type LED has a pair of extension portions facing each other. By doing so, the socket formed by insert molding or the like can be omitted.
全部の光源取り付け部に光源を取り付ける必要はなく、 光源取り付け 部の少なくとも一つに光源が取り付けられていないようにしてもよい。 そのようにすることにより、 光源間の間隔をフレキシブルに変えること ができる。 これは、 例えば光源が直列または直並列に接続される場合、 パターン化導体形成時 (即ち一次加工時) に各光源取り付け部に含まれ る端子接続部間を連結しておき、 パターン化導体の二次加工時に、 光源 が取り付けられる光源取り付け部においてのみ端子接続部を分離するこ とにより達成できる。 It is not necessary to attach the light source to all the light source attachment portions, and the light source may not be attached to at least one of the light source attachment portions. By doing so, the spacing between the light sources can be flexibly changed. For example, when the light sources are connected in series or in series / parallel, the terminal connection portions included in each light source mounting portion are connected at the time of forming the patterned conductor (that is, at the time of primary processing), and the This can be achieved by separating the terminal connection part only at the light source mounting part where the light source is mounted during the secondary processing.
複数の光源の少なくとも一つが一対の端子を有する光源を含む場合、 この光源の一対の端子が光源連結体の幅方向に配置されるようにしても よい。 そのようにすると、 光源連結体を長手方向に撓ませた場合に、 光 源の端子を接続導体構造から分離させるような力が働かないため、 不所 望な光源の接続導体構造からの分離を防止することができる。 これは好 適には、 一対の端子を有する光源が取り付けられる光源取り付け部が一 対の端子に対応した一対の端子接続部を有し、 この一対の端子接続部が パターン化導体の幅方向に配置されるようにすることにより実現される。 更に各光源が一対の端子を有する場合、 パターン化導体は、 光源を直 列、 並列または直並列接続するのに兼用可能なパターンを有しているこ とが好ましい。 そのようにすることにより、 光源が直列、 並列または直 並列のいずれに接続された光源連結体でも同じパターン化導体から形成 することができるため、 生産効率の向上及び製造コストの低下を図るこ とができる。 本発明の好適実施例によると、 パターン化導体は長寸のテ —プ状をなし、 且つ、 光源との電気的接続のための長手方向に配置され た複数の光源取り付け部と、 これら光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡す る連絡路部と、 連絡路部及び光源取り付け部を幅方向に挟んで両側に配 置され長手方向に延在する一対の幹路部と、 幹路部及び連絡路部を幅方 向に連絡する複数の枝路部とを有する。 このような構造により、 所要の 枝路部、 連絡路部または幹路部の部分を切除することで、 共通のパター ン化導体から多様な光源接続パターンを有する接続導体構造を一つの製 造ラインで容易に且つ効率よく製造することができるため、 少量生産す る場合でも製造コストを低く抑えることができる。 好適には、 光源取り 付け部の各々は光源の一対の端子に対応した一対の端子接続部を有して おり、 連絡路部は、 隣接する光源取り付け部に含まれる端子接続部同士 を互いに連結する複数の接続路を含む。 When at least one of the plurality of light sources includes a light source having a pair of terminals, the pair of terminals of the light source may be arranged in the width direction of the light source assembly. In this case, when the light source connector is flexed in the longitudinal direction, a force that separates the terminal of the light source from the connection conductor structure does not work. Can be prevented. Preferably, the light source mounting portion to which the light source having the pair of terminals is mounted has a pair of terminal connection portions corresponding to the pair of terminals, and the pair of terminal connection portions are arranged in the width direction of the patterned conductor. This is realized by being arranged. Further, when each light source has a pair of terminals, the patterned conductor preferably has a pattern that can be used for connecting the light sources in series, in parallel, or in series / parallel. By doing so, even if the light sources are connected in series, in parallel, or in series / parallel, the light sources can be formed from the same patterned conductor, thereby improving production efficiency and reducing production costs. Can be. According to a preferred embodiment of the present invention, the patterned conductor has an elongated tape shape and a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source; Connecting section in the longitudinal direction, a pair of trunk sections disposed on both sides of the connecting section and the light source mounting section in the width direction, and extending in the longitudinal direction; the trunk section and the connecting path And a plurality of branch portions connecting the portions in the width direction. With such a structure, a common putter can be cut off by cutting off the required branch road, connecting road, or trunk road. Since a connection conductor structure having various light source connection patterns can be easily and efficiently manufactured from a single conductor on a single production line, the production cost can be kept low even in a small-scale production. Preferably, each of the light source mounting portions has a pair of terminal connection portions corresponding to a pair of terminals of the light source, and the communication path portion connects the terminal connection portions included in the adjacent light source mounting portions to each other. Including a plurality of connection paths.
複数の光源が、 2つの異なる色の L E Dチップを含み且つ 3つの端子 を有する 3極 L E Dランプを含む場合、 パタ一ン化導体が長寸のテープ 状をなし、 且つ、 光源との電気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複 数の光源取り付け部と、 光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部 と、 該連絡路部及び光源取り付け部を幅方向に挟んで両側に配置され長 手方向に延在する一対の幹路部と、 幹路部及び連絡路部を幅方向に連絡 する複数の枝路部とを有し、 光源取り付け部の各々は 3極 L E Dランプ の 3つの端子に対応して幅方向に配列された 3つの端子接続部を有し、 連絡路部は隣接する光源取り付け部の幅方向に整合した端子接続部同士 を互いに連結する複数の接続路を含んでいるようにするとよい。 このよ うにすることにより、 3極 L E Dランプを光源として用いた光源連結体 を実現することができ、 適切な電源及びスィツチを接続することで発光 色を様々に変化させることができる。  When the plurality of light sources include two different color LED chips and a three-pole LED lamp having three terminals, the patterned conductor has a long tape shape, and is electrically connected to the light source. A plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in the longitudinal direction for connecting the light source mounting portion, a communication path portion connecting the light source mounting portion in the longitudinal direction, and a length disposed on both sides of the communication path portion and the light source mounting portion in the width direction. It has a pair of trunk roads extending in the hand direction, and a plurality of branch roads that connect the trunk road and the connecting road in the width direction, and each of the light source mounting parts has three terminals of a three-pole LED lamp. Has three terminal connection portions arranged in the width direction corresponding to each other, and the connection path portion includes a plurality of connection paths connecting the terminal connection portions aligned in the width direction of the adjacent light source mounting portions to each other. It is good to do so. By doing so, it is possible to realize a light source connected body using a three-pole LED lamp as a light source, and it is possible to variously change the emission color by connecting an appropriate power supply and switch.
複数の光源が、 異なる色の第 1及び第 2の L E Dチップを含み且つ 4 つの端子を有する 4極 L E Dランプを含んでおり、 前記 4つの端子のう ち 2つは前記第 1の L E Dチップに接続され、 残りの 2つは前記第 2の L E Dチップに接続されている場合、 パターン化導体が長寸のテ一プ状 をなし、 且つ、 光源との電気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複数 の光源取り付け部と、光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、 連絡路部及び光源取り付け部を幅方向に挟んで両側に配置され長手方向 に延在する一対の幹路部と、 幹路部及び連絡路部を幅方向に連絡する複 数の枝路部とを有し、 光源取り付け部の各々は 4極 L E Dランプの 4つ の端子に対応して 4つの端子接続部を有し、 これら 4つの端子接続部の うち第 1の L E Dチップに接続された端子に対応する 2つはパターン化 導体の長手方向に整列して配列され、 第 2の L E Dチップに接続された 端子に対応する 2つはパターン化導体の長手方向に整列されるとともに、 他の 2つの端子接続部からパターン化導体の幅方向に離間され、 連絡路 部は、 隣接する光源取り付け部に含まれる幅方向に整合した端子接続部 同士を連結する複数の接続路を有し、 これら複数の接続路の長手方向に 整合したものは幅方向に延在する枝路部によって連結されており、 更に パターン化導体は、 第 1及び第 2の幹路部のいずれかの幅方向外側に長 手方向に延在する第 3の幹路部と、 第 3の幹路部と第 1及び第 2の幹路 部の前記いずれかとを幅方向に連絡する枝路部とを有するようにするこ とができる。 これにより、 4極 L E Dランプを光源として用いた光源連 結体が実現することができ、 適切な電源及びスィッチを接続することで 発光色を様々に変化させることができる。 The plurality of light sources include a four-pole LED lamp including first and second LED chips of different colors and having four terminals, wherein two of the four terminals are connected to the first LED chip. Connected, the other two being connected to the second LED chip, the patterned conductor has a long tape shape, and is disposed in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source. A plurality of light source mounting parts, a communication path part connecting the light source mounting parts in the longitudinal direction, and a longitudinal direction in which the communication path part and the light source mounting part are disposed on both sides of the width direction. And a plurality of branches connecting the main road and the connecting road in the width direction. Each of the light source mounting portions has four terminals of a 4-pole LED lamp. And four of the four terminal connections corresponding to the terminals connected to the first LED chip are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the patterned conductor, The two corresponding to the terminals connected to the second LED chip are aligned in the longitudinal direction of the patterned conductor, are separated from the other two terminal connection portions in the width direction of the patterned conductor, and the connection path portion is A plurality of connection paths for connecting the terminal connection portions aligned in the width direction included in the adjacent light source attachment portions, and the plurality of connection paths aligned in the longitudinal direction are branches extending in the width direction. Parts, and the patterned conductors are first and second A third trunk road extending in the longitudinal direction outward of any one of the trunk roads in the width direction, and a third trunk road and any one of the first and second trunk roads extending in the width direction. And a branch that communicates in the direction. As a result, a light source combination using a four-pole LED lamp as a light source can be realized, and the emission color can be variously changed by connecting an appropriate power supply and switch.
好適にはバタ一ン化導体は主としてアルミからなる。 また、 光源を接 続導体構造にレーザ溶接により取り付けると、 高い信頼度で取り付ける ことが容易にできるため好ましい。 また、 光源とともに所定の回路を構 成する抵抗を接続導体構造にレーザ溶接により取り付けることもできる。 このようにレーザ溶接により接続導体構造に取り付けられる光源は典型 的にはチップ型 L E D (表面実装型 L E D ) であり、 そのような抵抗は チップ型抵抗 (表面実装型抵抗) であるが、 これに限るものではなく、 電気接続用の端子としてリード線を有する光源に用いることも可能であ る。  Preferably, the buttered conductor consists essentially of aluminum. It is preferable to attach the light source to the connection conductor structure by laser welding because the attachment can be easily performed with high reliability. Further, a resistor constituting a predetermined circuit together with the light source can be attached to the connection conductor structure by laser welding. The light source thus attached to the connection conductor structure by laser welding is typically a chip type LED (surface mount type LED), and such a resistor is a chip type resistor (surface mount type resistor). The present invention is not limited to this, and can be used for a light source having a lead wire as a terminal for electrical connection.
複数の光源の少なくとも一つを、 複数の発光素子を含む発光素子ァセ ンブリとしてもよい。 また、 パターン化導体が光源の取り付け位置を定 める突起を有していると好都合である。 A light-emitting device base including at least one of the plurality of light sources; It may be an assembly. It is also advantageous if the patterned conductor has a projection that determines the position of the light source.
本発明の更に別の光源連結体の好適実施例においては、 パターン化導 体は長手方向に概ね平行に延在する一対の幹路部と、 これら一対の幹路 部を互いに連結する複数の枝路部とを有し、 光源は一対の幹路部間に接 続され、 パターン化導体の切除される部分は枝路部を含む。 この実施例 は一対の幹路部間に複数の光源が並列に接続された光源連結体を具現す るのに特に適している。 一対の幹路部が複数の枝路部によって連結され ていることからパターン化導体の取り扱いが極めて容易であり、 生産効 率を向上させることができる。 また、 一対の幹路部の間の空隙が非直線 状である (例えば方形波状に屈曲している) と、 一対の幹路部間に取り 付けられる光源 (L E D ) の取り付け位置を長手方向だけでなく幅方向 にも容易に調整することができ、 例えば光源連結体が車載ランプを形成 するのに用いられる場合、 車種により異なる L E D配列パターンが必要 とされてる場合にも対応することができ、 部品の共用化を図って大きな 経済的なメリットを得ることができる。  In still another preferred embodiment of the light source connecting body according to the present invention, the patterned conductor includes a pair of trunks extending substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of branches connecting the pair of trunks to each other. A light source is connected between the pair of trunk roads, and the cut portion of the patterned conductor includes a branch. This embodiment is particularly suitable for implementing a light source assembly in which a plurality of light sources are connected in parallel between a pair of trunk roads. Since the pair of trunk roads is connected by a plurality of branch roads, handling of the patterned conductor is extremely easy, and the production efficiency can be improved. In addition, if the gap between the pair of trunk roads is non-linear (for example, bent in a square wave shape), the light source (LED) mounted between the pair of trunk roads is attached only in the longitudinal direction. It can be easily adjusted not only in the width direction but also in the width direction, for example, when the light source assembly is used to form an in-vehicle lamp, and when a different LED arrangement pattern is required depending on the vehicle type, Great economic benefits can be achieved by sharing parts.
複数の光源の各々がプレート状のカソード端子及びアノード端子を有 する L E Dからなる場合、 パターン化導体の各 L E Dの力ソード端子が 取り付けられる部分が L E Dのァノード端子が取り付けられる部分より 大きな面積を有するとよい。 これは、 そのような L E Dでは、 通常、 パ ッケ一ジ内に封止される L E Dチップはカソード端子上に載置され、 ァ ノ一ド端子とは細いリード線などにより接続され、 L E Dチップから発 せられる熱はその大部分がカソード端子を通じて放出されるからである パターン化導体の各 L E Dのカソード端子が取り付けられる部分がより 大きい面積を有することにより、 L E Dの力ソード端子から放出される 熱をより効果的に放散させることができる。 パターン化導体が長手方向 に概ね平行に延在する一対の幹路部を有し、 各 L E Dは一対の幹路部間 に接続される場合、 L E Dのカソード端子が取り付けられる幹路部の幅 を、 L E Dのアノード端子が取り付けられる幹路部の幅より大きくする とよい。 When each of the plurality of light sources is composed of a plate-shaped LED having a cathode terminal and an anode terminal, the portion of the patterned conductor to which the power source terminal of each LED is attached has a larger area than the portion to which the anode terminal of the LED is attached. Good to do. This is because, in such an LED, the LED chip, which is usually sealed in a package, is mounted on the cathode terminal and connected to the anode terminal by a thin lead wire, etc. Most of the heat generated from the LED is radiated through the cathode terminal because the portion of the patterned conductor to which the cathode terminal of each LED is attached has a larger area, and is thus radiated from the power source terminal of the LED Heat can be dissipated more effectively. Patterned conductor is longitudinal When each LED is connected between a pair of trunk roads, the width of the trunk road to which the cathode terminal of the LED is attached is determined by the anode terminal of the LED. It should be larger than the width of the trunk road to be attached.
本発明の別の側面によると、 複数の光源を電気的に接続してなる光源 連結体とこの光源連結体を保持する保持体とを有する発光体装置であつ て、 光源連結体は、 複数の光源を連結するべくこれら光源の配列方向に 延在する接続導体構造を含み、 該接続導体構造は、 所定のパターンが形 成された概ね平板なパターン化導体の所要の部分を切除することで形成 されたものであり、 パターン化導体は長寸のテープ状をなし、 且つ、 光 源との電気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複数の光源取り付け部 と、 これら光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、 連絡路部 及び光源取り付け部を幅方向に挟んで両側に配置され長手方向に延在す る一対の幹路部と、 幹路部及び連絡路部を幅方向に連絡する複数の枝路 部とを有しており、 接続導体構造は、 幹路部の主面が連絡路部の主面と 概ね直交するように、 幹路部と連絡路部とを結ぶ前記枝路部が折り曲げ られており、 これら幹路部を、 保持体に設けられた対応する穴または凹 部に挿入することにより、 光源連結体の保持体への取り付けを行うよう にしたことを特徴とする発光体装置が提供される。 このような発光体装 置では、 保持体の凹部または穴に幹路部を差し込むだけで光源連結体を 保持体に取り付けることができるので、 取り付け作業の効率が向上され る。  According to another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a light-emitting device including a light source connector that electrically connects a plurality of light sources and a holder that holds the light source connector, wherein the light source connector includes a plurality of light sources. It includes a connecting conductor structure extending in the arrangement direction of the light sources to connect the light sources, and the connecting conductor structure is formed by cutting out a required portion of a generally flat patterned conductor having a predetermined pattern formed thereon. The patterned conductor has a long tape shape, and has a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with a light source; A pair of trunk roads which are disposed on both sides of the communication passage and the light source mounting portion in the width direction and extend in the longitudinal direction, and the trunk road and the communication passage are arranged in the width direction. With multiple branches to contact In the connection conductor structure, the branch section connecting the trunk section and the communication path section is bent so that the main surface of the trunk section is substantially orthogonal to the main surface of the connection path section. The light emitting device is characterized in that the light source device is attached to the holder by inserting the light source into the corresponding hole or recess provided in the holder. In such a light emitting device, the light source connector can be attached to the holder simply by inserting the trunk road into the recess or hole of the holder, so that the efficiency of the attaching operation is improved.
また別の実施例に基づくと、 リード線を備えた複数の光源がリード線 に概ね直交する向きに並んで電気的に接続された光源連結体と、 該光源 連結体を保持する保持体とを有する発光体装置であって、光源連結体が、 複数の光源をその配列方向に延在する接続導体構造で連結してなるもの であり、 リ一ド線及び接続導体構造の一部のいずれか一方あるいは双方 を保持体側に突出させて該保持体に設けられた対応する穴または凹部に 挿入することにより、 光源連結体の保持体への取り付けを行うようにし たことを特徴とする発光体装置が提供される。 このような発光体装置に よると、 保持体には穴または凹部を設ければ良く、 煩雑な加工を必要と しないため、 光源の位置の異なる多種類のものを容易に製造することが できるので、 多品種のものを少量製造する場合のコストを削減すること ができる。 さらに簡易な構成で光源連結体を確実に保持体に固定するこ とができる。 その上、 保持体と光源本体との間に接続導体構造が配置さ れ、 光源本体が保持体の表面から離れた状態で保持されるため、 放熱性 を高めることができる。 According to another embodiment, a plurality of light sources each including a lead wire are electrically connected to each other in a direction substantially perpendicular to the lead wire, and a holding body that holds the light source connected body includes: Having a plurality of light sources connected by a connection conductor structure extending in the arrangement direction. By holding one or both of the lead wire and the connecting conductor structure to the holder side and inserting them into corresponding holes or recesses provided in the holder, the light source connector is held. A light-emitting device characterized by being attached to a body is provided. According to such a light-emitting device, a hole or a concave portion may be provided in the holder, and complicated processing is not required, so that various types of light sources having different positions can be easily manufactured. However, it is possible to reduce the cost in the case of producing a large number of products in small quantities. Furthermore, the light source connected body can be securely fixed to the holder with a simple configuration. In addition, the connecting conductor structure is arranged between the holder and the light source main body, and the light source main body is held in a state separated from the surface of the holder, so that the heat dissipation can be improved.
本発明の更に別の側面に基づくと、 複数の光源を電気的に接続して光 源連結体を形成するための所定のパターンを有するテープ状のパターン 化導体であって、 光源との電気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複 数の光源取り付け部と、 これら光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連 絡路部と、 連絡路部及び光源取り付け部から幅方向に離間されて長手方 向に延在する少なくとも一つの幹路部と、 幹路部及び連絡路部を幅方向 に連絡する複数の枝路部とを有することを特徴とするテープ状パターン 化導体が提供される。 このようなテープ状パ夕一ン化導体を用いること により、 光源連結体をプリント基板を用いることなく且つ効率的に生産 することが可能となる。 また枝路部及び/または連絡路部の一部を所望 に応じて切除することで様々な接続パターンで光源を連結した光源連結 体を容易に形成することができる。  According to still another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a tape-shaped patterned conductor having a predetermined pattern for electrically connecting a plurality of light sources to form a light source connected body, the tape-shaped patterned conductor being electrically connected to the light source. A plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in the longitudinal direction for connection, a communication path portion connecting these light source mounting portions in the longitudinal direction, and a longitudinal direction separated from the communication path portion and the light source mounting portion in the width direction. There is provided a tape-shaped patterned conductor having at least one trunk road portion extending in the direction, and a plurality of branch road portions that connect the trunk road portion and the connecting road portion in the width direction. By using such a tape-shaped patterned conductor, it is possible to efficiently produce a light source assembly without using a printed circuit board. Further, by cutting off a part of the branch and / or the communication path as required, a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in various connection patterns can be easily formed.
このようなパターン化導体の切除 (二次加工) は、 順送プレス機を用 いたプレス加工によって行うと効率的に低コストで行うことができる。 そのため、 幹路部に順送プレス機のパイロットピンに係合して位置決め をしたり、 パターン化導体の搬送に用いたりすることのできる複数の穴 (パイロット穴) が長手方向に所定の間隔で形成されていることが好ま しい。 光源の各々がー対の電気接続用の端子を有している場合、 光源取 り付け部の各々が対応する光源の一対の端子に接続される一対の端子接 続部を有しているとよい。 その場合、 連絡路部は、 隣接する光源取り付 け部に含まれる端子接続部同士をそれぞれ連結する複数の接続路を含む ことができる。 接続路の少なくとも一つまたは Z及び幹路部に例えば抵 抗のようなリード線を有する電気素子のリード線を差し込むための穴を 設けてもよい。 各光源取り付け部の一対の端子接続部が互いに離間され ている場合、 パターン化導体の二次加工時に切除する箇所が少なくてす み、 一方、 互いに連結されている場合には、 必要に応じて端子接続部間 を連絡している部分を切除することができフレキシビリティが向上する。 少なくとも一組の隣接する光源取り付け部の間に抵抗取り付け部を設け てもよい。 また、 枝路部の少なくとも一つを抵抗取り付け部によって置 き換えてもよい。 そのようにすることにより、 抵抗を容易に回路中に組 み込むことができる。 また、 幹路部は幅方向凸状湾曲部を有していても よい。 そのような凸状湾曲部を根本部分で折り曲げることにより、 保持 体などとの接続に用いることができる。 また順送プレス機を用いてコィ ル状に巻かれたテープ状パタ一ン化導体の巻きをほどきつつラジアルテ —ビングにより保持された複数の光源との組み付けを行う際、 テープ状 パターン化導体の幹路部と光源の本体部とが干渉する場合があり得るが、 そのような場合、 光源本体と干渉する幹路部に凸状湾曲部が形成されて いると、 テープ状パターン化導体の巻きがほどけた部分の凸状湾曲部を 折り曲げて、 テープ状パターン化導体の幹路部と光源の本体部とが干渉 するのを防ぐことが可能となる。 Cutting (secondary processing) of such a patterned conductor can be efficiently performed at low cost by performing press processing using a progressive press machine. Therefore, it is engaged with the pilot pin of the progressive press machine on the trunk road and positioned. It is preferable that a plurality of holes (pilot holes) that can be used for carrying the patterned conductors be formed at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction. When each of the light sources has a pair of terminals for electrical connection, it is assumed that each of the light source mounting portions has a pair of terminal connection portions connected to a pair of terminals of the corresponding light source. Good. In this case, the communication path section may include a plurality of connection paths that connect the terminal connection sections included in the adjacent light source mounting sections. A hole for inserting a lead wire of an electric element having a lead wire such as a resistor may be provided in at least one of the connection paths or Z and the trunk road. If the pair of terminal connection parts of each light source mounting part are separated from each other, there are few places to cut out during the secondary processing of the patterned conductor, while if they are connected to each other, as necessary The portion connecting the terminal connections can be cut off, improving flexibility. A resistance mounting portion may be provided between at least one pair of adjacent light source mounting portions. Also, at least one of the branch portions may be replaced by a resistor mounting portion. By doing so, the resistor can be easily incorporated into the circuit. Further, the main road may have a convex curved portion in the width direction. By bending such a convex curved portion at the root portion, it can be used for connection with a holder or the like. When unwinding a coiled tape-shaped patterned conductor using a progressive press machine and assembling with multiple light sources held by radial tubing, a tape-shaped patterned conductor is used. In some cases, the trunk road may interfere with the main body of the light source.In such a case, if a convex curved portion is formed in the trunk road that interferes with the main body of the light source, the tape-shaped patterned conductor may be damaged. By bending the convex curved portion of the unwound portion, it is possible to prevent the trunk portion of the tape-shaped patterned conductor from interfering with the main body of the light source.
更に好適には、 一対の幹路部が、 光源取り付け部と連絡路部とを幅方 向に挟んで両側に設けられている。 このような構造では、 枝路部及び Z または連絡路部の所定部分を切除することで、 光源を直並列、 並列、 直 列のいずれに接続する光源連結体を形成することも可能である。 即ち、 同じ製造ラインで同じパターン化導体から様々な接続パターンの光源連 結体を製造することができるため、 生産効率の向上及ぴ製造コストの低 下において極めて有益である。 More preferably, the pair of trunk roads extends the light source mounting part and the communication path in a width direction. It is provided on both sides across the direction. In such a structure, it is possible to form a light source connected body that connects the light sources in any of a series-parallel, a parallel, and a series by cutting off a predetermined portion of the branch path and the Z or the communication path. That is, since light source couplings having various connection patterns can be produced from the same patterned conductor on the same production line, it is extremely useful in improving production efficiency and lowering production costs.
本発明に基づく別の実施例に基づくと、 複数の光源を電気的に接続し て光源連結体を形成するための所定のパターンを有するテープ状のパ夕 ーン化導体であって、 パターン化導体は順送プレス機により所要部分を 切除されることで、 光源を連結する接続導体構造を形成し、 パターン化 導体は、 順送プレス機による搬送または位置決めに用いられる複数の穴 が長手方向に所定の間隔で形成されていることを特徴とするテープ状パ ターン化導体が提供される。 また更に別の実施例に基づくと、 リード線 を備えた複数の光源をこれらリード線に概ね直交する向きに並べ、 電気 的に接続して光源連結体を形成するための所定のパ夕一ンを有するテ一 プ状パターン化導体であって、 複数の光源のリード線との接続のため長 手方向に配置された複数の接続部と、 これら接続部を長手方向に連絡す る連絡路部とを有し、 連絡路部に順送プレス機による搬送または位置決 めに用いられる複数の穴が長手方向に所定の間隔で形成されていること を特徴とするパターン化導体が提供される。 このように、 テープ状パタ —ン化導体に順送プレス機による搬送または位置決めに用いられる複数 の穴を設けることで、 順送プレス機によるパターン化導体の取り扱いを 容易にし、それを用いた光源連結体の生産効率を向上することができる。 更に本発明の別の側面に基づくと、 複数の光源と、 これら複数の光源 を電気的に接続するための接続導体構造とを有する光源連結体を製造す るための方法であって、 所定のパターンを有する概ね平板なパターン化 導体を形成する過程と、このパターン化導体を光源に組み付ける過程と、 パターン化導体の所要の部分を切除して接続導体構造を形成する過程と を有することを特徴とする光源連結体の製造方法が提供される。 このよ うにすることにより、 パターン化導体の切除場所を変えることで様々な 光源接続パターンを有する接続導体構造を含む光源連結体を形成するこ とができる。 またこのような方法ではプリント基板及びそれとの接続に 通常用いられる半田を不要とすることができる。 According to another embodiment of the present invention, there is provided a tape-shaped patterned conductor having a predetermined pattern for electrically connecting a plurality of light sources to form a light source assembly, comprising: The conductor is cut off at a required portion by a progressive press to form a connecting conductor structure that connects the light sources.The patterned conductor has multiple holes used for transport or positioning by the progressive press in the longitudinal direction. A tape-shaped patterned conductor characterized by being formed at a predetermined interval is provided. According to yet another embodiment, a plurality of light sources having leads are arranged in a direction substantially perpendicular to the leads, and are electrically connected to form a predetermined light source for forming a light source assembly. A plurality of connecting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for connecting to a plurality of light source lead wires, and a communication path portion connecting these connecting portions in a longitudinal direction. A patterned conductor is provided, wherein a plurality of holes used for transport or positioning by a progressive press are formed at predetermined intervals in a longitudinal direction in a communication path portion. Thus, by providing a plurality of holes in the tape-shaped patterned conductor used for transport or positioning by the progressive press machine, handling of the patterned conductor by the progressive press machine is facilitated, and a light source using the same is provided. The production efficiency of the linked body can be improved. According to still another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a method for manufacturing a light source assembly having a plurality of light sources and a connection conductor structure for electrically connecting the plurality of light sources, comprising: Almost flat patterning with patterns Forming a conductor, assembling the patterned conductor with a light source, and cutting a required portion of the patterned conductor to form a connection conductor structure. Is provided. By doing so, it is possible to form a light source connected body including a connection conductor structure having various light source connection patterns by changing the cutout location of the patterned conductor. In addition, such a method eliminates the need for a printed circuit board and the solder normally used for connection with the printed circuit board.
好適には、 テープ状パターン化導体を形成する過程は、 導電性平板材 料をプレス加工する過程を含む。 また、 パタ一ン化導体の所要の部分を 切除する過程及び Zまたはパターン化導体を光源に組み付ける過程が、 順送プレス機によってなされると、 作業効率の点から一層好適である。 パターン化導体から形成される接続導体構造の各部を一体に保持するべ く、 テープ状パターン化導体に連結部材を取り付ける過程を更に含み、 パターン化導体の所要の部分を切除する過程は、 連結部材の取り付け過 程の後になされると、 形成された接続導体構造の各部がばらばらになる ことを防止することができる。 またその場合、 パタ一ン化導体の所要の 部分を露出するべく連結部材には少なくとも一つの穴が設けられている ことが好ましい。 それによつて、 その穴によって露出されたパターン化 導体の部分を必要に応じて切除することが可能となる。 光源がチップ型 L E Dを含み、 当該方法がチップ型 L E Dを装着するためのソケットを パターン化導体に取り付ける過程を有する場合、 パターン化導体の所要 の部分を切除する過程が、 ソケットの取り付け過程の後になされるよう にしてもよい。  Preferably, the step of forming the tape-shaped patterned conductor includes a step of pressing a conductive flat material. Further, it is more preferable in terms of working efficiency if the step of cutting off a required portion of the patterned conductor and the step of assembling the Z or patterned conductor to the light source are performed by a progressive press. The method further includes attaching a connecting member to the tape-shaped patterned conductor so as to integrally hold each part of the connection conductor structure formed from the patterned conductor. When the connection conductor structure is formed after the mounting process, the individual portions of the formed connection conductor structure can be prevented from falling apart. In that case, it is preferable that at least one hole is provided in the connecting member to expose a required portion of the patterned conductor. Thereby, the portion of the patterned conductor exposed by the hole can be cut off as needed. If the light source includes a chip-type LED and the method includes attaching a socket for mounting the chip-type LED to the patterned conductor, the step of cutting off a required portion of the patterned conductor is performed after the socket attaching process. It may be done.
光源がリ一ド線を有する光源を含んでいる場合、 パターン化導体を光 源に組み付ける過程は、 光源のリード線を接続導体構造に設けられた対 応する穴に差し込む過程を有することができる。 あるいは、 パターン化導体を光源に組み付ける過程の後にパターン化 導体の切除過程を行うようにしてもよい。 これによれば、 連結部材を用 いることなく、 パターン化導体の所要箇所を切除することで形成される 接続導体構造の各部がばらばらになるのを防止することができる。また、 光源の各々が電気接続用の一対のリード線を有している場合、 組み付け 過程が、 パターン化導体の所定の部分でリード線をかしめる過程を含ん でいると、 半田の使用をなくすことができるため好適である。 このよう なかしめによる結合方法は、 順送プレスで行うのに適している点からも 好適である。 パターン化導体を長手方向に延在する折り曲げ線に沿って 折り曲げる過程を更に含んでいると、 それによりパターン化導体 (また はそれから形成される接続導体構造) と光源のリード線との不所望な接 触を防ぐことができる When the light source includes a light source having a lead wire, assembling the patterned conductor to the light source may include inserting a lead wire of the light source into a corresponding hole provided in the connection conductor structure. . Alternatively, the process of cutting the patterned conductor may be performed after the process of assembling the patterned conductor to the light source. According to this, each part of the connection conductor structure formed by cutting off a required portion of the patterned conductor can be prevented from being separated without using a connecting member. Also, if each of the light sources has a pair of leads for electrical connection, the use of solder is eliminated if the assembling step includes a step of caulking the leads at predetermined portions of the patterned conductor. This is preferable because it can be performed. Such a joining method by staking is also suitable from the point that it is suitable for performing by a progressive press. Folding the patterned conductor along a longitudinally extending fold line may further include undesired connection between the patterned conductor (or the connecting conductor structure formed therefrom) and the light source leads. Can prevent contact
更に本発明の一実施例によると、 リード線を備えた複数の光源がこれ らリード線に概ね直交する向きに並んで電気的に接続された光源連結体 を製造するための方法であって、 ラジアルテーピング用のキャリアテー プによりリ一ド線に直交する向きに並べて保持された複数の光源を供給 する過程と、 これら光源がキャリアテープに保持された状態で、 光源の 電気的接続を行い光源を連続的に得る過程とを有することを特徴とする 光源連結体の製造方法が提供される。 これによると、 光源の接続作業が 複数の光源が一体になつた状態で行われるため、 光源連結体製造時の作 業性を高めることができる。  Furthermore, according to one embodiment of the present invention, there is provided a method for manufacturing a light source assembly in which a plurality of light sources having leads are electrically connected in a direction substantially orthogonal to the leads. The process of supplying a plurality of light sources held side by side with a carrier tape for radial taping in a direction perpendicular to the lead line, and electrically connecting the light sources while these light sources are held on a carrier tape And a step of continuously obtaining the light source. According to this, the work of connecting the light sources is performed in a state where a plurality of light sources are integrated, so that the workability at the time of manufacturing the light source assembly can be improved.
更に本発明の別の側面に基づくと、 複数の光源を電気的に接続してな る光源連結体を有する発光体装置であって、 光源連結体を収容する透光 性を有する管状部材と、 管状部材の両端に取り付けられた一対のキヤッ プ部材とを有し、 光源連結体は、 複数の光源を連結するべくこれら光源 の配列方向に延在する接続導体構造を含み、 この接続導体構造は、 所定 のパターンが形成された概ね平板なパターン化導体の所要の部分を切除 することで形成されたものであることを特徴とする発光体装置が提供さ れる。 このような発光体装置では、 接続導体構造をプリント基板の回路 形成用銅箔 (通常 3 5 m) より大幅に厚くして (0 . 1〜0 . 3 mm) 熱伝導特性を高めることができるため、 光源や他の素子 (抵抗) から発 せられた熱を素早く移動させ、 光源や他の素子の周囲温度が過度に高ま るのを防止し、 熱による光源や他の素子の損傷を防ぐことができる。 好適にはパターン化導体は長寸のテープ状をなし、 且つ、 光源との電 気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複数の光源取り付け部と、 これ ら光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、 連絡路部及び光源 取り付け部から幅方向に離間されて長手方向に延在する少なくとも一つ の幹路部と、 幹路部及び連絡路部を幅方向に連絡する複数の枝路部とを 有する。 また、 一対のキャップ部材の少なくとも一方に外部装置との電 気接続用の導電性ピンが保持されている場合、 幹路部が導電性ピンに接 続されるようにすると、 別途配線することが不要となるため作業効率の 向上などの点から望ましい。 According to still another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a light emitting device having a light source connected body in which a plurality of light sources are electrically connected, and a light-transmitting tubular member for housing the light source connected body; A pair of cap members attached to both ends of the tubular member, wherein the light source connector includes a connection conductor structure extending in an arrangement direction of the light sources so as to connect a plurality of light sources; , Prescribed A luminous body device is provided, which is formed by cutting off a required portion of a substantially flat patterned conductor on which the above pattern is formed. In such a light-emitting device, the connection conductor structure can be made much thicker (0.1 to 0.3 mm) than the copper foil (typically 35 m) for forming a circuit on a printed circuit board to improve the heat conduction characteristics. As a result, the heat generated from the light source and other elements (resistors) can be transferred quickly, preventing the ambient temperature of the light source and other elements from becoming excessively high, and preventing damage to the light source and other elements due to heat. Can be prevented. Preferably, the patterned conductor is in the form of a long tape, and a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in the longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source, and these light source mounting portions are connected in the longitudinal direction. A communication path portion, at least one trunk path portion extending in the longitudinal direction separated from the connection path portion and the light source mounting portion in the width direction, and a plurality of the communication paths connecting the trunk path portion and the connection path portion in the width direction. And a branch portion. In addition, when a conductive pin for electrical connection to an external device is held on at least one of the pair of cap members, if the trunk path is connected to the conductive pin, wiring can be performed separately. This is not required and is desirable from the viewpoint of improving work efficiency.
本発明の更に別の側面に基づくと、 複数の光源を電気的に接続してな る光源連結体を有する発光体装置であって、 光源連結体は、 複数の光源 を連結するべくこれら光源の配列方向に延在する接続導体構造を含み、 接続導体構造は、 所定のパターンが形成された概ね平板なパターン化導 体の所要の部分を切除することで形成されたものであり、発光体装置は、 光源連結体を収容するハウジングと、 光源連結体の接続導体構造とハウ ジングの内面とに接触し、 それらの間で熱を伝達する熱伝達部材とを有 していることを特徴とする発光体装置が提供される。 このようにするこ とにより、 光源などから生成された熱は、 接続導体構造からハウジング へと伝達され、 更にハウジングから外部へと放散されるため、 ハウジン グ内の温度上昇を抑制して過度な温度上昇による光源などの素子の損傷 または性能低下を防止することができる。 即ち、 熱伝達部材を用いるこ とによってハウジングをヒートシンクとして作用させることができる。 熱伝達部材は光源連結体を八ウジング内で支持する支持体としても働 くことができ、 その場合、 別途支持体を用意しなくてもよい。 また熱伝 達部材が弹性を有しており、 それによつてハウジングの内面に圧接され ていると、 ハウジングへの熱伝達が良好になるとともにハウジング内で 光源連結体をがたつきなく安定に保持することができるため好適である。 ハウジングはガラスのような熱伝導性のよい材料からなることが好まし い。 パターン化導体が長寸のテープ状をなし、 且つ、 光源との電気的接 続のための長手方向に配置された複数の光源取り付け部と、 光源取り付 け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、 該連絡路部及び光源取り付け部 から幅方向に離間されて長手方向に延在する少なくとも一つの幹路部と、 該幹路部及び連絡路部を幅方向に連絡する複数の枝路部とを有している 場合、 熱伝達部材は幹路部に接続することができる。 According to still another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a light emitting device having a light source connected body in which a plurality of light sources are electrically connected, wherein the light source connected body includes a plurality of light sources. A connection conductor structure extending in the arrangement direction, wherein the connection conductor structure is formed by cutting off a required portion of a substantially flat patterned conductor on which a predetermined pattern is formed; Is characterized by having a housing for accommodating the light source connector, and a heat transfer member for contacting the connection conductor structure of the light source connector and the inner surface of the housing and transmitting heat therebetween. An illuminator device is provided. In this way, the heat generated from the light source and the like is transmitted from the connection conductor structure to the housing, and further radiated from the housing to the outside. Thus, it is possible to prevent a temperature rise in the power supply, thereby preventing an element such as a light source from being damaged or a performance drop due to an excessive temperature rise. That is, the use of the heat transfer member allows the housing to function as a heat sink. The heat transfer member can also function as a support for supporting the light source assembly in the housing, in which case a separate support need not be provided. In addition, when the heat transfer member has elasticity and is pressed against the inner surface of the housing, heat transfer to the housing becomes good and the light source connector is stably held in the housing without rattling. It is preferable because it can be performed. The housing is preferably made of a material having good heat conductivity such as glass. A plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with a light source, and a communication path for connecting the light source mounting portion in a longitudinal direction, in which the patterned conductor has a long tape shape. At least one trunk road portion extending in the longitudinal direction while being spaced apart in the width direction from the communication path portion and the light source mounting portion; and a plurality of branch paths connecting the trunk road portion and the communication path portion in the width direction. In the case where the heat transfer member is provided, the heat transfer member can be connected to the trunk road.
本発明の別の側面によると、 複数の光源を電気的に接続してなる光源 連結体とこの光源連結体を保持する保持体とを有する発光体装置であつ て、 光源連結体は、 複数の光源を連結するべく光源の配列方向に延在す る接続導体構造を含み、 該接続導体構造は、 所定のパターンが形成され た概ね平板なパターン化導体の所要の部分を切除することで形成された ものであり、 パターン化導体は長寸のテープ状をなし、 且つ、 光源との 電気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複数の光源取り付け部と、 光 源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、 該連絡路部及び光源取 り付け部を幅方向に挟んで両側に配置され長手方向に延在する一対の幹 路部と、 該幹路部及び連絡路部を幅方向に連絡する複数の枝路部とを有 しており、 保持体は、 少なくとも一面に溝が設けられ、 この溝の対向す る側壁には一対の幹路部に対応する長手方向に延在するガイド溝が設け られ、これら一対の幹路部をスライドさせてガイド溝に嵌め込むことで、 光源連結体が保持体に取り付けられていることを特徴とする発光体装置 が提供される。 このような発光体装置においては、 光源連結体の保持体 への取付けを容易に行うことができる。 According to another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a light-emitting device including a light source connector that electrically connects a plurality of light sources and a holder that holds the light source connector, wherein the light source connector includes a plurality of light sources. A connection conductor structure extending in the arrangement direction of the light sources to connect the light sources, wherein the connection conductor structure is formed by cutting off a required portion of a substantially flat patterned conductor on which a predetermined pattern is formed; The patterned conductor is in the form of a long tape, and a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in the longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source, and the light source mounting portion is connected in the longitudinal direction. A pair of trunk paths arranged on both sides of the communication path section and the light source mounting section in the width direction and extending in the longitudinal direction; and connecting the trunk path section and the connection path section in the width direction. And has multiple branches to contact The body is provided with a groove on at least one surface thereof, A guide groove extending in the longitudinal direction corresponding to the pair of trunk roads is provided on the side wall, and the pair of trunk roads is slid and fitted into the guide grooves, so that the light source connector is attached to the holder. A luminous body device is provided. In such a light emitting device, attachment of the light source connector to the holder can be easily performed.
保持体の両面に溝が設けられ、 各溝の対向する側壁に一対の幹路部に 対応する長手方向に延在するガイド溝が設けられるようにすると、 一対 の幹路部をスライドさせてガイ ド溝に嵌め込むことで、 保持体の両面の 各々に光源連結体を取り付けて、 保持体の両面側に光を放射することが 可能となる。  Grooves are provided on both sides of the holding body, and guide grooves extending in the longitudinal direction corresponding to the pair of trunk roads are provided on opposing side walls of each groove. By fitting into the groove, it is possible to attach the light source connector to each of both sides of the holder and to emit light to both sides of the holder.
本発明の更に別の側面に基づくと、 複数の光源を電気的に接続して光 源連結体を形成するための所定のパ夕一ンを有するテープ状のパターン 化導体であって、 幅方向に互いに離間され長手方向に延在する 3以上の 幹路部と、 隣接する幹路部間において長手方向に配置された、 光源との 電気的接続のための複数の光源取り付け部と、 複数の光源取付部を長手 方向に連絡する連絡路部と、 連絡路部の各々を幅方向に挟む幹路部に連 絡するべく幅方向に延在する複数の枝路部とを含むことを特徴とするテ ープ状パターン化導体が提供される。 このようなパターン化導体を用い ることにより、 光源が複数列に配列された光源連結体を容易に形成する ことができ、 生産性が向上する。  According to still another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a tape-shaped patterned conductor having a predetermined pattern for electrically connecting a plurality of light sources to form a light source connection body, comprising: Three or more trunks that are spaced apart from each other in the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of light source mounting portions for electrical connection with a light source, which are arranged in the longitudinal direction between the adjacent trunks, A communication path for connecting the light source mounting section in the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of branch sections extending in the width direction so as to communicate with the trunk path sandwiching each of the connection paths in the width direction. A tape-shaped patterned conductor is provided. By using such a patterned conductor, a light source connected body in which the light sources are arranged in a plurality of rows can be easily formed, and the productivity is improved.
本発明の更に別の側面によると、 複数の光源を電気的に接続してなる 光源連結体を複数含む発光体装置であって、これら光源連結体の各々は、 複数の光源を連結するべく光源の配列方向に延在する接続導体構造を含 み、 該接続導体構造は、 所定のパターンが形成された概ね平板なパター ン化導体の所要の部分を切除することで光源を互いに並列に接続するよ うに形成されており、 複数の光源連結体は幅方向に配列され、 隣接する 光源連結体の接続導体構造同士が接続されることで、 複数の光源連結体 が直列接続されていることを特徴とする発光体装置が提供される。 この ようにして、 光源連結体を用いてマトリックス状に光源が接続された発 光体装置を形成することができる。 このような発光体装置は、 一つの光 源が故障して電流を流さなくなっても他の光源に与える影響が小さいた め、 例えば信号灯などに適している。 According to still another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a light emitting device including a plurality of light source connected bodies each of which is electrically connected to a plurality of light sources, wherein each of the light source connected bodies is a light source for connecting a plurality of light sources. The connection conductor structure includes a connection conductor structure extending in the direction in which the light sources are arranged, and the connection conductor structure connects the light sources in parallel with each other by cutting off a required portion of a substantially flat patterned conductor on which a predetermined pattern is formed. The plurality of light source connected bodies are arranged in the width direction, and are adjacent to each other. A light emitting device characterized in that a plurality of light source connected bodies are connected in series by connecting the connection conductor structures of the light source connected bodies. In this way, it is possible to form a light emitter device in which light sources are connected in a matrix using the light source connector. Such a luminous device is suitable for, for example, a signal light, because even if one light source fails and current stops flowing, the influence on other light sources is small.
光源の各々が L E Dからなり、 各 L E Dに直列に抵抗が接続されてい ると、 一つの L E Dが短絡故障してもそれに直列に接続された抵抗によ つて電圧が維持されるため、 短絡故障した L E Dと並列に接続された L E Dも発光を続けることができ、 大幅な光量の低下を防止することがで さる。  If each of the light sources consists of LEDs, and if a resistor is connected in series with each LED, even if one LED is short-circuited, the voltage is maintained by the resistor connected in series with it, resulting in a short-circuit failure The LED connected in parallel with the LED can also continue to emit light, preventing a significant decrease in light quantity.
本発明の別の側面によると、 複数の光源を電気的に接続してなる光源 連結体であって、 光源連結体は、 複数の光源を連結するべく光源の配列 方向に延在する接続導体構造を含み、 該接続導体構造は、 所定のパター ンが形成された概ね平板なパターン化導体の所要の部分を切除すること で形成されており、 パターン化導体は長寸のテ一プ状をなし、 且つ、 光 源との電気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複数の光源取り付け部 と、 これら光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、 該連絡路 部及び光源取り付け部を幅方向に挟んで両側に配置され長手方向に延在 する一対の幹路部と、 該幹路部及び連絡路部を幅方向に連絡する複数の 枝路部とを有し、 一対の幹路部の間に並列に接続された複数の光源を含 む光源並列接続体が複数個形成されるように枝路部及び連絡路部の一部 が切除されており、 これら光源並列接続体が直列に接続されるように、 一対の幹路部の一部が切断されていることを特徴とする光源連結体が提 供される。 これによると、 電気的にはマトリックス状に接続され且つ空 間的には一列に配列された光源を含む光源連結体を提供することができ る。 According to another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a light source connector formed by electrically connecting a plurality of light sources, wherein the light source connector is a connection conductor structure extending in a direction in which the light sources are arranged to connect the plurality of light sources. The connection conductor structure is formed by cutting off a required portion of a substantially flat patterned conductor on which a predetermined pattern is formed, and the patterned conductor has a long tape shape. A plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with a light source; a communication path portion connecting the light source mounting portions in a longitudinal direction; and a communication path portion and a light source mounting portion. A pair of trunk roads, each of which has a pair of trunk roads disposed on both sides of the width direction and extending in the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of branch roads connecting the trunk roads and the communication roads in the width direction; Light source parallel connection including multiple light sources connected in parallel between sections A part of the branch path and a part of the communication path are cut off so that a plurality of bodies are formed, and a part of a pair of trunk paths is cut so that these light source parallel connection bodies are connected in series. There is provided a light source connected body characterized in that: According to this, it is possible to provide a light source connected body including light sources that are electrically connected in a matrix and spatially arranged in a line. You.
光源の各々が L E Dからなる場合、 隣接する光源並列接続体に含まれ る L E Dの接続の向きが逆になつており、 それによつて隣接する光源並 列接続体の電気的に上流側の光源並列接続体に含まれる L E Dのカソー ドと下流側の光源並列接続体に含まれる L E Dのアノードとがー対の幹 路部の一方を介して接続されており、 一対の幹路部は、 隣接する光源並 列接続体のうち上流側の光源並列接続体に含まれる L E Dのアノードと 下流側の光源並列接続体に含まれる L E Dの力ソードとが分離されるよ うに且つ各 L E Dの両端が短絡しないように切断されていると、 上記し たような光源連結体を容易に形成することができる。  When each of the light sources consists of LEDs, the connection direction of the LEDs included in the adjacent light source parallel connection is reversed, so that the light source parallel upstream of the adjacent light source parallel connection is electrically connected. The cathode of the LED included in the connection body and the anode of the LED included in the parallel connection of the light source on the downstream side are connected via one of the pair of trunk roads, and the pair of trunk roads are adjacent to each other. In the parallel light source connection, the anode of the LED included in the upstream parallel light source is separated from the power source of the LED included in the downstream parallel light source, and both ends of each LED are not short-circuited. When cut as described above, the light source connected body as described above can be easily formed.
あるいは、 隣接する光源並列接続体の電気的に上流側の光源並列接続 体に含まれる L E Dのカソ一ドと下流側の光源並列接続体に含まれる L E Dのアノードとを接続するべく一対の幹路部の一部が枝路部または Z 及び光源取付部を介して互いに接続されており、 一対の幹路部は、 隣接 する光源並列接続体のうち上流側の光源並列接続体に含まれる L E Dの アノードと下流側の光源並列接続体に含まれる L E Dの力ソードとが分 離されるように且つ各 L E Dの両端が短絡しないように切断されている ようにすることで、上記したような光源連結体を形成することもできる。 本発明の更に別の側面によると、 概ね線状に配列された複数の光源を 連結してなる光源連結体を複数個含む発光体装置であって、 複数の光源 連結体は発光体装置の発光面の周縁部において周方向に概ね等間隔に配 置されたそれぞれの始点から中心部に向かって渦巻きをなすように配置 されていることを特徴とする発光体装置が提供される。 このようにする ことにより、 線状に配列された複数の光源を連結してなる光源連結体を 用いて面発光体を容易に形成することができる。 特に、 複数の光源連結 体が、 異なる光色の光を発する少なくとも 2つの光源連結体を含んでい る場合、 これら異なる光色の光源を概ね均一に混在配置することが可能 である。 Alternatively, a pair of trunk routes connect the LED cathode included in the light source parallel connection electrically upstream of the adjacent light source parallel connection and the anode of the LED included in the downstream light source parallel connection. Are connected to each other via a branch or Z and a light source mounting part, and a pair of trunk roads are connected to the LED included in the upstream light source parallel connection among the adjacent light source parallel connection. By separating the anode and the power source of the LED included in the downstream light source parallel connection body so that both ends of each LED are not short-circuited, the light source connection body as described above is used. Can also be formed. According to still another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a luminous body device including a plurality of light source connected bodies formed by connecting a plurality of light sources arranged in a substantially linear manner, wherein the plurality of light source connected bodies is a light emitting device. A luminous body device is provided, wherein the luminous body device is arranged so as to form a spiral from respective starting points arranged at substantially equal intervals in a circumferential direction at a peripheral portion of the surface toward a center portion. By doing so, the surface light emitter can be easily formed by using a light source connected body formed by connecting a plurality of light sources arranged linearly. In particular, the plurality of light source assemblies include at least two light source assemblies that emit light of different light colors. In such a case, it is possible to arrange the light sources of these different light colors almost uniformly mixedly.
本発明の更に別の側面に基づくと、 発光体装置であって、 各々複数の L E Dを並列接続してなる複数の L E D並列接続体を含み、 複数の L E D並列接続体は直列に接続されており、 各 L E Dに関連する抵抗が直列 接続されていることを特徴とする発光体装置が提供される。 これによ れば、 一つの L E Dが短絡故障をしてもその L E Dと直列に接続された 抵抗の両端に電圧が生成されるため、 その L E Dと並列に接続された他 の L E Dの両端は短絡されず、 発光が維持される。 従って、 1つの L E Dの短絡故障が発生しても、 全体の光量の大幅な低下を防止することが 可能である。  According to still another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a light emitting device, comprising: a plurality of LED parallel connected bodies each having a plurality of LEDs connected in parallel, wherein the plurality of LED parallel connected bodies are connected in series. A luminous device is provided, wherein resistors associated with each LED are connected in series. According to this, even if one LED is short-circuited, a voltage is generated across the resistor connected in series with that LED, so that the other LED connected in parallel with that LED is short-circuited. Instead, light emission is maintained. Therefore, even if a short-circuit failure of one LED occurs, it is possible to prevent a drastic decrease in the overall light quantity.
本発明の更に別の側面に基づくと、 複数の光源を電気的に接続して光 源連結体を形成するための所定のパターンを有するテープ状のパターン 化導体であって、 その長手方向の所定の箇所に伸縮可能部を有すること を特徴とするパターン化導体が提供される。 これによると、 光源連結体 形成後であっても伸縮可能部を変形させることにより光源の配置位置を 調整することができる。 また直線だけでなく例えば光源の配列方向をォ フセットしたり曲折させたりするなど、 様々な光源の配置が容易に可能 である。 伸縮可能部の変形を選択的に許可するための変形阻止部を有し ているとより好ましい。 これら伸縮可能部及び変形阻止部が打ち抜き加 ェ (穴抜き加工ともいう) により形成されたものであると、 容易に且つ 効率よく形成できるため好ましい。 その場合、 変形阻止部を切除するこ とで伸縮可能部の変形が可能となるようにすると、 伸縮可能部の変形を 容易に許可することができるため望ましい。 パターン化導体が長手方向 に概ね平行に延在する一対の幹路部を有し、 複数の光源がこれら一対の 幹路部間に接続される場合、 伸縮可能部及び変形阻止部は、 一対の幹路 部の所定部分を打ち抜き加工して形成することができる。 別の方法とし て、 伸縮可能部がパターン化導体の幅方向に延在する少なくとも一つの ひだ状部を有するものとすることもできる。 According to still another aspect of the present invention, there is provided a tape-shaped patterned conductor having a predetermined pattern for forming a light source connection by electrically connecting a plurality of light sources, the tape-shaped patterned conductor having a predetermined lengthwise direction. A patterned conductor characterized by having a stretchable portion at the position (1). According to this, even after the light source connector is formed, the arrangement position of the light source can be adjusted by deforming the extendable portion. In addition, various light sources can be easily arranged, for example, by offsetting or bending the arrangement direction of the light sources as well as straight lines. It is more preferable to have a deformation preventing portion for selectively allowing deformation of the extendable portion. It is preferable that the stretchable portion and the deformation preventing portion are formed by a punching process (also referred to as a punching process) because they can be easily and efficiently formed. In this case, it is preferable that the deformable portion be deformable by removing the deformation preventing portion, because the deformable portion can be easily deformed. When the patterned conductor has a pair of trunks extending substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction, and when a plurality of light sources are connected between the pair of trunks, the stretchable portion and the deformation preventing portion are formed by a pair of trunks. Trunk road A predetermined portion of the portion can be formed by punching. Alternatively, the stretchable portion may have at least one pleated portion extending in the width direction of the patterned conductor.
本発明の特徴、 目的及び作用効果は、 添付図面を参照しつつ好適実施 例について説明することにより一層明らかとなるだろう。 図面の簡単な説明  The features, objects and advantages of the present invention will become more apparent by describing a preferred embodiment with reference to the accompanying drawings. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE FIGURES
図 1は、 本発明による発光体装置を示す断面図である。  FIG. 1 is a sectional view showing a light emitting device according to the present invention.
図 2は、 図 1のライン I I 一 I Iに沿った断面図である。  FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view along the line II-II in FIG.
図 3は、 図 1に示した光源連結体を示す斜視図である。  FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the light source assembly shown in FIG.
図 4 a及び図 4 bは、 それぞれテ一プ状パターン化導体の実施例を示 す正面図である。  4a and 4b are front views showing examples of the tape-shaped patterned conductor, respectively.
図 5は、図 1に示した発光体装置の製造工程での状況を示す図である。 図 6は、 図 1に示した直並列式の発光体装置とするためのテープ状パ タ一ン化導体の二次加工の要領を示す図である。  FIG. 5 is a diagram showing a situation in a manufacturing process of the light emitting device shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a view showing a procedure of the secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor for forming the serial / parallel light emitting device shown in FIG.
図 7は、 並列式の発光体装置とするためのテープ状パターン化導体の 二次加工の要領を示す図である。  FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a procedure of secondary processing of a tape-shaped patterned conductor to form a parallel light emitting device.
図 8は、 直列式の発光体装置とするためのテープ状パターン化導体の 二次加工の要領を示す図である。  FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a procedure of secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor to form a serial light emitting device.
図 9は、 図 8に示した二次加工により得られた直列式の光源連結体を 取付ポ一ド (保持体) に取り付けた発光体装置を示す断面図である。 図 1 0は、 直列式の発光体装置とするためのテープ状パターン化導体 の二次加工の別の態様を示す図である。  FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view showing a light emitting device in which a series light source connected body obtained by the secondary processing shown in FIG. 8 is mounted on a mounting pod (holding body). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another embodiment of the secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor to form a serial light emitting device.
図 1 l a及び図 1 l bは、 それぞれ光源連結体の保持体に対する取り 付け形態の異なる例を示す断面図である。  FIG. 1la and FIG. 1lb are cross-sectional views showing different examples of the attachment form of the light source connector to the holder.
図 1 2は、 光源を平面上に配置した例を示す正面図である。 図 1 3は、 光源を曲面上に配置した例を示す断面図である。 FIG. 12 is a front view showing an example in which the light sources are arranged on a plane. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view showing an example in which light sources are arranged on a curved surface.
図 1 4は、 直列式の発光体装置とするために適したテープ状パターン 化導体の実施例を示す正面図である。  FIG. 14 is a front view showing an embodiment of a tape-shaped patterned conductor suitable for forming a serial light emitting device.
図 1 5は、 図 1 4に示したパタ一ン化導体の二次加工の要領を示す図 である。  FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the procedure of the secondary processing of the patterned conductor shown in FIG.
図 1 6は、本発明に基づく光源連結体の一実施例を示す斜視図である。 図 1 7 aは図 1 6のライン X V I I— X V I Iに沿ってとつた断面図 であり、 図 1 7 bはソケットピンを用いた実施例を示す図 1 7 aに対応 する断面図である。  FIG. 16 is a perspective view showing an embodiment of the light source assembly according to the present invention. FIG. 17a is a cross-sectional view taken along line XVI-XVII of FIG. 16, and FIG. 17b is a cross-sectional view corresponding to FIG. 17a showing an embodiment using socket pins.
図 1 8は、 図 1 6に示した光源連結体を形成するのに使用されるパ夕 ーン化導体の平面図である。  FIG. 18 is a plan view of a patterned conductor used to form the light source assembly shown in FIG.
図 1 9は、 光源が直並列に接続された光源連結体を形成するための図 1 8に示したパターン化導体の二次加工の要領を示す図である。  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a procedure of secondary processing of the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 18 for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in series and parallel.
図 2 0は、 光源が並列に接続された光源連結体を形成するための図 1 8に示したパターン化導体の二次加工の要領を示す図である。  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a procedure of the secondary processing of the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 18 for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in parallel.
図 2 1は、 光源が直列に接続された光源連結体を形成するための図 1 8に示したパターン化導体の二次加工の要領を示す図である。  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a procedure of secondary processing of the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 18 for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in series.
図 2 2は、 本発明に基づく光源連結体の別の実施例を示す斜視図であ る。  FIG. 22 is a perspective view showing another embodiment of the light source assembly according to the present invention.
図 2 3は、 L E Dが装着されていない状態のソケットを示す上面図で ある。  FIG. 23 is a top view showing the socket where no LED is mounted.
図 2 4は、 L E Dが装着された状態のソケットを示す側断面図である。 図 2 5は、 図 1 6に示した光源連結体を形成するのに使用されるパ夕 —ン化導体の平面図である。  FIG. 24 is a side sectional view showing the socket with the LED mounted. FIG. 25 is a plan view of a patterned conductor used to form the light source assembly shown in FIG.
図 2 6は、 光源が直並列に接続された光源連結体を形成するための図 2 5に示したパターン化導体の二次加工の要領を示す図である。 図 2 7は、 光源が並列に接続された光源連結体を形成するための図 2 5に示したパターン化導体の二次加工の要領を示す図である。 FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a procedure of secondary processing of the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 25 for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in series and parallel. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a procedure of secondary processing of the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 25 for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in parallel.
図 2 8は、 光源が直列に接続された光源連結体を形成するための図 2 5に示したパターン化導体の二次加工の要領を示す図である。  FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a procedure of secondary processing of the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 25 for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in series.
図 2 9は、 図 2 2に示した光源連結体の変形実施例を示す斜視図であ る。  FIG. 29 is a perspective view showing a modified example of the light source assembly shown in FIG.
図 3 0は、 図 2 2に示した光源連結体の別の変形実施例を示す斜視図 である。  FIG. 30 is a perspective view showing another modified example of the light source assembly shown in FIG.
図 3 1は、 図 2 2に示した光源連結体の更に別の変形実施例を示す斜 視図である。  FIG. 31 is a perspective view showing still another modified example of the light source assembly shown in FIG.
図 3 2は、 図 3 1に示した光源連結体を形成するのに使用されるバタ ーン化導体の平面図である。  FIG. 32 is a plan view of a patterned conductor used to form the light source assembly shown in FIG.
図 3 3は、 光源が直列接続された光源連結体を形成するのに適した、 図 1 8に示したパターン化導体の変形実施例を示す平面図である。  FIG. 33 is a plan view showing a modification of the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 18 suitable for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in series.
図 3 4は、 光源が直列接続された光源連結体を形成するのに適した、 図 2 5に示したパターン化導体の変形実施例を示す平面図である。  FIG. 34 is a plan view showing a modified embodiment of the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 25, which is suitable for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in series.
図 3 5は、連結部材の別の実施例を示す図 1 6と同様の斜視図である。 図 3 6は、 連結部材の更に別の実施例を示す図 1 6と同様の斜視図で ある。  FIG. 35 is a perspective view similar to FIG. 16 showing another embodiment of the connecting member. FIG. 36 is a perspective view similar to FIG. 16 showing still another embodiment of the connecting member.
図 3 7は、 図 3 6に示した光源連結体の下面図である。  FIG. 37 is a bottom view of the light source assembly shown in FIG.
図 3 8は、 図 3 6に示した光源連結体を保持体に取り付ける場合の実 施例を示す斜視図である。  FIG. 38 is a perspective view showing an embodiment in a case where the light source connector shown in FIG. 36 is attached to a holder.
図 3 9は、 図 3 6に示した光源連結体を用いた発光体装置の斜視図で ある。  FIG. 39 is a perspective view of a light emitting device using the light source assembly shown in FIG.
図 4 0は、 図 3 9のライン X L— X Lに沿った断面図である。  FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view along a line XL-XL in FIG.
図 4 1は、図 3 9に示した発光体装置を模式的に表した上面図である。 図 4 2 aは光源として発光素子アセンブリを用いた光源連結体の実施 例を示す斜視図であり、 図 4 2 bは図 4 2 aに示した発光素- リの回路図である。 FIG. 41 is a top view schematically showing the light emitting device shown in FIG. FIG. 42a is a perspective view showing an embodiment of a light source assembly using a light emitting element assembly as a light source, and FIG. 42b is a circuit diagram of the light emitting element shown in FIG. 42a.
図 4 3 aは光源として発光素子アセンブリを用いた光源連結体の別の 実施例を示す斜視図であり、 図 4 3 bは図 4 3 aに示した発光素子ァセ ンプリの回路図である。  FIG. 43 a is a perspective view showing another embodiment of a light source assembly using a light emitting device assembly as a light source, and FIG. 43 b is a circuit diagram of the light emitting device assembly shown in FIG. 43 a. .
図 4 4は、 本発明に基づくテープ状パターン化導体の別の実施例を示 す平面図である。  FIG. 44 is a plan view showing another embodiment of the tape-shaped patterned conductor according to the present invention.
図 4 5は、 図 4 4に示したパターン化導体を用いた光源連結体をそれ を支持する保持体とともに示した斜視図である。  FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing a light source connected body using the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 44 together with a holder for supporting the light source connected body.
図 4 6は、 図 4 5に示した光源連結体を長手方向に撓ませた状態を示 す模式図である。  FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram showing a state where the light source assembly shown in FIG. 45 is bent in the longitudinal direction.
図 4 7 aは本発明に基づくテープ状パターン化導体の別の実施例を示 す部分平面図であり、 図 4 7 bは図 4 7 aのライン A— Aに沿った断面 図、 図 4 7 cは図 4 7 aのパターン化導体の所要部分を切除して形成し た接続導体構造にチップ型 L E D及びチップ型抵抗を取り付けて形成し た光源連結体の部分平面図である。  FIG. 47 a is a partial plan view showing another embodiment of the tape-shaped patterned conductor according to the present invention, and FIG. 47 b is a cross-sectional view taken along line A—A of FIG. 7c is a partial plan view of a light source connector formed by attaching a chip-type LED and a chip-type resistor to a connection conductor structure formed by cutting out a required portion of the patterned conductor of FIG. 47a.
図 4 8 aは 3極 L E Dランプの正面図であり、 図 4 8 bは図 4 8 aに 示した 3極 L E Dランプの回路図である。  Fig. 48a is a front view of the three-pole LED lamp, and Fig. 48b is a circuit diagram of the three-pole LED lamp shown in Fig. 48a.
図 4 9は、 図 4 8 a及び図 4 8 bに示した 3極 L E Dランプを複数個 連結して光源連結体を形成するのに適したテープ状パターン化導体の平 面図である。  FIG. 49 is a plan view of a tape-shaped patterned conductor suitable for forming a light source connector by connecting a plurality of the three-pole LED lamps shown in FIGS. 48A and 48B.
図 5 0は、 図 4 9に示したパターン化導体を二次加工して所定の回路 パターンを有する接続導体構造を製造する際の切除要領の一例を示した 平面図である。  FIG. 50 is a plan view showing an example of a cutting procedure when the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 49 is subjected to secondary processing to produce a connection conductor structure having a predetermined circuit pattern.
図 5 1は、 図 5 0の二次加工要領に従って形成された接続導体構造を 用いて形成される光源連結体の回路図である。 Fig. 51 shows the connection conductor structure formed according to the secondary processing procedure shown in Fig. 50. FIG. 3 is a circuit diagram of a light source assembly formed using the light source assembly.
図 5 2 aは 4極 L E Dランプの上側斜視図であり、 図 5 2 bは図 5 2 aに示した 4極 L E Dランプの下側斜視図、 図 5 2 cはその回路図であ る。  Fig. 52a is a top perspective view of the 4-pole LED lamp, Fig. 52b is a bottom perspective view of the 4-pole LED lamp shown in Fig. 52a, and Fig. 52c is a circuit diagram thereof.
図 5 3は、 図 5 2 a〜図 5 2 cに示した 4極 L E Dランプを複数個連 結して光源連結体を形成するのに適したテープ状パターン化導体の平面 図である。  FIG. 53 is a plan view of a tape-shaped patterned conductor suitable for connecting a plurality of the 4-pole LED lamps shown in FIGS. 52a to 52c to form a light source assembly.
図 5 4は、 図 5 3に示したパターン化導体を二次加工して所定の回路 パターンを有する接続導体構造を製造する際の切除要領の一例を示した 平面図である。  FIG. 54 is a plan view showing an example of a cutting procedure when the patterned conductor shown in FIG. 53 is subjected to secondary processing to produce a connection conductor structure having a predetermined circuit pattern.
図 5 5は、 図 5 4に示したパターン化導体の二次加工要領に従って形 成された接続導体構造を用いて形成される光源連結体の回路図である。 図 5 6は、 本発明に基づくパターン化導体の別の実施例を示す部分平 面図である。  FIG. 55 is a circuit diagram of a light source assembly formed using the connection conductor structure formed according to the secondary processing procedure of the patterned conductor shown in FIG. FIG. 56 is a partial plan view showing another embodiment of the patterned conductor according to the present invention.
図 5 7は、 光源が直列に接続された光源連結体を形成し且つ幹路部を 放熱に使用することが可能な、 図 2 5に示したパターン化導体の二次加 ェの要領を示す図である。  Fig. 57 shows the procedure for the secondary application of the patterned conductor shown in Fig. 25, which can form a light source connected body in which light sources are connected in series and can use the trunk road for heat dissipation. FIG.
図 5 8 aは幅の狭い光源連結体を形成するのに適したパターン化導体 を示す平面図であり、 図 5 8 bは図 5 8 aに示したパターン化導体の端 部に導電ピンを接続するのを可能にするための端部導体を示す平面図で ある。  Figure 58a is a plan view showing a patterned conductor suitable for forming a narrow light source assembly, and Figure 58b is a diagram showing conductive pins at the ends of the patterned conductor shown in Figure 58a. FIG. 3 is a plan view showing an end conductor for enabling connection.
図 5 9は、 光源取付面に絶縁性シートが張り付けられた光源連結体を 示す斜視図である。  FIG. 59 is a perspective view showing a light source connected body in which an insulating sheet is attached to a light source mounting surface.
図 6 0 aは光源連結体の保持体への取り付け要領を示す部分斜視図で あり、 図 6 0 bは保持体に取り付けられた状態の光源連結体の断面図だ ある。 図 6 1は、 光源連結体の保持体への取り付けの別の実施態様を示す断 面図である。 FIG. 60a is a partial perspective view showing a procedure for attaching the light source connector to the holder, and FIG. 60b is a cross-sectional view of the light source connector attached to the holder. FIG. 61 is a cross-sectional view showing another embodiment of attachment of the light source connector to the holder.
図 6 2 a〜図 6 2 cは、 フォトエッチングを用いたパターン化導体及 び光源連結体の製造方法について説明するための模式図である。  FIGS. 62A to 62C are schematic diagrams for explaining a method of manufacturing a patterned conductor and a light source assembly using photoetching.
図 6 3 aは 2列に整列された光源を有する光源連結体を形成するのに 適したパターン化導体の部分平面図であり、 図 6 3 bはその二次加工の 一例を示す部分平面図である。  Fig. 63a is a partial plan view of a patterned conductor suitable for forming a light source assembly having light sources arranged in two rows, and Fig. 63b is a partial plan view showing an example of the secondary processing. It is.
図 6 4は、 4列に整列された光源を有する光源連結体を形成するのに 適したパターン化導体の部分平面図である。  FIG. 64 is a partial plan view of a patterned conductor suitable for forming a light source assembly having light sources arranged in four rows.
図 6 5は、 信号灯に用いるのに適した L E D回路の好適実施例を示す 回路図である。  FIG. 65 is a circuit diagram showing a preferred embodiment of an LED circuit suitable for use in a signal light.
図 6 6は、 信号灯に用いるのに適した L E D回路の別の好適実施例を 示す回路図である。  FIG. 66 is a circuit diagram showing another preferred embodiment of an LED circuit suitable for use in a signal light.
図 6 7は、 図 6 6に示したような電気接続形態を有する面発光体を光 源連結体を用いて形成する方法を示す模式図である。  FIG. 67 is a schematic view showing a method of forming a surface light-emitting body having an electrical connection form as shown in FIG. 66 by using a light source connection body.
図 6 8は、 図 6 5に示したような電気接続形態を有し且つ L E Dがー 列に配列された線発光体を提供する光源連結体の一実施例を示す模式的 な部分平面図である。  FIG. 68 is a schematic partial plan view showing one embodiment of a light source connecting body having the electric connection form shown in FIG. 65 and providing a linear light emitting body in which LEDs are arranged in a row. is there.
図 6 9は、 図 6 5に示したような電気接続形態を有し且つ L E Dがー 列に配列された線発光体を提供する光源連結体の別の実施例を示す模式 的な部分平面図である。  FIG. 69 is a schematic partial plan view showing another embodiment of the light source connecting body having the electric connection form shown in FIG. 65 and providing a line light emitting body in which LEDs are arranged in a row. It is.
図 7 0は、 パターン化導体の別の実施例を示す部分平面図である。 図 7 1は、 図 7 0に示したパターン化導体を用いて形成された光源連 結体の一例を示す部分平面図である。  FIG. 70 is a partial plan view showing another embodiment of the patterned conductor. FIG. 71 is a partial plan view showing an example of a light source assembly formed using the patterned conductor shown in FIG.
図 7 2 aは、 図 7 1に示した光源連結体を用いて形成される発光体装 置の模式図であり、 図 7 2 bは、 図 7 2 aのライン b— bに沿った断面 図である。 FIG. 72A is a schematic diagram of a light emitting device formed using the light source assembly shown in FIG. 71, and FIG. FIG.
図 7 3は、 図 5 6に示したパターン化導体の二次加工方法の別の例を 示す部分平面図である。  FIG. 73 is a partial plan view showing another example of the secondary processing method of the patterned conductor shown in FIG.
図 7 4は、 図 7 3に示した要領で二次加工されたパターン化導体を用 いて形成される光源連結体の部分平面図である。  FIG. 74 is a partial plan view of a light source assembly formed using the patterned conductor that has been subjected to the secondary processing in the manner shown in FIG.
図 7 5は、 各々図 6 5に示したような電気接続形態を有する 2列の L E Dを有する線発光体を提供する光源連結体の実施例を示す模式的な部 分平面図である。  FIG. 75 is a schematic partial plan view showing an embodiment of a light source assembly that provides a line light emitter having two rows of LEDs each having the electrical connection configuration shown in FIG.
図 7 6は、 光源連結体を複数用いて面発光体を形成するときの光源連 結体の好適配置例を示す模式図である。  FIG. 76 is a schematic diagram showing a preferred arrangement example of the light source couplers when a surface light emitter is formed by using a plurality of light source couplers.
図 7 7は、 光源連結体を複数用いて面発光体を形成するときの光源連 結体の別の好適配置例を示す模式図である。  FIG. 77 is a schematic diagram showing another preferred arrangement example of the light source couplers when the surface light emitter is formed by using a plurality of light source couplers.
図 7 8は、 光源連結体を複数用いて面発光体を形成するときの光源連 結体の更に別の好適配置例を示す模式図である。  FIG. 78 is a schematic diagram showing still another preferred arrangement example of the light source couplers when the surface light emitter is formed by using a plurality of light source couplers.
図 7 9は、 光源連結体の使用例を示す模式図である。  FIG. 79 is a schematic diagram showing an example of using the light source assembly.
図 8 0は、 本発明に基づく光源連結体を用いた車載用ランプを形成す るための発光体装置の実施例を示す斜視図である。  FIG. 80 is a perspective view showing an embodiment of a light emitting device for forming a vehicle-mounted lamp using the light source connector according to the present invention.
図 8 1は、 図 8 0の発光体装置に用いられた光源連結体の折り曲げ加 工前の状態を示す斜視図である。  FIG. 81 is a perspective view showing a state before the bending process of the light source unit used in the light emitting device of FIG.
図 8 2は、 図 8 1に示した光源連結体の端面図である。  FIG. 82 is an end view of the light source assembly shown in FIG.
図 8 3は、 図 8 1に示した光源連結体を形成するのに適したパターン 化導体の一実施例の部分平面図である。  FIG. 83 is a partial plan view of one embodiment of a patterned conductor suitable for forming the light source assembly shown in FIG.
図 8 4 aは、 L E D位置の調整を可能とするパターン化導体の別の実 施例を示す部分平面図であり、 図 8 4 bは使用状態において切除する部 分を斜線で例示した図 8 4 aと同様の図である。  Fig. 84a is a partial plan view showing another embodiment of the patterned conductor that enables the adjustment of the LED position. It is a figure similar to 4a.
図 8 5 a及び図 8 5 bは、 図 8 4 aに示したパターン化導体を用いて 形成された光源連結体の変形状態の例を示す部分平面図である。 Figures 85a and 85b show the results of using the patterned conductor shown in Figure 84a. FIG. 4 is a partial plan view showing an example of a deformed state of a formed light source assembly.
図 8 6 aは伸縮可能部を有するパターン化導体の更に別の実施例を示 す部分平面図であり、 図 8 6 bはそれを用いて形成した光源連結体の変 形状態の一例を示す部分平面図である。  FIG. 86a is a partial plan view showing still another embodiment of a patterned conductor having a stretchable portion, and FIG. 86b shows an example of a deformed state of a light source assembly formed using the same. It is a partial plan view.
図 8 7 aは伸縮可能部を有するパターン化導体の更に別の実施例を示 す部分平面図であり、 図 8 7 bは図 8 7 aの正面図、 図 8 7 cはこのパ 夕一ン化導体を用いた光源連結体の変形状態の一例を示す部分平面図で ある。  FIG. 87a is a partial plan view showing still another embodiment of a patterned conductor having a stretchable portion, FIG. 87b is a front view of FIG. 87a, and FIG. FIG. 5 is a partial plan view showing an example of a deformed state of a light source assembly using a conductive conductor.
図 8 8 aは伸縮可能部を有するパターン化導体の更に別の実施例を示 す部分平面図であり、 図 8 8 bは図 8 8 aの正面図、 図 8 8 cはこのパ ターン化導体を用いた光源連結体の変形状態の一例を示す部分平面図で ある。  FIG. 88 a is a partial plan view showing still another embodiment of a patterned conductor having a stretchable portion, FIG. 88 b is a front view of FIG. 88 a, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a partial plan view showing an example of a deformed state of a light source assembly using a conductor.
図 8 9 aはパターン化導体の更に別の実施例を示す部分平面図であり、 図 8 9 bは図 8 9 aのパターン化導体を用いた光源連結体を示す部分平 面図である。 発明を実施するための最良の形態  FIG. 89a is a partial plan view showing still another embodiment of the patterned conductor, and FIG. 89b is a partial plan view showing a light source assembly using the patterned conductor of FIG. 89a. BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
以下、 本発明の実施の態様を図面を参照して説明する。  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
図 1は、 本発明による発光体装置の好適実施例を示す正面断面図であ る。 図示されているように、 この発光体装置は光源として複数の発光ダ ィォ一ド (L E D ) 1を含み、 各 L E D 1は電気接続用の端子として 2 本の平行なリード線 3を有し、 パッケージ部 (本体部) 1 aが砲弹型を した、 いわゆる砲弾型 L E D (またはランプ型 L E Dともいう) となつ ている。 これら光源 1はそのリ一ド線 3に直交する向きに並んで取付ポ ード (保持体) 2の表面に列設されている。 この複数の光源 1はその配 列方向に延在する接続導体構造 4により直並列、 すなわち複数の光源 1 を直列に接続したものがさらに並列に接続されて光源連結体 6を形成し ている。 このような直並列構造は、 直列接続される光源の数を適切に設 定することで降圧トランスなどを用いることなく商用電源に接続できる だけでなく、 そのような光源直列体 (直列ブロック) を複数並列接続す ることで任意の数の光源を使用することが可能であるという利点がある 図示されているように、 接続導体構造 4は、 それぞれ所定の光源 1の リ一ド線 3に接続されるとともに電源電圧が印加される長手方向に延在 する第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 1、 1 2と、 隣接する光源 1のリード線 3 を接続する複数の接続片 5とを有している。 各接続片 5は両端に一対の 接続部 9を有しており、 隣接する光源 1のリード線 3の基部 3 aにこの 一対の接続部 9を介して結合している。 第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 1、 1 2はそれぞれ枝路部 1 3、 1 4及びそれに繋がった接続部 9を介して、 関連する光源 1のリ一ド線 3の基部 3 aに結合じている。 また光源 1の 本体部 1 a側の第 1の幹路部 1 1には幅方向に延在する切れ込み (スリ ット) 1 5が設けられ、 幹路部 1 1は蛇行している。 或いは、 光源の取 付位置と長手方向に対応した部分が凸状に湾曲しているとも言える。 こ のようにして形成された光源連結体 6を取付ポ一ド 2に固定するため、 取付ポ一ド 2に開設された取付穴 7にリード線 3の先端部 3 bが差し込 まれる。 FIG. 1 is a front sectional view showing a preferred embodiment of a light emitting device according to the present invention. As shown, the light emitting device includes a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) 1 as light sources, each LED 1 having two parallel leads 3 as terminals for electrical connection. The package part (body part) 1a is a so-called shell-type LED (or lamp-type LED) with a gun-shaped configuration. These light sources 1 are arranged side by side in a direction orthogonal to the lead wire 3 on the surface of a mounting port (holding body) 2. The plurality of light sources 1 are connected in series by the connecting conductor structure 4 extending in the arrangement direction. Are connected in series to form a light source connector 6. Such a series-parallel structure not only allows connection to a commercial power supply without using a step-down transformer, etc., by appropriately setting the number of light sources connected in series, but also enables such a light source series body (series block) to be connected. There is an advantage that any number of light sources can be used by connecting a plurality of parallel connections. As shown in the figure, the connection conductor structure 4 is connected to the lead wire 3 of the predetermined light source 1. And a plurality of connecting pieces 5 for connecting the lead wires 3 of the adjacent light source 1 with first and second trunk paths 11 and 12 extending in the longitudinal direction to which the power supply voltage is applied. are doing. Each connecting piece 5 has a pair of connecting portions 9 at both ends, and is connected to the base 3 a of the lead wire 3 of the adjacent light source 1 via the pair of connecting portions 9. The first and second trunk roads 11 1 and 12 are connected to the base 3 a of the lead wire 3 of the associated light source 1 via the branch roads 13 and 14 and the connection 9 connected thereto, respectively. Are combined. Further, a slit 15 extending in the width direction is provided in the first main road section 11 on the main body section 1a side of the light source 1, and the main road section 11 is meandering. Alternatively, it can be said that a portion corresponding to the mounting position of the light source and the longitudinal direction is convexly curved. In order to fix the light source connector 6 formed in this way to the mounting port 2, the tip 3b of the lead wire 3 is inserted into the mounting hole 7 formed in the mounting port 2.
図 2は図 1のライン I I 一 I Iに沿った断面図であり、 図 3は、 図 1 に示した光源連結体 6を示す斜視図である。 図 3では、 見やすくするた め光源 1の本体部 1 aは破線で示してある。 また同図には、 後に詳述す る接続導体構造 4の元となるテープ状パターン化導体 1 6も併せて破線 で示してある。  FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II-II of FIG. 1, and FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the light source assembly 6 shown in FIG. In FIG. 3, the main body 1a of the light source 1 is shown by a broken line for easy viewing. In the same figure, the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 which is the basis of the connection conductor structure 4 described in detail later is also indicated by a broken line.
図 3によく示されているように本実施例では、 各接続部 9は板状部分 を有しており、 この板状部分を対応するリード線 3を挟み込むように折 り曲げてかしめることによってリード線 3に固着される。 なお、 接続部 9は、 かしめの他に弾性係合片による係着、 スポット溶接など種々の形 態をとることができるが、 かしめによる場合、 順送プレスにより連続的 に処理が可能である、 はんだの使用をなくすことができる、 熱により光 源 (L E D ) 1に悪影響を及ぼす心配がないといった利点がある。 As is well shown in FIG. 3, in this embodiment, each connecting portion 9 has a plate-like portion, and the plate-like portion is folded so as to sandwich the corresponding lead wire 3. It is fixed to the lead wire 3 by bending and caulking. In addition, the connecting portion 9 can take various forms other than caulking, such as engagement by an elastic engagement piece and spot welding.In the case of caulking, it can be processed continuously by a progressive press. This has the advantage that the use of solder can be eliminated and there is no fear that the light source (LED) 1 will be adversely affected by heat.
図 2及び図 3によく示されているように、 接続導体構造 4は第 1の幹 路部 1 1の切れ込み 1 5の底部に概ね対応する位置及び枝路部 1 4と接 続片 5との境界に概ね対応する位置において長手方向に延在する折り曲 げ線に沿って折り曲げられている。 それにより第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 1 、 1 2は、 リード線 3に沿った接続部 9に対し図 2の断面において所 定の角度をなしている。 このようにして接続導体構造 4の幅方向の断面 形状(即ち長手方向に対して垂直な平面で切ったときに現れる断面形状) を屈曲させることにより、 光源本体部 1 aと第 1の幹路部 1 1 との干渉 を防ぐことができるだけでなく、 接続導体構造 4に絶縁処理を施さない 単純な構成でも第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 1 、 1 2が光源 1のリード 3に 直接接触レて回路内において意図しない短絡が生じるのを避けることが できる。 接続導体構造 4を絶縁材料で被覆せず露出させたままとするこ とで、 接続導体構造 4による放熱効果が高まり、 光源 1を高密度に配置 した場合にも好適に対応することができるという利点も得られる。 また 長手方向の湾曲が規制されるため、 取付ポ一ド 2に取り付ける際の作業 性を高めることができる。 更に、 リード線 3の先端部 3 bが取付ボード 2側に突出して、 取付ポード 2の取付穴 7への挿入が可能となる。  As is well shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the connecting conductor structure 4 has a position substantially corresponding to the bottom of the cut 15 of the first trunk section 11 and the branch section 14 and the connecting piece 5. Are bent along a bending line extending in the longitudinal direction at a position substantially corresponding to the boundary of the arrow. Thereby, the first and second trunk roads 11 1 and 12 form a predetermined angle in the cross section of FIG. 2 with respect to the connection 9 along the lead wire 3. By bending the cross-sectional shape in the width direction of the connecting conductor structure 4 (that is, the cross-sectional shape that appears when cut along a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal direction) in this manner, the light source body 1a and the first trunk path are bent. Not only can it prevent interference with part 1 1, but also the first and second trunk sections 1 1, 1 2 can be directly connected to the lead 3 of the light source 1 even in a simple configuration without insulation treatment on the connection conductor structure 4. Unintended short circuit in the circuit due to contact can be avoided. By leaving the connecting conductor structure 4 exposed without covering it with an insulating material, the heat dissipation effect of the connecting conductor structure 4 is enhanced, and it is possible to suitably cope with the case where the light sources 1 are densely arranged. Benefits are also obtained. In addition, since the bending in the longitudinal direction is restricted, the workability when mounting to the mounting pod 2 can be improved. Further, the tip 3b of the lead wire 3 projects toward the mounting board 2, so that the mounting pod 2 can be inserted into the mounting hole 7.
本発明に基づくと、 上記したような接続導体構造 4は、 好適には導電 性平板材料のプレス加工 (穴抜き加工) により直列、 並列及び直並列で 兼用可能な回路パターンが予め形成されたテープ状パターン化導体 1 6 を光源 1と組み付ける際に所要の部分を切除する二次加工を施すことで 得られる。 後に詳述するが、 テープ状パターン化導体 1 6に対する切除 部分を変更することで光源 1を直列、 並列または直並列のいずれに接続 することも可能である。 According to the present invention, the connection conductor structure 4 as described above is preferably a tape in which a circuit pattern that can be used in series, parallel, and series / parallel is formed in advance by pressing (piercing) a conductive flat plate material. When the patterned conductor 16 is assembled with the light source 1, can get. As will be described in detail later, the light source 1 can be connected in series, in parallel, or in series-parallel by changing the cut portion of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16.
図 4 aは、 二次加工前のテ一プ状パターン化導体 1 6の一実施例を示 す正面図である。 本図において、 上記した接続導体構造と対応する箇所 には同じ符号を付して示した。 図 4 aにおいて、 光源 1のリード線 3に 結合される複数の接続部 9はリード線 3と結合するべく折り曲げられる 前の状態で示されている。 これら接続部 9は長手方向に延在する連絡路 部 1 0によって連結されており、 この連絡路部 1 0及び接続部 9を幅方 向 (図の上下方向) に挟んで第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 1、 1 2がテープ 状パターン化導体 1 6の両側に配置されている。 また第 1及び第 2の幹 路部 1 1、 1 2と連絡路部 1 0とは、 複数の枝路部 1 3、 1 4によって 幅方向に連絡されている。  FIG. 4A is a front view showing one embodiment of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 before the secondary processing. In the figure, the same reference numerals are given to portions corresponding to the above-described connection conductor structure. In FIG. 4 a, the plurality of connection portions 9 connected to the lead wire 3 of the light source 1 are shown before being bent to be connected to the lead wire 3. These connecting parts 9 are connected by a connecting path part 10 extending in the longitudinal direction. The first and second connecting parts 9 and the connecting part 9 are sandwiched in the width direction (vertical direction in the figure). The trunk sections 11 and 12 are arranged on both sides of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16. The first and second trunk roads 11 and 12 and the communication road 10 are connected in the width direction by a plurality of branch roads 13 and 14.
このテープ状パターン化導体 1 6は、 前記の通り用途に応じて所要の 部分を切除する二次加工を施すことで所定の接続パターンの回路を有す る接続導体構造 4となるが、 この二次加工は、 ラジアルテーピングによ り保持された光源 1とテープ状パターン化導体 1 6とを順送プレス機に より組み付ける際に同時に行うと製造工程を簡略化できるため好適であ る。 そのため図 4 aに示したテープ状パターン化導体 1 6では、 テ一プ 状パターン化導体 1 6の所定位置に光源 1が適切に組み付けられるよう 光源 1とテープ状パターン化導体 1 6とを整合させる位置決めのために、 光源本体部 1 aと相反する側の第 2の幹路部 1 2に順送プレス機 (図示 せず)のパイロットピンに係合するパイロット穴 1 8が設けられている。 別の方法として、 図 4 bに示したテープ状パターン化導体 1 6 ' のよう に第 2の幹路部 1 2に連結部 2 0を介して接続された緣桟部 1 9を設け、 そこに順送プレス機のパイロットピンに係合するパイロット穴 1 8を形 成してもよいが、 図 4 aの場合と比べて縁桟部 1 9の分だけ材料を多く 必要とする。 As described above, the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 is subjected to the secondary processing of cutting out a required portion according to the use as described above, thereby forming a connection conductor structure 4 having a circuit of a predetermined connection pattern. It is preferable that the subsequent processing be performed at the same time when the light source 1 held by radial taping and the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 are assembled by a progressive press machine, because the manufacturing process can be simplified. For this reason, in the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 shown in Fig. 4a, the light source 1 and the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 are aligned so that the light source 1 can be properly assembled at a predetermined position of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16. For positioning, a pilot hole 18 for engaging with a pilot pin of a progressive press (not shown) is provided in the second main path section 12 on the side opposite to the light source body section 1a. . As another method, as shown in a tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 ′ shown in FIG. 4B, a cross section 19 connected to the second main road section 12 via a connecting section 20 is provided. Pilot hole 18 to be engaged with pilot pin of progressive press machine Although it may be made, more material is required for the edge 19 than in the case of Fig. 4a.
テープ状パターン化導体 1 6は、 導電性平板材料のプレス加工 (より 詳細には穴抜き加工) により得ることができる。 具体的には、 まず連絡 路部 1 0からリード線 3に沿う方向に突出するように接続部 9を形成す るとともに連絡路部 1 0と第 1の幹路部 1 1とを区画するとともにそれ らを連絡する枝路部 1 3を定める切り抜き穴 2 1が形成される。 この切 り抜き穴 2 1により接続部 9をかしめる工作具が差し込まれるスペース が確保される。 また第 1の幹路部 1 1には切れ込み 1 5が形成される。 更に連絡路部 1 0と第 2の幹路部 1 2とを区画するとともにそれらを連 結する枝路部 1 4を定める切り抜き穴 2 2が形成される。 第 1及び第 2 の幹路部 1 1 、 1 2と連絡路部 1 0とを接続する枝路部 1 3、 1 4は切 除時にリード線 3を切断しないようにリード線 3とずれた位置に形成す ると好適である。 それにより、 リード線 3を例えば適度な長さ取付ポ一 ド 2側に突出させて、 できあがった光源連結体 6を取付ボード 2に取り 付ける際に取付ポード 2に設けた取付穴 7に挿入して取り付けの安定化 を図ることができる (図 1参照)。  The tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 can be obtained by pressing (more specifically, punching) a conductive flat plate material. Specifically, first, the connecting portion 9 is formed so as to protrude from the connecting portion 10 in the direction along the lead wire 3, and the connecting portion 10 and the first trunk portion 11 are defined. A cutout hole 21 defining a branch 13 connecting them is formed. The cutout hole 21 secures a space into which the tool for caulking the connection portion 9 is inserted. A cut 15 is formed in the first trunk road 11. Further, a cutout hole 22 that defines the connection path portion 10 and the second main road portion 12 and defines a branch path portion 14 that connects them is formed. The branch sections 13 and 14 connecting the first and second trunk sections 11 and 12 and the communication section 10 are displaced from the lead 3 so as not to cut the lead 3 when cutting. It is preferable to form it at the position. As a result, the lead wire 3 is made to protrude, for example, toward the mounting port 2 having an appropriate length, and inserted into the mounting hole 7 provided in the mounting port 2 when the completed light source connector 6 is mounted on the mounting board 2. To stabilize the mounting (see Fig. 1).
テープ状パターン化導体 1 6は、可撓性を有し、屈曲自在であるため、 コイル状に巻き取ったり、 あるいはつづら折りに折り畳むことができ、 保管 ·輸送 ·梱包が容易である。  Since the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 is flexible and bendable, it can be wound into a coil or folded in a zigzag manner, and can be easily stored, transported, and packed.
図 5は、 図 1に示した発光体装置の製造工程での状況を示している。 光源 1は、 一対のリ一ド線 3が同一方向に引き出された砲弹型の L E D ランプであり、 ラジアルテーピングによりリード線 3に直交する向きに 並んで配置されている。 ラジアルテーピングのためのキヤリァテープ 2 5は互いに貼り合わされる一対のテープ材 2 5 a、 2 5 bからなり、 両 テープ材 2 5 a、 2 5 b間にリード線 3を挟み込むことで光源 1の固定 がなされる。 キャリアテープ 2 5にはテ一プ状パ夕一ン化導体 1 6と同 様にパイロット穴 2 6が設けられており、 テープ状パターン化導体 1 6 とキヤリァテープ 2 5のパイロット穴 1 8、 2 6を整合させることによ り、 テープ状パターン化導体 1 6に形成された接続部 9とキャリアテー プ 2 5により保持された光源 1のリード線 3との軸方向位置が整合され る。 こうしてテープ 2 5に保持された状態のままのリ一ド線 3に対して 接続部 9を係着し、テープ状パターン化導体 1 6の二次加工がなされる。 尚、 リード線 3と接続部 9との係着の際には光源 1の本体部 1 aとテ一 プ状パターン化導体 1 6の第 1の幹路部 1 1とが干渉しないよう、 テ一 プ状パターン化導体 1 6を長手方向折り曲げ線に沿って折り曲げておく 必要がある。 FIG. 5 shows a situation in a manufacturing process of the light emitting device shown in FIG. The light source 1 is a gun-shaped LED lamp in which a pair of lead wires 3 are drawn in the same direction, and is arranged side by side in a direction perpendicular to the lead wires 3 by radial taping. The carrier tape 25 for radial taping consists of a pair of tapes 25a and 25b that are attached to each other. Is made. The carrier tape 25 is provided with pilot holes 26 in the same manner as the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16, and the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 and the pilot holes 18, 2 of the carrier tape 25 are provided. By aligning 6, the connection portion 9 formed on the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 and the lead wire 3 of the light source 1 held by the carrier tape 25 are aligned in the axial direction. In this way, the connection portion 9 is engaged with the lead wire 3 held in the tape 25, and the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 is subjected to the secondary processing. When the lead wire 3 and the connecting portion 9 are engaged with each other, the main body 1 a of the light source 1 and the first trunk 11 of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 do not interfere with each other. It is necessary to bend the loop-shaped patterned conductor 16 along the longitudinal bending line.
上記したようなテープ状パターン化導体 1 6と光源 1との接続は、 コ ィル状に巻いたテープ状パターン化導体 1 6を用意し、 順送プレス機に おいて巻きをほどきながら行うことが作業効率及び取り扱いの容易さな どの点から好適である。 本発明によるテ一プ状パターン化導体 1 6は上 記したように第 1の幹路部 1 1に幅方向の切れ込み 1 5が形成されて、 第 1の幹路部 1 1が複数の凸状湾曲部を有しているため、 コイル状に卷 かれていても、 光源 1のリ一ド線 3との係着のために巻きがほどかれた 部分の凸状湾曲部だけを個別に折り曲げることができ、 それによつて光 源 1の本体部 1 aとテープ状パターン化導体 1 6の第 1の幹路部 1 1と が干渉するのを防ぐことが可能となっている。  The connection between the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 and the light source 1 as described above is performed while preparing a coil-shaped tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 and unwinding it in a progressive press machine. This is preferable in terms of work efficiency and ease of handling. In the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 according to the present invention, as described above, the notch 15 in the width direction is formed in the first trunk road portion 11, and the first trunk road portion 11 has a plurality of convex portions. Even if it is wound in a coil shape, only the convex curved portion of the part that is unwound to engage with the lead wire 3 of the light source 1 is individually bent because it has a curved shape. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the main body 1a of the light source 1 from interfering with the first trunk road 11 of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16.
図 6は、 図 1に示した直並列式の発光体装置とするためのテープ状パ ターン化導体 1 6の二次加工の要領を示す図である。 この図において、 切除部分は斜線を付して示してある。 図示されているように、 同じ光源 1のリード線 3が結合される一対の接続部 9の間の連絡路部 1 0の部分 2 7が切除される。 そして光源 1が直列に接続される範囲 (直列ブロッ ク) の端部に位置する枝路部 1 3、 1 4を除いた残りの枝路部 1 3、 1 4が切除されると共に、 隣り合う直列ブロックを繋ぐ連絡路部 1 0の部 分 2 8が切除される。 このようにして、 図 1に示した接続導体構造 4の 例えば接続片 5がテープ状パターン化導体 1 6の連絡路部 1 0から形成 されることが理解されるだろう。 また上記したように、 二次加工におい てテープ状パターン化導体 1 6 (または接続導体構造 4 ) は連絡路部 1 0の両側の長手方向折り曲げ線に沿って折り曲げられ、 好適には接続部 9においてかしめによりリード線 3に固着される。 折り曲げ加工が容易 なように、 あらかじめテープ状パターン化導体 1 6に折り曲げ線に沿つ たノッチを形成しておいてもよい。 また、 テープ状パターン化導体 1 6 は適切な箇所で切断し、 形成された光源連結体 6が取り扱い容易な適切 な長さとなるようにするとよい。 このような切除、 折り曲げ、 かしめ及 び切断といった加工工程を含み得るテ一プ状パターン化導体 1 6の二次 加工は、 順送プレス機により行うことができる。 なお、 順送プレス機の パイロットピンに係合するパイロット穴 1 8が設けられた第 2の幹路部 1 2側におけるテープ状パターン化導体 1 6の折り曲げは、 最終工程で 行うとよい。 或いは、 できあがった光源連結体 6を順送プレス機から取 り出した後に行ってもよい。 FIG. 6 is a view showing a procedure of secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 for making the serial-parallel light emitting device shown in FIG. In this figure, the resected part is shown with diagonal lines. As shown, a portion 27 of the communication path portion 10 between a pair of connection portions 9 to which the lead wires 3 of the same light source 1 are connected is cut off. The range in which light source 1 is connected in series (series block The remaining branches 13 and 14 except for the branches 13 and 14 located at the end of (h) are cut off, and the connection 10 that connects the adjacent series blocks 2 8 is resected. In this way, it will be understood that, for example, the connecting piece 5 of the connecting conductor structure 4 shown in FIG. 1 is formed from the communication path 10 of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16. As described above, in the secondary processing, the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 (or the connection conductor structure 4) is bent along the longitudinal bending lines on both sides of the communication path 10, and preferably, the connection 9 Is fixed to the lead wire 3 by swaging. A notch along the bending line may be formed in advance on the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 so as to facilitate bending. Further, the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 is preferably cut at an appropriate location so that the formed light source connector 6 has an appropriate length that is easy to handle. The secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 which can include such processing steps as cutting, bending, caulking, and cutting can be performed by a progressive press machine. The bending of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 on the side of the second main path section 12 provided with the pilot hole 18 for engaging with the pilot pin of the progressive press machine may be performed in the final step. Alternatively, it may be performed after taking out the completed light source assembly 6 from the progressive press.
同じ光源 1のリード線 3に対する接続部 9の間の連絡路部 1 0の部分 2 7はいずれの接続形態でも切り離す必要があり、 この部分 2 7をテー プ状パターン化導体 1 6の加工段階で設けないものとしても良いが、 こ の部分 2 7を残しておくことで接続部 9のリード線 3に対する固着工程 において接続部 9を安定させる利点が得られる。  The part 27 of the connecting part 10 between the connecting part 9 to the lead wire 3 of the same light source 1 must be separated in any connection form, and this part 27 is processed at the stage of processing the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16. However, leaving this portion 27 has an advantage of stabilizing the connection portion 9 in the step of fixing the connection portion 9 to the lead wire 3.
図 7は、 並列式の発光体装置とするためのテープ状パターン化導体 1 6の二次加工の要領を示す図である。 前記と同様に切除部分を斜線を付 して示しており、 同じ光源 1のリード線 3に対する一対の接続部 9間の 連絡路部 1 0の部分 2 7が切除される他に、 隣り合う光源 1のリード線 3に対する接続部 9を連絡する連絡路部 1 0の部分 2 9が切除される。 また前記と同様に連絡路部 1 0の両側の長手方向の折り曲げ線に沿って 折り曲げられると共に、 接続部 9がかしめによりリ一ド線 3に固着され る。この接続態様では枝路部 1 3、 1 4は切除されることなく残される。 図 8は、 直列式の発光体装置とするためのテープ状パターン化導体 1 6の二次加工の要領を示す図である。 前記と同様に切除部分を斜線を付 して示しており、 同じ光源 1のリード線 3に対する一対の接続部 9間の 連絡路部 1 0の部分 2 7が切除される他に、 一対の幹路部 1 1、 1 2及 び枝路部 1 3、 1 4が全て切除され、 互いに別体な接続片 5が残る。 各 接続片 5は、 リ一ド線 3と直交する向きに延在する本体の両端から一対 の接続部 9がリード線 3に沿う向きに突出した形態をなし、 この接続片 5を介して光源 1のリード線 3がそれぞれ隣り合う光源 1のリード線 3 に対して電気的に接続されると共に相互に連結されて光源連結体が得ら れる。 このように本実施態様では、 接続片 5のみによって光源 1を連結 する接続導体構造 4が形成されている。 FIG. 7 is a view showing a procedure of secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 to form a parallel-type light emitting device. The cut portion is shown with diagonal lines in the same manner as described above. In addition to cutting off the portion 27 of the connecting portion 10, the portion 29 of the connecting portion 10 connecting the connecting portion 9 to the lead wire 3 of the adjacent light source 1 is cut off. Similarly to the above, the connection path 10 is bent along the bending lines in the longitudinal direction on both sides, and the connection section 9 is fixed to the lead wire 3 by caulking. In this connection mode, the branch portions 13 and 14 are left without being cut off. FIG. 8 is a view showing a procedure of secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 to form a serial light emitting device. Similarly to the above, the cut portion is shown with diagonal lines, and in addition to cutting off the portion 27 of the communication path portion 10 between the pair of connection portions 9 for the lead wire 3 of the same light source 1, a pair of stems The roads 11 and 12 and the branches 13 and 14 are all cut off, leaving connection pieces 5 separate from each other. Each connecting piece 5 has a form in which a pair of connecting parts 9 protrude from both ends of the main body extending in a direction orthogonal to the lead wire 3 in a direction along the lead wire 3. The one lead wire 3 is electrically connected to the adjacent lead wire 3 of the light source 1 and connected to each other to obtain a light source connected body. As described above, in the present embodiment, the connection conductor structure 4 that connects the light sources 1 only by the connection pieces 5 is formed.
図 9は、 図 8に示した二次加工により得られた直列式の光源連結体 3 2を取付ボード (保持体) 2に取り付けた発光体装置を示す断面図であ る。 ここでは、 両端のリード線 3には接続片 5が結合されておらず、 こ の両端を除くリード線 3は、接続片 5の切り離しの際に同時に切断され、 取付ボード 2側に突出していない。 両端のリード線 3は、 所要の長さに 切断され、 取付ボード 2に開設された取付穴 3 3に差し込まれ、 電源電 圧を印加するための配線に接続される。  FIG. 9 is a cross-sectional view showing a light emitting device in which a series light source connector 32 obtained by the secondary processing shown in FIG. 8 is mounted on a mounting board (holder) 2. Here, the connection pieces 5 are not joined to the lead wires 3 at both ends, and the lead wires 3 except for both ends are cut off at the same time when the connection pieces 5 are separated, and do not protrude to the mounting board 2 side. . Lead wires 3 at both ends are cut to a required length, inserted into mounting holes 33 formed in mounting board 2, and connected to wiring for applying a power supply voltage.
図 1 0は、 直列式の発光体装置とするためのテープ状パターン化導体 1 6の二次加工の別の態様を示す図である。 前記と同様に切除部分を斜 線を付して示しており、 同じ光源 1のリード線 3間の連絡路部 1 0の部 分 2 7が切除される他、 ここでは、 第 1の幹路部 1 1に繋がる枝路部 1 3がー方の端部 (図中右側) に位置するものを残してその他がすべて切 除される。 また第 2の幹路部 1 2が、 他方の端部 (図中左側) に位置す る接続部 9に繋がる部分を残して枝路部 1 4とともに切除される。 この 例では、 前記の例とは異なり、 第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 1、 1 2が残つ ているため、 そこに電源電圧を印加することができる。 FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another embodiment of the secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 to form a serial light emitting device. The cut portion is shown with diagonal lines in the same manner as above, and the portion of the communication path portion 10 between the lead wires 3 of the same light source 1 is shown. In addition to cutting off part 27, here all other parts are cut off except that the branch 13 connected to the first trunk 11 is located at the other end (right side in the figure). Is done. Also, the second trunk road section 12 is cut off together with the branch road section 14 except for a portion connected to the connection section 9 located at the other end (left side in the figure). In this example, unlike the above example, since the first and second trunk roads 11 and 12 remain, the power supply voltage can be applied thereto.
図 1 1 aは、 光源連結体の保持体に対する取り付け形態の異なる例を 示す断面図である。 この実施例における光源連結体 3 7の接続片 3 5は その両端に取付ポード 2側に向いた突出部を有しており、 リード線 3の 端部もそれと整合している。 そして、 リード線 3の端部と接続片 3 5の 突出部が共に取付ボ一ド 2に開設された取付穴 3 6に差し込まれること で、 光源連結体 3 7の取付ボード 2上での支持がなされている。 このよ うな接続片 3 5は、 図 4 aに示したテープ状パターン化導体 1 6の枝路 部 1 4を、 各光源 1に関連する一対の接続部 9の一方だけでなく両方に 対し長手方向に整合した位置に設け、 そのようなテープ状パターン化導 体を二次加工する際に、 このテ一プ状パターン化導体に結合された光源 1のリード線 3と共に枝路部 1 4を第 2の幹路部 1 2側の根本において 切断することにより形成することができる。 なお、 複数本おきに突出さ せて取付穴 3 6に差し込む構成としても良く、 この場合、 取付穴 3 6に 差し込むリード線 3の本数は、 光源連結体 3 7が適切に取付ボード 2に 保持されるようにリード線 3及び接続片 3 5の剛性などを勘案して設定 される。 また図 1 1 bに示すように、 取付穴 3 6は、 貫通孔の替わりに 溝のような凹部 3 6 ' としてもよい。 そのような凹部 3 6 ' は、 取付ポ ード 2を例えば成形により製造するときに一体に形成することもできる し、 取付ボード 2の成形後に切削加工により形成してもよい。 或いは取 付ポード 2上に複数の突出部を設けることで形成することも可能である。 図 1 2及び図 1 3は光源 1を保持体に配置した例を示す図である。 図 1 2は、 平面上に配置した例であり、 平板な保持体 (取付ボード) 4 1 の表面に、 前記の接続導体構造 4を介して複数の光源 1が連結された光 源連結体 4 2が、 接続導体構造 4を適宜に折り曲げることでループを形 成しており、 光源連結体 4 2による光源列が文字の輪郭線を表すように 配置されている。 図 1 3は、 光源 1を曲面上に配置した例であり、 前記 の接続導体構造 4を介して複数の光源 1が連結された光源連結体 5 2が、 閉断面をなす保持体 5 1に巻き付けられている。 なお、 保持体の表面に 光源を密に配置して面発光体とする構成も可能である。 FIG. 11a is a cross-sectional view showing an example of a different attachment form of the light source connector to the holder. The connecting piece 35 of the light source connector 37 in this embodiment has projecting portions facing the mounting port 2 at both ends thereof, and the end of the lead wire 3 is also aligned therewith. The end of the lead wire 3 and the projecting portion of the connection piece 35 are both inserted into the mounting hole 36 formed in the mounting board 2, so that the light source connector 37 is supported on the mounting board 2. Has been made. Such a connecting piece 35 extends the branch portion 14 of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 16 shown in FIG. 4a not only to one of the pair of connecting portions 9 associated with each light source 1, but also to both of them. In the secondary processing of such a tape-shaped patterned conductor, the branch portion 14 together with the lead wire 3 of the light source 1 coupled to the tape-shaped patterned conductor is provided. It can be formed by cutting at the root of the second trunk road section 12 side. In addition, it is good also as a structure which protrudes every two or more and inserts it into the mounting hole 36.In this case, the number of the lead wires 3 inserted into the mounting hole 36 is such that the light source connector 37 is appropriately held on the mounting board 2. It is set in consideration of the rigidity of the lead wire 3 and the connection piece 35 so as to be set. Further, as shown in FIG. 11b, the mounting hole 36 may be a recess 36 ′ like a groove instead of the through hole. Such a concave portion 36 'may be formed integrally when the mounting port 2 is manufactured by molding, for example, or may be formed by cutting after the mounting board 2 is formed. Alternatively, it can be formed by providing a plurality of protrusions on the mounting port 2. FIGS. 12 and 13 are diagrams showing examples in which the light source 1 is arranged on a holder. FIG. 12 shows an example in which the plurality of light sources 1 are connected to the surface of a flat holding member (mounting board) 41 via the connection conductor structure 4. 2 forms a loop by appropriately bending the connection conductor structure 4, and is arranged so that the light source row by the light source connector 42 indicates the outline of the character. FIG. 13 shows an example in which the light sources 1 are arranged on a curved surface. It is wound. Note that a configuration in which light sources are densely arranged on the surface of the holder to form a surface light emitter is also possible.
図 1 4は、 光源の直列接続を形成するのに適したパターン化導体の変 形実施例を示す正面図であり、 図 1 5はこのパターン化導体を光源 1と 組み付ける際の二次加工の要領を示した図である (切除部分は斜線で示 した)。 尚、 これらの図において図 4 aまたは図 6と同様の部分には同じ 符号を付して詳しい説明を省略する。 図示されているように、 この直列 接続形成用パターン化導体 1 6〃 は、 製造ラインでの位置決めまたは搬 送のためのパイロット孔 1 8 ' が連絡路部 1 0 ' に形成されており、 図 4に示した第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 1、 1 2とこれら幹路部 1 1、 1 2 を連絡路部 1 0に接続する枝路部 1 3、 1 4を有しておらず、 その分幅 が狭くなつている。 このようにすることにより、 光源連結体の完成時に 不要となる材料を節約してコストを大幅に削減することができる。  FIG. 14 is a front view showing a modified embodiment of a patterned conductor suitable for forming a series connection of light sources, and FIG. 15 is a view of a secondary processing when assembling the patterned conductor with the light source 1. This is a diagram showing the outline (removed parts are indicated by oblique lines). In these figures, the same parts as those in FIG. 4A or FIG. 6 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted. As shown in the figure, the patterned conductor 16〃 for forming a series connection has a pilot hole 18 'for positioning or transport on the production line formed in the communication path section 10'. The first and second trunk roads 11 and 12 shown in FIG. 4 and branch roads 13 and 14 connecting these trunk roads 11 and 12 to the communication road 10 are provided. However, the width is narrowed accordingly. In this manner, unnecessary materials can be saved when the light source assembly is completed, and the cost can be significantly reduced.
上記実施例においては、 L E Dを光源として用いた例を示したが、 本 発明はこれに限定されるものではなく、 リード線を有する無口金電球な どでも同様に適用することが可能である。  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the LED is used as a light source has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can be similarly applied to a baseless bulb having a lead wire.
このように本発明に基づく上記実施例によれば、 異なる光源接続パ夕 ーンを有する多様な光源連結体を共通に使用可能な所定の回路パターン が予め形成されたテ一プ状パターン化導体から同じ製造ラインで製造で きるため、 生産性の向上及び製造コストの低下が可能となり、 そのよう な光源連結体を用いた発光体装置の製造コストを削減する上で大きな効 果が得られる。 さらに光源連結体として光源を一体化した上で保持体に 固定するため、 光源の多様な配置にも容易に対応することができる。 し かも保持体に煩雑な加工を必要としないため、 多品種のものを少量製造 する場合でも製造コストの上昇を抑えることができる。 As described above, according to the embodiment of the present invention, a tape-shaped patterned conductor in which a predetermined circuit pattern capable of commonly using various light source connected bodies having different light source connection patterns is formed in advance. From the same production line Therefore, the productivity can be improved and the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and a great effect can be obtained in reducing the manufacturing cost of the light emitting device using such a light source connector. Further, since the light source is integrated as a light source connected body and then fixed to the holder, various arrangements of the light source can be easily handled. Further, since the holder does not require complicated processing, it is possible to suppress an increase in manufacturing cost even when a large number of types are manufactured in small quantities.
上記実施例では、 光源が一対の概ね平行に延在するリード線を有し、 これらリード線が接続導体構造 ひ°ターン化導体) の主面に概ね沿って 延在していた。 しかしながら、 光源のリード線が接続導体構造の主面に 対し概ね垂直に延在する向きに光源を取り付けることが望まれる場合や 光源がリード線を有さないいわゆるチップ型 L E Dからなるような場合 も考えられる。 以下の本発明の実施例は、 そのような場合に適したもの である。  In the above embodiment, the light source has a pair of generally parallel extending lead wires, and these lead wires extend substantially along the main surface of the connection conductor structure (the multi-turn conductor). However, there are also cases where it is desired to mount the light source so that the light source leads extend substantially perpendicular to the main surface of the connecting conductor structure, or where the light source is a so-called chip LED without leads. Conceivable. The following embodiments of the present invention are suitable for such a case.
図 1 6は、 本発明による光源連結体の別の好適実施例を示す部分斜視 図である。 図示されているようにこの光源連結体 1 0 1は、 光源として 複数の発光ダイオード (L ED) 1 02を用いており、 各 LED 1 0 2 は電気接続用の端子として 2本の平行なリード線 1 0 3を有するいわゆ る砲弾型 LED (またはランプ型 L EDともいう) となっている。 複数 の L ED 1 0 2はリ一ド線 1 0 3に直交する向きに配列され、 この配列 方向に延在する概ね平板な接続導体構造 1 04により電気的に接続され ている。 図示した例では、 LED 1 0 2は直並列接続 (即ち複数の LE D 1 0 2を直列に接続したものをさらに並列に接続した接続) となって いるが、 後に詳述するように、 接続導体構造 1 04の構成に応じて直列 接続、 並列接続など他の接続も可能である。  FIG. 16 is a partial perspective view showing another preferred embodiment of the light source assembly according to the present invention. As shown, the light source assembly 101 uses a plurality of light emitting diodes (LEDs) 102 as light sources, and each LED 102 has two parallel leads as terminals for electrical connection. It is a so-called bullet-type LED (or lamp-type LED) with a line 103. The plurality of LEDs 102 are arranged in a direction orthogonal to the lead wires 103, and are electrically connected by a substantially flat connecting conductor structure 104 extending in the arrangement direction. In the illustrated example, the LEDs 102 are connected in series / parallel (that is, a plurality of LEDs 102 connected in series and further connected in parallel). Other connections such as series connection and parallel connection are also possible depending on the configuration of the conductor structure 104.
接続導体構造 1 04は、 電源電圧が印加される長手方向に延在する第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2を有しており、 その間に、 L E D 1 0 2のリード線 1 0 3と接続するための光源取り付け部 1 0 5と、 これ ら光源取り付け部 1 0 5を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部 1 1 0が配置さ れている。 図からわかるように、 各光源取り付け部 1 0 5は一つの L E D 1 02の一対のリード線 (端子) 1 0 3に結合される一対の端子接続 部 1 0 9を有しており、 この実施例では一対の端子接続部 1 0 9は長手 方向に互いに離間されている。第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2は、 横方向 (幅方向) に延在する枝路部 1 1 3、 1 14によって所定の箇所 にて連絡路部 1 1 0に電気的に接続され、 図示した例では LED 1 0 2 を直並列に接続する導体パターンを構成している。 また連絡路部 1 1 0 と第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2は、 好ましくはインサートモ一 ルドにより形成される幅方向に延在する絶縁性連結部材 1 1 5により機 械的に連結され一体に保持されている。 The connection conductor structure 104 has first and second trunk sections 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 extending in the longitudinal direction to which the power supply voltage is applied. A light source mounting portion 105 for connecting to the lead wire 103 of the second device 102 and a communication path 110 connecting the light source mounting portion 105 in the longitudinal direction are arranged. As can be seen from the figure, each light source mounting portion 105 has a pair of terminal connection portions 109 coupled to a pair of lead wires (terminals) 103 of one LED 102. In the example, the pair of terminal connection portions 109 are separated from each other in the longitudinal direction. The first and second trunk roads 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 are connected to the connecting road 1 1 10 at predetermined locations by branch roads 1 1 3 and 1 1 4 extending in the lateral direction (width direction). It is electrically connected, and in the example shown, forms a conductor pattern that connects the LEDs 102 in series and parallel. Further, the communication path section 110 and the first and second main path sections 111, 112 are preferably formed by an insulating connecting member 115 extending in the width direction formed by insert molding. They are mechanically connected and held together.
接続導体構造 1 04の各端子接続部 1 0 9には好ましくは十字形の穴 1 1 6が形成されており、 この穴 1 1 6に、 対応する L ED 1 02のリ ード線 1 0 3を押し込むことで、 接続導体構造 1 04と L ED 1 02と の機械的 Z電気的な接続がなされる。 穴 1 1 6が十字形であることによ り、 内向きに 4つの突出部が形成され、 リ一ド線 1 0 3を押し込むとこ れら 4つの突出部は撓んでリード線 1 0 3をしつかりと保持する働きを する。 図 1 6のライン XV I I -XV I Iに沿った断面図である図 1 7 aによく示されるように、 リード線 1 0 3を穴 1 1 6に差し込んだ後各 端子接続部 1 0 9において穴 1 1 6を挟んで両側に幅方向に延出した部 分 1 1 7が折り曲げられ、 リード線 1 0 3を挟み込むようにかしめるこ とによってリード線 1 0 3が不所望に穴 1 1 6から抜けるのがより一層 効果的に防止される。延出部 1 1 7によりリード線 1 0 3をかしめた後、 リード線 1 0 3は適当な長さに切断される。 予めリード線 1 03を所定 の長さに切断しておいてもよい。 図示されているように、 リード線 1 0 3は、 取り付けボード (保持体) 1 2 3に設けた対応する凹部または穴 1 2 4に挿入することで光源連結体 1 0 1を保持体 1 2 3に取り付ける のに用いることができる。 Each terminal connection portion 109 of the connection conductor structure 104 is preferably formed with a cross-shaped hole 1 16, and the hole 1 16 is provided with a lead wire 10 of the corresponding LED 102. By pushing in 3, a mechanical Z electrical connection between the connection conductor structure 104 and the LED 102 is made. Due to the cross shape of the hole 1 16, four protrusions are formed inward, and when the lead wire 103 is pushed in, these four protrusions bend and the lead wire 103 is bent. It works to hold tightly. As shown in Fig. 17a, which is a cross-sectional view along the line XV II -XV II in Fig. 16, after the lead wire 103 is inserted into the hole 1 16 The portion 1 17 extending in the width direction on both sides of the hole 1 16 is bent, and the lead wire 103 is undesirably holed by crimping so that the lead wire 103 is sandwiched. Exiting from 6 is more effectively prevented. After caulking the lead wire 103 with the extension part 117, the lead wire 103 is cut to an appropriate length. The lead wire 103 may be cut into a predetermined length in advance. Lead 10 as shown 3 can be used to attach the light source connector 101 to the holder 123 by inserting it into the corresponding recess or hole 124 provided in the mounting board (holder) 123.
なお、 端子接続部 1 0 9とリード線 1 0 3との接続は、 穴 1 1 6への リード線 1 0 3の差し込み及び延出部 1 1 7によるリード線 1 0 3のか しめの他に、 スポット溶接、 超音波溶接、 レーザ溶接などによっても可 能であるが、 上記した接続方法では、 順送プレスにより連続的に処理が 可能である、 はんだの使用をなくすことができる、 熱により L E D 1 0 2に悪影響を及ぼす心配がないといった利点がある。 穴 1 1 6へのリー ド線 1 0 3の差込みとレーザ溶接とを併用してもよい。 その場合穴 1 1 6が図示したように内向きの突出部を有しリ一ド線 1 0 3を穴 1 1 6に 押し込んだとき突出部が撓んでリ一ド線 1 0 3に圧接されるようにする と、 接触面積が大きくなりレ一ザ溶接を一層確実になすことができる。 また端子接続部 1 0 9の穴 1 1 6に隣接する連絡路部 1 1 0の部分にお いて切り込みを設けて舌片を形成し、 この舌片を折り曲げることで上記 した一対の延出部 1 1 7と共に 3方向からリード線 1 0 3をかしめるよ うにしてもよい。  The connection between the terminal connection part 109 and the lead wire 103 is made by inserting the lead wire 103 into the hole 116 and crimping the lead wire 103 by the extension part 117. , Spot welding, ultrasonic welding, laser welding, etc., but with the connection method described above, it is possible to continuously process by progressive press, eliminate the use of solder, LED by heat There is an advantage that there is no fear of adversely affecting 102. The insertion of the lead wire 103 into the hole 116 and laser welding may be used in combination. In this case, the hole 116 has an inward protrusion as shown in the figure, and when the lead wire 103 is pushed into the hole 116, the protrusion warps and is pressed against the lead wire 103. By doing so, the contact area is increased and laser welding can be performed more reliably. In addition, a notch is formed in a portion of the communication path portion 110 adjacent to the hole 1 16 of the terminal connection portion 109 to form a tongue piece, and the tongue piece is bent to form the pair of extension portions described above. The lead wire 103 may be swaged from three directions together with 1 17.
更に、 図 1 7 bの断面図に示すように、 穴 1 1 6にいわゆる "ソケッ トビン" 1 2 5を差し込んでリード線 1 0 3との接続に使用することも できる。 ソケットピンとはピン部 (凸部またはォス部) の背面側にソケ ット部 (凹部またはメス部) がー体に形成された導電体を含んだもので あり、 例えば (株) マックエイトから販売されている P Dシリーズなど を使用することができる。 ソケットピンのピン部を穴 1 1 6に予め差し 込んでおくことで、 ソケットピンのソケット部にリード線 1 0 3を差し 込むことで L E D 1 0 2と接続導体構造 1 0 4との電気的接続を容易に 行うことができる。 本発明に基づくと、 上記したような接続導体構造 1 0 4は、 好適には 導電性平板材料のプレス加工 (穴抜き加工) により直列、 並列及び直並 列で兼用可能な回路パターンが予め一次加工により形成されたパターン 化導体に、 その所要の部分を切除する二次加工を施すことで得られる。 そのようにすることにより、 パターン化導体に対する切除部分を変更す ることで L E D 1 0 2を直列、 並列または直並列のいずれに接続するこ とも可能となる。 Further, as shown in the sectional view of FIG. 17b, a so-called “socket bin” 125 can be inserted into the hole 116 to be used for connection with the lead wire 103. A socket pin is a pin that includes a conductor (concave portion or female portion) formed on the back side of a pin portion (a convex portion or a female portion), and is, for example, sold by Mac Eight Co., Ltd. You can use the PD series, etc. By inserting the pin portion of the socket pin into the hole 1 16 in advance, inserting the lead wire 103 into the socket portion of the socket pin allows the electrical connection between the LED 102 and the connection conductor structure 104. Connection can be made easily. According to the present invention, the connection conductor structure 104 as described above preferably has a circuit pattern that can be used in series, in parallel, and in series in parallel, preferably by pressing (drilling) a conductive flat plate material. It can be obtained by subjecting the patterned conductor formed by processing to secondary processing for cutting out the required portions. By doing so, it is possible to connect the LEDs 102 in series, parallel, or series-parallel by changing the cutouts for the patterned conductor.
図 1 8は、 二次加工前のパターン化導体の好適実施例 1 2 0を示す部 分平面図である。 本図において、 上記した接続導体構造 1 0 4と対応す る箇所には同じ符号を付して示した。 図示されているように、 このパ夕 ーン化導体 1 2 0は自立性を有する (即ち、 各部が一体となった) 長寸 のテープ状であり、 連絡路部 1 1 0が長手方向に延在して光源取り付け 部 1 0 5を連絡している。 また光源取り付け部 1 0 5及び連絡路部 1 1 0を幅方向に挟んで第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2がパターン化 導体 1 2 0の両側に配置されている。 また各光源取り付け部 1 0 5の各 端子接続部 1 0 9は対応する枝路部 1 1 3、 1 1 4によって第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2に接続されている。 連絡路部 1 1 0は、 隣り 合う異なる L E D 1 0 2のリ一ド線 1 0 3に接続される (即ち、 隣り合 う光源取り付け部 1 0 5に含まれる) 一対の端子接続部 1 0 9をそれぞ れ接続する複数の接続路 1 2 1を含んでいる。 インサートモールドによ り形成される連結部材 1 1 5はこの接続路 1 2 1上に形成することがで きる (図 1 6参照)。 この際、 接続路 1 2 1を露出するように接続路 1 2 1と整合する連結部材 1 1 5の箇所には穴 1 1 9が設けられる (穴 1 1 9によって露出される接続路 1 2 1の部分をプリッジ部 1 2 1 Aと呼ぶ (図 1 9〜図 2 1参照))。 これにより、 連結部材 1 1 5の形成後に穴 1 1 9を通じてプレス機のパンチ (図示せず) を揷入してブリッジ部 1 2 1 Aを切除し、 接続路 1 2 1を介して連絡されていた端子接続部 1 0 9 を分断することが可能となる。 FIG. 18 is a partial plan view showing a preferred embodiment 120 of the patterned conductor before the secondary processing. In the figure, the portions corresponding to the connection conductor structure 104 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals. As shown in the figure, the patterned conductor 120 is in the form of a long tape having self-supporting properties (that is, each part is integrated), and the communication path 110 is formed in the longitudinal direction. It extends to connect the light source mounting part 105. In addition, the first and second trunk roads 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 are arranged on both sides of the patterned conductor 1 20 with the light source mounting section 1 05 and the communication path 1 1 10 sandwiched in the width direction. . In addition, each terminal connection section 109 of each light source mounting section 105 is connected to the first and second trunk sections 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 by the corresponding branch sections 1 1 3 and 1 1 4 respectively. I have. The communication path section 110 is connected to the lead wire 103 of the adjacent different LED 102 (that is, included in the adjacent light source mounting section 105). 9 includes a plurality of connection paths 1 2 1 respectively connecting the 9. The connecting member 115 formed by insert molding can be formed on this connecting path 121 (see FIG. 16). At this time, a hole 1 19 is provided at a position of the connecting member 1 15 which is aligned with the connection path 1 21 so as to expose the connection path 1 2 1 (the connection path 1 2 exposed by the hole 1 19). The portion 1 is referred to as a bridge portion 12 21 A (see FIGS. 19 to 21). Thus, after forming the connecting member 115, a punch (not shown) of the press machine is inserted through the hole 119 to form the bridge portion 112. By cutting off 1 A, it becomes possible to cut off the terminal connection section 109 connected via the connection path 121.
パターン化導体 1 2 0は、 前記の通り用途に応じて所要の部分を切除 する二次加工を施すことで所定の接続パターンの回路を有する接続導体 構造 1 0 4となるが、 この二次加工は、 好適にはインサ一トモ一ルドに より形成される連結部材 1 1 5によって幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2と連絡路 部 1 1 0とを連結した後に行われる。 そのようにすることにより、 形成 された接続導体構造 1 0 4の各部がばらばらになるのを防止することが できる。 このようなィンサ一トモールドによる連結部材 1 1 5の形成及 びパターン化導体 1 2 0の二次加工は連続的な製造ラインで行うと効率 的である。 そのため、 製造ラインにおける搬送 Z位置決めのために第 2 の幹路部 1 1 2には例えば順送プレス機 (図示せず) などのパイロット ピンに係合するパイロット穴 1 1 8が設けられている。  As described above, the patterned conductor 120 becomes a connection conductor structure 104 having a circuit of a predetermined connection pattern by performing secondary processing for cutting out a required portion according to the application as described above. The connection is preferably performed after connecting the trunk roads 111, 112 and the communication road 110 with a connecting member 115, preferably formed by an insert mold. By doing so, it is possible to prevent each part of the formed connection conductor structure 104 from being separated. The formation of the connecting member 115 and the secondary processing of the patterned conductor 120 by such an insert mold are efficient if performed on a continuous production line. Therefore, a pilot hole 1 18 for engaging with a pilot pin of, for example, a progressive press machine (not shown) is provided in the second main road section 112 for positioning of the transport Z in the production line. .
上記したようなパターン化導体 1 2 0は、 好適には例えばアルミや銅 などの金属からなる導電性平板材料のプレス加工 (より詳細には穴抜き 加工) により得ることができる。 アルミは半田に不向きなためプリント 基板には用いられていないが、 比重が小さく (銅の約 1 Z 3 ) 製品の軽 量化に適しているという利点がある。 また熱伝導率が高く (銅の数倍) 導電率が高い点も好適である。 またプリント基板の銅箔が 3 5 x m程度 であるのに対し、 パターン化導体は 1 0 0〜 3 O O mと厚くできるた め許容電流値を大きくとることができるという利点があり、 また熱放散 の観点からも好ましい。 導電性平板材料をフォトエッチングしたり、 ヮ ィヤーカツト、 レーザあるいは放電加工によってカツティングしたりす ることによりパターン化導体 1 2 0を形成することも可能である。 マグ ネシゥム成形のようなダイキャストによって形成することも可能である。 パターン化導体 1 2 0は、 可撓性を有し、 屈曲自在であるため、 コイル 状に巻き取ったり、 あるいはつづら折りに折り畳むことができ、 保管 · 輸送 ·梱包が容易.である。 The patterned conductor 120 described above can be preferably obtained by pressing (more specifically, punching) a conductive plate material made of a metal such as aluminum or copper. Aluminum is not used for printed circuit boards because it is unsuitable for soldering, but it has the advantage of being low in specific gravity (about 1 Z3 of copper) and suitable for weight reduction of products. It is also preferable that the thermal conductivity is high (several times that of copper) and the conductivity is high. In addition, the printed conductor has a thickness of about 35 xm, while the patterned conductor can be made as thick as 100 to 3 OO m, which has the advantage that the allowable current value can be increased. It is also preferable from the viewpoint of. It is also possible to form the patterned conductor 120 by photo-etching the conductive plate material or cutting it by wire cutting, laser or electric discharge machining. It can also be formed by die casting such as magnesium molding. Since the patterned conductor 120 is flexible and bendable, the coil It can be rolled up or folded in a zigzag, making it easy to store, transport and pack.
図 1 9〜図 2 1は、 それぞれ L ED 1 02を直並列、 並列、 直列に接 続するときのパターン化導体 1 2 0の二次加工の要領を示す図である。 これらの図において、 切除部分は斜線を付して示してある。 また切除部 分の位置を理解しやすいように、 穴 1 1 9を有する連結部材 1 1 5を点 線で示した。  FIG. 19 to FIG. 21 are diagrams showing the procedure of secondary processing of the patterned conductor 120 when the LEDs 102 are connected in series, parallel, and series, respectively. In these figures, the resected part is shown with diagonal lines. In addition, a connecting member 1 15 having a hole 1 19 is shown by a dotted line so that the position of the cut portion can be easily understood.
図 1 9の例では、各々 3つの L ED 1 02を含む複数の直列接続体(直 列ブロック) を幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2間に並列に接続することができる 接続導体構造が提供される。 詳述すると、 隣接する直列ブロックの間に 位置する接続路 1 2 1のブリッジ部 1 2 1 Aは切断され、 直列ブロック 内の端子接続部 1 0 9同士を結ぶ接続路 1 2 1はそのままとされる。 各 直列ブロックに含まれる枝路部 1 1 3、 1 1 4は一方の端部において第 1の幹路部 1 1 1に接続された枝路部 1 1 3と、 他方の端部において第 2の幹路部 1 1 2に接続された枝路部 1 14とを残して全て切除される。 各直列ブロックに含むことのできる L E D 1 0 2の数は、 切除する枝路 部 1 1 3、 1 14及びプリッジ部 1 2 1 Aを変えることで変更可能であ り、 3に限られるものではないことを理解されたい。 また図 1 9の例で は同じ直列ブロック内に含まれる隣接する LED 1 0 2を互いに接続す る (即ち隣接する光源取り付け部 1 0 5内に含まれる端子接続部同士を 連結する) ためのブリッジ部 1 2 1 Aは切除せずに残されているが、 図 1 6の斜視図において点線で示したように例えば抵抗 1 2 2を隣接する LED 1 0 2間に挿入するべく例えばスポッ卜溶接やレーザ溶接などに より連絡路部 1 1 0に接続するときは、 抵抗 1 22の両端子間に位置す ることになるブリッジ部 1 2 1 Aを切除してもよい。 同様に点線で示す ように抵抗 1 2 2を連絡路部 1 1 0と第 2の幹路部 1 1 2との間に接続 するときは、 対応する位置にある枝路部 1 1 4を切除するとよい。 In the example of Fig. 19, there is a connection conductor structure that can connect a plurality of series-connected bodies (series blocks) each including three LEDs 102 in parallel between the trunk sections 1 1 1 and 1 1 2. Provided. More specifically, the bridge section 1 2 1 A of the connection path 1 2 1 located between the adjacent series blocks is disconnected, and the connection path 1 2 1 connecting the terminal connection sections 1 0 9 in the series block remains unchanged. Is done. The branch sections 113, 114 included in each series block include a branch section 113 connected to the first trunk section 111 at one end and a second branch section 113 at the other end. All of them are removed except for the branch 1 114 connected to the trunk 1 1 2. The number of LEDs 102 that can be included in each series block can be changed by changing the branch sections 113, 114 and the bridge section 121A to be cut, and is not limited to three. Please understand that there is no. Further, in the example of FIG. 19, adjacent LEDs 102 included in the same series block are connected to each other (that is, terminal connections included in adjacent light source mounting portions 105 are connected to each other). The bridge portion 121A is left uncut, but as shown by a dotted line in the perspective view of FIG. 16, for example, a resistor 122 is inserted between adjacent LEDs 102, for example, as a spot. When connecting to the communication path section 110 by welding, laser welding, or the like, the bridge section 121 A located between both terminals of the resistor 122 may be cut off. Similarly, as shown by the dotted line, connect the resistance 1 2 2 between the communication path 1 110 and the second main path 1 1 2 To do this, it is advisable to cut off the branch section 114 at the corresponding position.
路部 1 1 0と第 1の幹路部 1 1 1との間に接続する場合も同様である。 図 2 0の例では、ブリッジ部 1 2 1 Aは全て切除され、枝路部 1 1 3、 1 14は各 L ED 1 02に接続される (即ち各光源取り付け部 1 0 5内 の) 一対の端子接続部 1 0 9のうち一方は幹路部 1 1 1に、 他方は幹路 部 1 1 2に接続されるように切除される。 このようにして、 光源取り付 け部 1 0 5に取り付けられる複数の L ED 1 0 2が幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2間に並列に接続されるような接続導体構造が提供される。 The same applies to the connection between the road section 110 and the first trunk section 111. In the example of FIG. 20, all the bridge portions 121 A are cut off, and the branch portions 113, 114 are connected to each LED 102 (ie, in each light source mounting portion 105). One of the terminal connection portions 109 is cut off so as to be connected to the main road portion 111, and the other is connected to the main road portion 112. In this way, a connection conductor structure is provided in which a plurality of LEDs 102 attached to the light source mounting section 105 are connected in parallel between the trunk sections 1 1 1 and 1 1 2. .
図 2 1の例では枝路部 1 1 3、 1 14は全て切除される一方、 ブリツ ジ部 1 2 1 Aは全て切除されることなく残され幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2の 間に L ED 1 0 2の直列体を形成することができるようになつている。 接続路 1 2 1とそれによって連絡された一対の端子接続部 1 0 9とによ つて、 隣接する L ED 1 0 2を接続するための接続片が形成されている ということもできる。 このようにして形成された接続導体構造によって LED 1 0 2を連結してなる光源連結体 1 0 1では、 幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2を使用せず例えば L ED直列体の両端に位置する L ED 1 0 2のリ ード線 1 0 3に直接電源を接続してもよいが、 適当な枝路部 1 1 3、 1 14を残すことで幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2を LED直列体と接続し、 幹路 部 1 1 1、 1 1 2を電源に接続して幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2を介して £ D直列体に電源からの電圧が供給されるようにすることもできる。 幹路 部 1 1 1、 1 1 2のいずれか一方のみをそのような電源との接続に用い てもよい。  In the example of Fig. 21, all branches 1 13 and 1 14 are cut off, while all bridges 1 2 1 A are left uncut and remain between trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 In this way, a series body of LEDs 102 can be formed. It can be said that the connection piece for connecting the adjacent LEDs 102 is formed by the connection path 122 and the pair of terminal connection portions 109 connected by the connection path. In the light source connected body 101 which connects the LEDs 102 by the connection conductor structure formed in this way, the trunk roads 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 are not used, for example, at both ends of the LED series body. The power supply may be connected directly to the lead wire 103 of the LED 102 located, but the trunk roads 1 1 1 and 1 1 can be obtained by leaving appropriate branches 1 13 and 1 14 2 is connected to the LED series, and the trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 are connected to the power supply, and the voltage from the power supply is supplied to the series D via the trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2. You can also make it. Only one of the trunk roads 111 and 112 may be used for connection to such a power source.
このように本発明の好適実施例に基づくと、 切除する枝路部 1 1 3、 1 1 4及びプリッジ部 1 2 1 Aを変えることで、 共通のパターン化導体 1 2 0から様々な接続パターンを有する接続導体構造 1 04 (及びそれ を有する光源連結体 1 0 1) を形成することが可能であることが理解さ れるだろう。 パターン化導体 1 2 0の二次加工による接続導体構造 1 0 4の形成は、 プレス加工により好適に行うことができるが、 そのとき、 異なる接続パターンの接続導体構造 1 0 4を形成する際の切除すべき枝 路部 1 1 3、 1 1 4及びブリッジ部 1 2 1 Aの選択は例えばコンピュー 夕制御により行うことができ、 プレス機の金型を変更する必要はないた め、 金型の取り替えに伴う時間ロス及び作業ミスをなくし、 生産性の向 上及び製造コストの低下が実現可能となっている。 また光源連結体 1 0 1の形成にはプリント基板を用いないため、 プリント基板との接続に通 常用いられる半田をなくすことができ、 環境への悪影響が低減されるだ けでなく、 半田使用時の熱による光源 (L E D ) への悪影響をなくすこ とができる。 また光源 (L E D ) と接続導体構造からなる極めて単純な 構造であることから分解が容易であり且つリサイクルの困難なプリント 基板を用いないため、 不用になったときのリサイクルを効率良く行うこ とができる。 As described above, according to the preferred embodiment of the present invention, by changing the branch portions 113, 114, and the bridge portion 121A to be cut, various connection patterns can be formed from the common patterned conductor 120. It is understood that it is possible to form the connecting conductor structure 104 having the following (and the light source connecting body 101 having the same). Will be. The formation of the connection conductor structure 104 by the secondary processing of the patterned conductors 120 can be suitably performed by press working. At that time, when the connection conductor structure 104 of a different connection pattern is formed, The selection of the branch section 1 13, 1 1 4 and the bridge section 1 21 A to be cut off can be made by, for example, computer control, and there is no need to change the die of the press machine. Eliminating time loss and work mistakes associated with replacement, it has become possible to improve productivity and reduce manufacturing costs. In addition, since a printed circuit board is not used to form the light source connector 101, solder that is normally used for connection to the printed circuit board can be eliminated, which not only reduces adverse effects on the environment but also uses solder. The adverse effect of heat on the light source (LED) can be eliminated. In addition, since it has a very simple structure consisting of a light source (LED) and a connecting conductor structure, it is easy to disassemble and does not use a printed circuit board that is difficult to recycle. it can.
図 2 2は、 本発明に基づく光源連結体の別の実施例を示す部分斜視図 である。 図 2 2に図示した光源連結体 1 5 1では、 リード線 1 0 3の代 わりに側面部から底面部にかけて延在する一対の電気接続用端子 1 5 3 を備え、 上面に光放出部 1 5 2 Aを有するノーマルタイプのチップ型 L E D (または表面実装用 L E D ) 1 5 2を光源として用いている。 この ようなチップ型 L E Dは縦、 横、 高さの各寸法が数 mm以下と極めて小 形のものが市販されており、 それらを用いて製造される光源連結体 1 5 1の寸法も小さくできる。  FIG. 22 is a partial perspective view showing another embodiment of the light source assembly according to the present invention. The light source connector 15 1 shown in FIG. 22 includes a pair of electrical connection terminals 15 3 extending from the side surface to the bottom surface in place of the lead wire 103, and a light emitting portion 15 5 on the upper surface. A normal type chip LED (or LED for surface mounting) 152 having 2 A is used as a light source. Such chip-type LEDs are extremely small, with a vertical, horizontal, and height dimension of several mm or less, and are commercially available.The dimensions of the light source assembly 151 manufactured using them are also reduced. .
上記実施例と同様に、 L E D 1 5 2は、 概ね平板なパ夕一ン化導体 1 7 0 (図 2 5参照) を二次加工して得られる接続導体構造 1 5 4によつ て電気的に接続されている。 また同様に、 接続導体構造 1 5 4は、 電源 電圧が印加される長手方向に延在する第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 6 1、 1 6 2を有しており、 その間に、 L ED 1 5 2との接続のための光源取り 付け部 1 5 5 (図 2 5参照) を長手方向に連結する連絡路部 1 6 0が配 置されている。 第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 6 1、 1 62は、 幅方向に延在 する枝路部 1 6 3、 1 64によって所定の箇所にて連絡路部 1 6 0に電 気的に接続され、 図示した例では L ED 1 5 2を直並列に接続する導体 パターンを構成している。 図 1 6の実施例と同様に、 第 2の幹路部 1 6 2には順送プレス機での取り扱いが容易なようにパイロット穴 1 6 8が 設けられている。 また連絡路部 1 6 0と第 1及ぴ第 2の幹路部 1 6 1、 1 62は、 ィンサートモールドにより形成された幅方向に延在する連結 部材 1 6 5により機械的に連結されている。 As in the above-described embodiment, the LED 152 is electrically connected to a connection conductor structure 150 obtained by secondary processing of a generally flat conductor 170 (see FIG. 25). Connected. Similarly, the connection conductor structure 15 4 includes first and second trunk sections 16 1 and 1 1 extending in the longitudinal direction to which the power supply voltage is applied. In the meantime, there is a communication path section 160 that connects the light source mounting section 15 5 (see Fig. 25) for connection to the LED 155 in the longitudinal direction. Have been. The first and second trunk paths 161, 162 are electrically connected to the communication path section 160 at predetermined locations by branching sections 163, 164 extending in the width direction. In the example shown in the figure, a conductor pattern for connecting the LEDs 152 in series and parallel is configured. As in the embodiment of FIG. 16, the second trunk section 162 is provided with a pilot hole 168 for easy handling by a progressive press. In addition, the communication path section 160 and the first and second trunk paths 161, 162 are mechanically connected by a connecting member 1 65 extending in the width direction formed by insert molding. ing.
この実施例では、 チップ型 L ED 1 5 2を装着するため上面に開口を 有する概ね箱形のソケット 1 7 2が、 接続導体構造 1 54の光源取り付 け部 1 5 5と整合した位置に形成されている。 このようなソケット 1 7 2は好適にはィンサ一トモールドにより形成することができる。  In this embodiment, a generally box-shaped socket 172 having an opening on the upper surface for mounting the chip-type LED 155 is positioned at a position aligned with the light source mounting portion 155 of the connection conductor structure 154. Is formed. Such a socket 172 can be preferably formed by an insert mold.
図 2 3は、 LED 1 5 2が装着されていない状態のソケット 1 7 2 (図 2 2の左から 2つめ) を示す上面図であり、 図 24は LED 1 5 2が装 着された状態のソケット 1 7 2 (例えば図 2 2の左端) を示す側断面図 である。 これらの図に示されているように、 接続導体構造 1 54の各光 源取り付け部 1 5 5は一対の長手方向に互いに離隔された端子接続部 1 5 9を有しており、 これら端子接続部 1 5 9はソケット 1 7 2の底壁の 上に位置して露出されており、 LED 1 52をソケット 1 7 2に揷入す ると、 LED 1 5 2の端子 1 5 3と接続導体構造 1 54の端子接続部 1 5 9とが接触するようになっている。 また L ED 1 5 2の端子 1 5 3と 端子接続部 1 5 9との接触が確実になされるように各端子接続部 1 5 9 の表面には小さな突起 1 6 7が設けられている。 また、 ソケット 1 72 の底壁には穴 1 7 3が形成され、 そこからソケット 1 7 2に装着された L E D l 5 2を押して L E D l 5 2をソケット 1 7 2から取り外すこと ができるようになつている。 それにより、 故障した L E D 1 5 2を正常 なものと交換することができる。 Fig. 23 is a top view showing the socket 1 72 (the second from the left in Fig. 22) without the LED 15 2 installed, and Fig. 24 shows the socket with the LED 152 installed. 3 is a side sectional view showing a socket 17 2 (for example, the left end in FIG. 22) of FIG. As shown in these figures, each light source mounting portion 155 of the connection conductor structure 154 has a pair of terminal connection portions 159 which are separated from each other in the longitudinal direction. Portion 159 is exposed on the bottom wall of socket 172, and when LED 153 is inserted into socket 172, terminals 153 and connection conductor of LED 155 are connected. The terminal connection portion 159 of the structure 154 is in contact with the structure. Also, small projections 1667 are provided on the surface of each terminal connection portion 159 so that the terminal 153 of the LED 155 and the terminal connection portion 159 are surely in contact with each other. In addition, a hole 1 73 was formed in the bottom wall of the socket 1 72, from which the socket 1 72 was mounted. The LED l52 can be removed from the socket 172 by pressing the LED l52. This allows the failed LED 152 to be replaced with a working one.
図 2 2〜図 2 4に示した実施例における接続導体構造 1 5 4も、 図 1 6の実施例と同様に、 所定の回路パターンを有する平板状のパ夕一ン化 導体に、所定の箇所を切除する二次加工を施すことで好適に形成される。 図 2 5は、 図 2 2〜図 2 4の実施例で使用するのに適した二次加工前の パターン化導体 1 7 0を示す平面図である。 本図において、 図 2 2〜図 2 4と対応する箇所には同じ符号を付して示した。  The connection conductor structure 154 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 22 to FIG. 24 also has the same structure as the embodiment of FIG. It is preferably formed by performing a secondary processing of cutting off the portion. FIG. 25 is a plan view showing a patterned conductor 170 before secondary processing suitable for use in the embodiment of FIGS. In this figure, parts corresponding to those in FIGS. 22 to 24 are denoted by the same reference numerals.
図 1 8に示したパターン化導体 1 2 0と同様に、 このパターン化導体 1 7 0も長寸のテープ状であり、 光源取り付け部 1 5 5を長手方向に連 絡する連絡路部 1 6 0が長手方向に延在している。 また光源取り付け部 Like the patterned conductor 120 shown in FIG. 18, the patterned conductor 170 is also a long tape, and the connecting portion 16 connects the light source mounting portion 15 5 in the longitudinal direction. 0 extends in the longitudinal direction. Light source mounting part
1 5 5と連絡路部 1 6 0を幅方向に挟んで第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 6 1、The first and second trunk roads 1 6 1, 1 5 5 and the connecting road 1 6 0 are sandwiched in the width direction.
1 6 2がパ夕一ン化導体 1 7 0の両側に配置されている。 また各光源取 り付け部 1 5 5の各端子接続部 1 5 9は対応する枝路部 1 6 3、 1 6 4 によって第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2に接続されている。 連絡 路部 1 6 0は、 隣り合う異なる L E D 1 5 2の端子 1 5 3に接続される (即ち隣り合う光源取り付け部 1 5 5に含まれる) 一対の端子接続部 1 5 9をそれぞれ接続する複数の接続路 1 7 1を含んでいる。 ィンサート モールドにより形成される連結部材 1 6 5はこの接続路 1 7 1の長手方 向ほぼ中央上に形成される (図 2 2参照)。 この際、 接続路 1 7 1を露出 するように接続路 1 7 1と整合する連結部材 1 6 5の箇所には穴 1 6 9 が設けられる (穴 1 6 9によって露出される接続路 1 7 1の部分をプリ ッジ部 1 7 1 Aと呼ぶ)。 これにより、連結部材 1 6 5の形成後に穴 1 6 9を通じてプレス機のパンチ (図示せず) を揷入してブリッジ部 1 7 1 Aを切除し、 接続路 1 7 1を介して連絡されていた端子接続部 1 5 9を 分断することが可能となる。 本実施例では、 連結部材 1 6 5の穴 1 6 9 によって確実に露出されるように且つ切除が容易なように穴 1 6 9によ つて露出されるブリッジ部 1 7 1 Aは比較的幅狭に形成されている。尚、 プリッジ部 1 7 1 Aの形状は任意であり、 例えば十字形に交わる 2つの 細い経路を含むようにしてもよい。 また切除が容易なように接続路 1 7 1の適切な箇所にミシン目を入れても良い。 1 62 are arranged on both sides of the conductor 170. In addition, each terminal connection section 159 of each light source mounting section 155 is connected to the first and second main path sections 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 by the corresponding branch sections 16 3 and 16 4. Have been. The communication section 160 is connected to the terminals 153 of the adjacent different LEDs 155 (that is, included in the adjacent light source mounting section 155), and connects the pair of terminal connections 159 respectively. Includes multiple connections 1 7 1. The connecting member 165 formed by the insert mold is formed substantially at the center in the longitudinal direction of the connecting path 171 (see FIG. 22). At this time, a hole 169 is provided at a position of the connecting member 165 which is aligned with the connection path 171 so as to expose the connection path 171 (the connection path 171 exposed by the hole 169). The part of 1 is called the bridge part 17 1 A). As a result, after forming the connecting member 165, a punch (not shown) of the press machine is inserted through the hole 169 to cut off the bridge portion 171A, and the connection is made via the connection path 171. Terminal connection part 1 5 9 It becomes possible to divide. In this embodiment, the bridge portion 17 1 A exposed through the hole 16 9 is relatively wide so that the hole 16 9 of the connecting member 16 5 can be reliably exposed and easily cut off. It is formed narrow. Note that the shape of the bridge portion 1771A is arbitrary, and may include, for example, two narrow paths crossing a cross. Also, perforations may be made at appropriate locations on the connection path 17 1 to facilitate resection.
この実施例では、 光源取り付け部 1 5 5の端子接続部 1 5 9に隣接す る接続路 1 7 1の部分には切り込みにより長手方向に延在する舌片 1 7 4が形成されている。 図 2 2の斜視図及び図 2 4の断面図に示したよう に、 組み立て状態において舌片 1 7 4は折り曲げられ、 ソケット 1 7 2 に装着された L E D 1 5 2を上から抑えて L E D 1 5 2が不所望にソケ ット 1 7 2から脱落するのを防止する働きをする。  In this embodiment, a tongue piece 174 extending in the longitudinal direction is formed by cutting at a portion of the connection path 171 adjacent to the terminal connection portion 159 of the light source mounting portion 155. As shown in the perspective view of FIG. 22 and the cross-sectional view of FIG. 24, in the assembled state, the tongue piece 17 4 is bent, and the LED 15 2 attached to the socket 17 2 is held down from above. It serves to prevent 52 from undesirably dropping out of socket 17 2.
図 2 6〜図 2 8は、図 2 5に示したパターン化導体 1 7 0から直並列、 並列、 直列接続用の接続導体構造 1 5 4を形成するべくパターン化導体 1 7 0を二次加工する際の要領を示している。図 1 9〜図 2 1と同様に、 切除される部分は斜線で示されている。 また切除部分の位置を理解しや すいように、 ソケット 1 7 2と連結部材 1 6 5を点線で示した。 図 2 6 〜図 2 8に対する説明は図 1 9〜図 2 1に対する説明と概ね同じである ため省略するが、 これらの図からわかるように、 パターン化導体 1 7 0 からも様々な接続パターンの接続導体構造 1 5 4を形成することが可能 である。  FIGS. 26 to 28 show that the patterned conductors 170 are secondarily formed from the patterned conductors 170 shown in FIG. 25 to form connection conductor structures 154 for series-parallel, parallel, and series connection. This shows the procedure for processing. As in FIGS. 19 to 21, the part to be resected is indicated by oblique lines. In addition, the sockets 172 and the connecting members 16.5 are shown by dotted lines so that the position of the cut portion can be easily understood. The description for FIGS. 26 to 28 is substantially the same as the description for FIGS. 19 to 21, and therefore will be omitted. As can be seen from these figures, various connection patterns can be obtained from the patterned conductor 170. It is possible to form the connection conductor structure 154.
図 2 9は、 図 2 2に示した実施例の変形実施例を示す部分斜視図であ る。 この図において図 2 2と同様の部分には同じ符号を付して詳しい説 明を省略する。 この光源連結体 1 5 1 ' では、 光源として、 側面に光放 出部 1 5 2 を有するいわゆるサイドビュータイプの L E D 1 5 2 ' を用いている点が図 2 2に示した実施例と異なる。また、 L E D 1 5 2 ' が装着されるソケット 1 7 2 ' は、 側壁の一部が切除されて開口 1 7 6 を形成しており、 LED 1 5 2 ' から照射される光を妨げないようにな つている。尚、ソケット 1 7 2 ' の両側面に開口を設け、 L E D 1 5 2 ' の向きを変えて装着することを可能とし、 両側に光を照射するようにす ることもできる。 FIG. 29 is a partial perspective view showing a modified embodiment of the embodiment shown in FIG. In this figure, the same parts as those in FIG. 22 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted. The light source connector 15 1 ′ differs from the embodiment shown in FIG. 22 in that a so-called side-view type LED 15 2 ′ having a light emitting portion 15 2 on the side is used as a light source. . Also LED 1 5 2 ' The socket 17 2 ′ in which the LED is mounted has a part of the side wall cut away to form an opening 17 6 so as not to obstruct the light emitted from the LED 15 2 ′. An opening is provided on both sides of the socket 17 2 ′ so that the LED 15 2 ′ can be mounted with its orientation changed, and light can be applied to both sides.
図 30は、 図 22に示した実施例の別の変形実施例を示す部分斜視図 である。 この図において図 2 2、 図 2 9と同様の部分には同じ符号を付 して詳しい説明を省略する。 この光源連結体 1 5 1〃 では、 ソケッ ト 1 72" が接続導体構造 1 54の幅全体に渡って延在しており、 連結部材 の働きを兼ねている点が図 2 2の実施例と異なる。 このようにすること によりインサートモールドの箇所を減らして製造コストの低減を図るこ とができる。 また図 2 9の実施例と同様に光源としてサイドビュータイ プの LED 1 52 ' を用いることができるように、 ソケット 1 72〃 の 側壁の一部が切除されて開口 1 7 6を形成している。 開口 1 7 6はソケ ット 1 7 2〃 の両側に設けてあるので、 図 30に示したのとは逆向きに L ED 1 5 2 ' を取り付けることもできる。 光源としてノーマルタイプ の L ED 1 5 2を用いることも勿論可能である。  FIG. 30 is a partial perspective view showing another modified example of the embodiment shown in FIG. In this figure, the same parts as those in FIGS. 22 and 29 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted. In this light source connection body 151〃, the socket 172 "extends over the entire width of the connection conductor structure 154, and also serves as a connection member. In this way, it is possible to reduce the number of insert molds to reduce the manufacturing cost, and to use the side-view type LED 1 52 ′ as the light source as in the embodiment of FIG. In order to make the opening, a part of the side wall of the socket 172〃 is cut out to form an opening 176. Since the openings 176 are provided on both sides of the socket 172〃, FIG. It is also possible to mount the LED 152 'in the opposite direction to that shown in Fig. 2. It is of course possible to use a normal LED 152 as a light source.
図 3 1は、 図 2 2に示した実施例の更に別の変形実施例を示す斜視図 である。 この図において図 2 2と同様の部分には同じ符号を付して詳し い説明を省略する。 この光源連結体 1 5 1 aの接続導体構造 1 54 ' の 各光源取り付け部 1 5 5 ' の各端子接続部 1 5 9 ' は、 幅方向に延出す る一対の延出部 1 7 5を有している。 この幅方向延出部 1 7 5はプレス 機によって折り曲げられて接続導体構造 1 54 ' の主面に対して概ね垂 直に起こされ対向する壁を形成し、 その間にチップ型 LED 1 52を保 持して LED 1 5 2を接続導体構造 1 54 f に組み付けることができる ようになつている。 これにより、 図 2 2のようにインサ一トモ一ルドに よって形成されたソケット 1 72が不要となり、 その分、 製造コストや 作業時間を低減することができる。 尚、 図 2 2の実施例と同様に、 接続 導体構造 1 54 ' の光源取り付け部 1 5 5 ' の端子接続部 1 5 9 ' に電 気的に接続されたチップ型 L ED 1 5 2は、 接続部 1 5 9 ' に近接して 長手方向に延在する切り込みによって接続路 1 7 1中に形成された舌片 1 74を起こして折り曲げ、 その舌片 1 74によって上から押圧付勢す るようにすると、 不所望な脱落を防止することができ好適である。 FIG. 31 is a perspective view showing still another modified embodiment of the embodiment shown in FIG. In this figure, the same parts as those in FIG. Each terminal connection portion 15 9 ′ of each light source attachment portion 15 5 ′ of the connection conductor structure 1 54 ′ of the light source connection body 15 1 a has a pair of extension portions 17 5 extending in the width direction. Have. The widthwise extending portion 175 is bent by a press machine so as to be substantially perpendicular to the main surface of the connecting conductor structure 154 ′ to form a wall facing to the connecting conductor structure 154 ′. LED 15 2 can be assembled to the connection conductor structure 1 54 f . As a result, as shown in Fig. 22 Therefore, the formed socket 172 becomes unnecessary, and the manufacturing cost and work time can be reduced accordingly. Note that, similarly to the embodiment of FIG. 22, the chip type LED 152 electrically connected to the light source mounting portion 15 5 'of the connection conductor structure 1 54' The tongue 174 formed in the connection path 171 is raised and bent by a notch extending in the longitudinal direction in the vicinity of the connection part 159 ', and is pressed and urged from above by the tongue 174. This is preferable because undesired falling off can be prevented.
また図 3 1の実施例では、 右から 2つめの光源取り付け部 1 5 5 ' の 一対の端子接続部 1 5 9 ' には L ED 1 5 2が取り付けられておらず、 これら一対の端子接続部 1 5 9 ' はブリッジ部 1 5 9 Aによって互いに 連結され、 左から 2つめの L ED 1 5 2と右端の L E D 1 52の 2つの LEDを直列接続している。 これは図 3 2を参照して後に詳述するよう に、 接続導体構造 1 54 ' の元となるテープ状パターン化導体 1 7 0 ' をプレス加工によって製造する一次加工の際に各一対の端子接続部 1 5 9 ' を接続するブリッジ部 1 5 9 Aを形成しておき、二次加工において、 LED 1 52が取り付けられる光源取り付け部 1 5 5 ' 内のプリッジ部 1 5 9 Aのみを切除し、 L ED 1 5 2が接続されない光源取り付け部 1 55 ' のブリッジ部 1 5 9 Aはそのまま残しておくことにより実現でき る。 このようにすることにより、 完成された光源連結体 1 5 1 aにおい て隣り合う LED 1 5 2間の間隔を調整することが可能である。 尚、 図 3 1の実施例では L ED 1 5 2は全て接続導体構造 1 5 4 ' の同じ面 (図では上面) 側に取り付けられているが、 延出部 1 7 5及び舌片 1 7 4の折り曲げ方向を反対にすることにより、 他方の面 (図では下面) に L ED 1 5 2を取り付けることも可能である。  In the embodiment shown in FIG. 31, the LED 152 is not attached to the pair of terminal connection portions 15 9 ′ of the second light source attachment portion 15 5 ′ from the right. The sections 159 'are connected to each other by a bridge section 159A, and the two LEDs, the second LED 152 from the left and the LED 152 on the right, are connected in series. As will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. A bridge part 159 A connecting the connection part 159 ′ is formed, and in the secondary processing, only the bridge part 159 A in the light source mounting part 155 ′ to which the LED 152 is mounted is cut off. However, this can be realized by leaving the bridge portion 159 A of the light source mounting portion 155 ′ to which the LED 155 is not connected as it is. By doing so, it is possible to adjust the interval between the adjacent LEDs 152 in the completed light source assembly 151a. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 31, the LEDs 15 2 are all mounted on the same side (upper surface in the figure) of the connection conductor structure 15 4 ′, but the extension 17 5 and the tongue 17 By reversing the bending direction of 4, it is also possible to attach LED 152 to the other surface (the lower surface in the figure).
さらに図 3 1の実施例では、 連絡路部 1 6 0と第 2の幹路部 1 62と の間にチップ型抵抗 (または表面実装用抵抗ともいう) 1 56が接続さ れている。 このため図 3 1の接続導体構造 1 5 4 ' は、 抵抗 1 5 6が接 続される連絡路部 1 6 0及び第 2の幹路部 1 6 2の箇所において、 連絡 路部 1 6 0及び幹路部 1 6 2から互いに向かって延出する一対の抵抗端 子接続部 1 7 8を有している。 即ちこれら一対の抵抗端子接続部 1 7 8 によって抵抗取り付け部 1 7 7が形成されている。 L E D 1 5 2に対す る (光源) 端子接続部 1 5 9 ' と同様に、 各抵抗端子接続部 1 7 8もプ レス機によって折り曲げられて対向する壁を形成する一対の延出部 1 7 9を備えている。 チップ型抵抗 1 5 6はこれら対向する壁 1 7 9の間に 挿入され、 チップ型抵抗 1 5 6の一対の端子 1 5 7は抵抗端子接続部 1 7 8に例えばレーザ溶接などにより溶接 (ボンディング) される。 レー ザ溶接は好適には抵抗端子接続部 1 7 8の抵抗 1 5 6が取り付けられる 反対側の面の 1または複数の点にレーザ光を当てることにより行うこと ができるが、 抵抗 1 5 6が取り付けられる面の側からレ一ザ光を当てて 行うことも可能である。 溶接することによりチップ型抵抗 1 5 6が不所 望に接続導体構造 1 5 4 ' から脱落するのを防止することができる。 接 続導体構造 1 5 4 ' がアルミからなると、 このようなレーザ溶接を信頼 度高く行うことができるため好ましい。 錫メツキをしておくといっそう 好適である。 なお、 アーク溶接、 超音波溶接、 スポット溶接 (抵抗溶接) なども考えられるが、 チップ型抵抗 1 5 6の端子 1 5 7は通常極めて薄 く損傷しやすいため、 そのような損傷の可能性を極力低減するためレー ザ溶接が好適である。 溶接の代わりに例えば窒化アルミの粉末を含む導 電性接着剤を用いることも可能であるが、 機械的強度の観点からは一般 に溶接の方が好ましい。 このように、 連絡路部 1 6 0と第 2の幹路部 1 6 2との間に抵抗 1 5 6を接続可能とすることにより、 L E D 1 5 2に 対して直列に抵抗 1 5 6を接続して L E D 1 5 2に過電圧が印加される のを防止することができる。 また図 3 1の実施例では、 連絡路部 1 6 0と一対の幹路部 1 6 1、 1 6 2とを連結するべく接続導体構造 1 5 4 ' の幅方向に延在するように インサートモールドにより形成される連結部材 1 6 5 ' が、 接続導体構 造 1 5 4 ' の幅と同じ長さとなっている。 これは後に図 3 2に示すよう に、 一対の幹路部 1 6 1及び 1 6 2の一部に幅方向凹み 1 6 6 Aまたは 貫通孔 1 6 6 Bが形成され、 これら幅方向凹み 1 6 6 Aまたは貫通孔 1 6 6 Bを通じて、 ィンサ一トモ一ルドにより形成される連結部材 1 6 5 ' の一部が図の上下方向に延在して幹路部 1 6 1及び 1 6 2と強固に 連結し、 長手方向への連結部材 1 6 5 ' のずれが防止されることにより 可能となっている。 Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 31, a chip-type resistor (also referred to as a surface mount resistor) 156 is connected between the communication path section 160 and the second main path section 162. Have been. For this reason, the connection conductor structure 150 4 ′ of FIG. 31 includes the connection path section 160 at the connection path section 160 to which the resistor 156 is connected and the second trunk path section 16 2. And a pair of resistance terminal connection portions 178 extending from the trunk portion 162 toward each other. That is, a resistance mounting portion 177 is formed by the pair of resistance terminal connection portions 178. As with the (light source) terminal connection section 15 9 ′ for the LED 15 2, each resistance terminal connection section 17 8 is also bent by a press machine to form a pair of extension sections 17 It has nine. The chip-type resistor 156 is inserted between the opposed walls 179, and the pair of terminals 157 of the chip-type resistor 156 are welded to the resistor terminal connection portion 178 by, for example, laser welding (bonding). ) Is done. Laser welding is preferably performed by irradiating laser light to one or more points on the opposite side to which the resistor 156 of the resistor terminal connection 178 is attached. It is also possible to apply laser light from the side of the surface to be attached. By welding, it is possible to prevent the chip resistor 156 from undesirably dropping off from the connecting conductor structure 154 ′. It is preferable that the connection conductor structure 154 ′ be made of aluminum because such laser welding can be performed with high reliability. It is more suitable to tin-plate. In addition, arc welding, ultrasonic welding, spot welding (resistance welding), etc. are also conceivable, but the terminal 157 of the chip-type resistor 156 is usually very thin and easily damaged. Laser welding is preferred to reduce as much as possible. Although a conductive adhesive containing, for example, aluminum nitride powder can be used instead of welding, welding is generally preferred from the viewpoint of mechanical strength. In this way, by allowing the resistor 156 to be connectable between the communication path section 160 and the second trunk section 162, the resistor 156 is connected in series to the LED 152. It can be connected to prevent overvoltage from being applied to LED 152. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 31, the insert is formed so as to extend in the width direction of the connection conductor structure 15 4 ′ so as to connect the communication path section 160 and the pair of trunk sections 16 1, 16 2. The connecting member 165 'formed by the mold has the same length as the width of the connecting conductor structure 154'. As shown in FIG. 32, a widthwise depression 1666A or a through hole 1666B is formed in a part of the pair of trunk roads 161 and 162 later, as shown in FIG. A part of the connecting member 16 5 ′ formed by the sensor mold extends in the vertical direction in the figure through 66 A or the through hole 16 B, and the trunk roads 16 1 and 16 2 It is made possible by firmly connecting the connecting member and preventing the connecting member 165 'from shifting in the longitudinal direction.
図 3 2は、 図 3 1の光源連結体 1 5 1 aを形成するのに使用されるパ ターン化導体 1 7 0 ' の平面図である。 この図において、 図 2 5と同様 の部分には同じ符号を付して詳しい説明を省略する。 図示されているよ うに、 このパターン化導体 1 7 0 ' は、 各々チップ型 L E D 1 5 2を取 り付けることのできる複数の光源取り付け部 1 5 5 ' を有しており、 各 光源取り付け部 1 5 5 ' はチップ型 L E D 1 5 2の一対の電気接続用端 子 1 5 3に対応した一対の端子接続部 1 5 9 ' を有している。 各端子接 続部 1 5 9 ' は一対の相反する方向に延出する幅方向延出部 1 7 5を有 しており、 接続導体構造 1 5 4 ' を形成する際のパターン化導体 1 7 0 ' の二次加工 (プレス加工) 時にこれら延出部 1 7 5を折り曲げるこ とで、 図 3 1に示したようなチップ型 L E D 1 5 2を保持または位置決 めするための壁を形成することができるようになつている。 尚、 曲げ加 ェが容易なように延出部 1 7 5の基部にノッチ(溝)を形成してもよい。 また図 3 2のパターン化導体 1 7 0 ' では、 図 3 1に関連して述べた ように、 各光源取り付け部 1 5 5 ' の一対の端子接続部 1 5 9 ' 間がブ リッジ部 1 5 9 Aによって連結され、 接続導体構造 1 5 4 ' を形成する パターン化導体 1 7 CT の二次加工時に L E D 1 5 2が接続される光源 取り付け部 1 5 5 ' のブリッジ部 1 5 9 Aのみを切除することができる ようになつている。 さらに、 このパターン化導体 1 7 0 ' では、 連絡路 部 1 6 0と第 2の幹路部 1 6 2とを結ぶ枝路部 1 6 4の一部が、 連絡路 部 1 6 0と幹路部 1 6 2との間にチップ型抵抗 1 5 6を接続するための 抵抗取り付け部 1 7 7によって置き換えられている。 各抵抗取り付け部 1 7 7はチップ型抵抗 1 5 6の一対の電気接続用端子 1 5 7に対応する 一対の抵抗端子接続部 1 7 8を有し、 二次加工前のパターン化導体 1 7 0 ' においては、 これら一対の抵抗端子接続部 1 7 8はブリッジ部 1 7 8 Aによって互いに連結されており、 実際に抵抗 1 5 6が接続される場 合のみ二次加工においてブリッジ部 1 7 8 Aが切除される。 抵抗 1 5 6 が接続されずブリッジ部 1 7 8 Aが残される場合は、 通常の枝路部 1 6 4と同様に、 単に連絡路部 1 6 0と第 2の幹路部 1 6 2とを連結する導 体として機能することが理解されるだろう。 尚、 図 3 2の実施例では複 数の枝路部 1 6 4の一部を抵抗取り付け部 1 7 7としたが、 全部を抵抗 取り付け部 1 7 7としてもよい。 また、 図 3 1、 図 3 2の実施例では抵 抗 1 5 6取り付けるための抵抗取り付け部 1 7 7を連絡路部 1 6 0と第 2の幹路部 1 6 2との間に設けたが、 連絡路部 1 6 0と第 1の幹路部 1 6 1との間に設けることも勿論可能である。 FIG. 32 is a plan view of a patterned conductor 170 ′ used to form the light source assembly 151a of FIG. In this figure, the same parts as those in FIG. As shown, this patterned conductor 170 ′ has a plurality of light source mounting portions 155 ′, each of which can be mounted with a chip type LED 152, and each of the light source mounting portions 155 ′. The reference numeral 15 5 ′ has a pair of terminal connection portions 15 9 ′ corresponding to the pair of electric connection terminals 15 3 of the chip type LED 15 2. Each terminal connecting portion 15 9 ′ has a pair of widthwise extending portions 17 5 extending in opposite directions, and is a patterned conductor 17 5 when forming the connecting conductor structure 15 4 ′. By bending these extensions 175 during the secondary processing (press processing) of 0 ', a wall is formed to hold or position the chip-type LED 152 as shown in Fig. 31 You can do it. Notches (grooves) may be formed at the base of the extension portion 175 so that bending can be easily performed. In the patterned conductor 170 ′ in FIG. 32, as described with reference to FIG. 31, the bridge portion 1 59 ′ between the pair of terminal connection portions 159 ′ of each light source mounting portion 155 ′ is provided. Connected by 5 9 A to form a connecting conductor structure 1 5 4 ′ During the secondary processing of the patterned conductor 17 CT, only the bridge section 15 9 A of the light source mounting section 15 5 ′ to which the LED 15 2 is connected can be cut off. Further, in the patterned conductor 170 ', a part of the branch section 164 connecting the connecting path section 160 and the second trunk section 162 is partially connected to the connecting path section 160 and the trunk section. It has been replaced by a resistor mounting part 177 for connecting a chip type resistor 156 to the road part 162. Each resistor mounting portion 1 7 7 has a pair of resistor terminal connection portions 1 7 8 corresponding to a pair of electrical connection terminals 1 5 7 of the chip type resistor 1 5 6, and the patterned conductor 1 7 before secondary processing At 0 ′, the pair of resistance terminal connection portions 178 are connected to each other by the bridge portion 178 A, and only when the resistance 156 is actually connected, the bridge portion 178 in the secondary processing. 8 A is removed. If the resistor 156 is not connected and the bridge section 178 A is left, just like the normal branch section 164, the connection section 160 and the second trunk section 162 are simply connected. It will be understood that it functions as a conductor connecting the two. In the embodiment of FIG. 32, a part of the plurality of branch portions 164 is a resistor mounting portion 177, but all of the branch portions 164 may be a resistor mounting portion 177. In addition, in the embodiment of FIGS. 31 and 32, the resistance mounting portion 1777 for mounting the resistor 156 is provided between the communication path portion 160 and the second main road portion 162. However, it is of course possible to provide between the connecting path section 160 and the first trunk section 161.
更に、 上記したように図 3 2のパターン化導体 1 7 (T は、 連結部材 1 6 5 ' が設けられる位置に対応した場所において、 第 1の幹路部 1 6 1に半円形の幅方向凹み 1 6 6 Aが設けられ、 第 2の幹路部 1 6 2に貫 通孔 1 6 6 Bが形成されている。 このようにすることにより、 ィンサー トモ一ルドにより形成される連結部材 1 6 5 ' の一部がこれら幅方向凹 み 1 6 6 A及び貫通孔 1 6 6 Bを通って延在し、 連結部材 1 6 5 ' がパ ターン化導体 1 7 0 ' の幅と同じまたはより短い長さであっても、 連結 部材 1 6 5 ' と幹路部 1 6 1、 1 6 2とを強固に結合することが可能と なる。 尚、 図 3 2では比較的幅の狭い第 1の幹路部 1 6 1に幅方向凹部 を設け、 比較的幅の厚い第 2の幹路部 1 6 2に貫通孔を設けたが、 逆に することも勿論可能である。 連結部材 1 6 5 ' の一部がこれら幹路部 1 6 1、 1 6 2の一部を上下方向に貫通できるようになっていればよい。 もちろん幅方向凹み 1 6 6 Aや貫通孔 1 6 6 Bの形状は任意であり、 半 円形や円形に限らない。 Further, as described above, the patterned conductor 17 (T in FIG. 32 corresponds to the semi-circular width direction of the first main road 161 at a position corresponding to the position where the connecting member 16 5 ′ is provided. A recess 1666A is provided, and a through hole 1666B is formed in the second trunk section 162. In this manner, the connecting member 1 formed by the insert mold is formed. 6 5 ′ extends through these widthwise recesses 1 66 A and through holes 16 6 B, and the connecting member 16 5 ′ has the same width or the same width as the patterned conductor 170 ′. Concatenation, even for shorter lengths The member 16 5 ′ and the trunk roads 16 1, 16 2 can be firmly connected. In FIG. 32, the first trunk road portion 161 having a relatively small width is provided with a recess in the width direction, and the second trunk road portion 162 having a relatively large width is provided with a through hole. It is, of course, possible to do so. It is sufficient that a part of the connecting member 16 5 ′ can penetrate a part of these trunk roads 16 1 and 16 2 in the vertical direction. Of course, the shape of the widthwise recess 1666A and the through hole 1666B is arbitrary, and is not limited to a semicircle or a circle.
図 3 3は、 L E Dの直列接続体を形成するのに適した図 1 8のパター ン化導体の変形実施例を示す部分平面図である。 この図において図 1 8 と同様の部分には同じ符号を付して詳しい説明を省略する。 図示されて いるように、 このパターン化導体 1 2 0 ' は図 1 8に示した第 1の幹路 部 1 1 1及びこの第 1の幹路部 1 1 1を連絡路部 1 1 0に接続する枝路 部 1 1 3を有しておらず、 その分幅が狭くなつている。 このようにする ことにより、 光源連結体の完成時に不要となる材料を節約してコストの 低減を図ることができる。 尚、 このパターン化導体 1 2 0 ' は幹路部 1 1 1及び枝路部 1 1 3を有さない点を除くと図 1 8のパターン化導体 12 0と同じであるため、 図 1 8のパターン化導体 1 2 0に対して用いる のと同じ順送プレス機で処理可能である。  FIG. 33 is a partial plan view showing a modified embodiment of the patterned conductor of FIG. 18 suitable for forming a series connection of LEDs. In this figure, the same parts as those in FIG. As shown in the figure, the patterned conductor 120 ′ is connected to the first trunk section 111 and the first trunk section 111 shown in FIG. It does not have the branch section 113 to be connected, and its width is narrowed accordingly. By doing so, unnecessary materials can be saved when the light source assembly is completed, and costs can be reduced. Note that this patterned conductor 1 20 ′ is the same as the patterned conductor 120 of FIG. 18 except that it does not have the trunk section 1 1 1 and the branch section 1 13, and therefore, FIG. It can be processed by the same progressive press machine used for the patterned conductor 120 of FIG.
図 3 4は、 L E Dの直列接続体を形成するのに適した図 2 5のパター ン化導体の変形実施例を示す部分平面図である。 この図において図 2 5 と同様の部分には同じ符号を付して詳しい説明を省略する。 図 3 3に示 したパターン化導体 1 2 0 ' と同様に、 このパターン化導体 1 7 0〃 も 第 1の幹路部 1 6 1及び枝路部 1 6 3を有しておらず、 材料削減による コストの低減が図られている。  FIG. 34 is a partial plan view showing a modified example of the patterned conductor of FIG. 25 suitable for forming a series connection of LEDs. In this figure, the same parts as those in FIG. Similarly to the patterned conductor 120 ′ shown in FIG. 33, this patterned conductor 170 ° also does not have the first trunk portion 161 and the branch portion 163, and is made of material. Costs are being reduced through reductions.
図 3 5は、 連結部材の別の実施例を示す図 1 6と同様の部分斜視図で ある。 この図において図 1 6と同様の部分には同じ符号を付して詳しい 説明を省略する。 この光源連結体 1 0 1 ' では、 両幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2と連絡路部 1 1 0とを連結するための連結部材として、 接続導体構造 1 04 (またはパターン化導体 1 20) の幅方向に延在する例えば塩化 ビニールからなる複数の絶縁性シ一ト 1 84を用いている。 この絶縁性 シート 1 84は、 幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2及び連絡路部 1 1 0を含むパタ ーン化導体 1 2 0に、 その二次加工前に張り付けることができる。 その ような張り付けには接着剤を用いることが好適であるが、 熱溶着、 樹脂 の UV硬化など他の任意の適切な方法によって張り付けることもできる。 このようなシート 1 84を用いた場合、 ィンサートモールドを用いた場 合と比べて、 機械的強度では劣るが、 形成される光源連結体をより小形 または薄形にすることができる。 また絶縁性シート 1 84は、 テープ状 パターン化導体 1 2 0の二次加工時、 プレス機によって一緒に打ち抜く ことが可能である。 FIG. 35 is a partial perspective view similar to FIG. 16 showing another embodiment of the connecting member. In this figure, the same parts as those in FIG. Description is omitted. In this light source connected body 101 ', a connecting conductor structure 104 (or a patterned conductor 120 ), A plurality of insulative sheets 184 made of, for example, vinyl chloride are used. The insulating sheet 184 can be attached to the patterned conductor 120 including the main roads 111, 112 and the communication path 110 before the secondary processing. It is preferable to use an adhesive for such attachment, but it is also possible to attach by any other appropriate method such as heat welding or UV curing of a resin. When such a sheet 184 is used, mechanical strength is inferior to the case where an insert mold is used, but the formed light source connecting body can be made smaller or thinner. The insulating sheet 184 can be punched together by a press machine during the secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 120.
図 36は、 連結部材の更に別の実施例を示す図 1 6と同様の部分斜視 図であり、 図 3 7はその下面図である。 これらの図において図 1 6と同 様の部分には同じ符号を付して詳しい説明を省略する。 この光源連結体 1 0 1〃 では、 両幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2と連絡路部 1 1 0とを連結する ための連結部材として、 接続導体構造 1 04 (またはパターン化導体 1 20) の幅方向に延在するとともに、 その長さ方向に所定の長さに渡つ て延在する例えば塩化ビニールからなる絶縁性シート 1 84 ' を用いて いる。 絶縁性シート 1 84 ' は例えばパターン化導体 1 2 0の全長に渡 つて延在してもよい。 このような絶縁性シート 1 84 ' もまたパターン 化導体 1 2 0の二次加工前にパターン化導体' 1 2 0に接着剤などの適切 な手段を用いて取り付けられる。 また絶縁性シート 1 84 ' の所定の部 分 (例えばパイロット穴 1 1 8と整合する部分及び L ED 1 02のリ一 ド線 1 0 3が差し込まれる部分) に穴をあけてもよい。 本実施例では図 3 7の下面図によく示されているように、 レ一ザ溶接のためのレーザを 下側から当てることができるように、 接続導体構造 1 0 4の端子接続部 1 0 9 (または光源取り付け部 1 0 5 ) を露出するよう開口 1 8 5が設 けられている。 図 3 6に示した実施例でもやはり、 図 3 5に示した複数 の絶縁性シート 1 8 4を用いる実施例と同様に、 インサートモールドを 用いた塲合と比べて形成される光源連結体をより小形または薄形にする ことができる。 また複数の絶縁性シート 1 8 4を用いる場合と比べて比 較的容易且つ短時間にパターン化導体 1 2 0への張り付け作業を行うこ とができる。 尚、 図 3 6では絶縁性シート 1 8 4 ' は接続導体構造 1 0 4の幅方向一杯に渡って延在しているが、 両幹路部 1 1 1 、 1 1 2と連 絡路部 1 1 0とを連結できればよく、 必ずしも幅方向全体に渡って延在 する必要はなく、 例えばパイロット穴 1 1 8を塞がないような幅として もよい。 FIG. 36 is a partial perspective view similar to FIG. 16 showing still another embodiment of the connecting member, and FIG. 37 is a bottom view thereof. In these figures, the same parts as those in FIG. 16 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted. In this light source connected body 101, a connecting conductor structure 104 (or a patterned conductor 120) is used as a connecting member for connecting the two main road sections 111, 112 and the connecting path section 110. ), An insulating sheet 184 ′ made of, for example, vinyl chloride is used which extends over a predetermined length in the length direction. The insulating sheet 184 'may extend, for example, over the entire length of the patterned conductor 120. Such an insulating sheet 184 'is also attached to the patterned conductor' 120 using a suitable means such as an adhesive before the secondary processing of the patterned conductor '120. A hole may be formed in a predetermined portion of the insulating sheet 184 '(for example, a portion matching the pilot hole 118 and a portion where the lead wire 103 of the LED 102 is inserted). In this embodiment, 3 As shown in the bottom view of 7, the terminal for the connecting conductor structure 104 (or light source mounting) is connected so that the laser for laser welding can be applied from below. An opening 180 is provided to expose the part 105). In the embodiment shown in FIG. 36 as well, similarly to the embodiment using a plurality of insulating sheets 184 shown in FIG. Can be smaller or thinner. In addition, the work of attaching to the patterned conductor 120 can be performed relatively easily and in a short time as compared with the case where a plurality of insulating sheets 184 are used. In FIG. 36, the insulating sheet 18 4 ′ extends over the entire width of the connecting conductor structure 104 in the width direction, but the two trunk roads 1 1 1, 1 1 2 and the connecting road 1 As long as it can be connected to 110, it is not always necessary to extend over the entire width direction. For example, the width may be such that the pilot hole 118 is not closed.
図 3 6に示したように絶縁シート 1 8 4 ' を連結部材として用いた光 源連結体 1 0 1〃 の場合、 図 3 8に示すように両幹路部 1 1 1 、 1 1 2 の主面が連絡路部 1 1 0の主面と垂直になるように枝路部 1 1 3、 1 1 4を折り曲げ、 幹路部 1 1 1 、 1 1 2を取り付けボード (保持体) 1 8 0に形成した整合する溝 1 8 1 、 1 8 2に挿入することで、 光源連結体 1 0 1〃 の取り付けボード 1 8 0への取り付けを容易に行うことができ る。 光源連結体 1 0 1〃 の下面に突出する例えば L E D 1 0 2のリード 線 1 0 3などを受容するべく取り付けボード 1 8 0に溝または穴を設け てもよい。 また取り付けポ一ド 1 8 0をモールドにより光源連結体 1 0 1と一体になるように形成してもよい。 更に、 取り付けポード 1 8 0に 複数の光源連結体 1 0 1〃 を幅方向に並べて配設し、 面光源を形成する ことも可能である。 その際、 縦方向及び横方向の L E D 1 0 2のピッチ が同じになるように調整することが好ましい。 尚、 図 1 6に示した光源 連結体 1 0 1では、 インサートモールドにより形成した連結部材 1 1 5 により接続導体構造 1 04の幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2及び連絡路部 1 1 0 を連結していたが、 LED 1 02の接続導体構造 1 04への取り付け後 は、 L ED 1 0 2及び枝路部 1 1 3、 1 14を介して両幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2と連絡路部 1 1 0がー体となっているため、 連結部材 1 1 5は除 去することができる。 そのような場合にも図 3 8に示したのと同様にし て光源連結体 1 0 1の取り付けボードへの取り付けが可能である。 図 2 2に示した光源連結体についても同様である。 As shown in FIG. 36, in the case of the light source connected body 101 〃 using the insulating sheet 184 ′ as a connecting member, as shown in FIG. 38, the two main road sections 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 Fold the branch roads 1 1 3 and 1 1 4 so that the main surface is perpendicular to the main surface of the connecting road 1 1 10 and attach the trunk roads 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 to the board (holding body) 1 8 By inserting into the matching grooves 18 1, 18 2 formed at 0, the light source connector 101 can easily be mounted on the mounting board 180. A groove or a hole may be provided in the mounting board 180 so as to receive, for example, the lead wire 103 of the LED 102 projecting from the lower surface of the light source connector 101 体. Further, the mounting port 180 may be formed integrally with the light source connector 101 by molding. Further, it is also possible to form a surface light source by arranging a plurality of light source connected bodies 101 on the mounting port 180 side by side in the width direction. At this time, it is preferable to adjust the pitches of the LEDs 102 in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction so that they are the same. The light source shown in Fig. 16 In the connecting body 101, the trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 of the connecting conductor structure 104 and the connecting path 1 110 were connected by the connecting member 1 15 formed by insert molding. After installation on the connecting conductor structure 104 of 02, the two trunk roads 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 and the connecting road 1 110 are connected via the LED 102 and the branch roads 1 13 and 1 14. The connecting member 1 15 can be removed because of the body. In such a case, the light source connector 101 can be mounted on the mounting board in the same manner as shown in FIG. The same applies to the light source assembly shown in FIG.
図 3 9は、 例えば図 3 6に示した絶縁シート 1 84 ' を連結部材とし て用いた光源連結体 1 0 1〃 を用いた発光体装置の一実施例 1 9 0を示 す斜視図であり、図 40はそのライン XL— XLに沿った横方向断面図、 図 4 1は模式的な上面図である。 これらの図において図 3 6に示したの と同様の部分には同じ符号を付して詳しい説明を省略する。 図 4 1によ く示されるように、 この例では、 光源連結体 1 0 1〃 に含まれる N個の LED直列ブロック 1^ 〜LN の各々は 4つの LED 1 0 2とこれら L ED 1 0 2に直列に接続されたチップ型抵抗 1 5 6 (図 3 1参照) を含 んでいる。 チップ型抵抗 1 5 6は、 隣接する L ED 1 0 2間の連絡路部 1 1 0 (または接続路 1 2 1 ) の一部を切除して、 その切除部分をまた ぐように抵抗 1 5 6を配置して抵抗 1 5 6の端子を接続路 1 2 1にレー ザ溶接することにより取り付けることができる。 また各直列ブロック L i 〜LN に含まれる LED 1 02の数はもちろん様々に変えることがで きる。 FIG. 39 is a perspective view showing an embodiment 190 of a light emitting device using a light source connector 101 using, for example, the insulating sheet 184 ′ shown in FIG. 36 as a connecting member. Yes, FIG. 40 is a cross-sectional view along the line XL—XL, and FIG. 41 is a schematic top view. In these drawings, the same parts as those shown in FIG. 36 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 41, in this example, each of the N LED series blocks 1 ^ to LN included in the light source assembly 101〃 is composed of four LEDs 102 and these LEDs 1 Includes a chip-type resistor 1 56 (see Figure 31) connected in series to 0 2. The chip-type resistor 156 cuts a part of the communication path 110 (or connection path 121) between the adjacent LEDs 102, and the resistor 156 spans the cut part. 6 can be mounted and the terminal of the resistor 156 can be attached by laser welding to the connection path 121. The number of LEDs 102 included in each of the series blocks L i to L N can of course be variously changed.
図示されている発光体装置 1 9 0は、 光源連結体 1 0 1〃 を収容する ハウジングとして例えばガラス管のような光透過性を有する円筒形状の 管状部材 1 9 1を有している。 L ED 1 0 2として十分寸法の小さいも のを使用することにより、 管状部材 1 9 1は例えば直径 0. 5〜2 cm と細いものを用いることができる。 透光性管状部材 1 9 1はプラスチッ クなどから形成することも可能であるが、 後に詳述するように、 熱放散 を効率よく行うため熱伝達特性の良いガラス管が好ましい。 The illustrated light-emitting device 190 has a light-transmitting cylindrical tubular member 191, such as a glass tube, as a housing for accommodating the light source connector 101 '. By using a sufficiently small one as the LED 102, the tubular member 191, for example, has a diameter of 0.5 to 2 cm. And a thin thing can be used. The translucent tubular member 191 can be made of plastic or the like, but as described later in detail, a glass tube having good heat transfer characteristics is preferable for efficient heat dissipation.
管状部材 1 9 1の両端にはキャップ部材 1 9 2が装着され、 各キヤッ プ部材 1 9 2には一対の導電性ピン 1 9 3が保持されている。 管状部材 1 9 1の各端部に設けられた一対の導電性ピン 1 9 3の一方は、 光源連 結体 1 0 1〃 の第 1の幹路部 1 1 1に接続され、 他方は第 2の幹路部 1 1 2に接続されている。 これにより、 例えば管状部材 1 9 1の一方の端 部に設けられた一対の導電性ピン 1 9 3を電源に接続することで、 幹路 部 1 1 1、 1 1 2を介して光源連結体 1 0 1〃 の L E D 1 0 2に電源電 圧を供給することができる。  Cap members 192 are attached to both ends of the tubular member 191, and each cap member 192 holds a pair of conductive pins 1993. One of a pair of conductive pins 193 provided at each end of the tubular member 191 is connected to the first trunk section 111 of the light source connector 101, and the other is connected to the first It is connected to 2 main roads 1 1 2. Thus, for example, by connecting a pair of conductive pins 193 provided at one end of the tubular member 191 to a power source, the light source connector is connected via the trunk roads 111, 112. The power supply voltage can be supplied to the LED 101 of 101〃.
このように本実施例によれば、 L E D 1 0 2を電源に接続するための 配線 (または電路) として光源連結体 1 0 1〃 の幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2 を使用できるため、 別途配線する場合と比べて組み立てなどの作業効率 を大幅に向上させることができる。 また、 対応する導電性ピン 1 9 3を 介して別の発光体装置 1 9 0を接続することが可能であり、 それを繰り 返すことで、 任意の数の発光体装置 1 9 0を連結することができる。 こ の場合発光体装置 1 9 0同士の接続が容易なように、 例えば一方の端部 の導電性ピン 1 9 3をォス型にし、 他方の端部の導電性ピン 1 9 3をメ ス型としてもよい。 また接続のため専用のコネクタケーブルを用いるこ とも可能である。 尚、 装置 1 9 0を単体としてのみ使用する場合には光 源連結体 1 5 1の第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2は管状部材 1 9 1の一方の端部に設けられた導電性ピン 1 9 3にのみ接続されるように することもできる。  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 of the light source assembly 100 1 で き る can be used as wiring (or electric circuit) for connecting the LED 102 to the power supply. The work efficiency of assembling and the like can be greatly improved as compared with the case of wiring separately. Further, it is possible to connect another luminous device 190 through the corresponding conductive pin 193, and by repeating this, any number of luminous devices 190 can be connected. be able to. In this case, for example, the conductive pin 193 at one end is formed into a female shape and the conductive pin 193 at the other end is female so that the light emitting device 190 can be easily connected to each other. It may be a type. It is also possible to use a dedicated connector cable for connection. When the device 190 is used only as a single unit, the first and second trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 of the light source connector 15 1 are connected to one end of the tubular member 19 1. Alternatively, it may be configured to be connected only to the conductive pin 193 provided in the device.
また、 図 3 9〜図 4 1に示した発光体装置 1 9 0では、 使用時には抵 抗 1 2 2や L E D 1 0 2から熱が発生する。 また、 管状部材 1 9 1はそ の両端をキャップ部材 1 9 2で密封されていることから、 管状部材 1 9 1の直径が 0 . 5〜 2 c mと細い場合には熱対流がほとんど発生しない。 そのため、 プリント基板を用いた場合、 回路形成に用いられる銅箔が通 常 3 5 m程度と薄く熱伝達効率が悪い (即ち、 熱伝達速度が遅い) た め、 抵抗 1 2 2や L E D 1 5 2などの素子から発生した熱がその周囲に 留まり、 素子周囲の温度が過度に上昇してそれにより素子が損傷したり 性能低下したりする恐れがあった。 しかしながら、 図 3 9〜図 4 1に示 した発光体装置 1 9 0は導電性平板材料を ( 1次及び 2次の) プレス加 ェして形成することのできる接続導体構造 1 0 4 (図 3 8 ) を有する光 源連結体 1 0 1〃 を用いており、 平板材料の厚さは通常 0 . 1〜 0 . 3 mm程度とプリント基板の銅箔と比べて大幅に厚くすることができる。 そのため熱伝導特性がプリント基板と比べて極めて良好であり、 各素子 で発生した熱を逃がし、 素子の周りで温度が過度に上昇するのを抑止し て、 管状部材 1 9 1内で概ね均一な温度分布を実現することができる。 更に第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2には熱伝達部材として働く 好適にはアルミなどの金属からなる弾性を有する円弧状の複数の熱伝達 板 1 9 4が例えば溶接ゃネジ止めによって取り付けられている。 熱伝達 板 1 9 4は、 光源連結体 1 0 1〃 を管状部材 1 9 1内で支持する支持体 としても働く。 図の断面図によく示されているように熱伝達板 1 9 4は 管状部材 1 9 1の内面に概ね沿った断面形状を有し、 管状部材 1 9 1に 密着状態で圧接している。 これにより、 第 1及び第 2の幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2から熱伝達板 1 9 4を介して管状部材 1 9 1へと熱が伝達され、 更にガラスからなる管状部材 1 9 1から外部へと熱が放散されるため、 管状部材 1 9 1内の温度上昇を一層抑制することができる。 即ち、 熱伝 達板 1 9 4を用いることによって管状部材 1 9 1自体をヒートシンクと して作用させることができる。 尚、 ガラスからなる管状部材 1 9 1以外 にも、 例えばセラミックのような熱伝達性のよい絶縁体からなるハウジ ング (収容体) に光源連結体 1 0 1〃 を収容して用いる場合にも上記し たような熱伝達板 1 9 4を用いてハウジングに熱を伝達し、 ハウジング から外部へと熱を放散するようにすることができる。 尚、 図示した例で は比較的小さい熱伝達板 1 9 4を用いたが、 管状部材 1 9 1と概ね同じ 長さに渡って延在する熱伝達板 1 9 4を用いることもできる。 またハウ ジングの形状は管状に限るものではなく、 熱伝達板 1 9 4の形状もハウ ジングの形状に合わせて様々に変えることができる。 また、 光源連結体 1 0 1〃 の上面及び Zまたは下面の一部または全部を黒色であると、 熱 を赤外線として放射することができるため一層好ましい。 これは、 例え ば黒色ニッケルめっき、黒色クロムめつき、クロメ一卜処理を行ったり、 材料に黒アルマイトを用いることにより可能である。 In the light emitting device 190 shown in FIGS. 39 to 41, heat is generated from the resistor 122 and the LED 102 when used. The tubular member 19 1 is Since both ends of the tubular member 1912 are sealed by the cap member 192, when the diameter of the tubular member 191 is as small as 0.5 to 2 cm, heat convection hardly occurs. Therefore, when a printed circuit board is used, the copper foil used to form the circuit is usually as thin as 35 m and has poor heat transfer efficiency (that is, the heat transfer speed is low). The heat generated from elements such as 2 remained in the surrounding area, and the temperature around the element was excessively increased, which could damage the element or reduce its performance. However, the light emitting device 190 shown in FIGS. 39 to 41 has a connection conductor structure 104 (FIG. 1) which can be formed by pressing (primary and secondary) a conductive flat plate material. The light source connected body 101) with (38) is used, and the thickness of the flat plate material is usually about 0.1 to 0.3 mm, which can be much larger than the copper foil of the printed circuit board. . Therefore, the heat conduction characteristics are extremely good compared to the printed circuit board, the heat generated in each element is released, and the temperature around the element is prevented from rising excessively, and the heat conduction is substantially uniform in the tubular member 19 1. A temperature distribution can be realized. Furthermore, a plurality of arc-shaped heat transfer plates 194 having elasticity, preferably made of metal such as aluminum, are welded to the first and second trunk road sections 111, 112, for example, by welding.取 り 付 け Mounted with screws. The heat transfer plate 194 also functions as a support for supporting the light source connector 101 in the tubular member 191. As is well shown in the cross-sectional view of the figure, the heat transfer plate 1994 has a cross-sectional shape substantially along the inner surface of the tubular member 191, and is pressed against the tubular member 191 in close contact. As a result, heat is transmitted from the first and second trunk roads 11 1 and 1 12 to the tubular member 19 1 via the heat transfer plate 19 4, and further, the tubular member 19 1 made of glass is formed. Since heat is dissipated from the outside to the outside, the temperature rise in the tubular member 19 1 can be further suppressed. That is, the use of the heat transfer plate 1994 allows the tubular member 1911 itself to act as a heat sink. In addition, tubular members made of glass other than 19 1 In addition, when the light source connector 101 is housed in a housing (housing) made of an insulator having good heat transfer properties, such as ceramic, the heat transfer plate 1994 described above is used. Can be used to transfer heat to the housing and dissipate heat from the housing to the outside. Although a relatively small heat transfer plate 194 is used in the illustrated example, a heat transfer plate 194 extending over substantially the same length as the tubular member 191 may be used. Further, the shape of the housing is not limited to a tubular shape, and the shape of the heat transfer plate 194 can be variously changed according to the shape of the housing. Further, it is more preferable that the upper surface and the Z or a part or all of the lower surface of the light source unit 101 be black because heat can be radiated as infrared rays. This can be achieved, for example, by performing black nickel plating, black chrome plating, chromate treatment, or using black alumite as the material.
上記実施例では、 個々の光源は例えば 2本のリード線を有する砲弾型 L E D 1 0 2またはリード線を有さないいわゆるチップ型 L E D 1 5 2 のような単一の発光素子からなっていた。 しかしながら以下に示すよう に、 一つの光源が複数の発光素子を含む発光素子アセンブリからなるよ うにすることもできる。  In the above embodiment, the individual light sources consisted of a single light-emitting element, such as a bullet-type LED 102 with two leads or a so-called chip-type LED 152 without leads. However, as described below, one light source may be formed of a light emitting element assembly including a plurality of light emitting elements.
図 4 2 aは光源としてそのような発光素子アセンブリ 1 9 5を用いた 実施例について説明するための斜視図である。 この実施例では、 接続導 体構造 1 0 4として図 2 0に示したようにテープ状パターン化導体 1 2 0を光源の並列接続用に二次加工したものを用いることができる。 図 4 2 aにおいて上記実施例と同様の部分には同じ符号を付して詳しい説明 を省略する。 また、 このように並列接続用の回路を構成する場合、 接続 導体構造 1 0 4の各光源取り付け部 1 0 5の一対の端子接続部 1 0 9は それぞれ対応する枝路部 1 1 3または 1 1 4を通じて幹路部 1 1 1また は 1 1 2に接続されているため、 接続導体構造 1 0 4の各部がばらばら になるのを防ぐためのインサ一トモ一ルドによる連結部材 1 1 5は不要 である。 FIG. 42a is a perspective view for explaining an embodiment using such a light emitting element assembly 195 as a light source. In this embodiment, as the connection conductor structure 104, as shown in FIG. 20, a tape-shaped patterned conductor 120 subjected to secondary processing for parallel connection of light sources can be used. In FIG. 42A, the same parts as those in the above embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. When a circuit for parallel connection is configured in this manner, a pair of terminal connection portions 109 of each light source attachment portion 105 of the connection conductor structure 104 are connected to the corresponding branch portion 1 13 or 1 respectively. Since each of them is connected to the trunk 1 1 1 or 1 1 2 through 1 4, each part of the connecting conductor structure 104 is separated The connecting member 115 is not required by the insert mold to prevent the occurrence.
図 4 2 aの実施例では、 光源としての発光素子アセンブリ 1 9 5は例 えばプリント基板などからなる支持体 1 9 8上に一列に配置され且つ電 気的に接続された 6つのチップ型 L E D 1 9 6と一つのチップ型抵抗 1 9 7とを有している。 さらにこの発光素子アセンブリ 1 9 5は、 接続導 体構造 1 0 4の各光源取り付け部 1 0 5の一対の端子接続部 1 0 9に対 応した間隔で離間し、 電気接続用の端子として働く下方に延在する一対 のリード線または導電性ピン 1 9 9を有している。 この発光素子ァセン プリ 1 9 5の L E D 1 9 6及び抵抗 1 9 7は例えば図 4 2 bの回路図に 示したように直列接続することができる。 このようにすることにより、 リード線 1 9 9を端子接続部 1 0 9に形成された接続穴 1 1 6に挿入す ることにより、 図 1 6の実施例について説明したのと同様にして、 光源 としての発光素子アセンブリ 1 9 5を接続導体構造 1 0 4に接続するこ とができる。 このように発光素子アセンブリ 1 9 5を光源として接続導 体構造 1 0 4に取り付け可能とすることで、 照明効果のパリエーション を広げることができる。 例えば図 4 2 aに示したように、 発光素子ァセ ンブリ 1 9 5を複数個光源として使用し、 隣接するもの同士が長手方向 に互いに密接するように配置することで、 光源と光源の間の暗部をなく して、 より均一な、 むらのない照明を実現することができる。 尚、 支持 体 1 9 8としてプリント基板を用いて発光素子アセンブリ 1 9 5を形成 する代わりに、 発光素子アセンブリ 1 9 5を例えば図 2 2や図 3 1に示 したような光源連結体 1 5 1、 1 5 1 ' を用いて形成することも可能で ある。  In the embodiment of FIG. 42a, the light-emitting element assembly 195 as a light source is composed of six chip-type LEDs arranged in a row on a support 198 made of, for example, a printed circuit board and electrically connected. 196 and one chip-type resistor 197. Further, the light emitting element assembly 195 is separated at a distance corresponding to the pair of terminal connection portions 109 of each light source mounting portion 105 of the connection conductor structure 104, and serves as a terminal for electrical connection. It has a pair of leads or conductive pins 199 extending downward. The LED 196 and the resistor 197 of the light emitting element assembly 195 can be connected in series, for example, as shown in the circuit diagram of FIG. By doing so, by inserting the lead wire 199 into the connection hole 1 16 formed in the terminal connection portion 109, in the same manner as described in the embodiment of FIG. The light emitting element assembly 195 as a light source can be connected to the connection conductor structure 104. By allowing the light-emitting element assembly 195 to be attached to the connection conductor structure 104 as a light source in this manner, it is possible to widen the parallax of the lighting effect. For example, as shown in Fig. 42a, a plurality of light-emitting element assemblies 195 are used as light sources, and adjacent light-emitting elements are arranged so as to be close to each other in the longitudinal direction. By eliminating dark areas, more uniform and even illumination can be achieved. Instead of using a printed circuit board as the support 1998 to form the light-emitting element assembly 1995, the light-emitting element assembly 1995 may be connected to the light source assembly 15 shown in FIG. 22 or FIG. 31, for example. It is also possible to form using 1, 1 5 1 '.
図 4 3 a及び図 4 3 bに、別の発光素子アセンブリを用いた例を示す。 図 4 3 aはそのような発光素子アセンブリ 1 9 5 ' を光源として用いた 光源連結体の実施例を説明するための斜視図であり、 図 43 bは発光素 子アセンブリ 1 9 5 ' の回路図である。 図 43 a及び図 43 bにおいて 図 42 a及び図 42 bと同様の部分には同じ符号を付して詳しい説明を 省略する。 この発光素子アセンブリ 1 9 5 ' は、 各々 6つの LED 1 9 6と一つの抵抗 1 9 7を直列に接続した直列接続体を、 例えばプリント 基板を有する支持体 1 9 8 ' 上に 5つ並置した構成となっており、 二次 元的な発光が可能となっている。 この実施例も、 図 42に示した実施例 と同様に、 接続導体構造 1 04の端子接続部 1 0 9に接続される電気接 続用端子として、 支持体 1 9 8 ' の L ED 1 9 6及び抵抗 1 9 7が取り 付けられた面とは反対側の面において、 所定の間隔で概ね平行に伸びる 一対のリード線または導電性ピン 1 9 9を有している。 図示されている ように、 発光素子アセンブリ 1 9 5 ' が接続導体構造 1 04と同じ幅を 有するようにすることができる。 このようにすると、 発光素子ァセンブ リ 1 9 5 ' を用いた光源連結体を幅方向に並べて配置したとき、 隣接す る光源連結体の間隔を適宜調節して全体的にむらのない照明を行うこと ができる。 また複数の発光素子アセンブリ 1 9 5 ' が長手方向に隙間な く配置されるようにすると光源と光源との間の暗部をなくすことができ るため好適である。 尚、 発光素子アセンブリ 1 9 5 ' の形状は正方形や 長方形に限るものではなく、 円形など他の任意の形状とすることができ る。 また、 上記実施例では接続導体構造 1 04としてテープ状パターン 化導体 1 20を光源の並列接続用に二次加工したものを用いたが、 発光 素子アセンブリ内の発光素子の接続方法や抵抗の大きさなどを適宜選択 することで、 直並列接続、 直列接続など他の接続用に二次加工したもの (図 1 9、 図 2 1 ) を用いることも勿論可能である。 FIGS. 43a and 43b show examples using another light emitting element assembly. Figure 43a shows such a light-emitting device assembly 1 95 'as the light source. FIG. 43B is a perspective view for explaining an embodiment of the light source assembly, and FIG. 43B is a circuit diagram of the light emitting element assembly 195 ′. In FIGS. 43a and 43b, the same parts as those in FIGS. 42a and 42b are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted. This light-emitting element assembly 195 'is composed of a series connection of 6 LEDs 1960 and one resistor 197 connected in series, for example, 5 on a support 198' with a printed circuit board. It has a two-dimensional light emission. In this embodiment, similarly to the embodiment shown in FIG. 42, the LED 19 of the support 1 98 ′ is used as an electric connection terminal connected to the terminal connection portion 109 of the connection conductor structure 104. On a surface opposite to the surface on which the resistor 6 and the resistor 197 are mounted, there is provided a pair of lead wires or conductive pins 199 extending substantially in parallel at predetermined intervals. As shown, the light emitting element assembly 1 95 ′ may have the same width as the connecting conductor structure 104. In this way, when the light source assemblies using the light-emitting element assemblies 1 95 ′ are arranged side by side in the width direction, the distance between adjacent light source assemblies is appropriately adjusted to provide uniform illumination as a whole. be able to. In addition, it is preferable that the plurality of light emitting element assemblies 1 95 ′ are arranged without a gap in the longitudinal direction, because a dark portion between the light sources can be eliminated. Note that the shape of the light emitting element assembly 195 'is not limited to a square or a rectangle, but may be any other shape such as a circle. Further, in the above embodiment, the tape-shaped patterned conductor 120 subjected to secondary processing for parallel connection of the light source was used as the connection conductor structure 104, but the connection method of the light emitting element in the light emitting element assembly and the size of the resistance were large. By appropriately selecting the size and the like, it is of course possible to use those that have been subjected to secondary processing for other connections such as series-parallel connection and series connection (Figs. 19 and 21).
光源としてチップ型 L ED 1 5 2を用いた例えば図 3 1に示した光源 連結体 1 5 1 aは、 接続導体構造 1 54 ' が概ね平板であり可撓性を有 することから、 長手方向に撓ませて使用することが可能である。 しかし ながら、 図 3 1の実施例では各チップ型 LED 1 5 2の一対の電気接続 用端子 1 5 3 (及び接続導体構造 1 54 ' の対応する一対の端子接続部 1 5 9 ' ) が光源連結体 1 5 1 a (即ち接続導体構造 1 5 4 ' ) の長手 方向に離間して配置される構成となっているため、 光源連結体 1 5 1 a を撓ませたとき、 接続導体構造 1 54 ' の端子接続部 1 5 9 ' と L ED 1 5 2の端子 1 5 3とを離間させようとする力が働き得る。 図 3 1の実 施例では舌片 1 74で L ED 1 5 2を上から抑えているが、 電気的接点 (即ち、 端子 1 5 3及び端子接続部 1 5 9 ' ) にそれらを離間させるよ うな力が働くことは接続不良防止の観点から好ましくない。 L ED 1 5 2と接続導体構造 1 54 ' とを例えばレーザ溶接などにより溶接するこ とも考えられるが、 そのような力が働くことが好ましくないのは同様で ある。 For example, in the light source connector 15 1 a shown in FIG. 31 using a chip-type LED 155 as a light source, the connection conductor structure 154 ′ is substantially flat and flexible. Therefore, it is possible to bend and use in the longitudinal direction. However, in the embodiment of FIG. 31, the pair of electrical connection terminals 15 3 of each chip type LED 15 2 (and the corresponding pair of terminal connection portions 15 9 ′ of the connection conductor structure 154 ′) are light sources. Since the connecting body 15 1 a (that is, the connecting conductor structure 1 5 4 ′) is arranged to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction, when the light source connecting body 15 1 a is bent, the connecting conductor structure 1 A force can be exerted to separate the terminal connection part 15 9 ′ of 54 ′ and the terminal 15 3 of the LED 152. In the embodiment of FIG. 31, the LED 155 is held down from above by the tongue piece 174, but they are separated from the electrical contacts (that is, the terminal 153 and the terminal connection 159 ′). It is not preferable that such a force acts from the viewpoint of preventing poor connection. It is conceivable that the LED 155 and the connection conductor structure 154 'are welded by, for example, laser welding or the like, but it is similarly undesirable that such force acts.
図 44に示すテープ状パターン化導体の実施例は、 このような問題が 生じないように適合されている。 図示されているように、 このパターン 化導体 2 0 0も上記した実施例と同様に所定のパターンを有するように プレス加工によって形成することができ、 適切な部分を切除する二次加 ェを施すことで所要の回路構成を有する接続導体構造を形成できるよう になっている。 即ち、 このパターン化導体 2 0 0は、 長手方向に概ね平 行に延在する第 1及び第 2の幹路部 2 1 1、 2 1 2と、 光源としてのチ ップ型 L ED 2 0 2 (図 4 5参照) との電気接続用にこれら幹路部 2 1 1、 2 1 2間において長手方向に配列された複数の光源取り付け部 2 1 5と、 これら光源取り付け部 2 1 5を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部 2 1 0と、 連絡路部 2 1 0と幹路部 2 1 1、 2 1 2とを幅方向に接続する複 数の枝路部 2 1 3、 2 1 4とを有し、 適切な枝路部 2 1 3、 2 1 4を切 除することで直列、 並列、 直並列などの様々な接続態様でチップ型 L E D 2 0 2を接続する接続導体構造を形成することができる。 The embodiment of the tape-shaped patterned conductor shown in FIG. 44 is adapted to avoid such problems. As shown in the figure, this patterned conductor 200 can also be formed by press working so as to have a predetermined pattern, similarly to the above-described embodiment, and is subjected to a secondary processing for cutting out an appropriate portion. As a result, a connection conductor structure having a required circuit configuration can be formed. That is, this patterned conductor 200 is composed of first and second trunk roads 211 and 212 extending substantially in parallel in the longitudinal direction, and a chip type LED 200 as a light source. A plurality of light source mounting portions 2 15 arranged in the longitudinal direction between the trunk roads 2 11 1 and 2 12 for electrical connection with the light source mounting portion 2 (see FIG. 45), and these light source mounting portions 2 15 A connecting path 2 1 0 that connects in the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of branch sections 2 1 3 and 2 1 4 that connect the connecting path 2 1 0 and the trunk 2 1 1 and 2 1 2 in the width direction By cutting off appropriate branch sections 2 13 and 2 14, chip-type LEs can be connected in various connection modes such as series, parallel, and series-parallel. A connection conductor structure for connecting D 202 can be formed.
図 4 4の実施例では、 各光源取り付け部 2 1 5が、 パターン化導体 2 0 0の長手方向に対して概ね垂直な向き (即ち幅方向) に離間して設け られた一対の光源端子接続部 2 1 6を有している。 これにより、 光源と して用いられる各チップ型 L E D 2 0 2を対応する光源取り付け部 2 1 5に取り付けたとき、 以下に図 4 5に示すように、 各 L E D 2 0 2の一 対の端子 2 0 3がパターン化導体 2 0 0の (即ち、 それから形成される 接続導体構造の) 長手方向に対して概ね垂直な向きに離間して配置され ることとなる。  In the embodiment of FIG. 44, each of the light source mounting portions 2 15 has a pair of light source terminal connections spaced apart in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the patterned conductor 200 (ie, in the width direction). It has a part 2 16. With this, when each chip type LED 202 used as a light source is mounted on the corresponding light source mounting part 215, as shown in FIG. 203 will be spaced apart in a direction generally perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the patterned conductor 200 (ie, of the connecting conductor structure formed therefrom).
各端子接続部 2 1 6はパターン化導体 2 0 0の長手方向に延出した一 対の延出部 2 1 7を有している。 この延出部 2 1 7は、 図 3 1に示した 実施例の延出部 1 7 5と同様に、 パターン化導体 2 0 0の主面に対して 垂直に折り曲げられて L E D 2 0 2の保持または位置決めのための壁を 形成する。 また図示した例では、 各光源取り付け部 2 1 5の一対の端子 接続部 2 1 6は互いに分離されているが、 図 3 1、 図 3 2に示した実施 例と同様に、 互いに接続しておいて、 L E D 2 0 2が取り付けられる場 合のみパターン化導体 2 0 0の二次加工において切り離すようにしても よい。  Each terminal connection portion 2 16 has a pair of extension portions 2 17 extending in the longitudinal direction of the patterned conductor 200. The extension portion 217 is bent perpendicularly to the main surface of the patterned conductor 200 similarly to the extension portion 175 of the embodiment shown in FIG. Form a wall for holding or positioning. In the illustrated example, the pair of terminal connecting portions 2 16 of each light source mounting portion 2 15 are separated from each other. However, as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 31 and 32, they are connected to each other. In this case, the pattern conductor 200 may be cut off in the secondary processing only when the LED 202 is attached.
図 4 4のパターン化導体 2 0 0では、 図の左側 2つの光源取り付け部 2 1 5の間にチップ型抵抗 2 0 5 (図 4 5参照) を取り付けるための抵 抗取り付け部 2 2 5が設けられている。 抵抗取り付け部 2 2 5は、 光源 取り付け部 2 1 5と同様に、 パターン化導体 2 0 0の幅方向に離間した 一対の抵抗端子接続部 2 2 6を有している。 また各端子接続部 2 2 6は パターン化導体 2 0 0の長手方向に延出した一対の延出部 2 2 7を有し ている。 この延出部 2 2 7は、 図 3 1に示した実施例の延出部 1 7 9と 同様に、 パターン化導体 2 0 0の主面に対して垂直に折り曲げられて抵 抗 2 0 5の保持または位置決めのための壁を形成する。 このように抵抗 取り付け部 2 2 5を設けることにより隣接する LED 2 02を抵抗 2 0 5を介して接続することが容易に実現でき、 且つ、 取り付けられた抵抗 20 5の一対の端子 20 6がパターン化導体 2 0 0の長手方向に対して 概ね垂直な方向に離間して配置される。 尚、 パターン化導体 2 0 0の形 成時に抵抗取り付け部 2 2 5の一対の抵抗端子接続部 2 26を連結して おいて、 抵抗 20 5が取り付けられる場合のみ、 パターン化導体 2 00 の二次加工において分離するようにすることができるのは、 光源取り付 け部 2 1 5と同様である。 In the patterned conductor 200 of Fig. 44, the resistor mounting part 2 25 for mounting the chip-type resistor 205 (see Fig. 45) between the two light source mounting parts 2 15 on the left side of the figure is shown. Is provided. Similarly to the light source mounting part 215, the resistance mounting part 225 has a pair of resistance terminal connecting parts 226 spaced apart in the width direction of the patterned conductor 200. Each of the terminal connecting portions 226 has a pair of extending portions 227 extending in the longitudinal direction of the patterned conductor 200. This extension portion 227 is bent perpendicularly to the main surface of the patterned conductor 200 similarly to the extension portion 179 of the embodiment shown in FIG. Form a wall for retaining or positioning the anti-205. By providing the resistor mounting portion 2 25 in this way, it is possible to easily realize the connection of the adjacent LED 202 via the resistor 205, and the pair of terminals 20 6 of the mounted resistor 205 is formed. The patterned conductors 200 are spaced apart in a direction substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. It should be noted that, when forming the patterned conductor 200, the pair of resistance terminals 226 of the resistor mounting portion 222 is connected, and only when the resistor 205 is mounted, the patterned conductor 200 It is the same as the light source mounting part 215 that can be separated in the next processing.
更に図 44のパターン化導体 2 0 0では、 第 1及び第 2の幹路部 2 1 1、 2 1 2が蛇行しつつ長手方向に延在している。 詳述すると、 これら 幹路部 2 1 1、 2 1 2は、 L ED 2 0 2が取り付けられる光源取り付け 部 2 1 5と長手方向に概ね整合した部分が、 幅方向外向き (即ち連絡路 部 2 1 0から離れる向き) に凸状に湾曲して、 凸状湾曲部 2 1 1 A、 2 1 2 Aをなしている。 尚、 各凸状湾曲部 2 1 1 A、 2 1 2 Aは図では概 ねコの字状に湾曲しているが、 例えば円弧状に湾曲していてもよい。 こ れにより、 幹路部 2 1 1、 2 1 2の凸状湾曲部 2 1 1 A、 2 1 2 Aをそ の根本部分で折り曲げて連絡路部 2 1 0の主面と概ね垂直になるように し、 折り曲げた部分を支持板などへの取り付けなどに用いることができ る (図 4 5参照)。 また、 このパターン化導体 2 0 0では幹路部 2 1 1、 2 1 2を比較的幅狭に形成しているため、 テープ状パターン化導体 2 0 0の順送プレス機 (図示せず) での取り扱いを容易にするべく順送プレ ス機のパイロットピンと係合するパイロット穴 2 1 8が設けられた縁桟 部 2 1 9が別途長手方向に延在して設けられ、 第 2の幹路部 2 1 2と複 数の連結部 2 2 0によって連結されている。 この縁桟部 2 1 9はプレス 機によるテープ状パターン化導体 2 0 0の二次加工の例えば最終工程に おいて連結部 2 2 0を切除することで第 2の幹路部 2 1 2から切り離さ れる。 Further, in the patterned conductor 200 of FIG. 44, the first and second trunk roads 211, 212 extend in the longitudinal direction while meandering. More specifically, the trunk roads 2 11 1 and 2 1 2 are arranged such that a portion substantially aligned in the longitudinal direction with the light source mounting portion 2 15 to which the LED 202 is mounted is directed outward in the width direction (that is, the communication path portion). (In a direction away from 210) to form a convex curved portion 211A, 212A. In addition, although each of the convex curved portions 211A and 212A is curved in a substantially U-shape in the drawing, it may be curved in an arc shape, for example. As a result, the convex curved portions 2 11 A and 2 12 A of the trunk roads 2 1 1 and 2 12 are bent at their roots to become substantially perpendicular to the main surface of the communication road 2 10 In this way, the bent part can be used for mounting on a support plate or the like (see Fig. 45). In addition, in the patterned conductor 200, since the trunk roads 211 and 212 are formed to be relatively narrow, a tape-shaped patterned conductor 200 progressive press machine (not shown) In order to facilitate handling at the same time, the edge bar 219 provided with the pilot hole 218 engaging with the pilot pin of the progressive press machine is separately provided extending in the longitudinal direction. It is connected to the road section 212 by a plurality of connecting sections 220. This edge cross section 219 is used, for example, in the final step of secondary processing of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 200 by a press machine. In this case, the connection part 220 is cut off from the second trunk road part 212 by cutting it off.
図 4 5は、 図 44に示したパターン化導体 2 0 0を用いて形成された 光源連結体 2 0 1とそれを保持するための保持体 2 3 0の斜視図である。 図示されているように、 この光源連結体 2 0 1は、 図 44に示したパ夕 ーン化導体 2 00の所定の部分を切除して所要の回路構成を有するよう に形成された接続導体構造 2 04にチップ型 L ED 2 0 2及びチップ型 抵抗 2 0 5を組み付けてなる。 詳述すると、 接続導体構造 204の各光 源端子接続部 2 1 6の一対の長手方向延出部 2 1 7は折り曲げられて対 向する壁を形成し、 その間に光源としてチップ型 LED 202が挿入さ れ取り付けられる。 各 L ED 20 2に対する一対の端子接続部 2 1 6が 光源連結体 2 0 1の幅方向に離間して配置されているため、 取り付け状 態において各 L ED 2 0 2の一対の電気接続用端子 2 0 3も幅方向に沿 つて位置することが理解されるだろう。 この実施例では、 LED 2 0 2 を上側から抑える図 3 1に示したような舌片 1 74を有していないため、 端子接続部 2 1 6と LED 2 02の端子 20 3との接続は例えばレーザ 溶接などの溶接により行うとよい。 同様にチップ型抵抗 2 05は光源取 り付け部 2 1 5間に設けられた抵抗取り付け部 2 2 5に取り付けられる。 抵抗取り付け部 2 2 5の各抵抗端子接続部 2 2 6の一対の長手方向延出 部 2 2 7もやはり折り曲げられて対向する壁を形成し、 チップ型抵抗 2 0 5はこれら対向する壁 2 27間に挿入される。 チップ型抵抗 2 0 5の 端子 2 0 6と端子接続部 2 2 6との接続も、 チップ型 L ED 2 0 2と同 様に、 レーザ溶接などの溶接により行うことができる。 チップ型 LED 2 02とチップ型抵抗 2 0 5とが接続導体構造 2 04の同じ面に取り付 けられると、 レーザを片面からのみ当てればよいため製造装置が単純化 され好ましい。 尚、 図 4 5では説明のため左端の L ED 202及び抵抗 2 0 5が、 パターン化導体 2 0 0の所要個所を切除して形成された接続 導体構造 2 0 4から離間して示されているが、 実際には、 L E D 2 0 2 及び抵抗 2 0 5をパターン化導体 2 0 0に溶接により組み付けた後で、 パターン化導体 2 0 0の所要個所 (枝路部 2 1 3、 2 1 ) を切除して 接続導体構造を形成するようにすると、 接続導体構造 2 0 4の各部がば らばらにならなくてよい。 別の方法として、 接続導体構造 2 0 4の各部 がばらばらにならないように、 例えば図 3 5、 図 3 6に示したように絶 縁性シート 1 8 4、 1 8 4 ' をパターン化導体 2 0 0に張り付けてから パターン化導体 2 0 0の所要箇所を切除してもよい。 FIG. 45 is a perspective view of a light source connected body 201 formed by using the patterned conductor 200 shown in FIG. 44 and a holding body 230 for holding the same. As shown in the figure, the light source coupling body 201 is formed by cutting a predetermined portion of the patterned conductor 200 shown in FIG. 44 and forming a connection conductor having a required circuit configuration. A chip type LED 202 and a chip type resistor 205 are assembled to the structure 204. More specifically, a pair of longitudinally extending portions 217 of each light source terminal connecting portion 216 of the connection conductor structure 204 are bent to form opposing walls, and a chip type LED 202 as a light source is interposed therebetween. Inserted and attached. Since a pair of terminal connecting portions 2 16 for each LED 202 are arranged apart from each other in the width direction of the light source connected body 201, a pair of electric connection of each LED 202 in the mounted state is provided. It will be understood that terminals 203 are also located along the width direction. In this embodiment, since the tongue piece 174 as shown in FIG. 31 for suppressing the LED 202 from the upper side is not provided, the connection between the terminal connection part 2 16 and the terminal 203 of the LED 202 is not performed. For example, it may be performed by welding such as laser welding. Similarly, the chip-type resistor 205 is attached to a resistor attachment portion 225 provided between the light source attachment portions 215. The pair of longitudinally extending portions 2 27 of each of the resistor terminal connection portions 2 26 of the resistor mounting portion 2 25 are also bent to form opposing walls, and the chip-type resistor 205 is formed of these opposing walls 2 2 Inserted between 27. The connection between the terminal 206 of the chip-type resistor 205 and the terminal connection part 222 can also be performed by welding such as laser welding, similarly to the chip-type LED 202. When the chip-type LED 202 and the chip-type resistor 205 are mounted on the same surface of the connection conductor structure 204, the laser can be applied only from one side, which simplifies the manufacturing apparatus, which is preferable. Note that in FIG. 45, the leftmost LED 202 and resistor Although 205 is shown separated from the connection conductor structure 204 formed by cutting out the required portion of the patterned conductor 200, in practice, the LED 202 and the resistor 205 are shown. After assembling to the patterned conductor 200 by welding, the required portions (branch portions 2 13 and 21) of the patterned conductor 200 are cut off to form a connection conductor structure. Each part of the conductor structure 204 does not have to be separated. Alternatively, the insulating sheets 18 4 and 18 4 ′ may be connected to the patterned conductors 2, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, so that the parts of the connecting conductor structure 204 are not separated. After sticking to the pattern conductor 00, a required portion of the patterned conductor 200 may be cut off.
上記したようにテープ状パターン化導体 2 0 0の第 1及び第 2の幹路 部 2 1 1、 2 1 2の凸状湾曲部 2 1 1 A、 2 1 2 Aはその根本部分にお いて光源連結体 2 0 1の主面に対して概ね垂直に折り曲げられる。 図 4 5に示すように、 折り曲げられた凸状湾曲部 2 1 1 A、 2 1 2 Aは、 例 えば可撓性を有する保持体 2 3 0に形成された対応する溝 2 3 1にきつ く受容され、 それにより光源連結体 2 0 1の保持体 2 3 0への取り付け がなされ発光体装置 2 4 0を形成することができる。  As described above, the first and second trunk road portions 211, 212 of the tape-shaped patterned conductor 200, the convex curved portions 211A, 212A are located at the roots thereof. It is bent substantially perpendicularly to the main surface of the light source unit 201. As shown in FIG. 45, the bent convex curved portions 211 A and 212 A are, for example, tightly fitted in corresponding grooves 2 31 formed in a flexible holder 230. Thus, the light source connector 201 can be attached to the holder 230 to form the light emitting device 240.
図 4 6は、 このようにして形成された発光体装置 2 4 0を長手方向に 撓ませた状態を示す模式的な斜視図である。 なお、 この図では接続導体 構造 2 0 4は図示を省略した。 図 4 6に示されているように各 L E D 2 0 2はその一対の端子 2 0 3が発光体装置 2 4 0の幅方向に沿って配置 されているため、 発光体装置 2 4 0を長手方向に撓ませても L E D 2 0 2の端子 2 0 3と接続導体構造 2 0 4の端子接続部 2 1 6とを分離させ るような力が生じないことが理解されるだろう。  FIG. 46 is a schematic perspective view showing a state in which the light emitting device 240 thus formed is bent in the longitudinal direction. In this figure, the connecting conductor structure 204 is not shown. As shown in FIG. 46, each LED 202 has a pair of terminals 203 arranged along the width direction of the light-emitting device 240, so that the light-emitting device 240 is elongated. It will be appreciated that flexing in the direction does not create a force that separates the terminal 203 of the LED 202 from the terminal connection 2 16 of the connecting conductor structure 204.
図 4 7 aは、 テープ状パターン化導体の更に別の実施例を示す平面図 であり、 図 4 7 bは図 4 7 aのライン A— Aに沿った断面図、 及び図 4 7 cは図 4 7 aのパターン化導体の所要部分を切除して形成した接続導 体構造にチップ型 L E D及びチップ型抵抗を取り付けて形成した光源連 結体の平面図である。 図 4 7 aに示したパタ一ン化導体 2 5 0は、 4つ のチップ型 L E D 2 5 2と 1つのチップ型抵抗 2 5 5を直列に接続して なる複数の直列ブロックを互いに並列に接続して構成される直並列型の 光源連結体 2 5 1 (図 4 7 c参照) を製造するのに適した構造となって いる。 FIG. 47a is a plan view showing still another embodiment of the tape-shaped patterned conductor, FIG. 47b is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--A of FIG. 47a, and FIG. Fig. 47 Connection conductor formed by cutting out the required part of the patterned conductor of 7a FIG. 2 is a plan view of a light source assembly formed by attaching a chip-type LED and a chip-type resistor to a body structure. The patterned conductor 250 shown in Fig. 47a is composed of a plurality of series blocks consisting of four chip-type LEDs 255 and one chip-type resistor 255 connected in series. The structure is suitable for manufacturing a series-parallel light source connector 2 51 (see Fig. 47c) that is connected and configured.
図 4 7 aに示されているように、 このテープ状パターン化導体 2 5 0 は、 上述した実施例と同様に、 長手方向に概ね平行に延在する第 1及び 第 2の幹路部 2 6 1、 2 6 2と、 光源としてのチップ型 L E D 2 5 2と の電気接続のためこれら幹路部 2 6 1、 2 6 2間において長手方向に配 列されたの複数の光源取り付け部 2 6 5と、 これら光源取り付け部 2 6 5を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部 2 6 0と、 連絡路部 2 6 0と第 1及び 第 2の幹路部 2 6 1、 2 6 2とを幅方向に接続する枝路部 2 6 3、 2 6 4とを有している。 またこの実施例では、 図の左から 2つめと 3つめの 光源取り付け部 2 6 5間にチップ型抵抗 2 5 5を取り付けるための抵抗 取り付け部 2 7 5が形成されている。 各光源取り付け部 2 6 5はチップ 型 L E D 2 5 2の一対の端子に対応した一対の端子接続部 2 6 6を有し、 抵抗取り付け部 2 7 5も同様に抵抗 2 5 5の一対の端子に対応した一対 の端子接続部 2 7 6を有する。 この実施例では、 直列ブロック内の隣接 する光源取り付け部 2 6 5及び抵抗取り付け部 2 7 5間は連絡路部 2 6 0によって連結されており、 異なる直列ブロックに含まれる隣接する光 源取り付け部 2 6 5間は予め分断してある。 またこの実施例では第 1及 び第 2の幹路部 2 6 1 , 2 6 2が比較的細く形成されていることから、 順送プレスを行う順送プレス機 (図示せず) のパイロットピンと係合す るパイロッ卜穴 2 6 8が形成された長手方向に延在する縁桟部 2 6 9が 設けられ、 この縁桟部 2 6 9は連結部 2 7 0によって第 2の幹路部 2 6 2に連結されている。 As shown in FIG. 47a, the tape-shaped patterned conductor 250 is formed of the first and second trunk roads 2 extending substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction, similarly to the above-described embodiment. A plurality of light source mounting portions 2 arranged longitudinally between these trunk routes 2 6 1 and 2 6 2 for electrical connection between 6 1, 2 62 and the chip type LED 25 2 as a light source 65, a communication path section 260 connecting these light source mounting sections 2 65 in the longitudinal direction, a communication path section 260, and the first and second trunk paths 2 61, 26 2. It has branch portions 26 3 and 26 4 connected in the width direction. Further, in this embodiment, a resistor mounting portion 275 for mounting a chip-type resistor 255 is formed between the second and third light source mounting portions 265 from the left in the figure. Each light source mounting section 2 65 has a pair of terminal connection sections 2 66 corresponding to a pair of terminals of the chip type LED 25 2, and the resistance mounting section 2 75 similarly has a pair of terminals of the resistance 2 5 5. It has a pair of terminal connection portions 276 corresponding to the above. In this embodiment, the adjacent light source mounting portion 265 and the resistor mounting portion 275 in the series block are connected by the communication path portion 260, and the adjacent light source mounting portions included in different series blocks are connected. The interval between 2 and 5 is divided in advance. Further, in this embodiment, since the first and second trunk roads 261, 262 are formed relatively thin, the pilot pins of the progressive press (not shown) for performing progressive press are used. An edge bar 269 extending in the longitudinal direction having a pilot hole 268 to be engaged is provided, and the edge bar 269 is connected to the second trunk road by a connecting portion 270. 2 6 Connected to 2.
この実施例では、 各光源取り付け部 2 6 5の各端子接続部 26 6に L ED 2 5 2の位置決めのための突起 2 6 7が設けられている。 同様に、 抵抗取り付け部 27 5の各端子接続部 27 6には抵抗 2 5 5の位置決め のための突起 2 7 7が設けられている。 これら突起 26 7、 2 7 7は、 例えば取り付けられる LED 2 5 2または抵抗 2 5 5の端部に整合した 位置において端子接続部 2 6 6, 2 7 6に幅方向の切り込みを形成し、 この切り込みに関して L ED 2 52または抵抗 2 5 5が取り付けられる 側とは反対側の端子接続部 2 6 6、 2 7 6の部分をプレス機によって隆 起させることで好適に形成することができる (図 47 b参照)。 このよう な突起 2 67、 2 7 7を設けることにより、 LED 2 5 2及び抵抗 2 5 5をパターン化導体 2 50上に容易に位置させることができる。 その後 L ED 2 52及び抵抗 2 5 5とパターン化導体 2 5 0とを例えばレーザ 溶接などにより接続した後、 パターン化導体の所要個所を切除して所要 の回路パターンを有する接続導体構造 2 54を形成し、 光源連結体 2 5 1を形成することができる (図 4 7 c )。 別の方法として、 図 3 6に示し た実施例のように、 絶縁性テープ 1 84 ' をテ一プ状パタ一ン化導体 2 5 0に貼り付けた後、 パターン化導体 2 50の所要個所を切除して接続 導体構造 2 54を形成し、 接続導体構造 2 54に LED 2 52及び抵抗 2 5 5を取り付けるようにしてもよい。 図 1 6などに示した連結部材 1 1 5のような、 幅方向に延在する連結部材を用いて接続導体構造 2 54 の各部がばらばらになるのを防止することも勿論可能である。  In this embodiment, each terminal connection portion 266 of each light source mounting portion 265 is provided with a projection 267 for positioning the LED 252. Similarly, each terminal connection portion 276 of the resistor mounting portion 275 is provided with a protrusion 277 for positioning the resistor 255. These projections 267 and 277 form, for example, widthwise cuts in the terminal connection portions 26 6 and 2776 at positions matching the ends of the LED 255 or the resistor 255 to be mounted. Regarding the notch, it can be suitably formed by raising the terminal connection part 26 6, 27 6 on the opposite side to the side where the LED 252 or the resistor 255 is attached with a press machine. 47b). By providing such protrusions 267 and 277, the LED 255 and the resistor 255 can be easily positioned on the patterned conductor 250. Then, after connecting the LED 252 and the resistor 255 to the patterned conductor 250 by, for example, laser welding, a required portion of the patterned conductor is cut off to form a connection conductor structure 254 having a required circuit pattern. Then, the light source connected body 25 1 can be formed (FIG. 47c). As another method, as in the embodiment shown in FIG. 36, an insulating tape 184 ′ is attached to the tape-shaped patterned conductor 250, and then a required portion of the patterned conductor 250 is formed. May be cut off to form a connection conductor structure 254, and an LED 255 and a resistor 255 may be attached to the connection conductor structure 254. It is of course possible to use a connecting member extending in the width direction, such as the connecting member 115 shown in FIG. 16 or the like, to prevent the individual portions of the connection conductor structure 254 from being separated.
上記実施例では光源が、 電気接続用の端子として 2本のリード線を有 する砲弾型 LED 1 02、 または本体に一体な一対の電極部を有するチ ップ型 LED 1 52、 1 5 2 ' 、 2 0 2、 2 5 2若しくは 2本のリード 線を有する発光素子アセンブリ 1 9 5、 1 9 5 ' のようないわゆる " 2 極" タイプのものであった。 しかしながら、 今日では、 例えば互いに異 なる色で発光する 2つの L EDチップを含み 3つまたは 4つの電気接続 用端子を有するいわゆる "3極 L EDランプ"、 "4極 LEDランプ" と 呼ばれるものも市販されている。 そのような 3極または 4極 LEDラン プにも適用可能なテープ状パターン化導体及びそのようなパターン化導 体から形成される接続導体構造と 3極または 4極 L EDランプとを組み 合わせて形成される光源連結体があると好都合である。以下の実施例は、 そのような 3極または 4極 L EDランプを用いた光源連結体を実現する ためのものである。 In the above embodiment, the light source is a bullet type LED 102 having two lead wires as terminals for electrical connection, or a chip type LED 152, 15 2 ′ having a pair of electrodes integrated with the main body. A light emitting device assembly having two, two, two or two lead wires, a so-called "2" However, today, for example, the so-called "three-pole LED lamp", which has two or three LED terminals emitting light of different colors and has three or four electrical connection terminals, for example, Also known as "4-pole LED lamps" are tape-shaped patterned conductors that can be applied to such 3-pole or 4-pole LED lamps and connection conductor structures formed from such patterned conductors. Advantageously, there is a light source combination formed by combining a 3 pole or 4 pole LED lamp.The following example describes a light source combination using such a 3 pole or 4 pole LED lamp. It is for realizing.
図 48 aは、 典型的な 3極 L EDランプ 3 0 2の正面図であり、 図 4 8 bはその回路図である。 図示されているように、 3極 LEDランプ 3 02は例えば黄色と赤色というように互いに異なる色で発光する 2つの LEDチップを含み、 これら 2つの L E Dチップの力ソードは互いに接 続され、第 1のリード線 3 0 3 Aを通じて外部と接続可能となっている。 また一方の L E Dチップのァノ一ドは第 2のリード線 3 0 3 Bを通じて、 他方の L EDチップのアノードは第 3のリード線 30 3 Cを通じて外部 と接続可能となっている。 なお、 図示した例では 2つの L EDチップの 力ソードが互いに接続されているが、 アノード同士が接続されていても よい。  FIG. 48a is a front view of a typical 3-pole LED lamp 302, and FIG. 48b is a circuit diagram thereof. As shown, the three-pole LED lamp 302 includes two LED chips that emit light in different colors, for example, yellow and red, and the power sources of these two LED chips are connected to each other to form the first LED chip. It can be connected to the outside through the lead wire 303A. The anode of one LED chip can be connected to the outside through the second lead wire 303B, and the anode of the other LED chip can be connected to the outside through the third lead wire 303C. In the illustrated example, the power sources of the two LED chips are connected to each other, but the anodes may be connected to each other.
図 49は、 図 48に示した 3極 L EDランプ 3 02を複数個光源とし て用いて光源連結体を形成するのに適したテープ状パターン化導体 3 0 0の部分平面図である。 図示されているように、 このパターン化導体 3 0 0は、 光源としての 3極 L EDランプ 3 0 2を取り付けるための、 長 手方向に配列された複数の光源取り付け部 3 1 5を有しており、 これら 光源取り付け部 3 1 5は連絡路部 3 1 0によって長手方向に連絡されて いる。 詳述すると、 各光源取り付け部 3 1 5は 3極 L EDランプの 3本 のリード線 3 0 3 A、 3 0 3 B、 3 0 3 Cに対応して幅方向に整列され た第 1〜第 3の端子接続部 3 1 6 A、 3 1 6 B、 3 1 6 Cを有し、 連絡 路部 3 1 0は、 隣接する光源取り付け部 3 1 5の第 1の端子接続部 3 1 6 A同士を互いに接続する複数の第 1接続路 32 1 Aと、 隣接する光源 取り付け部 3 1 5の第 2の端子接続部 3 1 6 B同士を互いに接続する複 数の第 2接続路 3 2 1 Bと、 隣接する光源取り付け部 3 1 5の第 3の端 子接続部 3 1 6 C同士を互いに接続する複数の第 3接続路 32 1 Cとを 含んでいる。 また図示されているように、 各端子接続部 3 16 A、 3 1 6 B、 3 1 6 Cには図 1 6に示したのと同様の L ED 3 0 2のリード線 30 3 A、 3 0 3 B、 3 0 3 Cを差し込んで保持するための十字形の穴 3 1 7が形成されている。 FIG. 49 is a partial plan view of a tape-shaped patterned conductor 300 suitable for forming a light source assembly using a plurality of three-pole LED lamps 302 shown in FIG. 48 as light sources. As shown in the figure, the patterned conductor 300 has a plurality of light source mounting portions 3 15 arranged in the longitudinal direction for mounting a three-pole LED lamp 302 as a light source. These light source mounting sections 3 15 are connected in the longitudinal direction by a communication path section 3 10. In detail, each light source mounting part 3 1 5 is a 3 pole LED lamp The first to third terminal connections 316A, 316B, 316C aligned in the width direction corresponding to the lead wires 303A, 303B, 303C A plurality of first connection paths 32 1 A for connecting the first terminal connection sections 3 16 A of the adjacent light source attachment sections 3 15 to each other; A plurality of second connection paths 3 2 1 B connecting the second terminal connection sections 3 16 B of the mounting section 3 15 to each other, and a third terminal connection section of the adjacent light source mounting section 3 15 And a plurality of third connection paths 321C connecting the 316Cs to each other. Also, as shown, the terminal connections 316 A, 316 B, and 316 C have the same lead wires 303 A, 3 A cross-shaped hole 317 for inserting and holding 03B and 303C is formed.
更に、 光源取り付け部 3 1 5及び連絡路部 3 1 0を幅方向に挟んで、 パターン化導体 3 0 0の両側において第 1及び第 2の幹路部 3 1 1、 3 1 2が長手方向に延在している。 これら第 1及び第 2の幹路部 3 1 1、 3 1 2は、 幅方向に延在する枝路部 3 1 3、 3 1 4によって、 光源取り 付け部 3 1 5の幅方向両端に位置する端子接続部 3 1 6 B、 3 1 6 Cを 接続する第 2及び第 3接続路 32 1 B、 32 1 Cに連結されている。 ま た第 2の幹路部 3 1 2には、 順送プレス機 (図示せず) での取り扱いを 可能とするためのパイロット穴 3 1 8が形成されている。  Furthermore, the first and second trunk paths 311 and 312 are arranged in the longitudinal direction on both sides of the patterned conductor 300 with the light source mounting section 315 and the communication path section 310 sandwiched in the width direction. Extends. These first and second trunk roads 3 1 1 and 3 1 2 are positioned at both ends in the width direction of the light source mounting portion 3 15 by branching roads 3 13 and 3 14 extending in the width direction. Are connected to the second and third connection paths 321 B and 321 C connecting the terminal connection sections 316 B and 316 C to be connected. Further, a pilot hole 318 is formed in the second trunk road 312 so as to be able to be handled by a progressive press machine (not shown).
この実施例では、 各光源取り付け部 3 1 5の幅方向両端に位置する端 子接続部 3 1 6 B、 3 1 6 <3と幹路部3 1 1、 3 1 2との間にチップ型 抵抗を取り付けるための抵抗取り付け部 32 5が設けられている。 図示 されているように各抵抗取り付け部 3 2 5は、 光源取り付け部 3 1 5の 端子接続部 3 1 6 B、 3 1 6 C及び対応する幹路部 3 1 1、 3 1 2から 互いに向かって延出する一対の抵抗端子接続部 3 2 6を有している、 図 3 1で示した実施例と同様に、 各抵抗端子接続部 3 2 6はプレス機によ つて折り曲げられて対向する壁を形成するべく一対の相反する方向に延 出する延出部 3 2 7を備えている。 In this embodiment, a chip type is provided between the terminal connection portions 316B, 316 <3 located at both ends in the width direction of each light source mounting portion 315 and the trunk road portions 311, 312. A resistor mounting portion 325 for mounting a resistor is provided. As shown in the figure, each resistor mounting section 3 25 faces each other from the terminal connection sections 3 16 B and 3 16 C of the light source mounting section 3 15 and the corresponding trunk sections 3 1 1 and 3 12. As in the embodiment shown in FIG. 31, each of the resistance terminal connections 3 26 is formed by a press machine. And a pair of extending portions 327 extending in opposite directions so as to be bent to form opposing walls.
このような構造を有するパターン化導体 3 0 0の所要の部分を切除し て接続導体構造を形成し、 光源としての 3極 L EDランプ 302を対応 する光源取り付け部 3 1 5に取り付けるとともに図 45の抵抗 2 0 5と 同様のチップ型抵抗 3 0 5 (図 5 1の回路図参照) を抵抗取り付け部 3 A required portion of the patterned conductor 300 having such a structure is cut out to form a connection conductor structure, and a three-pole LED lamp 302 as a light source is attached to the corresponding light source attachment part 3 15 and a connection conductor structure is formed as shown in FIG. Connect the chip resistor 3 05 (see the circuit diagram in Figure 51) similar to the resistor 205
2 5に取り付けることで光源連結体 3 0 1を得ることができる。 そのよ うな切除パターンの例を図 5 0に示す。 この図において切除される部分 は斜線で示した。 また形成された光源連結体 3 0 1の回路図を図 5 1に 示す。 図 5 1において点線で示すように直流電源の低電圧側を連絡路部By attaching to the light source 25, the light source connected body 301 can be obtained. Figure 50 shows an example of such an ablation pattern. In this figure, the parts to be removed are indicated by oblique lines. FIG. 51 shows a circuit diagram of the formed light source unit 301. As shown by the dotted line in Fig. 51, connect the low voltage side of the DC power
32 1 Aに接続するとともに、 高電圧側をスィッチ SW1を介して第 1 の幹路部 3 1 1に接続し、 スィッチ S W2を介して第 2の幹路部 3 1 2 に接続することにより、 スィッチ SW1を閉じれば各 3極 LEDランプ 3 0 2の図の上側の LEDチップが発光し、 スィツチ SW2を閉じれば 各 3極 LEDランプ 3 0 2の下側の L E Dチップが発光するようにする ことができる。 従って各 3極 L EDランプ 30 2の上側の LEDチップ と下側の L EDチップの発光色が異なる場合、 スィッチ SW1、 S W2 を制御することで発光色を変えることができる。 By connecting the high-voltage side to the first trunk line 3 1 1 via switch SW1 and to the second trunk line 3 1 2 via switch SW2. When switch SW1 is closed, the upper LED chip in the figure of each 3-pole LED lamp 302 emits light, and when switch SW2 is closed, the lower LED chip of each 3-pole LED lamp 302 emits light. be able to. Therefore, when the upper LED chip and the lower LED chip of each three-pole LED lamp 302 have different emission colors, the emission colors can be changed by controlling the switches SW1 and SW2.
図 4 9に示したパターン化導体 3 0 0は、 図 1 6に示したような 2本 のリード線を有する砲弾型 L ED 1 0 2を接続して光源連結体を形成す るのに用いることもできる。  The patterned conductor 300 shown in FIG. 49 is used to connect a shell type LED 102 having two leads as shown in FIG. 16 to form a light source assembly. You can also.
図 5 2 aは、 典型的な 4極 L EDランプの上側斜視図であり、 図 5 2 bはその下側斜視図、 図 52 cはその回路図である。 図 5 2 a及び図 5 2 bに示されているように、 この 4極 L EDランプ 40 2は端子として リード線を有していないチップ型 L ED (表面実装用 LED) である。 また上面に光放出部 40 2 Aを有している。 図 5 2 cに示すように 4極 LEDランプ 40 2は例えば黄色と赤色というように互いに異なる色で 発光する第 1及び第 2の L EDチップを含み、 4極 LEDランプ 4 02 はこれら第 1及び第 2の L E Dチップのアノード、 力ソードにそれぞれ 接続される 4つの端子 40 3を有している。 これら端子 403のうち第 1及び第 2の LEDチップのカソ一ドに接続される 2つの端子は 4極 L EDランプ 402の一方の端部に、 第 1及び第 2の L EDチップのァノ —ドに接続される 2つの端子は他方の端部に配置されている。 こうして 4極 L EDランプ 402内に含まれる第 1及び第 2'の各 L EDチップの アノード及びカソ一ドはそれぞれ対応する端子 40 3を通じて外部と接 続可能となっている。 FIG. 52a is a top perspective view of a typical 4-pole LED lamp, FIG. 52b is a bottom perspective view thereof, and FIG. 52c is a circuit diagram thereof. As shown in FIGS. 52a and 52b, this 4-pole LED lamp 402 is a chip-type LED (surface mounting LED) having no lead wire as a terminal. Further, it has a light emitting portion 402 A on the upper surface. 4 poles as shown in Fig. 5 2c The LED lamp 402 includes first and second LED chips that emit light in different colors, for example, yellow and red, and a four-pole LED lamp 402 It has four terminals 403 connected to the sword, respectively. Two of these terminals 403, which are connected to the cathodes of the first and second LED chips, are connected to one end of the 4-pole LED lamp 402 at the ends of the first and second LED chips. The two terminals connected to the node are located at the other end. Thus, the anode and cathode of each of the first and second 'LED chips included in the four-pole LED lamp 402 can be connected to the outside through the corresponding terminal 403.
図 5 3は、 図 5 2 a〜図 5 2 cに示したような 4極 L EDランプ 40 2を複数個光源として用いて光源連結体を形成するのに用いることので きるテープ状パターン化導体の部分平面図である。 図示されているよう に、 このパターン化導体 40 0は、 光源としての 4極 L EDランプ 40 2を取り付けるための、 長手方向に配列された光源取り付け部 41 5を 有しており、 これら光源取り付け部 4 1 5は連絡路部 4 1 0によって長 手方向に連絡されている。 詳述すると、 各光源取り付け部 41 5は 4極 LEDランプ 40 2の 4つの端子 40 3に対応した 4つの端子接続部 4 1 6を有し、 これら端子接続部 4 1 6のうち 2つは 4極 L EDランプ 4 02に含まれる第 1の LEDチップに対応した一対の端子 40 3に接続 されるよう長手方向に整列され、 残りの 2つは 4極 LEDランプ 40 2 に含まれる第 2の L EDチップに対応した一対の端子 40 3に接続され るように長手方向に配列され、 第 1の L EDチップに対応した前記 2つ の端子接続部から幅方向に離間されている。 そして、 連絡路部 4 1 0は 隣接する光源取り付け部 4 1 5に含まれる幅方向に整合した端子接続部 41 6同士を接続する複数の第 1及び第 2接続路 42 1 A、 42 1 Bを 有している。 第 1接続路 42 1 Aは、 4極 L EDランプ 402に含まれ る第 1の LEDチップに対応した端子接続部 4 1 6同士を長手方向に連 結し、 第 2接続路 42 1 Bは 4極 L EDランプ 40 2に含まれる第 2の LEDチップに対応した端子接続部 4 1 6同士を長手方向に連結する。 したがって第 1接続路 42 1 Aと第 2接続路 42 1 Bとは幅方向に離間 している。 また互いに長手方向に整合した第 1接続路 42 1 Aと第 2接 続路 42 1 Bは枝路部 422によって幅方向に連結されている。 FIG. 53 shows a tape-shaped patterned conductor that can be used to form a light source assembly using a plurality of 4-pole LED lamps 402 as shown in FIGS. 52 a to 52 c. 3 is a partial plan view of FIG. As shown in the figure, the patterned conductor 400 has a light source mounting portion 415 arranged in a longitudinal direction for mounting a 4-pole LED lamp 402 as a light source. The section 4 15 is communicated in the longitudinal direction by the communication section 4 10. More specifically, each light source mounting portion 41 5 has four terminal connection portions 4 16 corresponding to the four terminals 403 of the four-pole LED lamp 402, and two of these terminal connection portions 4 16 The two poles are arranged longitudinally so as to be connected to a pair of terminals 403 corresponding to the first LED chip included in the four-pole LED lamp 402, and the other two are included in the second pole included in the four-pole LED lamp 402. Are arranged in the longitudinal direction so as to be connected to a pair of terminals 403 corresponding to the first LED chip, and are separated in the width direction from the two terminal connection portions corresponding to the first LED chip. Further, the communication path section 4 10 includes a plurality of first and second connection paths 42 1 A and 42 1 B for connecting the terminal connection sections 4 16 aligned in the width direction included in the adjacent light source mounting sections 4 15. To Have. The first connection path 42 1 A connects the terminal connection sections 4 16 corresponding to the first LED chips included in the 4-pole LED lamp 402 in the longitudinal direction, and the second connection path 42 1 B The terminal connection portions 4 16 corresponding to the second LED chips included in the 4-pole LED lamp 402 are connected in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, the first connection path 421A and the second connection path 421B are separated in the width direction. Further, the first connection path 421A and the second connection path 421B which are aligned with each other in the longitudinal direction are connected in the width direction by the branch path 422.
更に、 光源取り付け部 4 1 5及び連絡路部 41 0を幅方向に挟んで、 第 1及び第 2の幹路部 41 1、 4 1 2が長手方向に延在している。 これ ら第 1及び第 2の幹路部 4 1 1、 4 1 2は、 幅方向に延在する枝路部 4 1 3、 4 1 4によってそれぞれ第 1及び第 2接続路 42 1 A、 42 I B に連結されている。 第 2の幹路部 4 1 2には、 順送プレス機 (図示せず) での取り扱いを可能とするためのパイロット穴 41 8が形成されている c 更にこの実施例では、 第 1の幹路部 4 1 1の幅方向外側に第 3の幹路部 41 9が設けられ、 幅方向に延在する枝路部 42 0によって第 1の幹路 部 4 1 1に結合されている。 Further, the first and second trunk road sections 41 1 and 41 2 extend in the longitudinal direction with the light source mounting section 4 15 and the communication path section 410 interposed therebetween in the width direction. These first and second main roads 4 1 1 and 4 1 2 are divided into first and second connection paths 42 1 A and 42 1 by branch paths 4 13 and 4 14 extending in the width direction, respectively. Connected to IB. The second trunk path portion 4 1 2, in c yet this embodiment the pilot holes 41 8 for enabling the handling of the progressive press machine (not shown) is formed, the first stem A third trunk road portion 419 is provided outside the road portion 411 in the width direction, and is connected to the first trunk road portion 411 by a branch passage portion 420 extending in the width direction.
このような構造を有するパターン化導体 40 0の所要の部分を切除し て接続導体構造を形成し、 光源としての 4極 L EDランプ 40 2を対応 する光源取り付け部 4 1 5に取り付け且つ抵抗を所定の位置に取り付け ることで 4極 L EDランプ 402を用いた光源連結体 40 1を得ること ができる。 そのような切除パターンの例を図 54に示す。 この図におい て、 切除される部分は斜線で示した。 また、 取り付けられる 4極 L ED ランプ 40 2及びチップ型抵抗 40 5を点線で示した。 図 5 5はそうし て形成される光源連結体 40 1の回路図である。 この例では 3つの 4極 LEDランプ 40 2と 2つの抵抗 40 5とによって一つの回路単位が形 成されており、 各回路単位の一方の端部において第 1及び第 2接続路 4 2 1 A、 42 1 Bは共に第 1の幹路部 4 1 1に結合され、 他方の端部に おいて 2つの抵抗 40 5の一方が第 1接続路 42 1 Aと第 3幹路部 4 1 9との間に接続され、 2つの抵抗 40 5の他方が第 2接続路 42 1 Bと 第 2の幹路部 4 1 2との間に接続されている。 尚、 各回路単位中に含む ことのできる 4極 L EDランプ 402の数は 3に限定されるものではな いことを理解されたい。 A required portion of the patterned conductor 400 having such a structure is cut off to form a connection conductor structure, and a four-pole LED lamp 402 as a light source is attached to the corresponding light source attachment part 415 and the resistance is reduced. By attaching the light source at a predetermined position, a light source connected body 401 using the four-pole LED lamp 402 can be obtained. An example of such an ablation pattern is shown in FIG. In this figure, the part to be resected is indicated by oblique lines. Also, the attached 4-pole LED lamp 402 and chip-type resistor 405 are shown by dotted lines. FIG. 55 is a circuit diagram of the light source connected body 401 thus formed. In this example, three 4-pole LED lamps 402 and two resistors 405 form one circuit unit, and one end of each circuit unit has first and second connection paths 4. 21A and 421B are both coupled to the first trunk 411, and at the other end, one of the two resistors 405 is connected to the first connection 421A and the third trunk. The other of the two resistors 405 is connected between the second connection path 42 1 B and the second trunk section 4 12. It should be understood that the number of 4-pole LED lamps 402 that can be included in each circuit unit is not limited to three.
図 5 5において点線で示すように直流電源の高電圧側を第 1の幹路部 4 1 1に接続するとともに、 低電圧側をスィツチ SW1を介して第 3の 幹路部 4 1 9に接続し、 スィッチ SW2を介して第 2の幹路部 4 1 2に 接続することにより、 スィッチ SW1を閉じれば各 4極 LEDランプ 4 02の図の上側の L EDチップ (第 1の LEDチップ) が発光し、 スィ ツチ S W 2を閉じれば各 4極 LEDランプ 40 2の図の下側の L E Dチ ップ (第 2の L EDチップ) が発光するようにすることができる。 従つ て各 L E D 40 2の上側の L EDチップと下側の L E Dチップの発光色 が異なる場合、 スィッチ SW1、 SW2を制御することで発光色を変え ることができる。  As shown by the dotted line in Fig. 55, the high-voltage side of the DC power supply is connected to the first trunk road section 411 and the low-voltage side is connected to the third trunk path section 4 19 via the switch SW1. Then, by connecting to the second trunk road section 4 1 2 via the switch SW2, when the switch SW1 is closed, the LED chip (first LED chip) on the upper side of the figure of each 4-pole LED lamp 402 is shown. When the switch SW2 is closed, the LED chip (the second LED chip) on the lower side of the figure of each 4-pole LED lamp 402 can emit light when the switch SW2 is closed. Therefore, when the light emission color of the upper LED chip and the light emission color of the lower LED chip of each LED 402 are different, the light emission color can be changed by controlling the switches SW1 and SW2.
図 5 6は、 本発明に基づくテ一プ状パターン化導体の更に別の実施例 を示す部分平面図である。 このパターン化導体 5 00は、 光源を取り付 けるための長手方向に配列された光源取り付け部 5 1 5を有しており、 これら光源取り付け部 5 1 5は連絡路部 5 1 0によって長手方向に連絡 されている。 各光源取り付け部 5 1 5は光源の一対の端子に対応した一 対の端子接続部 5 1 9を有し、 これら一対の端子接続部 5 1 9は互いに 長手方向に離間されている。 各端子接続部 5 1 9には光源が例えば図 1 6に示したような砲弹型 L ED 1 0 2のような場合に、 そのリ一ド線 1 0 3を差し込むための十字形の穴 5 1 6が形成されている。 光源が図 3 1に示したようなチップ型 L ED 1 5 2の場合、 L ED 1 52は単にレ ■一ザ溶接することによつて端子接続部 5 1 9に取り付けることができる。 連絡路部 5 1 0は隣接する光源取り付け部 5 1 5に含まれる端子接続部 5 1 9同士を接続する複数の接続路 5 2 1を有している。 一つの接続路 5 2 1とそれによって接続される一対の端子接続部 5 1 9とによって接 続片が形成されているということもできる。 各接続路 5 2 1の一部は切 断が容易なように比較的幅狭に形成されたプリッジ部 5 2 1 Aを有して おり、 このプリッジ部 5 2 1 Aを切除することで接続路 5 2 1によって 連結された端子接続部 5 1 9を分離することができるようになつている。 また光源取り付け部 5 1 5及び連絡路部 5 1 0を幅方向に挟んで第 1及 び第 2の幹路部 5 1 1、 5 1 2がパターン化導体 5 0 0の両側に配置さ れている。 各光源取り付け部 5 1 5の各端子接続部 5 1 9は対応する枝 路部 5 1 3、 5 1 によって第 1の幹路部 5 1 1または第 2の幹路部 5 1 2のいずれかに接続されており、 各光源取り付け部 5 1 5内の一対の 端子接続部 5 1 9のうち一方は第 1の幹路部 5 1 1に、 他方は第 2の幹 路部 5 1 2に接続されている。 もちろん各端子接続部 5 1 9が第 1及び 第 2の幹路部 5 1 1、 5 1 2の両方に接続されるように枝路部 5 1 3、 5 1 4を設けてもよい。 FIG. 56 is a partial plan view showing still another embodiment of the tape-shaped patterned conductor according to the present invention. The patterned conductor 500 has light source mounting portions 515 arranged in a longitudinal direction for mounting a light source, and these light source mounting portions 515 are formed in a longitudinal direction by a communication path portion 510. Has been contacted. Each light source mounting portion 5 15 has a pair of terminal connection portions 5 19 corresponding to a pair of terminals of the light source, and the pair of terminal connection portions 5 19 are separated from each other in the longitudinal direction. Each terminal connection 5 19 has a cross-shaped hole for inserting the lead wire 103 when the light source is, for example, a gun-type LED 102 as shown in FIG. 5 1 6 is formed. If the light source is a chip LED 152 as shown in Figure 31, LED 152 is simply a laser. ■ It can be attached to the terminal connection part 519 by one-side welding. The connection path section 5 10 has a plurality of connection paths 5 21 for connecting the terminal connection sections 5 19 included in the adjacent light source mounting section 5 15. It can also be said that a connection piece is formed by one connection path 521 and a pair of terminal connection parts 519 connected thereby. A part of each connection path 5 21 has a relatively narrow bridge portion 5 21 A for easy cutting, and the bridge portion 5 21 A is cut off to connect. The terminal connection portion 5 19 connected by the path 5 21 can be separated. In addition, the first and second trunk roads 5 1 1 and 5 1 2 are arranged on both sides of the patterned conductor 500 with the light source mounting section 5 15 and the communication path 5 110 sandwiched in the width direction. ing. Each terminal connection portion 5 19 of each light source mounting portion 5 15 is either the first trunk portion 5 1 1 or the second trunk portion 5 1 2 depending on the corresponding branch portion 5 13 3 5 1 One of the pair of terminal connections 5 19 in each light source mounting section 5 15 is connected to the first trunk section 5 11 1, and the other is connected to the second trunk section 5 12. It is connected. Of course, the branch sections 5 13 and 5 14 may be provided so that each terminal connection section 5 19 is connected to both the first and second trunk sections 5 11 and 5 12.
この実施例では、 図 1 6に示した抵抗 1 2 2のような一対のリード線 を有する抵抗の取り付けを容易且つ確実にするため、 接続路 5 2 1及び 第 2の幹路部 5 1 2に抵抗のリード線を挿入するための十字形の穴 5 2 3が形成されている。 図 5 6において点線で示すように、 抵抗 5 2 2の リード線 5 2 2 Aをこれらの穴 5 2 3に揷入する (好適には更にレ一ザ 溶接する) ことで、 抵抗 5 2 2を端子接続部 5 1 9と第 2の幹路部 5 1 2との間に接続したり、 任意の隣接する光源取り付け部に含まれる隣接 する端子接続部 5 1 9の間に接続したりすることができる。 抵抗 5 2 2 を取り付ける場合、 対応するプリッジ部 5 2 1 Aまたは枝路部 5 1 4は 切除することは言うまでもない。 尚、 この実施例では抵抗 52 2の接続 後にブリッジ部 5 2 1 Aまたは枝路部 5 14を切断することができるよ うにブリッジ部 5 2 1 Aが接続路 5 2 1の幅方向中心からずらして配置 されるとともに、 抵抗取り付け用穴 5 2 3は抵抗 5 2 2が取り付けられ たとき、 抵抗 52 2とブリッジ部 5 2 1 Aまたは枝路部 5 14とが重な らないような配置で形成されている。 In this embodiment, in order to easily and surely attach a resistor having a pair of leads, such as the resistor 122 shown in FIG. 16, the connecting path 52 1 and the second trunk section 5 12 A cross-shaped hole 5 23 for inserting a lead wire of a resistor is formed. As shown by the dotted line in FIG. 56, the lead wire 52 2 A of the resistor 52 2 is inserted into these holes 52 3 (preferably further laser-welded) so that the resistance 52 2 2 Between the terminal connection section 5 19 and the second trunk section 5 12 or between adjacent terminal connection sections 5 19 included in any adjacent light source mounting section. be able to. If a resistor 5 2 2 is installed, the corresponding bridge 5 2 1 A or branch 5 1 4 Needless to say resection. In this embodiment, the bridge portion 52 1 A is shifted from the widthwise center of the connection portion 52 1 so that the bridge portion 52 21 A or the branch portion 514 can be cut after the connection of the resistor 52 2. The resistor mounting holes 5 2 3 are arranged so that when the resistor 5 2 2 is mounted, the resistor 5 22 does not overlap with the bridge 5 2 1 A or branch 514. Is formed.
例えば図 1 8のテープ状パターン化導体 1 2 0を光源の直列接続用に 二次加工してなる接続導体構造 (図 2 1 ) では、 各端子取付部 1 0 9と 両幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2とを結ぶ枝路部 1 1 3、 1 14は切除されてい る。 従って、 そのような接続導体構造によって LED 1 0 2 (図 1 6) を連結して L ED 1 0 に電流を流すと、 それによつて発生する熱が両 幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2を通じて放散されず、 L ED 1 0 2の周囲温度が 不所望に高くなる恐れがある。 図 5 7に示すパターン化導体 1 2 0の二 次加工方法は、 LEDを直列接続しつつ、 且つ幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2を 通じた熱の放散を可能とし、 不所望な LED周囲温度の上昇を防ぐため のものである。 尚、 図 5 7では図 1 8と同様の箇所には同じ符号を付し て詳しい説明を省略する。  For example, in the connection conductor structure (Fig. 21) in which the tape-shaped patterned conductor 120 of Fig. 18 is secondary-processed for serial connection of the light source (Fig. 21), each terminal mounting portion 109 and both trunk roads 1 1 Branches 1 13 and 1 14 connecting 1 and 1 12 have been removed. Therefore, when the LED 102 (Fig. 16) is connected by such a connecting conductor structure and a current flows through the LED 10, the heat generated by the connection will cause the heat generated by both trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 And the ambient temperature of the LED 102 may be undesirably high. The secondary processing method of the patterned conductors 120 shown in Fig. 57 enables the heat dissipation through the trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 while connecting the LEDs in series. This is to prevent the ambient temperature from rising. In FIG. 57, the same parts as those in FIG. 18 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted.
図 5 7に示されているように、 この例では、 枝路部 1 1 3、 1 14を 切除する代わりに、 幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2の斜線で示した箇所を切除す る。 これにより、 各光源取付部 5内の一対の端子接続部 1 0 9、 1 09 を互いに電気的に分離して、 LED 1 0 2 (図 1 6) の直列接続を可能 につつ、 各端子接続部 1 0 9を幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2に接続された状態 のままとすることができる。 このようにして、 この実施例では LED 1 02に電流を流したときに発生する熱を幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2から速や かに放散して、 各 L ED 1 0 2の周囲に熱が溜まって温度が不所望に上 昇するのを防止することができる。 尚、 図示した例では各端子接続部 1 0 9は両幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2に接続されているものとしたが、 いずれ か一方にのみ接続されるようにしてもよい。 As shown in Figure 57, in this example, instead of cutting off the branches 1 13 and 1 14, cut off the shaded portions of the trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 . As a result, a pair of terminal connection portions 109 and 109 in each light source mounting portion 5 are electrically separated from each other so that the LED 102 (FIG. 16) can be connected in series while connecting each terminal. The unit 109 can be kept connected to the main roads 111 and 112. In this way, in this embodiment, the heat generated when a current is applied to the LED 102 is quickly dissipated from the trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 and the area around each LED 102 is It is possible to prevent the temperature from undesirably rising due to the accumulation of heat. In the example shown, each terminal connection 1 Although 09 is connected to both trunk roads 111 and 112, it may be connected to only one of them.
例えば図 3 9に示したような実施例のように、 光透過性を有するガラ ス管などに光源連結体を収容して発光体装置を形成する場合、 ガラス管 の内径が小さい場合(例えば約 5 mm)、 幅の狭い幹路部を有するパター ン化導体を用いなければならない。 そのようなパターン化導体 5 5 0を 図 5 8 aに示す。 このパターン化導体 5 5 0は光源 (図示せず) を取り 付けるための光源取付部 5 6 5を形成する端子接続部 5 6 9と、 光源取 付部 5 6 5を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部 5 6 0と、 光源取付部 5 6 5 及び連絡路部 5 6 0を幅方向に挟んで長手方向に延在する一対の幹路部 5 6 1、 5 6 2と、 光源取付部 5 6 5を幹路部 5 6 1、 5 6 2に連絡す る幅方向に延在する複数の枝路部 5 6 3、 5 6 4とを有する点は、 上記 した実施例と同じであるが、 幹路部 5 6 1、 5 6 2の幅が狭くなつてい る点に特徴がある。 そのため内径の小さいガラス管内に収容することが 可能であるが、 これら幹路部 5 6 1、 5 6 2の端部に図 3 9に示した導 電ピン 9 3のような外部電源との接続用の電極ピンを取り付けることが 困難である。 図 5 8 bは、 図 5 8 aに示したようなパターン化導体 5 5 0の幅の狭い幹路部 5 6 1 , 5 6 2の端部に電極ピンを取り付けること を可能にするための端部導体 5 7 0である。 この端部導体 5 7 0はパ夕 ーン化導体 5 5 0の幹路部 5 6 1、 5 6 2との接続用の一対の幅狭部 5 7 1、 5 7 2と、 これら一対の幅狭部 5 7 1、 5 7 2にそれぞれ連結さ れた一対の幅広部 5 7 3、 5 7 4とを有する。この一対の幅広部 5 7 3、 5 7 4の各々には電極ピンを取り付けるのに用いることのできる孔 5 7 3 A、 5 7 4 Aが形成されている。 端部導体 5 7 0はその一対の幅狭部 5 7 1、 5 7 2がパターン化導体 5 5 0の対応する幹路部 5 6 1、 5 6 2と重ね合わされた状態でレーザ溶接されることにより好適にパターン 化導体 5 5 0と一体化される。 なお、 端部導体 5 7 0の一対の幅広部 5 7 3、 5 7 4はブリッジ部 5 7 5によって互いに連結されているが、 使 用前にプリッジ部 5 7 5を切除して分離される。 このように一対の幅狭 部 5 7 1、 5 7 2と一対の幅広部 5 7 3、 5 7 4を有する端部導体 5 7 0を用いることで、 幅の狭い幹路部 5 6 1、 5 6 2を有するパ夕一ン化 導体 5 5 0にも電極ピンを取り付けることが容易に可能となる。 For example, as in the embodiment shown in FIG. 39, when the light source device is formed by housing the light source connector in a glass tube or the like having a light transmitting property, when the inner diameter of the glass tube is small (for example, about 5 mm), patterned conductors with narrow trunks must be used. Such a patterned conductor 550 is shown in Figure 58a. The patterned conductor 550 is a terminal connecting portion 569 that forms a light source mounting portion 565 for mounting a light source (not shown), and a communication connecting the light source mounting portion 565 in a longitudinal direction. A road section 560, a pair of trunk road sections 561, 562 extending in the longitudinal direction with the light source mounting section 565 and the connecting path section 660 sandwiched in the width direction, and a light source mounting section 5 The point that it has a plurality of branch portions 563 and 564 extending in the width direction that connects 65 to the trunk roads 561 and 562 is the same as the above-described embodiment. The feature is that the width of the main roads 561, 562 is becoming narrower. Therefore, it can be housed in a glass tube with a small inside diameter.However, the ends of these trunk roads 561, 562 can be connected to an external power source such as the conductive pin 93 shown in Fig. 39. It is difficult to attach an electrode pin for use. Fig. 58b shows a method for attaching electrode pins to the ends of the narrow trunk roads 561, 562 of the patterned conductor 550 as shown in Fig. 58a. The end conductor is 570. The end conductor 570 is a pair of narrow portions 571, 572 for connection with the trunks 561, 562 of the patterned conductor 5550, and It has a pair of wide portions 573, 574 connected to the narrow portions 571, 572, respectively. Holes 573 A and 574 A that can be used for attaching electrode pins are formed in each of the pair of wide portions 573 and 574. The end conductor 570 is laser welded with its pair of narrow portions 571, 572 superimposed on the corresponding trunks 561, 562 of the patterned conductor 550. More preferably pattern Integrated with the conductive conductor 550. The pair of wide portions 573 and 574 of the end conductor 570 are connected to each other by a bridge portion 575, but are separated by cutting off the bridge portion 575 before use. . By using the end conductor 570 having the pair of narrow portions 571, 572 and the pair of wide portions 573, 574 in this manner, the narrow trunk road portion 561, An electrode pin can be easily attached to the personalized conductor 550 having 562 as well.
図 3 6に示した例では、 パターン化導体 1 2 0の二次加工によって得 られる接続導体構造 1 0 4の各部がばらばらになるのを防ぐまたは接続 導体構造 1 0 4の機械的強度を高めて取り扱いを容易にするために絶縁 性シート 1 8 4 ' をパターン化導体 1 2 0の光源取付面とは反対側の面 に張り付けた。 しかしながら、 図 5 9に示す光源連結体の別実施例 1 0 l aのように、 絶縁性シート 1 8 4 ' をパターン化導体 1 2 0 (接続導 体構造 1 0 4 ) の光源取付面に例えば熱溶着などにより張り付けること もできる。 尚、 この図において図 3 6と同様の箇所には同じ符号を付し て詳しい説明を省略する。図示されているように、絶縁性シ一ト 1 8 4 ' には、 図 3 6の場合と同様に、 所定の箇所に開口 1 8 5が形成され、 光 源 (L E D ) 2とパターン化導体 1 2 0の端子接続部 1 0 9との接続が 可能となっている。 このような開口 1 8 5の形成は、 絶縁性シート 1 8 4 ' をパタ一ン化導体 1 2 0に張り付ける前に予め形成することも、 或 いは張り付けた後にプレス加工、 レーザ加工などの方法により形成する こともできる。 このように絶縁性シ一ト 1 8 4 ' をパターン化導体 1 2 0の光源取付面に張り付けると、 電源電圧が印加される部分が、 比較的 作業者が触りやすい光源取付面側に露出されないため安全性を向上する ことができるとともに、 絶縁性シート 1 8 4 ' が光源 1 0 2からの光を 反射することにより照明効率を上げることができる。  In the example shown in Fig. 36, the parts of the connecting conductor structure 104 obtained by the secondary processing of the patterned conductor 120 are prevented from being separated or the mechanical strength of the connecting conductor structure 104 is increased. To facilitate handling, an insulating sheet 18 4 ′ was attached to the surface of the patterned conductor 120 opposite to the light source mounting surface. However, as in another embodiment 10 la of the light source connected body shown in FIG. 59, for example, the insulating sheet 18 4 ′ is attached to the light source mounting surface of the patterned conductor 120 (connection conductor structure 104). It can also be attached by heat welding. In this figure, the same parts as those in FIG. 36 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted. As shown in the figure, the insulating sheet 18 4 ′ is formed with an opening 18 5 at a predetermined position, as in FIG. 36, and the light source (LED) 2 and the patterned conductor are formed. Connection with the terminal connection section 109 of 120 is possible. The opening 185 may be formed before the insulating sheet 184 ′ is attached to the patterned conductor 120, or may be formed by pressing, laser processing, or the like after the attachment. It can also be formed by the method described above. In this way, when the insulating sheet 18 4 ′ is attached to the light source mounting surface of the patterned conductor 120, the portion to which the power supply voltage is applied is exposed on the light source mounting surface that is relatively easy for an operator to touch. The safety can be improved because it is not performed, and the lighting efficiency can be increased by reflecting the light from the light source 102 with the insulating sheet 18 4 ′.
上記したように、 パターン化導体の二次加工により形成される接続導 体構造 1 04の各部がばらばらになるのを防ぐため絶縁性シート 1 84、 1 84 ' を用いる場合、 得られる光源連結体 1 0 1 ' 、 1 0 1〃 、 1 0 1 aの機械的強度を補うべく保持体に取り付けることが好ましい。また、 光源 1 0 2をパターン化導体 1 2 0に組み付けた後に、 所要箇所を切除 して接続導体構造 1 04を形成して光源連結体を得る場合、 絶縁性シー ト 1 84 ' などの連結部材を用いる必要はないが、 光源連結体の機械的 強度はより低下するので、 保持体の使用が一層望ましい。 図 60 aにそ のような光源連結体の保持体への取り付けの好適実施例を示す。 また図 60 bは光源連結体を保持体に取り付けた状態を示す断面図である。 As described above, the connection conductor formed by the secondary processing of the patterned conductor When using the insulating sheets 184 and 184 'to prevent the parts of the body structure 104 from falling apart, the mechanical strength of the obtained light source unit 1001', 101〃 and 101a is obtained. It is preferable to attach to the holder to compensate for. In addition, when assembling the light source 102 to the patterned conductor 120 and then cutting out the required portions to form the connecting conductor structure 104 to obtain a light source connected body, connecting the insulating sheet 184 'etc. It is not necessary to use a member, but it is more preferable to use a holder because the mechanical strength of the light source connection body is further reduced. FIG. 60a shows a preferred embodiment of such attachment of the light source assembly to the holder. FIG. 60B is a cross-sectional view showing a state where the light source connector is attached to the holder.
図 6 0 a及び図 6 0 bに示すように、 この保持体 5 8 0は中央部に長 手方向に延在する溝 5 8 2を有し、 この溝の対向する側壁 58 3、 58 3には光源連結体 1 0 1 bの一対の幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2に対応する一 対の対向する長手方向に延在するガイド溝 5 8 3 A、 5 8 3 Aが形成さ れている。 尚、 この例では光源連結体 1 0 1 bは図 1 8に示したような パターン化導体 1 2 0を用いて形成されるが、連結部材を有しておらず、 また延出部 1 1 7の折り曲げによるリード線 1 0 3のかしめは行わず、 レーザ加工によってリード線 1 0 3とパターン化導体 1 20との接続を 行い、 底面部は概ねフラットとなっている (図 6 0 b)。 図 6 0 aに示す ように、 光源連結体 1 0 1 bの一対の幹路部 1 1 1、 1 1 2を対応する ガイド溝 5 8 3 A、 5 8 3 Aに嵌め込むように、 図の矢印で示す方向に スライドさせることにより、 光源連結体 1 0 1 bの保持体 5 80への取 り付けを容易に行うことができる。 その後、 図 6 O bに示すように、 光 源連結体 1 0 1 bの光源取付面には電源電圧が印加される部分が露出さ れたり、 ほこりなどによって不所望に短絡したりするのを防ぐべく絶縁 体からなる力バ一部材 5 8 5が取り付けられる。 力パー部材 58 5には 予め光源 1 0 2の位置に合わせて開口が設けられている。 図 5 9に示し たように絶縁性シート 1 8 4 ' が光源取付面に張り付けられている場合、 カバ一部材 5 8 5を省略してもよい。 As shown in FIG. 60a and FIG. 60b, the holder 580 has a groove 582 extending in the longitudinal direction at the center, and opposing side walls 583, 583 of the groove. Has a pair of opposing longitudinally extending guide grooves 583A and 583A corresponding to a pair of trunk sections 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 of the connected light source body 101b. Have been. In this example, the connected light source 101b is formed using a patterned conductor 120 as shown in FIG. 18 but does not have a connecting member and has an extension 1 1b. The lead wire 103 is not caulked by bending the 7 and the lead wire 103 is connected to the patterned conductor 120 by laser processing, and the bottom surface is almost flat (Fig. 60b). . As shown in Fig. 60a, the pair of trunk roads 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 of the light source assembly 101 b are fitted into the corresponding guide grooves 583A and 583A. By sliding in the direction indicated by the arrow, it is possible to easily attach the light source connector 101b to the holder 580. Then, as shown in FIG. 6Ob, the portion to which the power supply voltage is applied is exposed on the light source mounting surface of the light source connection body 101b, and undesired short-circuiting due to dust or the like is prevented. In order to prevent this, a force bar member 585 made of an insulator is attached. An opening is provided in advance in the power par member 585 in accordance with the position of the light source 102. As shown in Figure 59 As described above, when the insulating sheet 184 'is attached to the light source mounting surface, the cover member 585 may be omitted.
図 6 1は、 保持体の別の実施例を示す断面図である。 光源連結体 1 0 1 bは図 6 0 a及び図 6 0 bに示したのと同様である。 この保持体 5 9 0は、上面と下面の両方に長手方向に延在する溝 5 9 2 , 5 9 6を有し、 概ね H形の断面を有している。 各溝 5 9 2、 5 9 6の対向する側壁 5 9 3、 5 9 3及び 5 9 7、 5 9 7には、 関連する光源連結体の一対の幹路 部 1 1 1、 1 1 2が嵌め込まれるガイド溝 5 9 3 A、 5 9 3 A及び 5 9 7 A、 5 9 7 Aが形成されている。 このような保持体 5 9 0を用いるこ とにより、 保持体 5 9 0の上面と下面のそれぞれに光源連結体 1 0 1 b を取付け、 上側及び下側の両方に光を照射することが可能となる。  FIG. 61 is a cross-sectional view showing another embodiment of the holder. The connected light source 101b is the same as that shown in FIGS. 60a and 60b. This holding body 590 has grooves 592 and 596 extending in the longitudinal direction on both the upper surface and the lower surface, and has a substantially H-shaped cross section. Opposing side walls 593, 593 and 597, 597 of each groove 592, 596 have a pair of trunks 1 1 1 and 1 1 2 of the associated light source assembly. Guide grooves 593 A, 593 A, 597 A, and 5977 A to be fitted are formed. By using such a holder 590, it is possible to attach the light source connector 101b to each of the upper surface and the lower surface of the holder 590 and irradiate light to both the upper and lower sides. Becomes
上記したように本発明によるパターン化導体 ( 1 2 0、 2 0 0など) は好適には順送プレス機で形成することができるが、 フォトエッチング により形成することも可能である。 そのようなフォトエッチングにより パターン化導体を形成し、 光源連結体を得る好適な方法を図 6 2 a〜図 6 2 cに示す。 図 6 2 aに示すように、 例えば燐青銅からなる導電板 6 0 1と概ね同じ大きさの絶縁板 6 0 2との間に熱溶着シート 6 0 3を挟 み、 高温で圧接することにより、 導電板 6 0 1を絶縁板 6 0 2に接着す る。 続いてフォトエッチングを用いて各々例えば図 5 6に示したような パターンを有する複数の長寸のパターン化導体 6 0 4— 1、 6 0 4— As described above, the patterned conductor (120, 200, etc.) according to the present invention can be preferably formed by a progressive press machine, but can also be formed by photoetching. A preferred method of forming a patterned conductor by such photoetching to obtain a light source assembly is shown in FIGS. As shown in Fig. 62a, for example, a heat welding sheet 63 is sandwiched between a conductive plate 601 made of phosphor bronze and an insulating plate 602 having substantially the same size, and pressed at a high temperature. Then, the conductive plate 601 is bonded to the insulating plate 602. Then, using photoetching, a plurality of long patterned conductors 6 04-1, 6 0 4 — each having a pattern as shown in FIG. 56, for example.
2 6 0 4— Nを形成する。 尚、 図 6 2 bでは、 形成されるパター ンの詳しい図示は省略した。 フォトエッチングプロセスとは別に、 光源 や抵抗のリ一ド線を挿入するための穴開け加工をプレス加工などによつ て行ってもよい。 この状態では複数のパターン化導体 6 0 4— 1、 6 0 4— 2、. . ·、 6 0 4— Nは全て絶縁板 6 0 2に取り付けられている。 そ の後、 例えばプレス加工により各パターン化導体 6 0 4— 1、 6 0 4 - 2 6 0 4— Nの適切な部分を切除して所望の接続導体構造を形成 し、 図 6 2 cに示すように接続導体構造に光源 6 0 6 (及び必要ならば 抵抗) を取り付け、 光源連結体 6 0 5— 1、 6 0 5 - 2 6 0 5—2 6 0 4— forms N. In FIG. 62B, detailed illustration of the formed pattern is omitted. Apart from the photo-etching process, a punching process for inserting a light source or a lead wire of a resistor may be performed by a press process or the like. In this state, all of the plurality of patterned conductors 604-1, 604-2,..., 604-N are attached to the insulating plate 602. After that, each patterned conductor 6 0 4—1, 6 0 4- Cut off the appropriate portion of 264-N to form the desired connecting conductor structure, attach light source 606 (and resistor if necessary) to the connecting conductor structure as shown in Figure 62c, 6 0 5— 1, 6 0 5-2 6 0 5—
Nを形成する。 図 6 2 cでは絶縁板 6 0 2によって連結された複数の光 源連結体 6 0 5— 1、 6 0 5— 2、. . .、 6 0 5— Nによって面光源が形 成されていることがわかるだろう。 光源 6 0 6の取り付け後または取り 付け前に絶縁板 6 0 2を切断して光源連結体 (接続導体構造) 6 0 5— 1、 6 0 5— 2、. . .、 6 0 5— Nを互いに分離することも勿論可能であ る。 Form N. In FIG. 62C, a plurality of light source connected bodies 655-1, 655-2,..., 655-N connected by an insulating plate 62 form a surface light source. You can see that. After or before mounting the light source 606, cut off the insulating plate 602 and connect the light source (connection conductor structure) 605—1, 605—2,..., 605—N Can of course be separated from one another.
上記実施例では、 パターン化導体 ( 1 2 0、 2 0 0など) を用いて複 数の光源が一列に配列された光源連結体( 1 0 1、 1 0 1 ' 、 1 0 1〃 、 2 0 1など) を形成した。 しかしながら、 複数列の光源を含む光源連結 体を形成するためのパターン化導体も可能である。 図 6 3 aは、 例とし て 2列の光源を含む光源連結体を形成することが可能なパターン化導体 の一実施例を示す部分平面図である。 図示されているように、 このパタ ーン化導体 6 1 0は、 上記したような一列に光源が配列された光源連結 体を形成するためのパターン化導体 (光源一列配置用パターン化導体) を 2つ幅方向に連結した構造を有している。 詳述すると、 この光源 1 0 2列配置用パターン化導体 6 1 0は、 長手方向に平行に延在する電源接 続用の第 1〜第 3の幹路部 6 1 1、 6 1 2、 6 1 3を有レ、 中央の第 2 の幹路部 6 1 2には順送プレス機での搬送 Z位置決めを容易にするため のパイロット穴 6 1 4が形成されている。 第 1幹路部 6 1 1と第 2幹路 部 6 1 2の間には複数の光源取付部 6 1 5が長手方向に配置され、 各光 源取付部 6 1 5は幅方向に延在する対応する枝路部 6 1 6、 6 1 7によ つて第 1幹路部 6 1 1及び第 2幹路部 6 1 2に接続されるとともに、 隣 接する光源取付部 6 1 5同士は互いに連絡路部 6 1 8によって連結され ている。 同様に、 第 2幹路部 6 1 2と第 3幹路部 6 1 3の間にも複数の 光源取付部 6 2 5が長手方向に配置され、 長手方向に連絡路部 62 8に よって連結されるとともに、 各光源取付部 6 2 5は幅方向に延在する対 応する枝路部 6 2 6、 62 7によって第 2幹路部 6 1 2及び第 3幹路部 6 1 3に接続されている。 この実施例では、 各々光源を一列に配置する ための 2つのパターン化導体によって中央の第 2の幹路部 6 1 2が共有 されているとも言える。 第 1幹路部 6 1 1と第 2幹路部 6 1 2の間に配 列された各光源取付部 6 1 5は対応する光源の一対の端子に対応した一 対の端子接続部 6 1 9、 6 1 9を有し、 各一対の端子接続部 6 1 9, 6 1 9はこの実施例では 2つのブリッジ部 6 19 A、 6 1 9Aによって互 いに連結され、 光源が接続される前にこれらブリッジ部 6 1 9 A、 6 1 9 Aは切除され各光源取付部 6 1 5内の一対の端子接続部 6 1 9, 6 1 9は互いに分離される。 また各端子接続部 6 1 9には光源がリード線を 有する場合にそのリード線を揷入するための穴 6 2 0が形成されている。 同様に、 第 2幹路部 6 1 1と第 3幹路部 6 1 3との間に配列された各光 源取付部 6 2 5は対応する光源の一対の端子に対応した一対の端子接続 部 6 2 9、 6 2 9を有し、 各一対の端子接続部 6 2 9、 6 29はこの実 施例では 2つのプリッジ部 6 2 9 A、 6 2 9 Aによって互いに連結され ている。 また各端子接続部 6 2 9には光源がリード線を有する場合にそ のリード線を挿入するための穴 6 3 0が形成されている。 In the above embodiment, a plurality of light sources (101, 101 ′, 101〃, 2102) in which a plurality of light sources are arranged in a line using patterned conductors (120, 200, etc.). 0 1). However, patterned conductors for forming a light source assembly comprising multiple rows of light sources are also possible. FIG. 63a is a partial plan view showing one embodiment of a patterned conductor capable of forming a light source assembly including two rows of light sources as an example. As shown in the figure, the patterned conductor 610 is a patterned conductor (patterned conductor for arranging light sources in one row) for forming a light source connected body in which light sources are arranged in one row as described above. It has a structure in which two are connected in the width direction. More specifically, the patterned conductors 6 10 for arranging the light sources 10 and 2 rows are composed of first to third trunk paths 6 1 1, 6 1 2, and 6. A pilot hole 6 14 for facilitating the positioning of the transport Z by the progressive press machine is formed in the central second trunk road 6 12. A plurality of light source mounting portions 6 15 are arranged in the longitudinal direction between the first main road portion 6 11 and the second main road portion 6 12, and each light source mounting portion 6 15 extends in the width direction. Corresponding to the first main road 611 and the second main road 612 by corresponding branch paths 6 16 and 6 17, and adjacent light source mounting sections 6 15 are mutually connected. Linked by 6 1 8 ing. Similarly, a plurality of light source mounting portions 6 25 are arranged in the longitudinal direction between the second trunk portion 6 12 and the third trunk portion 6 13, and are connected in the longitudinal direction by the communication path portion 628. At the same time, each light source mounting portion 6 25 is connected to the second trunk portion 6 12 and the third trunk portion 6 13 by the corresponding branch portions 6 26 and 6 27 extending in the width direction. Have been. In this embodiment, it can be said that the central second trunk section 6 12 is shared by two patterned conductors for arranging the light sources in a line. Each light source mounting portion 6 15 arranged between the first trunk portion 6 11 and the second trunk portion 6 12 is a pair of terminal connecting portions 6 1 corresponding to a pair of terminals of the corresponding light source. In this embodiment, each pair of terminal connecting portions 6 19, 6 19 are connected to each other by two bridge portions 6 19 A, 6 19 A, and a light source is connected. Previously, the bridge portions 6 19 A and 6 19 A are cut off, and the pair of terminal connection portions 6 19 and 6 19 in each light source mounting portion 6 15 are separated from each other. In addition, each terminal connection portion 619 is formed with a hole 620 for inserting a lead wire when the light source has the lead wire. Similarly, each light source mounting section 6 25 arranged between the second trunk section 6 11 and the third trunk section 6 13 has a pair of terminal connections corresponding to a pair of terminals of the corresponding light source. In this embodiment, each pair of terminal connecting portions 629 and 629 is connected to each other by two bridge portions 629A and 629A. In addition, each terminal connection portion 629 has a hole 630 for inserting a lead wire when the light source has the lead wire.
図 6 3 bは図 6 3 aのパターン化導体 6 1 0の二次加工要領の一例を 示す図である。 この図において、 取り付けられる光源 6 3 5及び抵抗 6 36を点線で示し、 切除される部分を斜線で示した。 光源 63 5及び抵 抗 6 3 6は図 1 6に示した L ED 1 02及び抵抗 1 22と同じようなリ —ド線を有するものとすることができるが、 リード線を有さないチップ 型としてもよい。 また印加される電源電圧の極性を記号で示した。 この 例では、 光源 6 3 5の各列が、 各々 4つの光源 6 3 5を含む複数の直列 ブロックが並列接続された光源直並列体をなすようにパターン化導体 6 1 0が二次加工されていることが理解されるだろう。 もちろん、 各列の 光源 63 5が直列または並列に接続されるようにパターン化導体 6 1 0 を二次加工することも可能である。 FIG. 63 b is a diagram showing an example of the secondary processing procedure of the patterned conductor 610 in FIG. 63 a. In this figure, the light source 635 and the resistor 636 to be attached are indicated by a dotted line, and a portion to be cut off is indicated by a diagonal line. The light source 635 and the resistor 636 may have leads similar to the LED 102 and the resistor 122 shown in FIG. 16, but a chip type without a lead wire. It may be. The polarity of the applied power supply voltage is indicated by a symbol. this In the example, the patterned conductors 6 10 are subjected to secondary processing so that each row of the light sources 6 3 5 forms a light source series-parallel body in which a plurality of series blocks each including 4 light sources 6 3 5 are connected in parallel. It will be understood that. Of course, it is also possible to subject the patterned conductors 6 10 to secondary processing so that the light sources 635 of each row are connected in series or in parallel.
図 64は光源を 4列に配列することが可能なパターン化導体の実施例 を示す平面図である。 このパターン化導体 640は、 図 6 3 aに示した パターン化導体を 2つ幅方向に連結した構成を有しており、 例えば図に 示したように電源電圧を印加することで各列の光源に適切に電力を供給 することが可能なことが理解されるだろう。 このように、 本発明によれ ば光源を複数列配列することが可能であり、 且つ、 二次加工における切 除部分を変えることで、 光源各列において並列、 直列、 直並列など様々 な態様で光源を連結することが可能なパターン化導体が提供される。  FIG. 64 is a plan view showing an embodiment of a patterned conductor in which light sources can be arranged in four rows. This patterned conductor 640 has a configuration in which two patterned conductors shown in FIG. 63A are connected in the width direction. For example, as shown in the figure, a light source in each column is applied by applying a power supply voltage. It will be understood that it is possible to supply power properly. As described above, according to the present invention, a plurality of light sources can be arranged in a plurality of rows, and by changing the cut portions in the secondary processing, the light sources can be arranged in various modes such as parallel, series, and series-parallel in each row. A patterned conductor to which a light source can be coupled is provided.
LEDは消費電力が少なくまた寿命が長いという利点があるため、 複 数の LEDを光源として用いて信号灯を形成することが提案されている, L EDが直列または直並列に接続されている場合、 1つの L EDが故障 して電流を流さなくなると、 その L EDに直列に接続された LEDにも 電流が流れなくなり、 信号灯全体の明るさが大きく低下してしまう。 複 数の L EDを並列接続し、 そうしてできた並列接続体を複数直列接続し てマトリックス状回路を形成することが知られている (例えば、 実開平 4- 8454号公報第 9図)。 このような回路では、 1つの LEDが故障 して電流を流さなくなっても、 それと並列に接続された L EDには電流 を流すことができるため、 光量が大きく低下することがない。 しかしな がら、 そのような回路では、 1つの L EDが短絡故障を起こした場合に はその L EDと並列に接続されている各 L EDの両端が短絡されること となり、 これらの L EDから光が放出されなくなるため、 光量が大幅に 低下してしまう。 図 65は、 そのような L EDの短絡故障の場合にも全 体の光量の大幅な低下を防ぐことができる信号灯に適した L ED回路を 示す模式図である。 Because LEDs have the advantages of low power consumption and long life, it has been proposed to use multiple LEDs as a light source to form a signal light, when LEDs are connected in series or series-parallel. If one LED breaks down and no longer conducts current, no current will flow through the LED connected in series with that LED, and the overall brightness of the signal light will drop significantly. It is known that a plurality of LEDs are connected in parallel, and a plurality of parallel-connected bodies are connected in series to form a matrix circuit (for example, FIG. 9 of Japanese Utility Model Application Laid-Open No. 4-8454). . In such a circuit, even if one LED fails and stops supplying current, current can flow through the LEDs connected in parallel with it, so that the light quantity does not decrease significantly. However, in such a circuit, if one LED experiences a short-circuit fault, both ends of each LED connected in parallel with that LED will be short-circuited, and these LEDs will Because no light is emitted, the amount of light is greatly increased Will drop. FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram showing an LED circuit suitable for a signal lamp that can prevent a large decrease in the total light quantity even in the case of such a LED short-circuit failure.
図 6 5の L ED回路 6 5 0は、 各々 5つの L ED 6 5 1が並列接続さ れてなる 8つの光源並列接続体 6 5 2が直列に接続され、 マトリックス 状回路をなしている点は従来と同様であるが、 各 LED 6 5 1に、 関連 する抵抗 6 5 3が直列に接続されている点に特徴がある。 これにより、 1つの L ED 6 5 1が短絡故障しても、 その L ED 6 5 1と直列に接続 された抵抗 6 5 3の両端に電圧が生成されるため、 その L ED 6 5 1と 並列に接続された他の L ED 6 5 1の両端は短絡されず、 発光が維持さ れる。 従って、 1つの L ED 6 5 1の短絡故障が発生しても、 全体の光 量の大幅な低下を防止することが可能である。 なお、 並列接続される L ED 6 5 1の数及び直列接続される光源並列接続体 6 5 2の数は勿論任 意に変更可能である。  The LED circuit 650 in FIG. 65 is a matrix-shaped circuit in which eight light source parallel connected bodies 652 each consisting of five LEDs 651 connected in parallel are connected in series. Is similar to the conventional one, but is characterized in that each LED 651 has an associated resistor 653 connected in series. As a result, even if one LED 651 is short-circuited, a voltage is generated across the resistor 653 connected in series with the LED 651, so that the LED 651 Both ends of the other LED 651 connected in parallel are not short-circuited, and light emission is maintained. Therefore, even if a short-circuit failure of one LED 651 occurs, it is possible to prevent a large decrease in the total light quantity. The number of LEDs 651 connected in parallel and the number of parallel light sources 652 connected in series can be arbitrarily changed.
図 6 6に示すように、 図 6 5に示した L ED回路 6 5 0と同様に複数 の光源並列接続体 6 6 2が直列接続されて光源 6 6 1がマトリックス状 に接続された回路構成を有する別の L ED回路 6 6 0を追加し、 それぞ れ独立した電源 (第 1電源及び第 2電源) に接続するとともに、 それぞ れの光源 6 5 1 , 6 6 1が概ね重なるように配置して発光体装置 6 7 0 を構成することも可能である。 このように別個の電源に接続された 2つ の回路 6 5 0、 6 6 0を用いることにより、 一方の電源が故障した場合 でも、 最低限必要な明るさを維持することができる。  As shown in FIG. 66, a circuit configuration in which a plurality of light source parallel connected bodies 626 are connected in series and light sources 661 are connected in a matrix like the LED circuit 650 shown in FIG. 65 A separate LED circuit 660 is added and connected to independent power supplies (first and second power supplies), and the light sources 651 and 661 are almost overlapped. May be arranged to constitute the light emitting device 670. By using the two circuits 650 and 660 connected to the separate power supplies in this way, even if one of the power supplies fails, the minimum required brightness can be maintained.
図 6 7に示すように、 図 6 6に示したような回路構成を有する発光体 装置 6 7 0は、 本発明に基づくパターン化導体を用いて形成される光源 連結体 6 7 1を使って容易に形成することができる。 図 6 7の発光体装 置 6 7 0は幅方向に配列された複数の光源連結体 67 1を含み、 異なる 電源 (第 1電源及び第 2電源) に接続される光源連結体 6 7 1が交互に 幅方向に配置されている。 各光源連結体 6 7 1に含まれる L E Dは長手 方向に延在する一対の幹路部 6 7 2 , 6 7 3間に互いに並列に接続され、 各 L E Dは抵抗を通じて一方の幹路部 6 7 3に接続されている。 このよ うな光源連結体は、 例えば図 5 6に示したパターン化導体 5 0 0を二次 加工して所要箇所を切除し、 光源としての L E Dを接続することにより 容易に形成することができる。 光源連結体 6 7 1は 1つおきにジヤンパ —線 6 7 5、 6 7 6によって連絡され、 図 6 5に示したようなマトリツ クス状 L E D回路を 2つ形成し、 両端に位置する光源連結体 6 7 1は第 1電源または第 2電源に接続されている。 このようにして、 信号灯に適 した信頼性の高い面発光装置をパターン化導体 (5 0 0など) を用いて 形成される光源連結体 6 7 1を用いて形成することができる。 As shown in FIG. 67, a light emitting device 670 having a circuit configuration as shown in FIG. 66 uses a light source connector 670 formed using a patterned conductor according to the present invention. It can be easily formed. The light emitter device 670 of FIG. 67 includes a plurality of light source connected bodies 671 arranged in the width direction, and is different. Light source connected bodies 671 connected to power supplies (first power supply and second power supply) are alternately arranged in the width direction. The LEDs included in each light source connected body 671 are connected in parallel with each other between a pair of trunk paths 672 and 673 extending in the longitudinal direction. Connected to 3. Such a connected light source can be easily formed, for example, by subjecting the patterned conductor 500 shown in FIG. 56 to secondary processing, cutting off a required portion, and connecting an LED as a light source. The light source assemblies 6 7 1 are connected by alternate jumpers — lines 6 7 6 and 6 7 6 to form two matrix-like LED circuits as shown in Figure 65, with light source connections located at both ends. The body 671 is connected to the first power source or the second power source. In this manner, a highly reliable surface light emitting device suitable for a signal light can be formed by using the light source connector 670 formed using a patterned conductor (such as 500).
図 6 8は、 電気的には図 6 5に示したようにマトリックス状に互いに 接続され且つ空間的には一列に配置された複数の光源を有する、 本発明 に基づく光源連結体の別の実施例を示す模式的な部分平面図である。 こ の図において各 L E Dの取り付け向きが記号で示されている。 この光源 連結体も、 図 5 6に示したパターン化導体 5 0 0の所要部分を切除して 形成される接続導体構造を用いることにより形成することができる。 本 図において図 5 6と同様の部分には同じ符号を付して詳しい説明を省略 する。  FIG. 68 shows another embodiment of a light source combination according to the invention having a plurality of light sources electrically connected to one another in a matrix and spatially arranged in a row as shown in FIG. It is a typical partial top view showing an example. In this figure, the mounting direction of each LED is indicated by a symbol. This connected light source can also be formed by using a connection conductor structure formed by cutting off a required portion of the patterned conductor 500 shown in FIG. In this figure, the same parts as those in FIG. 56 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted.
この光源連結体 7 0 0は、 上記した実施例と同様に、 長手方向に 1列 に配置された複数の光源としての L E D 7 0 1を有しており、 この実施 例では、 各々並列接続された 3つの L E D 7 0 1を含む複数の光源並列 接続体が直列接続されている。 勿論、 各並列接続体に含まれる L E D 7 0 1の数は 3に限定されるものではなく、 別の数の L E D 7 0 1を含む こともできる。 上記実施例と同様に、 この光源連結体 7 0 0も L E D 7 0 1を挟んで長手方向に延在する第 1及び第 2の幹路部 5 1 1、 5 1 2 を有し、 各 L ED 7 0 1はこれら幹路部 5 1 1、 5 1 2間に関連する枝 路部 5 1 3及び抵抗 7 02を介して接続されているが、 隣接する並列接 続体に含まれる LED 70 1の向きが逆になつており且つ第 1及び第 2 の幹路部 5 1 1、 5 1 2の一部が切断されている点が上記実施例と異な る。 これにより、 記号で示すような極性で直流電圧を印加すると、 概ね 図の左側から右側へと電流が流れる。 図から理解されるように、 隣接す る並列接続体に含まれる L ED 7 0 1の向きが逆になつていることによ り、 隣接する並列接続体のうち上流側の並列接続体に含まれる LED 7 0 1のカソードと下流側の並列接続体に含まれる LED 7 0 1のァノ一 ドとが接続されている。また、第 1及び第 2の幹路部 5 1 1、 5 1 2は、 隣接する並列接続体のうち上流側の並列接続体に含まれる LED 7 0 1 のァノードと下流側の並列接続体に含まれる L ED 7 0 1の力ソードと が分離されるように且つ各 LED 7 0 1の両端が短絡しないように隣接 する並列接続体の概ね間において切断されている(符号 7 0 3、 7 04)。 このように本実施例によれば、 各々並列に接続された複数の光源 7 0 1 を含む並列接続体を直列に接続した回路構造を有し且つこれら光源 7 0 1が直線状に配列された線発光体を得ることができる。 This light source connected body 700 has a plurality of LEDs 701 as a plurality of light sources arranged in a line in the longitudinal direction, similarly to the above-described embodiment, and in this embodiment, each is connected in parallel. A plurality of light source parallel connected bodies including three LEDs 701 are connected in series. Of course, the number of LEDs 701 included in each parallel connection is not limited to three, and another number of LEDs 701 can be included. As in the above embodiment, the light source assembly 700 is also an LED 7 0 1 has first and second trunk roads 5 1 1 and 5 1 2 extending in the longitudinal direction, and each LED 701 is between these trunk roads 5 1 1 and 5 1 2 Are connected via a branch section 5 13 and a resistor 7202, but the directions of the LEDs 701 included in the adjacent parallel connection are reversed, and the first and second trunks are connected to each other. The difference from the above embodiment is that a part of the road sections 511 and 5112 is cut off. Thus, when a DC voltage is applied with the polarity as indicated by the symbol, a current generally flows from the left side to the right side of the figure. As can be understood from the figure, since the direction of the LED 701 included in the adjacent parallel-connected body is reversed, it is included in the upstream parallel-connected body among the adjacent parallel-connected bodies. The cathode of the LED 701 is connected to the anode of the LED 701 included in the downstream parallel connection body. In addition, the first and second trunk roads 5 1 1 and 5 1 2 are connected to the anode of the LED 701 included in the upstream parallel connection and the downstream parallel connection of the adjacent parallel connection. The LED 701 is disconnected between the adjacent parallel connections so that the power source of the LED 701 is separated from the LED 701 and the two ends of each LED 701 are not short-circuited (reference numerals 73, 7). 04). As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitting device has a circuit structure in which a parallel connection body including a plurality of light sources 7 01 connected in parallel is connected in series, and the light sources 7 0 1 are arranged in a straight line. A line emitter can be obtained.
図 6 9は、 同様の電気回路構造及び光源配列構造を有する光源連結体 の別の実施例を示す模式的な部分平面図である。 この光源連結体 7 0 0 aでも、 記号で示すように電源電圧が印加され、 電流は概ね図の左から 右へ流れる。 この例では、 光源として用いられる LED 7 0 1の向きは 全て同じであるが、 隣接する並列接続体のうち上流側の並列接続体に含 まれる LED 7 0 1の力ソード (またはそれに接続された一方の幹路部 5 1 2) と下流側の並列接続体に含まれる L ED 7 0 1のアノード (ま たはそれに接続された他方の幹路部 5 1 1 ) とを接続するため、 2つの 光源取り付け部 5 1 5 (またはそれに含まれる端子接続部 5 1 9) 及び それらを幹路部 5 1 1、 5 1 2に連絡する枝路部 5 1 3、 5 14が用い られている。 そのためこの実施例では隣接する並列接続体の間の間隔が 図 6 8に示した実施例と比べて大きくなるという欠点がある。 FIG. 69 is a schematic partial plan view showing another embodiment of the light source assembly having the same electric circuit structure and light source arrangement structure. Even in this light source connected body 700a, the power supply voltage is applied as indicated by the symbol, and the current generally flows from left to right in the figure. In this example, the LED 701 used as a light source has the same orientation, but the power sword of the LED 701 included in the upstream parallel connection among adjacent parallel connections (or connected to it). To connect one of the trunk roads 5 1 2) to the anode of LED 701 included in the downstream parallel connection (or the other trunk road 5 1 1 connected to it). Two The light source mounting portion 5 15 (or the terminal connection portion 5 19 included therein) and the branch portions 5 13 and 514 for connecting them to the trunk portions 5 11 and 5 12 are used. For this reason, this embodiment has a disadvantage that the distance between adjacent parallel-connected bodies is larger than that of the embodiment shown in FIG.
図 7 0は、 電気的には図 6 5に示したようにマトリックス状に互いに 接続され且つ空間的には一列に配置された複数の光源を有する光源連結 体を形成するのに適したパターン化導体の別の実施例を示す部分平面図 である。 図 7 0のパターン化導体 5 0 0 aは、 図 5 6に示したパターン 化導体 500の変形実施例であり、 図 7 0において図 5 6と同様の部分 には同じ符号を付して詳しい説明を省略する。 また図 7 1は、 図 7 0に 示したパターン化導体 5 0 0 aを用いて形成された光源連結体の一例 7 0 0 bを示す部分平面図である。 この図において L ED 70 1はその接 続の向きもわかるように模式的に示したが、 砲弾型 L ED、 チップ型 L EDのいずれとすることもできる。 また本図において図 6 8と同様の部 分には同じ符号を付して詳しい説明を省略する。  FIG. 70 shows a patterning suitable for forming a light source assembly having a plurality of light sources electrically connected to each other in a matrix as shown in FIG. 65 and spatially arranged in a line. FIG. 9 is a partial plan view showing another example of the conductor. 70. The patterned conductor 500a in FIG. 70 is a modified example of the patterned conductor 500 shown in FIG. 56. In FIG. 70, the same parts as those in FIG. Description is omitted. FIG. 71 is a partial plan view showing an example of a light source connected body 700b formed using the patterned conductor 500a shown in FIG. In this figure, the LED 701 is schematically shown so that the connection direction can be understood, but it can be either a shell type LED or a chip type LED. Also, in this figure, the same parts as those in FIG. 68 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted.
図 7 0のパターン化導体 500 aでは、 各プリッジ部 52 1 Aの中央 部分において、 ブリッジ部 5 2 1 Aを第 1及び第 2の幹路部 5 1 1、 5 1 2に接続する更なる枝路部 5 1 7, 5 1 8が設けられている点が図 5 6の実施例と異なる。 これにより、 光源としての L EDを接続する接続 導体構造を形成するべく隣接する光源並列接続体間に位置するプリッジ 部 52 1 Aを切除する際、 その中央部分と枝路部 5 1 7 , 5 1 8を残し ておくことによって、 図 7 1に示すように、 光源としての LED 7 0 1 を組み付けたとき、 隣接する光源並列接続体のうち電気的に上流側のも のに含まれる LED 7 0 1の力ソードと下流側のものに含まれる L ED 7 0 1のアノードとを連絡することができる。  In the patterned conductor 500a of FIG. 70, at the central portion of each of the bridge portions 52 1A, further connecting the bridge portion 5 21 A to the first and second trunk portions 5 11 1, 5 12 It differs from the embodiment of FIG. 56 in that branch portions 5 17 and 5 18 are provided. As a result, when the ridge portion 52 1 A located between adjacent light source parallel connection bodies is cut to form a connection conductor structure for connecting the LED as a light source, the central portion and the branch portions 5 17, 5 5 By leaving LED 18 as shown in Fig. 71, when LED 701 as the light source is assembled, the LED 7 included in the electrically upstream side of the adjacent parallel connection of light sources is installed. It is possible to communicate the power source of 01 and the anode of LED 701 contained in the downstream one.
図 7 0のパターン化導体 5 0 0 aは、 第 2の幹路部 5 1 2から幅方向 に離間して長手方向に延在し、 プレス機のパイロットピンと係合してパ ターン化導体 5 0 0 aの順送 Z位置決めを可能にする複数のパイロット 穴 5 2 6が設けられた縁桟部 5 2 4を有している。 縁桟部 5 2 4は幅方 向に延在する複数の連結部 5 2 5によって第 2の幹路部 5 1 2に連結さ れている。 後に詳述するように、 この縁桟部 5 2 4は連結部 5 2 5を折 り曲げることにより、 第 2の幹路部 5 1 2の裏面との間に接続ワイヤな どを収容するスペースを形成するのに用いることができる。 The patterned conductor 500a in FIG. 70 extends in the width direction from the second trunk road 512 An edge bar that is provided with a plurality of pilot holes 5 26 that extend in the longitudinal direction at a distance from each other and engage with a pilot pin of a press machine to enable progressive Z positioning of the patterned conductor 500 a. It has a part 5 2 4. The edge section 52 4 is connected to the second trunk section 5 12 by a plurality of connecting sections 5 25 extending in the width direction. As will be described later in detail, the edge cross section 5 24 is formed by bending the connecting section 5 25 to form a space for accommodating connection wires and the like between the second main road section 5 12 and the back surface. Can be used to form
また図 7 1に示す光源連結体 7 0 0 bでは、 第 1及び第 2の幹路部 5 1 1、 5 1 2及び縁桟部 5 2 4は、 上記した実施例と同様に、 隣接する 光源並列接続体のうち上流側の光源並列接続体に含まれる L E D 7 0 1 のァノードと下流側の並列接続体に含まれる L E D 7 0 1の力ソードと が分離されるように且つ各 L E D 7 0 1の両端が短絡しないように適切 な箇所で切断されている。  Further, in the light source connected body 700b shown in FIG. 71, the first and second trunk roads 511 and 512 and the edge crossing section 524 are adjacent to each other as in the above-described embodiment. Among the parallel light source units, the anode of the LED 701 included in the upstream parallel light source unit and the power source of the LED 701 included in the downstream parallel connection unit are separated from each other. 01 Both ends of 1 are cut at appropriate places to prevent short circuit.
図 7 2 aは、 図 7 1に示した光源連結体 7 0 0 bを用いて形成される 発光体装置の模式図であり、 図 7 2 bは、 図 7 2 aのライン b— bに沿 つた断面図である。 図示されているように、 図 7 2 aの発光体装置 7 1 0に含まれる光源連結体 7 0 0 bでは、 各々 3つの L E D 7 0 1を含む 光源並列接続体が 3つ直列接続されている。 もちろん各光源並列接続体 に含まれる L E D 7 0 1の数及び直列接続される光源並列接続体の数は 任意に変更可能である。 なお、 図 7 2 aでは緣桟部 5 2 4は図示を省略 した。  FIG. 72 a is a schematic diagram of a light emitting device formed using the light source connected body 700 b shown in FIG. 71, and FIG. 72 b is a line b—b of FIG. 72 a. FIG. As shown, in the light source connected body 700b included in the light emitting device 7110 of FIG. 72a, three light source parallel connected bodies each including three LEDs 701 are connected in series. I have. Of course, the number of LEDs 701 included in each light source parallel connection body and the number of light source parallel connection bodies connected in series can be arbitrarily changed. In Fig. 72a, the cross section 524 is not shown.
この発光体装置 7 1 0は、 光源連結体 7 0 0 bを収容するガラス管 7 1 1と、このガラス管 7 1 1の両端に設けられた一対のキャップ 7 1 2、 7 1 3とを有しており、 光源連結体 7 0 0 bをほこりなどから保護する ことができるようになつている。 各キャップ 7 1 2、 7 1 3には一対の 電気接続用導電ピン 7 1 4、 7 1 4及び 7 1 5、 7 1 5が設けられてい る。 一方 (図の左側) のキャップ 7 1 2の一対の導電ピン 7 1 4、 7 1 4はキャップ 7 1 2を通ってガラス管 7 1 1内部に設けられたダイォ一 ドブリッジ 7 1 6の一対の入力端に接続される。 また、 このキャップ 7 1 2の一対の導電ピン 7 1 4、 7 1 4は対応する渡り線 7 1 7、 7 1 8 によって他方のキャップ 7 1 3の一対の導電ピン 7 1 5、 7 1 5の対応 するものに接続されている。 これにより、 同様の構造を有する他の発光 体装置 7 1 0 aを軸方向に連結する際、 渡り線 7 1 7、 7 1 8及び導電 ピン 7 1 5、 7 1 5を通じて電源電圧を他の発光体装置 7 1 0 aに容易 に供給することができる。 ダイオードブリッジ 7 1 6の一対の出力端の 一方 (この例では高電圧側) は光源連結体 7 0 0 b内の電気的に最上流 側に位置する光源並列接続体の L E D 7 0 1のアノード側に接続され、 他方 '(この例では低電圧側) は渡り線 7 1 9を介して光源連結体 7 0 0 b内の電気的に最下流側に位置する光源並列接続体の L E D 7 0 1の力 ソード側に接続される。 The luminous body device 7110 includes a glass tube 711, which accommodates the light source connected body 700b, and a pair of caps 712, 713 provided at both ends of the glass tube 7111. The light source connector 700b can be protected from dust and the like. Each of the caps 7 12 and 7 13 is provided with a pair of conductive pins 7 14, 7 14 and 7 15 and 7 15 for electrical connection. You. On the other hand, the pair of conductive pins 711 and 714 of the cap 712 on the left side of the figure (left side of the figure) pass through the cap 712 and are connected to a pair of diode bridges 716 provided inside the glass tube 711. Connected to input terminal. The pair of conductive pins 7 14 and 7 1 4 of the cap 7 1 2 are connected to the pair of conductive pins 7 1 5 and 7 1 5 of the other cap 7 13 by the corresponding crossovers 7 1 7 and 7 1 8. Are connected to the corresponding ones. As a result, when the other illuminant devices 710a having the same structure are connected in the axial direction, the power supply voltage is applied to the other illuminant devices 7l7, 7l8 and the conductive pins 7l5, 7l5. It can be easily supplied to the luminous device 7110a. One of the pair of output terminals of the diode bridge 7 16 (in this example, the high voltage side) is connected to the anode of the LED 7 0 1 of the light source parallel connected body located on the most upstream side in the light source connected body 700 b. The other side (the low-voltage side in this example) is connected via the crossover 7 19 to the LED 7 0 of the electrically downstreammost light source parallel connection in the light source connection 7 00 b. 1 force connected to the sword side.
図 7 2 bの断面図に示したように、 図 7 1の矢印 A及び Bで示した箇 所で連結部 5 2 5を折り曲げることによって、 縁桟部 5 2 4を第 2の幹 路部 5 1 2に対向するように位置させ、 縁桟部 5 2 4と第 2の幹路部 5 1 2との間に渡り線 7 1 7、 7 1 8、 7 1 9を収容するスペースを形成 することができる。 これにより、 渡り線 7 1 7、 7 1 8、 7 1 9をガラ ス管 7 1 1内で所定の位置に保持することができる。  As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 72b, by bending the connecting portion 52 at the points indicated by arrows A and B in FIG. It is located opposite to 5 1 2 and forms a space to accommodate the crossovers 7 17, 7 18, and 7 19 between the edge section 5 2 4 and the second main road section 5 1 2 can do. As a result, the crossovers 717, 718, 719 can be held at predetermined positions in the glass tube 711.
図 7 3は、 電気的には図 6 5に示したようにマトリックス状に互いに 接続され且つ空間的には一列に配置された複数の光源を有する光源連結 体を形成するための、 図 5 6に示したパターン化導体 5 0 0の別の二次 加工方法を示す部分平面図である。 図 7 3において図 5 6と同様の部分 には同じ符号を付して詳しい説明を省略する。 また、 本図において、 切 除する部分を斜線で示す。 図 7 4は、 図 7 3に示した要領でパターン化 導体を二次加工して形成した接続導体構造を用いて形成される光源連結 体の部分平面図である。 この図において LED 7 0 1はその接続の向き がわかるように模式的に示した。 FIG. 73 shows a light source assembly having a plurality of light sources electrically connected to each other in a matrix as shown in FIG. 65 and spatially arranged in a line. FIG. 21 is a partial plan view showing another secondary processing method of the patterned conductor 500 shown in FIG. In FIG. 73, the same parts as those in FIG. 56 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted. Also, in this figure, the portion to be cut is indicated by oblique lines. Figure 74 is patterned as shown in Figure 73. FIG. 4 is a partial plan view of a light source connection body formed using a connection conductor structure formed by secondary processing of a conductor. In this figure, the LED 701 is schematically shown so that the connection direction can be understood.
図 7 3及び図 74に示すように、 この実施例では、 L ED 7 0 1が第 1の幹路部 5 1 1と第 2の幹路部 5 1 2の間に並列に接続されるように、 プリッジ部 5 2 1 Aは全て切除される。また、上記した実施例と同様に、 隣接する光源並列接続体の概ね間の位置において第 1及び第 2の幹路部 5 1 1、 5 1 2が切断される。  As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, in this embodiment, the LED 701 is connected in parallel between the first main road 511 and the second main road 512. At this time, the entire bridge 5 21 A is cut off. Further, similarly to the above-described embodiment, the first and second trunk roads 5 11 1 and 5 12 are cut at a position substantially between the adjacent light source parallel connection bodies.
図 7 3の実施例では、 枝路部 5 1 3、 5 1 4は切除されずに残され、 これら枝路部 5 1 3、 5 14は、 第 1及び第 2の幹路部 5 1 1、 5 1 2 の主面が連絡路部 5 1 0の主面と概ね垂直になるように、 矢印 C、 Dで 示した位置において折り曲げられる。 さらに第 1及び第 2の幹路部 5 1 1、 5 1 2を切断することで形成される遊端部 5 1 1 A、 5 1 2Aが互 いに接触するように矢印 A、 Bに示した位置において幹路部 5 1 1、 5 1 2を中心へ向けて折り曲げ、 接触した遊端部 5 1 1 A、 5 1 2 A同士 を例えば溶接により接続し、 導電路を形成する (図 74)。 この導電路に より、 図 74に示すように、 光源としての L ED 7 0 1を全て同じ向き に対応する光源取り付け部 5 1 5に取り付けたとき、 隣接する光源並列 接続体のうち電気的に上流側のもの (図では左側) に含まれる L ED 7 0 1の力ソードと下流側のもの (図では右側) に含まれる LED 7 0 1 のアノードとを連絡して、光源並列接続体を直列接続することができる。 また、 第 1及び第 2の幹路部 5 1 1 , 5 1 2の適切な箇所での切断によ り、 隣接する光源並列接続体のうち電気的に上流側のものに含まれる L ED 7 0 1のァノ一ドと下流側のものに含まれる L ED 7 0 1のカソー ドとの間が分離され、 且つ、 各 L ED 7 0 1の両端の短絡が防止されて いる。 なお、 図 7 3及び図 74の実施例では枝路部 5 1 3、 5 14を全 て残すこととしたが、 一部または全てを切除して代わりにリード線を有 する抵抗を用いることも可能である。 In the embodiment of FIG. 73, the branch sections 5 13 and 5 14 are left uncut, and these branch sections 5 13 and 5 14 are the first and second trunk sections 5 1 1 , 512 are bent at the positions indicated by arrows C and D such that the main surfaces of the communication paths 5110 are substantially perpendicular to the main surfaces. Arrows A and B are shown so that the free ends 511A and 512A formed by cutting the first and second trunk roads 511 and 512 are in contact with each other. In this position, the trunk roads 5 11 and 5 12 are bent toward the center, and the free ends 5 11 A and 512 A that have come into contact with each other are connected, for example, by welding to form a conductive path (FIG. 74). ). As shown in FIG. 74, when the LEDs 701 as light sources are all mounted in the light source mounting portions 5 15 corresponding to the same direction, the conductive paths electrically connect the adjacent light source parallel connection bodies. The power source of LED701 included in the upstream one (left side in the figure) and the anode of the LED701 included in the downstream one (right side in the figure) are connected to connect the light source parallel connection. They can be connected in series. In addition, by cutting the first and second trunk roads 5 1 1 and 5 1 2 at appropriate places, the LED 7 included in the electrically upstream side of the adjacent light source parallel-connected body is connected. The node of 01 and the cathode of the LED 701 included in the downstream device are separated from each other, and a short circuit at both ends of each LED 701 is prevented. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the branch portions 5 13 and 5 14 are all However, it is also possible to cut out part or all and use a resistor having a lead wire instead.
図 7 5は、 図 6 3 aに示したような光源を 2列に配列するのに適した パターン化導体 6 1 0を用いて形成された、 光源がマトリックス状に接 続された光源連結体を示す模式的な部分平面図である。 本図において図 6 3 aと同様の箇所には同じ符号を付して詳しい説明は省略する。 また L E Dは接続方向がわかるように記号で示してある。 図 7 5において、 パターン化導体 6 1 0は既に所要部分を切除したものとして (即ち、 接 続導体構造として) 示されている。 各 L ED 7 2 1は対応する枝路部 6 1 6、 6 2 6及び抵抗 7 2 2を介して第 1幹路部 6 1 1と第 2幹路部 6 1 2の間または、 第 2幹路部 6 1 2と第 3幹路部 6 1 3の間に接続され ている。 また L E D 7 2 1の 2つの列の各々において、 3つの L ED 7 2 1を並列接続してなる光源並列接続体が複数形成されており、 図中記 号で示したように、 隣接する並列接続体に含まれる L ED 72 1の向き が逆になつている。 また第 1〜第 3幹路部 6 1 1〜6 1 3の一部が切断 されている (符号 7 2 3、 7 24、 7 2 5)。 これにより、 LED 7 2 1 の各列がマトリックス状の回路を形成し、 記号で示したような極性で電 圧を印加すると、この回路においても電流が概ね図の左から右へ流れる。 図 7 6は本発明に基づいて形成される光源連結体を複数用いて面発光 装置を形成する好適実施例を示す模式図である。 この例では、 複数の赤 色 LED (R) を含む赤色光源連結体 7 3 1と、 複数の緑色 LED (G) を含む緑色光源連結体 7 3 2と、 複数の青色 L ED (B) を含む青色光 源連結体 7 3 3とを用いて、 円形の発光面を有する面発光装置 7 3 0が 形成されている。 図示されているように、 これら 3つの光源連結体 7 3 1、 7 32、 7 3 3は発光面の周縁部において周方向に概ね等間隔に離 間されたそれぞれの始点 R S、 GS、 B Sから中心部に向かって渦巻き をなすように配置されている。 これにより各色の光を同じ明るさで概ね 円形に発光することが可能となっている。 図 7 7は、 同様の方法を用い て、 正方形の面発光体装置 7 3 0 aを形成した実施例である。 このよう に形成される面発光体の形状は任意に選択可能である。 また、 上記実施 例では各色毎に 1つの光源連結体を用いているが、 例えば各色につき 2 つの光源連結体を用い、 合計 6つの始点から渦巻きをなすように光源連 結体を中心へ向けて配列することも可能である。 また、 3色に限らず 2 色あるいは 3色より多くの色の光源 (L E D ) を用いることも可能であ る。 勿論、 全光源連結体に含まれる光源の発光色を同じにすることも可 能である。 Fig. 75 shows a light source assembly in which the light sources are connected in a matrix and formed using patterned conductors 61 suitable for arranging the light sources in two rows as shown in Fig. 63a. FIG. 4 is a schematic partial plan view showing In this figure, the same parts as those in FIG. The LEDs are indicated by symbols to indicate the connection direction. In FIG. 75, the patterned conductor 6 10 is shown as having already been cut off (ie, as a connecting conductor structure). Each LED 7 21 is connected between the first trunk 6 1 1 and the second trunk 6 1 2 via the corresponding branch 6 1 6 and 6 26 and the resistor 7 22 or It is connected between the trunk road section 6 12 and the third trunk road section 6 13. Further, in each of the two rows of LEDs 721, a plurality of light source parallel connected bodies each formed by connecting three LEDs 721 in parallel are formed, and as shown by the symbol in the figure, adjacent parallel connected light sources are formed. The LED 721 included in the connector has the opposite orientation. In addition, a part of the first to third trunk roads 6 11 1 to 6 13 is cut off (reference numerals 72 3, 724, and 7 25). As a result, each column of the LEDs 721 forms a matrix-like circuit, and when a voltage is applied with the polarity shown by the symbol, the current also flows from the left to the right in the circuit in this circuit as well. FIG. 76 is a schematic view showing a preferred embodiment in which a surface light emitting device is formed using a plurality of light source connected bodies formed according to the present invention. In this example, a red light source combination 732 including multiple red LEDs (R), a green light source combination 732 including multiple green LEDs (G), and multiple blue LEDs (B) are connected. The surface light emitting device 730 having a circular light emitting surface is formed by using the blue light source connected body 733 that includes the light emitting device. As shown in the figure, these three light source connected bodies 731, 732, and 733 are separated from their starting points RS, GS, and BS, which are substantially equally spaced circumferentially at the periphery of the light emitting surface. Swirl towards the center It is arranged so as to form. This makes it possible to emit light of each color in a substantially circular shape at the same brightness. FIG. 77 shows an embodiment in which a square surface light emitting device 730a is formed by using the same method. The shape of the surface light emitting body thus formed can be arbitrarily selected. Further, in the above embodiment, one light source connected body is used for each color. It is also possible to arrange. It is also possible to use not only three colors but also light sources (LEDs) of two colors or more than three colors. Of course, it is also possible to make the emission colors of the light sources included in all the light source connected bodies the same.
図 7 8は、 本発明に基づいて形成される光源連結体を複数用いて面発 光装置を形成する別の実施例を示す模式図である。 図示されているよう に、 この面発光装置 7 4 0では、 複数の赤色、 青色、 緑色光源連結体が 同心円状に配置されている。 上記実施例と同様にこのような配置も円形 に限られるものではないことが理解されるだろう。  FIG. 78 is a schematic view showing another embodiment in which a surface light emitting device is formed using a plurality of light source connected bodies formed according to the present invention. As shown in the figure, in the surface emitting device 7400, a plurality of red, blue, and green light source connected bodies are concentrically arranged. It will be understood that such an arrangement is not limited to a circular shape, as in the above embodiment.
図 7 9は、 本発明に基づく光源連結体 (例えば図 3 6に示した光源連 結体 1 0 1〃 ) の使用例を示す模式図である。 この図において接続導体 構造 1 0 4の詳細は図示を省略した。 本発明に基づく光源連結体はフレ キシピリティがあるため、 図のようにねじって使用することが可能であ る。 これにより、 光源 1 0 2が概ねスパイラル状に配置され、 周囲の空 間を概ね均等に照明することが可能となる。  FIG. 79 is a schematic view showing a usage example of the light source assembly (for example, the light source assembly 101 shown in FIG. 36) according to the present invention. In this figure, the details of the connection conductor structure 104 are not shown. Since the light source assembly according to the present invention has flexibility, it can be used by being twisted as shown in the figure. Thus, the light sources 102 are arranged in a substantially spiral shape, and it is possible to illuminate the surrounding space substantially uniformly.
ところで、 L E Dは白熱電球等と比べて極めて超寿命であることなど から、 近年、 高信頼性が要求される自動車のストップランプ、 テールラ ンプ、 方向指示器といったいわゆる車載ランプの光源として用いられて いる。 このような車載ランプは、 例えば車体のコーナー部に設けられる ような場合、 車体の全体的な形状に合うよう 3次元的な構造を有する必 要があり、 光源としての L EDもそれに合わせて 3次元配置しなければ ならない。 By the way, LEDs have a much longer life than incandescent lamps, etc. . Such an in-vehicle lamp, for example, when provided at a corner of a vehicle body, must have a three-dimensional structure to match the overall shape of the vehicle body. Therefore, the LED as a light source must be three-dimensionally arranged accordingly.
そのような 3次元的に L EDを配置した車載ランプは、 例えば特開平 1 1 - 1 2 1 80 7号公報に開示されている。 この公報に開示されてい る車載ランプは、 複数の LEDと、 階段状をした複数の段部を有するベ ースと、 これら複数の段部に嵌合支持され、 対応する LEDを保持する ホルダとを有する発光ュニットを有し、 この発光ュニットはレンズとラ ンプポディとによって画定されるランプ室内に収納される。 LEDとホ ルダの間には電気コードが挟持され、 それにより LEDの電気接続がな される。 また、 各 L EDのリードには、 L EDのホルダへの取り付け時 に電気コードの被覆を剥がし電気コードの芯線を露出することができる ように、 芯線の直径に概ね対応した幅のスリットが設けられている。 更 に、 各ホルダには、 L EDを取り付ける前において電気コードを仮保持 するための電気コ一ド揷通溝が設けられている。  Such an in-vehicle lamp in which LEDs are arranged three-dimensionally is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H11-121807. The on-vehicle lamp disclosed in this publication includes a plurality of LEDs, a base having a plurality of steps having a step shape, a holder fitted and supported by the plurality of steps, and holding a corresponding LED. And a light emitting unit having a light emitting unit, which is housed in a lamp chamber defined by the lens and the lamp pod. An electrical cord is sandwiched between the LED and the holder, thereby making an electrical connection for the LED. Each LED lead is provided with a slit with a width roughly corresponding to the diameter of the core so that the electric cord can be peeled off and the core of the electric cord exposed when the LED is mounted on the holder. Have been. Further, each holder is provided with an electric cord passage for temporarily holding an electric cord before mounting the LED.
このような車載ランプでは、 ホルダをベースに取着した後、 電気コー ドをホルダの揷通溝に通してから、 L EDをホルダに挿入して L EDと ホルダの間に電気コードを挟持することで灯具の主構成要素である発光 ユニッ トを形成することができる。 また別の方法として、 ホルダがベー スとは別体になっていることを利用し、 先にホルダに電気コードと L E Dを保持して光源連結体を形成し、 その後でホルダをベースに取着する ことで発光ュニットを形成することもできる。  In such a vehicle-mounted lamp, after the holder is attached to the base, the electric cord is passed through the through groove of the holder, then the LED is inserted into the holder, and the electric cord is sandwiched between the LED and the holder. Thus, a light-emitting unit, which is a main component of the lamp, can be formed. As another method, utilizing the fact that the holder is separate from the base, first hold the electric cord and LED in the holder to form a light source assembly, and then attach the holder to the base. By doing so, a light emitting unit can be formed.
しかしながらこのような車載ランプでは、 ホルダがベースと別体にな つていることにより、 部品点数が増加し、 管理コスト及び製造コストが 増加するという問題がある。 ホルダをベースと一体とすると、 ベースの 形状が複雑になりベースの金型代が上昇してしまう。 また、 上記したい ずれの組み立てプロセスにおいても電気コードを個々のホルダの揷通溝 に通す必要があることから、自動化することは極めて困難である。更に、 リードが特殊な形状を有する L E Dを用い、 市販品を使用することがで きないことも、 製造コスト上昇の一因となっている。 However, such an in-vehicle lamp has a problem that the number of parts is increased and the management cost and the manufacturing cost are increased because the holder is separate from the base. If the holder is integrated with the base, the shape of the base will be complicated and the mold cost of the base will rise. Also, in any of the assembly processes described above, the electrical cords must be Automation is extremely difficult because of the need to pass Furthermore, the use of LEDs with specially shaped leads and the inability to use commercial products have also contributed to increased manufacturing costs.
図 8 0は、 上記のような問題を解決するべく本発明に基づく光源連結 体を用いた車載ランプ用発光体装置の一実施例の斜視図である。 図示さ れているように、 この発光体装置 8 0 0は光源としての複数 (この例で は 9個) の L E D 8 0 2と、 これら L E D 8 0 2を 3次元配列するべく 階段状をした複数の段部を有するベース (保持体) 8 3 0とを有する。 このような発光体装置 8 0 0は、 従来と同様に、 車体の一部を構成する ハウジング (図示せず) とハウジングに取り付けられたレンズ (図示せ ず) とによって画定されるランプ室内に収納して用いられる。 なお、 こ の実施例では各 L E D 8 0 2は、 プレート状のァノ一ド端子 8 0 3 aと 力ソード端子 8 0 3 bを有する。  FIG. 80 is a perspective view of an embodiment of a light-emitting device for a vehicle-mounted lamp using a light source connected body according to the present invention in order to solve the above-described problem. As shown in the figure, the luminous device 800 has a plurality of (in this example, nine) LEDs 802 as light sources, and has a stepped shape to arrange these LEDs 802 three-dimensionally. A base (holding body) 830 having a plurality of steps. Such a luminous body device 800 is housed in a lamp chamber defined by a housing (not shown) constituting a part of a vehicle body and a lens (not shown) attached to the housing, as in the prior art. Used as In this embodiment, each LED 802 has a plate-shaped anode terminal 803a and a force source terminal 803b.
この実施例では、 3つの L E D 8 0 2が並列接続されて一つの光源連 結体 8 0 1を形成し、 そのような光源連結体 8 0 1が 3つジャンパー部 材 8 1 5で直列に接続されて、 いわゆるマトリックス回路 (または並直 列回路) を形成している。 なお、 この例では隣接する光源連結体 8 0 1 はそれらの端部において一つのジャンパー部材 8 1 5で接続されている が、 電気抵抗の低減、 熱伝達特性の向上等のために複数箇所において 2 個以上のジャンパー部材 8 1 5で接続してもよく、その数は任意である。 また、 図示した例ではジャンパー部材 8 1 5は平板状の導体を適切な箇 所で屈曲したものとなっているが、被覆された導線などを用いてもよい。 図 8 1は、 ベース 8 3 0の形状に合わせて屈曲する前の光源連結体 8 0 1を示す斜視図であり、 図 8 2はその端面図である。 図示されている ように、 光源連結体 8 0 1は、 複数 (この例では 3つ) の L E D 8 0 2 を電気的に接続するための接続導体構造 8 0 4を有する。 接続導体構造 8 04は長手方向に略平行に延在する一対の導体 (幹路部) 8 1 1、 8 1 2を有し、 各 LED 8 0 2のアノード端子 8 0 3 a及びカソ一ド端子 8 0 3 bはそれぞれ対応する幹路部 8 1 1 , 8 1 2に好適にはレーザ溶 接のような溶接により取着される。 即ち、 この実施例では一対の幹路部 8 1 1 , 8 1 2が光源取付部 (または光源端子接続部) を含んでいると いうことができる。 In this embodiment, three LEDs 802 are connected in parallel to form one light source combination 811, and three such light source combinations 8001 are connected in series with three jumper members 815. They are connected to form a so-called matrix circuit (or parallel-series circuit). In this example, the adjacent light source connected bodies 801 are connected by one jumper member 815 at their ends. However, in order to reduce electric resistance, improve heat transfer characteristics, etc. The connection may be made by two or more jumper members 8 15, and the number is arbitrary. In addition, in the illustrated example, the jumper member 815 is formed by bending a plate-shaped conductor at an appropriate position, but a covered conductor or the like may be used. FIG. 81 is a perspective view showing the light source connected body 811 before bending to conform to the shape of the base 830, and FIG. 82 is an end view thereof. As shown in the figure, the light source connector 801 has a connecting conductor structure 804 for electrically connecting a plurality of (three in this example) LEDs 802. Connection conductor structure 804 has a pair of conductors (trunk portions) 811 and 812 extending substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction, and has an anode terminal 80.3a and a cathode terminal 800 of each LED802. 3b is attached to the corresponding trunk roads 811 and 812, preferably by welding such as laser welding. That is, in this embodiment, it can be said that the pair of trunk roads 811 and 812 includes the light source mounting portion (or the light source terminal connection portion).
この実施例では各 LED 80 2の力ソード端子 8 0 3 bが取り付けら れる幹路部 8 1 2の幅がアノード端子 8 0 3 aが取り付けられる幹路部 8 1 1より広くなつており、 より熱を伝導しやすくなつている。 通常、 各 L ED 8 0 2において L E Dパッケージ内に封止された L E Dチップ (図示せず) はプレート状のカソ一ド端子 8 0 3 b上に直接取り付けら れ、 アノード端子 8 0 3 aとはリード線などにより接続され、 L EDチ ップから発せられる熱はその大部分が力ソード端子 8 0 3 bを介して外 部に放出されるため、 このようにカソード端子 8 0 3 bが接続される幹 路部 8 1 2を幅広とすることで、 L ED 8 0 2からの熱の放散を一層効 率良く行うことができる。 また放熱への寄与が小さいアノード端子 8 0 3 aが接続される幹路部 8 1 1を幅狭とすることにより、 光源連結体 8 0 1の幅を小さくすることができる。  In this embodiment, the width of the trunk section 8 1 2 to which the power sword terminal 8 0 3 b of each LED 802 is attached is wider than the trunk path 8 1 1 to which the anode terminal 8 0 3 a is attached, It is easier to conduct heat. Usually, in each LED 802, the LED chip (not shown) sealed in the LED package is directly mounted on the plate-shaped cathode terminal 803b, and the anode terminal 803a and Are connected by a lead wire, etc., and most of the heat generated from the LED chip is released to the outside via the force source terminal 803b. By making the connected trunk section 812 wider, heat from the LED 802 can be more efficiently dissipated. Further, by narrowing the width of the main road section 8111 to which the anode terminal 803a that contributes little to heat radiation is connected, the width of the light source connected body 801 can be reduced.
このような光源連結体 8 0 1は、 上記した実施例と同様に、 所定のパ ターンを有するテープ状のパターン化導体の適切な位置に L ED 8 0 2 を取り付けた後、 パターン化導体の所要部分を切除して L ED 8 0 2を 並列接続する接続導体構造 8 04を形成することにより得られる。 図 8 3は、 このような並列接続された L ED 80 2を有する光源連結体 8 0 1を形成するのに適したパターン化導体の一実施例の部分平面図である。 図示されているように、 このパターン化導体 8 2 0は平板なテープ状 をなし、 長手方向に延在する一対の導体 (幹路部) 8 1 1、 8 1 2と、 これら幹路部 8 1 1、 8 1 2を幅方向に連結する複数の枝路部 8 1 3と を有している。 上記したように、 L E D 8 0 2の力ソード端子 8 0 3 b が取り付けられる幹路部 8 1 2は、 アノード端子 8 0 3 aが取り付けら れる幹路部 8 1 1より幅広となっている。 また、 各幹路部 8 1 1 , 8 1 2には順送プレス機 (図示せず) などによる搬送/位置決めに用いるこ とのできる複数のパイロット穴 8 1 8が長手方向に所定の間隔で設けら れている。 Like the above-described embodiment, such a light source connected body 8001 is attached to a tape-shaped patterned conductor having a predetermined pattern at an appropriate position, and then the LED 802 is attached to the patterned conductor. It is obtained by cutting out the required portion to form a connection conductor structure 804 that connects the LEDs 802 in parallel. FIG. 83 is a partial plan view of one embodiment of a patterned conductor suitable for forming such a light source connected body 81 having the LEDs 802 connected in parallel. As shown in the figure, the patterned conductor 8 20 has a flat tape shape, and a pair of conductors (trunk portions) 8 11 and 8 1 2 extending in the longitudinal direction. There are a plurality of branch sections 813 connecting the trunk sections 811 and 812 in the width direction. As described above, the trunk section 8 1 2 to which the power source terminal 8 0 3 b of the LED 8 0 2 is attached is wider than the trunk section 8 11 1 to which the anode terminal 8 0 3 a is attached. . Also, a plurality of pilot holes 818 that can be used for conveyance / positioning by a progressive press machine (not shown) or the like are provided at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction in each trunk road section 811 and 812. It is provided.
L E D 8 0 2をパ夕一ン化導体 8 2 0の一対の幹路部 8 1 1、 8 1 2 間に例えばレーザ溶接などにより取り付けた後、 一対の幹路部 8 1 1、 8 1 2間を接続する枝路部 8 1 3を切除し、 更に適切な長さでパターン 化導体 8 2 0を切断することにより、 任意の数の並列接続された L E D 8 0 2を有する光源連結体 8 0 1を形成することができる。 L E D 8 0 2を取り付ける前において、 一対の幹路部 8 1 1、 8 1 2が枝路部 8 1 3によって機械的に連結されているため、 パターン化導体 8 2 0の取り 扱いが容易であり、 これにより、 上記したような L E D 8 0 2のパター ン化導体 8 2 0への取り付け、 パターン化導体 8 2 0の枝路部 8 1 3の 切除、 幹路部 8 1 1、 8 1 2の切断といった作業を順送プレス機などを 含む一つの製造ラインで自動化して生産効率を向上させることができる。 また特別なホルダを用いることなくレーザ溶接により L E D 8 0 2をパ ターン化導体 8 2 0に取り付けることにより、 部品点数の削減及び管理 コストの低減が実現される。  After mounting the LED 802 between the pair of trunk roads 8 11 1 and 8 1 2 of the integrated conductor 8 20 by laser welding, for example, the pair of trunk roads 8 1 1 and 8 1 2 By cutting off the branch portions 8 13 connecting between them and further cutting the patterned conductors 8 20 to an appropriate length, the light source assembly 8 having an arbitrary number of parallel-connected LEDs 8 02 0 1 can be formed. Before mounting the LED 802, the pair of trunk roads 811 and 812 are mechanically connected by the branch road 813, so that the patterned conductor 8200 can be easily handled. Yes, this allows the LED 802 to be attached to the patterned conductor 820 as described above, the branch 813 of the patterned conductor 820 to be cut off, and the trunk 811, 81 The work such as cutting can be automated on one production line including a progressive press machine to improve production efficiency. In addition, by attaching the LED 802 to the patterned conductor 820 by laser welding without using a special holder, the number of parts and the management cost can be reduced.
このようにして形成された図 8 1に示すような光源連結体 8 0 1を所 定の箇所で折り曲げ、 ベース 8 3 0に取り付けることにより、 図 8 0に 示したような車載ランプ用発光体装置 8 0 0を形成することができる。 光源連結体 8 0 1のべ一ス 8 3 0への取り付けは、 例えばベース 8 3 0 の所定の箇所にボス部 (図示せず) を形成し、 これらボス部に光源連結 体 80 1の幹路部 8 1 1、 8 1 2に設けられたパイロット穴 8 1 8を嵌 め込んだり、 あるいは接着剤を用いたりすることにより可能である。 光源連結体 8 0 1をベース 83 0に取り付ける際には、 各 L ED 8 0 2がベース 8 3 0上の適切な位置に配置されることが望ましいが、 例え ば光源連結体 8 0 1の折り曲げ加工における精度が低いと適切な位置か らずれてしまうことがある。 そのような場合、 各 LED 8 02が適切な 位置に配置されるように、 L ED 8 0 2の位置を調整できることが望ま しい。 また、 上記した例では各光源連結体 8 0 1に含まれる L ED 8 0 2は直線上に配列されているが、 L ED 8 0 2の配列方向をオフセット したり、 曲げたりすることが望ましい場合もある。 図 84 aは、 そのよ うな L ED位置の調整を可能とするパターン化導体の別の実施例を示す 部分平面図である。 また、 図 84 bは使用状態において切除する部分を 斜線で例示した図 84 aと同様の図である。 尚、 これらの図において図 8 3と同様の箇所には同じ符号を付して詳しい説明を省略する。 The light source connected body 811, as shown in FIG. 81, formed in this manner is bent at a predetermined position and attached to the base 83, so that the light-emitting body for a vehicle-mounted lamp as shown in FIG. A device 800 can be formed. To attach the light source connector 801 to the base 830, for example, a boss (not shown) is formed at a predetermined position of the base 830, and the light source is connected to these bosses. This can be achieved by fitting pilot holes 818 provided in trunk sections 811 and 812 of body 801 or by using an adhesive. When attaching the light source assembly 801 to the base 830, it is desirable that each LED 802 be placed at an appropriate position on the base 830. If the bending accuracy is low, the position may not be appropriate. In such a case, it is desirable that the position of the LED 802 can be adjusted so that each LED 802 is arranged at an appropriate position. In the above example, the LEDs 802 included in the respective light source connected bodies 81 are arranged in a straight line. However, it is desirable that the arrangement direction of the LEDs 802 be offset or bent. In some cases. FIG. 84a is a partial plan view illustrating another embodiment of a patterned conductor that enables such adjustment of the LED position. Further, FIG. 84b is a view similar to FIG. 84a, in which a portion to be cut off in a use state is illustrated by hatching. In these figures, the same parts as those in FIG. 83 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted.
図 84 aに示されているパターン化導体 8 2 0 ' では、 一対の幹路部 8 1 1、 8 1 2の各々の長手方向の所定の箇所に伸縮可能部 8 2 1が形 成され、 これら伸縮可能部 8 2 1が作用することで LED位置の調整が 可能となっている。 好適には伸縮可能部 8 2 1は隣接する LED取り付 け位置の間に形成される。 尚、 図 84 aでは一対の幹路部 8 1 1、 8 1 2の幅は同じとしたが、 図 8 3に示した実施例と同様に異なる幅を有す るものとすることも勿論可能である。  In the patterned conductor 8 20 ′ shown in FIG. 84 a, a stretchable portion 8 21 is formed at a predetermined position in the longitudinal direction of each of the pair of trunk roads 8 11, 8 12, The LED position can be adjusted by the action of these extendable portions 8 2 1. Preferably, the extendable portion 8221 is formed between adjacent LED mounting locations. Although the width of the pair of trunk roads 811 and 812 is the same in FIG. 84a, it is of course possible to have different widths as in the embodiment shown in FIG. 83. It is.
図 84 a及び図 84 bの実施例では、 各伸縮可能部 82 1は各幹路部 8 1 1、 8 1 2中に形成された一対の概ね U字形の細い接続路 8 22を 含み、 各 U字形接続路 8 2 2の向かい合う一対の直線部分は幹路部 8 1 1、 8 1 2の概ね幅方向に延在し、 曲折した底辺部分はパターン化導体 82 0 ' の中心軸線側に位置している。 また伸縮可能部 8 2 1は、 各 U 字形接続路 8 2 2の両端部を接続するべく幹路部 8 1 1、 8 1 2の幅方 向端部において長手方向に延在するプリッジ部 8 2 3を有しており、 そ れにより通常は伸縮可能部 8 2 1の変形が阻止され、 プリッジ部 8 2 3 は変形阻止部として働いている。 使用時においては、 図 8 4 bに斜線で 示すように、 ブリッジ部 8 2 3を切除することで所望の伸縮可能部 8 2 1の変形が可能となる。 このようにプリッジ部 8 2 3を用いることで、 必要な部分においてのみ伸縮可能部 8 2 1を選択的に変形可能として L E D配置位置を調整可能としつつ、 形成される光源連結体全体の機械的 強度が不必要に低下するのを防止することができる。 また、 ブリッジ部 8 2 2を切除する前の状態においてはパターン化導体 8 2 0 ' またはそ れを用いて形成される光源連結体の剛性が比較的高いため、 それらの取 り扱いが容易である。 このようなパターン化導体 8 2 0 ' の伸縮可能部 8 2 1及びブリッジ部 8 2 3は好適にはプレス加工の打ち抜きによって 容易に且つ安価に形成することができる。 In the embodiment of FIGS.84a and 84b, each telescoping portion 821 includes a pair of generally U-shaped narrow connecting channels 822 formed in each trunk portion 811, 812, The pair of straight portions facing each other of the U-shaped connection path 8 2 2 extend in the width direction of the main road sections 8 1 1 and 8 1 2, and the bent bottom portion is located on the center axis side of the patterned conductor 82 0 ′ are doing. The extendable portion 8 2 1 is It has a ridge portion 823 extending in the longitudinal direction at the widthwise ends of the trunk road portions 811 and 812 so as to connect both ends of the U-shaped connection passage 8222, whereby Normally, the deformation of the extensible portion 8 21 is prevented, and the bridge portion 8 23 functions as a deformation preventing portion. At the time of use, as shown by hatching in FIG. 84b, the desired extensible portion 8221 can be deformed by cutting off the bridge portion 823. By using the ridge portion 823 in this way, it is possible to selectively deform the expandable and contractible portion 821 only at the necessary portion so that the LED arrangement position can be adjusted. Unnecessary reduction in strength can be prevented. In addition, before the bridge portion 82 is cut off, the patterned conductors 82 0 ′ or the light source connected body formed using the same are relatively rigid, so that they can be easily handled. is there. The stretchable portion 821 and the bridge portion 823 of the patterned conductor 820 'can be formed easily and inexpensively preferably by stamping by press working.
図 8 5 a及び図 8 5 bは、 図 8 4 aに示したパターン化導体 8 2 0 ' を用いて形成された光源連結体 8 0 1 ' の変形状態の例を示す部分平面 図である。 図 8 5 aでは、 長手方向に 2力所の伸縮可能部 8 2 1の変形 によって L E D 8 0 2の配列方向 (または光源連結体 8 0 1 ' の長手方 向軸線) がパターン化導体 8 2 0 ' (または接続導体構造 8 0 4 ) の主 面と平行な面内で曲げられ、 その結果、 図の右端と左端とで L E D 8 0 2の配列方向が幅方向 (横方向) にオフセットされている。 図 8 5 で は、 伸縮可能部 8 2 1は隣接する L E D 8 0 2間の距離が光源連結体 8 0 1 ' の長手方向に広がるように変形している。 このように、 伸縮可能 部 8 2 1を有するパターン化導体 8 2 0 ' を用いた光源連結体 8 0 1 ' では、 L E D 8 0 2の配置位置を調整して L E D 8 0 2をベース上の適 切な位置に確実に配置することができるだけでなく、 様々な L E D配列 が容易に可能であり、 車載ランプの形状の設計自由度を大きく向上する ことができる。 或いは、 異なるベースに対しても、 その差異が光源連結 体 8 0 1 ' の伸縮可能部 8 2 1の変形によって吸収できる程度であれば、 同じ光源連結体 8 0 1 ' を用いることが可能である。 FIGS. 85A and 85B are partial plan views showing an example of a deformed state of the light source connected body 8 0 1 ′ formed using the patterned conductor 8 20 ′ shown in FIG. . In FIG. 85a, the arrangement direction of the LEDs 802 (or the longitudinal axis of the light source assembly 801 ′) is changed by the deformation of the stretchable portions 8 2 1 at two places in the longitudinal direction. It is bent in a plane parallel to the main surface of 0 '(or the connecting conductor structure 8004), and as a result, the arrangement direction of the LEDs 802 is offset in the width direction (lateral direction) at the right and left ends of the figure. ing. In FIG. 85, the extendable portion 8 21 is deformed such that the distance between adjacent LEDs 8 0 2 extends in the longitudinal direction of the light source assembly 8 0 1 ′. As described above, in the light source connected body 8 0 1 ′ using the patterned conductor 8 20 ′ having the extendable portion 8 2 1, the arrangement position of the LED 8 0 2 is adjusted so that the LED 8 2 Not only can you place it in the right place, but also various LED arrangements Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the vehicle-mounted lamp can be greatly improved. Alternatively, the same light source connector 8 0 1 ′ can be used for different bases as long as the difference can be absorbed by the deformation of the extendable portion 8 2 1 of the light source connector 8 0 1 ′. is there.
図 8 6 aは伸縮可能部を有するパターン化導体の更に別の実施例を示 す部分平面図であり、 図 8 6 bはそれを用いて形成した光源連結体の変 形状態の一例を示す部分平面図である。 これらの図において図 8 4 a〜 図 8 5 bに示したのと同様の部分には同じ符号を付して詳しい説明を省 略する。また図 8 6 aでは使用時において切除する部分を斜線で示した。 図 8 6 aに示されているように、 このパターン化導体 8 2 0 aでは各伸 縮可能部 8 2 1 aは対応する幹路部 8 1 1、 8 1 2の幅方向に渡って延 在する一対の概ね S字形の細い接続路 8 2 2 aを含む。 上記実施例と同 様に、 このパターン化導体 8 2 0 aも、 伸縮可能部 8 2 1 aの変形を選 択的に可能とする変形阻止部として働くプリッジ部 8 2 3 aが、 伸縮可 能部 8 2 1 aに対応する位置において各幹路部 8 1 1、 8 1 2の幅方向 外側端部に設けられている。 この実施例の伸縮可能部 8 2 1 a及びプリ ッジ部 (変形阻止部) 8 2 3 aも好適には打ち抜きによって形成するこ とができる。  FIG. 86a is a partial plan view showing still another embodiment of a patterned conductor having a stretchable portion, and FIG. 86b shows an example of a deformed state of a light source assembly formed using the same. It is a partial plan view. In these figures, the same parts as those shown in FIGS. 84a to 85b are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description is omitted. In FIG. 86a, the portion to be resected during use is indicated by hatching. As shown in FIG. 86a, in this patterned conductor 820a, each extensible portion 821a extends in the width direction of the corresponding trunk road 811, 812. Including a pair of generally S-shaped narrow connection paths 8 22 a. As in the above-described embodiment, the patterned conductor 820a also has a stretchable portion 823a that functions as a deformation prevention portion that selectively enables deformation of the stretchable portion 821a. It is provided at the position corresponding to the nobu 821a at the widthwise outer end of each of the trunk roads 811 and 812. The extendable portion 821a and the prism portion (deformation preventing portion) 823a of this embodiment can also be preferably formed by punching.
図 8 6 bに示すように、 図 8 6 aに示したパターン化導体 8 2 0 aを 用いて形成した光源連結体 8 0 1 aにおいても、 伸縮可能部 8 2 1 aの 変形によって L E D位置をパターン化導体 8 2 0 aの主面 (L E D取り 付け面) と平行な面内において、 横方向及び縦方向に調整することが可 能である。  As shown in FIG. 86 b, even in the light source connected body 81 a formed using the patterned conductors 82 a shown in FIG. Can be adjusted in the horizontal and vertical directions in a plane parallel to the main surface (LED mounting surface) of the patterned conductor 820a.
図 8 7 aは伸縮可能部を有するパターン化導体の更に別の実施例を示 す部分平面図であり、 図 8 7 bは図 8 7 aの正面図である。 また、 図 8 7 cはこのパターン化導体を用いた光源連結体の変形状態の一例を示す 部分平面図である。 これらの図において図 8 4 a〜図 8 5 bに示したの と同様の部分には同じ符号を付して詳しい説明を省略する。 図示されて いるように、 このパターン化導体 8 2 0 bでは伸縮可能部 8 2 1 bは蛇 腹状または波形となっており、 パターン化導体 8 2 0 bの幅方向に延在 する複数の折り目に沿って幹路部 8 1 1、 8 1 2を折り曲げることで形 成された複数のひだ状部を有している。 このような伸縮可能部 8 2 1 b はプレス加工によって容易に形成可能である。 このようなパターン化導 体 8 2 0 bを用いた光源連結体 8 0 1 bにおいても、 伸縮可能部 8 2 1 bを変形させることで、 図 8 7 cに示すように例えば L E D 8 0 2の配 列方向をパターン化導体 8 2 0 bの主面と平行な面内で曲折させるなど、 L E D 8 0 2の配置位置の調整または変更が可能である。 また図示して いないが、 隣接する L E D 8 0 2間の距離を調整するように変形するこ とも勿論可能である。 FIG. 87a is a partial plan view showing still another embodiment of the patterned conductor having a stretchable portion, and FIG. 87b is a front view of FIG. 87a. Fig. 87c shows an example of the deformed state of the connected light source using this patterned conductor. It is a partial plan view. In these figures, the same parts as those shown in FIGS. 84a to 85b are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in the figure, the stretchable portion 821b of the patterned conductor 8200b has a bellows shape or a waveform, and a plurality of extending portions extending in the width direction of the patterned conductor 8200b. It has a plurality of pleats formed by bending the trunk roads 811 and 812 along the fold line. Such a stretchable portion 8 21 b can be easily formed by press working. Even in the light source connected body 81b using such a patterned conductor 820b, by deforming the expandable / contractible portion 821b, for example, as shown in FIG. The arrangement position of the LEDs 802 can be adjusted or changed, for example, by bending the arrangement direction in a plane parallel to the main surface of the patterned conductor 820b. Although not shown, it is of course possible to make a modification so as to adjust the distance between the adjacent LEDs 802.
図 8 8 aは伸縮可能部を有するパターン化導体の更に別の実施例を示 す部分平面図であり、 図 8 8 bは図 8 8 aの正面図、 図 8 8 cはこのパ ターン化導体を用いた光源連結体の変形状態の一例を示す部分平面図で ある。 これらの図において図 8 4 a〜図 8 5 bに示したのと同様の部分 には同じ符号を付して詳しい説明を省略する。 このパターン化導体 8 2 0 cでは、 伸縮可能部 8 2 1 cはパターン化導体 8 2 0 cの厚み方向に 盛り上がった湾曲部からなる。 各湾曲部 8 2 1 cは変形が容易なように 長手方向中央部分が幅狭となっている。 この実施例は、 図 8 7 a〜 8 7 cに示した例における実施例のひだ状部が 1つの場合に相当するという こともできる。 図 8 7 cに示すように、 このようなパターン化導体 8 2 0 cを用いた光源連結体 8 0 1 cにおいても、 伸縮可能部 8 2 1 cを変 形させることで、 例えば L E D 8 0 2の配列方向をパターン化導体の主 面と平行な面内において曲折させるなど、 L E D 8 0 2の配置位置の調 整または変更が可能である。 FIG. 88 a is a partial plan view showing still another embodiment of a patterned conductor having a stretchable portion, FIG. 88 b is a front view of FIG. 88 a, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a partial plan view showing an example of a deformed state of a light source assembly using a conductor. In these figures, the same parts as those shown in FIGS. 84a to 85b are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description will be omitted. In this patterned conductor 820c, the extendable portion 821c comprises a curved portion that rises in the thickness direction of the patterned conductor 820c. Each curved portion 821c has a narrow central portion in the longitudinal direction for easy deformation. This embodiment can also be said to correspond to the case of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 87a to 87c with one fold. As shown in FIG. 87c, in the light source connected body 801c using such a patterned conductor 820c, for example, the LED Adjusting the arrangement position of the LED 802, such as bending the array direction of 2 in a plane parallel to the main surface of the patterned conductor Can be adjusted or changed.
図 8 9 aは、 本発明に基づく並列接続された複数の光源を含む光源連 結体を形成するのに適したパターン化導体の別の実施例を示す部分平面 図である。 図示されているように、 このパターン化導体 8 5 0も、 概ね 平板なテープ状をなし、 長手方向に延在する互いに離間した一対の導体 (幹路部) 8 5 1 、 8 5 2と、 これら幹路部 8 5 1 、 8 5 2を連結する 複数の枝路部 8 5 3とを有している。 この例では図の上側の幹路部 8 5 1に L E Dのァノード端子を取り付け、 下側の幹路部 8 5 2に L E Dの カソード端子を取り付けることが意図されており、 図 8 1に示した実施 例について述べたのと同様の理由により、 幹路部 8 5 1より幹路部 8 5 2の方がより面積が大きくなつている。 また、 各幹路部 8 5 1 、 8 5 2 には順送プレス機 (図示せず) などによる搬送 位置決めに用いること のできる複数のパイロット穴 8 5 8が長手方向に所定の間隔で設けられ ている。  FIG. 89a is a partial plan view illustrating another embodiment of a patterned conductor suitable for forming a light source assembly including a plurality of light sources connected in parallel according to the present invention. As shown in the figure, the patterned conductor 850 also has a substantially flat tape shape, and a pair of conductors (trunk portions) 851, 852 which are separated from each other and extend in the longitudinal direction. It has a plurality of branch roads 853 connecting these trunk roads 851, 852. In this example, it is intended to attach the LED anode terminal to the upper trunk road 851, and to attach the LED cathode terminal to the lower trunk road 852, as shown in Fig. 81. For the same reason as described in the embodiment, the area of the trunk road 852 is larger than that of the trunk road 851. In each of the trunk roads 851, 852, a plurality of pilot holes 858 are provided at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction that can be used for transport positioning by a progressive press machine (not shown) or the like. ing.
このパターン化導体 8 5 0では、 一対の幹路部 8 5 1 、 8 5 2の間の 空隙 8 5 5が直線状でなく、 方形波状に曲折している。 或いは、 各幹路 部 8 5 1 、 8 5 2の互いに近接する側に長手方向に交互に凹凸が形成さ れ、 幹路部 8 5 1 、 8 5 2の一方に形成された凹部に他方に形成された 凸部が入り込むようにして長手方向に整合されて配置されているという こともできる。 このような構造により、 一対の幹路部 8 5 1、 8 5 2を 互いに対してずらし、 それらの間隔を幅方向だけでなく長手方向にも調 整することが可能となっている。 尚、 上記したようなパターン化導体 8 5 0は平板な導体をプレス加工することにより容易に形成することがで さる。  In the patterned conductor 850, the air gap 855 between the pair of trunk roads 851, 852 is bent not in a straight line but in a square wave shape. Alternatively, irregularities are alternately formed in the longitudinal direction on the sides of the trunk roads 851, 852 that are close to each other, and the concaves formed on one of the trunk roads 851, 852 are on the other side. It can also be said that the formed convex portions are arranged so as to enter and aligned in the longitudinal direction. With such a structure, it is possible to shift the pair of trunk roads 851, 852 with respect to each other, and to adjust the interval not only in the width direction but also in the longitudinal direction. The patterned conductor 850 as described above can be easily formed by pressing a flat conductor.
図 8 9 bは、 図 8 9 aのパターン化導体 8 5 0を用いて形成した光源 連結体の平面図である。 この図において、 L E Dは取り付け方向がわか るように模式的に記号で示した。 この光源連結体 8 6 0は、 パターン化 導体 8 5 0に L E D 8 6 1を例えばレーザ溶接により取り付けた後、 一 対の幹路部 8 5 1、 8 5 2の間隔を幅方向及び長手方向に調整し、 枝路 部 8 5 3を切除することにより形成される。 図示されているように、 こ の実施例では、 パターン化導体 8 5 0の一対の幹路部 8 5 1、 8 5 2間 の空隙が非直線状であり、 幅方向に延在する部分を有していることによ り、 L E D 8 6 1の取り付け位置を長手方向だけでなく、 横方向 (幅方 向) にも大きく調整することが可能となっている。 これにより、 同じパ ターン化導体 8 5 0を用いて様々な L E D配列パターンを有する光源連 結体 8 6 0を形成することが可能となり、 例えば光源連結体 8 6 0を用 いて車載ランプを形成する際に車種により異なる L E D配列パターンが 必要とされる場合にも対応することができ、 部品の共用化を図って大き な経済的なメリットを得ることができる。 FIG. 89b is a plan view of a light source assembly formed using the patterned conductor 850 of FIG. 89a. In this figure, you can see the mounting direction of the LED As shown in FIG. After the LED 861 is attached to the patterned conductor 850 by, for example, laser welding, the light source connected body 860 is formed by changing the interval between the pair of trunk roads 851, 852 in the width direction and the longitudinal direction. It is formed by cutting the branch portion 853. As shown, in this embodiment, the gap between the pair of trunk roads 851, 852 of the patterned conductor 850 is non-linear, and the portion extending in the width direction is formed. By having this, the mounting position of the LED 861 can be largely adjusted not only in the longitudinal direction but also in the lateral direction (width direction). This makes it possible to form a light source coupler 860 having various LED arrangement patterns using the same patterned conductor 850, for example, to form a vehicle-mounted lamp using the light source coupler 860. In this case, it is possible to cope with the case where a different LED array pattern is required depending on the vehicle type, and it is possible to obtain a great economic advantage by sharing parts.
以上説明したように本発明によれば、 異なる光源接続パターンを有す る多様な光源連結体を共通に使用可能な所定の回路パターンが予め形成 されたパターン化導体から同じ製造ラインで製造できるため、 生産性を 向上し製造コストを削減する上で大きな効果が得られる。 またプリント 基板を用いる必要がなく、 プリント基板との接続に用いられる半田を不 要とすることができるため、環境汚染を心配する必要がないだけでなく、 半田使用時の熱による L E Dの損傷の恐れもなくなる。  As described above, according to the present invention, a predetermined circuit pattern capable of commonly using various light source connected bodies having different light source connection patterns can be manufactured on the same manufacturing line from a patterned conductor formed in advance. This has a significant effect on improving productivity and reducing manufacturing costs. In addition, there is no need to use a printed circuit board, which eliminates the need for solder used to connect to the printed circuit board.Therefore, there is no need to worry about environmental pollution. There is no fear.
本発明を実施例に基づいて詳細に説明したが、 これらの実施例はあく までも例示であって本発明は実施例によって限定されるものではない。 当業者であれば特許請求の範囲によって画定される本発明の技術的思想 を逸脱することなく様々な変形若しくは変更が可能であることは言うま でもない。 例えば図 1 6及び図 2 9の実施例では連結部材 1 1 5、 1 6 5はィンサ一トモ一ルドにより形成するものとしたが、 上側部分と下側 部分とに分けて成型したものをその間にパターン化導体 1 20、 1 7 0 を挟んだ状態で互いに接着剤などで張り合わせて形成することも可能で ある。 また光源として L EDを用いたが、 本発明を他の光源 (例えば無 口金電球) に適用することも可能である。 Although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to examples, these examples are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to the examples. It goes without saying that those skilled in the art can make various modifications or changes without departing from the technical idea of the present invention defined by the claims. For example, in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 16 and 29, the connecting members 115 and 165 are formed by an insulator model, but the upper part and the lower part are formed. It is also possible to form the molded parts separately by bonding them together with an adhesive or the like with the patterned conductors 120 and 170 sandwiched therebetween. Although the LED is used as the light source, the present invention can be applied to other light sources (for example, a base lamp).

Claims

請求の範囲 The scope of the claims
1. 複数の光源を電気的に接続してなる光源連結体であって、 1. a light source assembly in which a plurality of light sources are electrically connected,
前記光源連結体は、 複数の前記光源を連結するべく前記光源の配列方 向に延在する接続導体構造を含み、 該接続導体構造は、 所定のパターン が形成された概ね平板なパターン化導体の所要の部分を切除することで 形成されたことを特徴とする光源連結体。  The light source connector includes a connection conductor structure extending in the arrangement direction of the light sources to connect the plurality of light sources, and the connection conductor structure is formed of a substantially flat patterned conductor formed with a predetermined pattern. A light source assembly formed by cutting off a required portion.
2. 前記複数の光源がチップ型 L EDを含み、 前記チップ型 L EDを 装着するためのソケットがィンサ一トモ一ルドにより前記接続導体構造 に取り付けられていることを特徴とする請求項 1に記載の光源連結体。 2. The method according to claim 1, wherein the plurality of light sources include a chip-type LED, and a socket for mounting the chip-type LED is attached to the connection conductor structure by an insulator model. The light source assembly according to any one of the preceding claims.
3. 前記ソケットは上部に開口を有する空洞を画定するように底壁及 び側壁を有しており、 前記チップ型 L E Dは前記空洞内に収容されるこ とを特徴とする請求項 2に記載の光源連結体。 3. The socket according to claim 2, wherein the socket has a bottom wall and a side wall so as to define a cavity having an opening at an upper part, and the chip type LED is housed in the cavity. Light source assembly.
4. 前記ソケットの前記底壁に穴が設けられており、 そこから前記ソ ケッ トに装着された前記 LEDを押して前記ソケットから前記 L EDを 取り外すことができるようになつていることを特徴とする請求項 2に記 載の光源連結体。  4. A hole is provided in the bottom wall of the socket, from which the LED mounted on the socket can be pressed to remove the LED from the socket. The light source assembly according to claim 2, wherein:
5. 前記接続導体構造の一部が、 前記ソケットの前記空洞内において 露出し、 前記チップ型 LEDを前記ソケットに装着した状態で前記チッ プ型 L EDの電気端子と接触するようになっていることを特徴とする請 求項 2に記載の光源連結体。  5. A part of the connection conductor structure is exposed in the cavity of the socket, and comes into contact with the electric terminal of the chip-type LED with the chip-type LED mounted on the socket. 3. The light source assembly according to claim 2, wherein:
6. 前記接続導体構造の前記ソケットの前記空洞内において露出する 前記部分が前記 L EDの前記電気端子と接触するための突起を有してい ることを特徴とする請求項 5に記載の光源連結体。  6. The light source connection according to claim 5, wherein the portion of the connection conductor structure exposed in the cavity of the socket has a protrusion for contacting the electric terminal of the LED. body.
7. 前記接続導体構造の一部を折り曲げて、 前記ソケットに装着され た前記 LEDと係合させ、 前記 L EDが前記ソケットから脱落するのを 防止するようにしたことを特徵とする請求項 2に記載の光源連結体。 7. Bend a part of the connection conductor structure to engage with the LED mounted on the socket, and prevent the LED from dropping out of the socket. 3. The light source assembly according to claim 2, wherein the light source assembly is prevented.
8 . 前記チップ型 L E Dが側面に光放出部を有するサイドビュータイ プであり、 前記ソケットの前記側壁の少なくとも一部が前記 L E Dの前 記光放出部からの光を通過させるための開口を有していることを特徴と する請求項 3に記載の光源連結体。  8. The chip-type LED is a side-view type having a light-emitting portion on a side surface, and at least a part of the side wall of the socket has an opening for passing light from the light-emitting portion of the LED. 4. The light source assembly according to claim 3, wherein
9 . 前記複数の光源がリード線を有する光源を含んでおり、 前記接続 導体構造が前記光源の前記リード線に対応する穴を有していることを特 徴とする請求項 1に記載の光源連結体。  9. The light source according to claim 1, wherein the plurality of light sources include a light source having a lead wire, and the connection conductor structure has a hole corresponding to the lead wire of the light source. Concatenation.
1 0 . 前記接続導体構造の前記穴を画定する部分が、 前記穴の内部に 向かって突出する突出部を含んでいることを特徴とする請求項 9に記載 の光源連結体。  10. The light source assembly according to claim 9, wherein the portion of the connection conductor structure that defines the hole includes a protrusion protruding toward the inside of the hole.
1 1 . 前記光源の前記リード線が、 前記接続導体構造の前記穴に差し 込まれていることを特徴とする請求項 9に記載の光源連結体。  11. The light source assembly according to claim 9, wherein the lead wire of the light source is inserted into the hole of the connection conductor structure.
1 2 . 前記接続導体構造の前記穴に近接した前記接続導体構造の部分 によって前記リ一ド線がかしめられることで光源の保持がなされている ことを特徴とする請求項 9に記載の光源連結体。  12. The light source connection according to claim 9, wherein the light source is held by caulking the lead wire by a portion of the connection conductor structure close to the hole of the connection conductor structure. body.
1 3 . 前記接続導体構造の前記穴にソケットビンのピン部が差し込ま れ、 前記ソケットピンのソケット部に前記リ一ド線が差し込まれている ことを特徴とする請求項 9に記載の光源連結体。  13. The light source connection according to claim 9, wherein a pin portion of a socket bin is inserted into the hole of the connection conductor structure, and the lead wire is inserted into a socket portion of the socket pin. body.
1 4 . 前記パターン化導体が長寸のテープ状をなし、 且つ、 前記光源 との電気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複数の光源取り付け部と、 前記光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、 該連絡路部及び 前記光源取り付け部から幅方向に離間されて長手方向に延在する少なく とも一つの幹路部と、 該幹路部及び前記連絡路部を幅方向に連絡する複 数の枝路部とを有することを特徴とする請求項 1に記載の光源連結体。 14. The patterned conductor has a long tape shape, and a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source, and the light source mounting portion is connected in the longitudinal direction. A communication path portion, at least one trunk path portion extending in the longitudinal direction while being spaced apart in the width direction from the connection path portion and the light source mounting portion, and connecting the trunk path portion and the connection path portion in the width direction. 2. The light source assembly according to claim 1, comprising a plurality of branch portions that communicate with each other.
1 5 . 前記光源が前記幹路部を介して電源と接続されることを特徴と する請求項 1 4に記載の光源連結体。 15. The light source is connected to a power source through the trunk road. 15. The light source assembly according to claim 14, wherein:
1 6 . 前記パターン化導体の切除される部分が、 前記枝路部、 前記連 絡路部または前記幹路部の一部を含むことを特徴とする請求項 1 4に記 載の光源連結体。  16. The light source assembly according to claim 14, wherein a portion of the patterned conductor to be cut off includes a part of the branch, the communication, or the trunk. .
1 7 . 少なくとも一対の隣接する前記光源の間に抵抗が接続され、 前 記抵抗が間に接続された前記一対の隣接する光源間において前記連絡路 部が分断されていることを特徴とする請求項 1 4に記載の光源連結体。 17. A resistor is connected between at least a pair of adjacent light sources, and the connecting path is divided between the pair of adjacent light sources having the resistor connected therebetween. Item 14. A light source assembly according to Item 14.
1 8 . 前記接続導体構造の幅方向に延在して前記連絡路部と前記幹路 部とを一体に保持する連結部材を更に有することを特徴とする請求項 1 4に記載の光源連結体。 18. The light source connector according to claim 14, further comprising a connection member extending in a width direction of the connection conductor structure and holding the communication path portion and the trunk path portion integrally. .
1 9 . 前記連結部材がィンサ一トモ一ルドにより形成されたものであ ることを特徴とする請求項 1 8に記載の光源連結体。  19. The light source connected body according to claim 18, wherein the connecting member is formed by an insulator model.
2 0 . 前記幹路部に幅方向凹部または貫通孔が設けられ、 前記連結部 材が前記幅方向凹部または貫通孔を通って延在していることを特徴とす る請求項 1 9に記載の光源連結体。  20. The trunk road according to claim 19, wherein a width direction recess or a through hole is provided in the trunk road portion, and the connecting member extends through the width direction recess or the through hole. Light source assembly.
2 1 . 前記連結部材の前記連絡路部と整合する位置に、 前記連絡路部 を露出する穴が設けられており、 該穴を通じて露出された前記連絡路部 を分断することが可能となっていることを特徴とする請求項 1 8に記載 の光源連結体。  21. A hole that exposes the communication path is provided at a position where the connection member is aligned with the communication path, and the communication path exposed through the hole can be divided. 19. The light source assembly according to claim 18, wherein:
2 2 . 前記連結部材の前記穴によって露出される前記連絡路部の前記 部分が、 前記連絡路部の他の部分より小さい幅を有していることを特徴 とする請求項 2 1に記載の光源連結体。 22. The communication path according to claim 21, wherein the portion of the communication path exposed by the hole of the connection member has a smaller width than another part of the communication path. Light source assembly.
2 3 . 前記連結部材が 1または複数の絶縁性シートを含むことを特徴 とする請求項 1 8に記載の光源連結体。  23. The light source connected body according to claim 18, wherein the connecting member includes one or a plurality of insulating sheets.
2 4 . 前記幹路部の主面が前記連絡路部の主面と概ね直交するように、 前記幹路部と前記連絡路部とを結ぶ前記枝路部が折り曲げられているこ とを特徴とする請求項 1 4に記載の光源連結体。 24. The branch road connecting the trunk road and the communication path is bent so that the main surface of the trunk road is substantially perpendicular to the main surface of the connection road. 15. The light source assembly according to claim 14, wherein:
2 5. 前記複数の光源がチップ型 LEDを含み、 2 5. The plurality of light sources include a chip type LED,
当該光源連結体は、 前記チップ型 LEDを装着するためのソケットを 有し、  The light source assembly has a socket for mounting the chip-type LED,
前記ソケットは、 前記接続導体構造の幅方向に延在して前記連絡路部 と前記幹路部とを一体に保持することを特徴とする請求項 14に記載の 光源連結体。  15. The light source assembly according to claim 14, wherein the socket extends in a width direction of the connection conductor structure to integrally hold the communication path portion and the trunk path portion.
2 6. 前記複数の光源がチップ型 LEDを含み、  2 6. The plurality of light sources include a chip type LED,
前記チップ型 L E Dに対応する前記光源取り付け部は前記チップ型 L EDの端子に対応した端子接続部を有し、 前記端子接続部の少なくとも 一つは延出部を有し、 該延出部は折り曲げられて前記チップ型 L EDの 位置決めまたは保持のための壁を成していることを特徴とする請求項 1 4に記載の光源連結体。  The light source mounting part corresponding to the chip type LED has a terminal connection part corresponding to the terminal of the chip type LED, at least one of the terminal connection parts has an extension part, and the extension part is 15. The light source assembly according to claim 14, wherein the light source assembly is bent to form a wall for positioning or holding the chip-type LED.
2 7. 前記チップ型 L EDに対応する前記光源取り付け部の前記端子 接続部が互いに対向する一対の前記延出部を有することを特徴とする請 求項 2 6に記載の光源連結体。  27. The light source connector according to claim 26, wherein the terminal connection portion of the light source attachment portion corresponding to the chip type LED has a pair of the extension portions facing each other.
2 8. 前記光源取り付け部の少なくとも一つに光源が取り付けられて いないことを特徴とする請求項 14に記載の光源連結体。  15. The light source assembly according to claim 14, wherein a light source is not mounted on at least one of the light source mounting portions.
2 9. 前記複数の光源の少なくとも一つが一対の端子を有する光源を 含み、 この光源の前記一対の端子が前記光源連結体の幅方向に配置され ていることを特徴とする請求項 14に記載の光源連結体。  2. The light source according to claim 1, wherein at least one of the plurality of light sources includes a light source having a pair of terminals, and the pair of terminals of the light source is arranged in a width direction of the light source assembly. Light source assembly.
3 0. 前記一対の端子を有する前記光源が取り付けられる前記光源取 り付け部が前記一対の端子に対応した一対の端子接続部を有し、 この一 対の端子接続部が前記パターン化導体の幅方向に配置されていることを 特徴とする請求項 2 9に記載の光源連結体。  30. The light source mounting portion to which the light source having the pair of terminals is attached has a pair of terminal connection portions corresponding to the pair of terminals, and the pair of terminal connection portions is formed of the patterned conductor. 30. The light source assembly according to claim 29, being arranged in the width direction.
3 1. 前記光源の各々がー対の端子を有しており、 前記パターン化導 体が、 前記光源を直列、 並列または直並列接続するのに兼用可能なパ夕 ーンを有していることを特徴とする請求項 1に記載の光源連結体。 3 1. Each of the light sources has a pair of terminals, The light source assembly according to claim 1, wherein the body has a pattern that can be used for connecting the light sources in series, parallel, or series / parallel.
3 2 . 前記パターン化導体が長寸のテープ状をなし、 且つ、 前記光源 との電気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複数の光源取り付け部と、 前記光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、 該連絡路部及び 前記光源取り付け部を幅方向に挟んで両側に配置され長手方向に延在す る一対の幹路部と、 該幹路部及び前記連絡路部を幅方向に連絡する複数 の枝路部とを有することを特徴とする請求項 1に記載の光源連結体。 32. The patterned conductor has a long tape shape, and a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source, and the light source mounting portion is connected in the longitudinal direction. A pair of trunk roads which are arranged on both sides of the communication road and the light source mounting portion in the width direction and extend in the longitudinal direction; and a width of the trunk road and the communication road. 2. The light source assembly according to claim 1, comprising a plurality of branch portions communicating in a direction.
3 3 . 前記光源が前記一対の幹路部の少なくとも一方を介して電源と 接続されることを特徴とする請求項 3 2に記載の光源連結体。 33. The light source assembly according to claim 32, wherein the light source is connected to a power source via at least one of the pair of trunk roads.
3 4 . 前記光源の各々がー対の端子を有しており、 前記光源取り付け 部の各々は前記光源の一対の端子に対応した一対の端子接続部を有して おり、 前記連絡路部は、 隣接する光源取り付け部に含まれる前記端子接 続部同士を互いに連結する複数の接続路を含んでいることを特徴とする 請求項 3 2に記載の光源連結体。  34. Each of the light sources has a pair of terminals, each of the light source mounting portions has a pair of terminal connection portions corresponding to a pair of terminals of the light source, and the communication path portion has The light source connector according to claim 32, further comprising a plurality of connection paths that connect the terminal connection portions included in the adjacent light source attachment portions to each other.
3 5 . 前記複数の光源が、 2つの異なる色の L E Dチップを含み且つ 3つの端子を有する 3極 L E Dランプを含んでおり、  35. The plurality of light sources includes a three-pole LED lamp including two differently colored LED chips and having three terminals,
前記パターン化導体が長寸のテープ状をなし、 且つ、 前記光源との電 気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複数の光源取り付け部と、 前記 光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、 該連絡路部及び前記 光源取り付け部を幅方向に挟んで両側に配置され長手方向に延在する一 対の幹路部と、 該幹路部及び前記連絡路部を幅方向に連絡する複数の枝 路部とを有し、  A plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source, wherein the patterned conductor has a long tape shape, and a communication for connecting the light source mounting portions in the longitudinal direction. A road portion, a pair of trunk road portions disposed on both sides of the communication road portion and the light source attachment portion in the width direction and extending in the longitudinal direction, and a trunk road portion and the communication road portion extending in the width direction. A plurality of branches to communicate with,
前記光源取り付け部の各々は前記 3極 L E Dランプの 3つの端子に対 応して幅方向に配列された 3つの端子接続部を有し、 前記連絡路部は隣 接する光源取り付け部の幅方向に整合した端子接続部同士を互いに連結 する複数の接続路を含んでいることを特徴とする請求項 1に記載の光源 連結体。 Each of the light source mounting portions has three terminal connection portions arranged in the width direction corresponding to the three terminals of the three-pole LED lamp, and the communication path portion has a width in the width direction of the adjacent light source mounting portion. Connect matched terminal connections to each other 2. The light source assembly according to claim 1, comprising a plurality of connection paths.
3 6 . 前記複数の光源が、 異なる色の第 1及び第 2の L E Dチップを 含み且つ 4つの端子を有する 4極 L E Dランプを含んでおり、 前記 4つ の端子のうち 2つは前記第 1の L E Dチップに接続され、 残りの 2つは 前記第 2の L E Dチップに接続され、  36. The plurality of light sources include a four-pole LED lamp including first and second LED chips of different colors and having four terminals, two of the four terminals being the first terminal. And the other two are connected to the second LED chip,
前記パターン化導体が長寸のテープ状をなし、 且つ、 前記光源との電 気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複数の光源取り付け部と、 前記 光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、 該連絡路部及び前記 光源取り付け部を幅方向に挾んで両側に配置され長手方向に延在する一 対の幹路部と、 該幹路部及び前記連絡路部を幅方向に連絡する複数の枝 路部とを有し、  A plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source, wherein the patterned conductor has a long tape shape, and a communication for connecting the light source mounting portions in the longitudinal direction. A road, a pair of trunk roads disposed on both sides of the connecting road and the light source mounting portion in the width direction and extending in the longitudinal direction, and connecting the trunk road and the communication road in the width direction. A plurality of branches to communicate with,
前記光源取り付け部の各々は前記 4極 L E Dランプの 4つの端子に対 応して 4つの端子接続部を有し、 これら 4つの端子接続部のうち前記第 1の L E Dチップに接続された前記端子に対応する 2つは前記パターン 化導体の長手方向に整列して配列され、 前記第 2の L E Dチップに接続 された前記端子に対応する 2つは前記パターン化導体の長手方向に整列 されるとともに、 他の 2つの端子接続部から前記パターン化導体の幅方 向に離間され、  Each of the light source mounting portions has four terminal connection portions corresponding to four terminals of the four-pole LED lamp, and the terminal connected to the first LED chip among the four terminal connection portions. Are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the patterned conductor, and two corresponding to the terminals connected to the second LED chip are arranged in the longitudinal direction of the patterned conductor and Is separated from the other two terminal connections in the width direction of the patterned conductor,
前記連絡路部は、 隣接する光源取り付け部に含まれる幅方向に整合し た端子接続部同士を連結する複数の接続路を有し、 これら複数の接続路 の長手方向に整合したものは幅方向に延在する枝路部によって連結され ており、  The connection path section has a plurality of connection paths connecting terminal connection sections aligned in the width direction included in the adjacent light source attachment section, and the connection paths aligned in the longitudinal direction of the plurality of connection paths are in the width direction. Are connected by a branch that extends to
更に前記パターン化導体は、 前記第 1及び第 2の幹路部のいずれかの 幅方向外側に長手方向に延在する第 3の幹路部と、  Further, the patterned conductor includes a third trunk road extending longitudinally outward in the width direction of any of the first and second trunk roads,
前記第 3の幹路部と前記第 1及び第 2の幹路部の前記いずれかとを幅 方向に連絡する枝路部とを有することを特徴とする請求項 1に記載の光 源連結体。 The width of the third trunk road and one of the first and second trunk roads is 2. The light source assembly according to claim 1, further comprising a branch portion communicating with the direction.
3 7 . 前記パターン化導体が主としてアルミからなることを特徴とす る請求項 1に記載の光源連結体。  37. The light source assembly according to claim 1, wherein the patterned conductor is mainly made of aluminum.
3 8 . 前記光源の少なくとも一つが前記接続導体構造にレーザ溶接に より取り付けられていることを特徴とする請求項 1に記載の光源連結体 t 3 9 . 前記光源とともに所定の回路を構成する抵抗が前記接続導体構 造にレーザ溶接により取り付けられていることを特徴とする請求項 3 8 に記載の光源連結体。 3 8. At least one constitutes a predetermined circuit with the light source connecting body t 3 9. The light source according to claim 1, characterized in that are more attached to the laser welded to the connecting conductor structure resistance of the light source 39. The light source connector according to claim 38, wherein the light source is attached to the connection conductor structure by laser welding.
4 0 . レーザ溶接により前記接続導体構造に取り付けられる前記光源 がチップ型 L E Dであり、 前記抵抗がチップ型抵抗であることを特徴と する請求項 3 9に記載の光源連結体。 40. The light source assembly according to claim 39, wherein the light source attached to the connection conductor structure by laser welding is a chip-type LED, and the resistor is a chip-type resistor.
4 1 . 前記複数の光源の少なくとも一つが、 複数の発光素子を含む発 光素子アセンブリからなることを特徴とする請求項 1に記載の光源連結 体。  41. The light source assembly according to claim 1, wherein at least one of the plurality of light sources comprises a light emitting element assembly including a plurality of light emitting elements.
4 2 . 前記パターン化導体が前記光源の取り付け位置を定める突起を 有していることを特徴とする請求項 1に記載の光源連結体。  42. The light source assembly according to claim 1, wherein the patterned conductor has a projection for determining a mounting position of the light source.
4 3 . 複数の光源を電気的に接続してなる光源連結体と前記光源連結 体を保持する保持体とを有する発光体装置であって、  43. A luminous body device having a light source connected body formed by electrically connecting a plurality of light sources, and a holder for holding the light source connected body,
前記光源連結体は、 複数の前記光源を連結するべく前記光源の配列方 向に延在する接続導体構造を含み、 該接続導体構造は、 所定のパターン が形成された概ね平板なパターン化導体の所要の部分を切除することで 形成されたものであり、  The light source connector includes a connection conductor structure extending in the arrangement direction of the light sources to connect the plurality of light sources, and the connection conductor structure is formed of a substantially flat patterned conductor formed with a predetermined pattern. It is formed by cutting off the required parts,
前記パターン化導体は長寸のテープ状をなし、 且つ、 前記光源との電 気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複数の光源取り付け部と、 前記 光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、 該連絡路部及び前記 光源取り付け部を幅方向に挟んで両側に配置され長手方向に延在する一 対の幹路部と、 該幹路部及び前記連絡路部を幅方向に連絡する複数の枝 路部とを有しており、 The patterned conductor has a long tape shape, and has a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source, and a communication for connecting the light source mounting portions in the longitudinal direction. A road section, the communication path section and the It has a pair of trunk roads that are arranged on both sides of the light source mounting portion in the width direction and extend in the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of branch roads that connect the trunk road and the communication road in the width direction. And
前記接続導体構造は、 前記幹路部の主面が前記連絡路部の主面と概ね 直交するように、 前記幹路部と前記連絡路部とを結ぶ前記枝路部が折り 曲げられており、 前記幹路部を、 前記保持体に設けられた対応する穴ま たは凹部に挿入することにより、 前記光源連結体の前記保持体への取り 付けを行うようにしたことを特徴とする発光体装置。  In the connection conductor structure, the branch path connecting the main road and the communication path is bent such that a main surface of the main path is substantially orthogonal to a main surface of the connection path. The light emitting device is characterized in that the light source connector is attached to the holder by inserting the trunk road into a corresponding hole or recess provided in the holder. Body device.
4 4 . リード線を備えた複数の光源が前記リード線に概ね直交する向 きに並んで電気的に接続された光源連結体と、 該光源連結体を保持する 保持体とを有する発光体装置であって、 44. A luminous body device having a light source connected body in which a plurality of light sources provided with lead wires are electrically connected side by side in a direction substantially orthogonal to the lead wires, and a holder holding the light source connected body. And
前記光源連結体が、 複数の前記光源をその配列方向に延在する接続導 体構造で連結してなるものであり、  The light source connector is formed by connecting a plurality of the light sources by a connection conductor structure extending in the arrangement direction,
前記リード線及び前記接続導体構造の一部のいずれか一方あるいは双 方を前記保持体側に突出させて該保持体に設けられた対応する穴または 凹部に挿入することにより、 前記光源連結体の前記保持体への取り付け を行うようにしたことを特徴とする発光体装置。  By projecting one or both of the lead wire and the connection conductor structure toward the holder and inserting it into a corresponding hole or recess provided in the holder, A light-emitting device, wherein the light-emitting device is mounted on a holder.
4 5 . 複数の光源を電気的に接続して光源連結体を形成するための所 定のパターンを有するテープ状のパターン化導体であって、  45. A tape-shaped patterned conductor having a predetermined pattern for electrically connecting a plurality of light sources to form a light source assembly,
前記光源との電気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複数の光源取 り付け部と、  A plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source;
前記光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、  A communication path section that connects the light source mounting section in the longitudinal direction,
該連絡路部及び前記光源取り付け部から幅方向に離間されて長手方向 に延在する少なくとも一つの幹路部と、  At least one trunk road portion extending in the longitudinal direction separated from the communication path portion and the light source mounting portion in the width direction;
該幹路部及び前記連絡路部を幅方向に連絡する複数の枝路部とを有す ることを特徵とするテープ状パターン化導体。 A tape-shaped patterned conductor having a plurality of branch portions for connecting the trunk road portion and the connection road portion in a width direction.
4 6 . 前記幹路部に、 順送プレス機による前記パターン化導体の搬送 または位置決めに用いられる複数の穴が長手方向に所定の間隔で形成さ れていることを特徵とする請求項 4 5に記載のパターン化導体。 46. A plurality of holes used for conveying or positioning the patterned conductor by a progressive press machine at predetermined intervals in a longitudinal direction in the trunk road portion. A patterned conductor according to claim 1.
4 7 . 前記光源の各々がー対の電気接続用の端子を有しており、 前記 光源取り付け部の各々が対応する光源の前記一対の端子に接続される一 対の端子接続部を有していることを特徴とする請求項 4 5に記載のパ夕 ーン化導体。 47. Each of the light sources has a pair of electrical connection terminals, and each of the light source mounting portions has a pair of terminal connection portions connected to the pair of terminals of the corresponding light source. The patterned conductor according to claim 45, wherein:
4 8 . 前記連絡路部が、 隣接する光源取り付け部に含まれる前記端子 接続部同士をそれぞれ連結する複数の接続路を含んでいることを特徴と する請求項 4 7に記載のパターン化導体。  48. The patterned conductor according to claim 47, wherein the communication path section includes a plurality of connection paths that respectively connect the terminal connection sections included in the adjacent light source attachment sections.
4 9 . 前記接続路の少なくとも一つにリード線を有する抵抗の該リ一 ド線を差し込むための穴が形成されていることを特徴とする請求項 4 8 に記載のパターン化導体。  49. The patterned conductor according to claim 48, wherein a hole for inserting the lead wire of a resistor having a lead wire is formed in at least one of the connection paths.
5 0 . 前記幹路部に前記抵抗の前記リード線を差し込むための穴が形 成されていることを特徴とする請求項 4 9に記載のパターン化導体。 50. The patterned conductor according to claim 49, wherein a hole for inserting the lead wire of the resistor is formed in the trunk path.
5 1 . 前記光源取り付け部の少なくとも一つにおいて、 前記一対の端 子接続部が互いに離間されていることを特徴とする請求項 4 7に記載の パターン化導体。 51. The patterned conductor according to claim 47, wherein, in at least one of the light source mounting portions, the pair of terminal connection portions are separated from each other.
5 2 . 前記光源取り付け部の少なくとも一つにおいて、 前記一対の端 子接続部が互いに連結されていることを特徴とする請求項 4 7に記載の パターン化導体。  52. The patterned conductor according to claim 47, wherein at least one of the light source attachment portions, the pair of terminal connection portions are connected to each other.
5 3 . 少なくとも一組の隣接する光源取り付け部の間に抵抗取り付け 部が設けられていることを特徴とする請求項 4 5に記載のパターン化導 体。  53. The patterned conductor according to claim 45, wherein a resistance mounting portion is provided between at least one pair of adjacent light source mounting portions.
5 4 . 前記枝路部の少なくとも一つが抵抗取り付け部によって置き換 えられていることを特徴とする請求項 4 5に記載のパターン化導体。 54. The patterned conductor according to claim 45, wherein at least one of said branch portions is replaced by a resistor mounting portion.
5 5 . 前記幹路部が幅方向凸状湾曲部を有していることを特徴とする 請求項 4 5に記載のパターン化導体。 55. The patterned conductor according to claim 45, wherein the trunk has a convex portion in the width direction.
5 6 . —対の前記幹路部が、 前記光源取り付け部と前記連絡路部とを 幅方向に挟んで両側に設けられていることを特徴とする請求項 4 5に記 載のパターン化導体。  56. The patterned conductor according to claim 45, wherein the pair of trunk paths are provided on both sides of the light source attachment section and the communication path section in the width direction. .
5 7 . 複数の光源と、 これら複数の光源を電気的に接続するための接 続導体構造とを有する光源連結体を製造するための方法であって、  57. A method for manufacturing a light source assembly having a plurality of light sources and a connection conductor structure for electrically connecting the plurality of light sources,
所定のパターンを有する概ね平板なパターン化導体を形成する過程と、 前記パターン化導体を前記光源に組み付ける過程と、  Forming a generally planar patterned conductor having a predetermined pattern, and assembling the patterned conductor to the light source;
前記パターン化導体の所要の部分を切除して前記接続導体構造を形成 する過程とを有することを特徴とする光源連結体の製造方法。  Cutting off a required portion of the patterned conductor to form the connection conductor structure.
5 8 . 前記パターン化導体を形成する過程が、 導電性平板材料をプレ ス加工する過程を含むことを特徴とする請求項 5 7記載の製造方法。 58. The manufacturing method according to claim 57, wherein the step of forming the patterned conductor includes a step of pressing a conductive flat plate material.
5 9 . 前記パターン化導体の所要の部分を切除する過程が、 順送プレ ス機によってなされることを特徴とする請求項 5 7に記載の製造方法。 59. The method according to claim 57, wherein the step of cutting off a required portion of the patterned conductor is performed by a progressive press.
6 0 . 前記パターン化導体から形成される前記接続導体構造の各部を 一体に保持するべく、 前記パターン化導体に連結部材を取り付ける過程 を更に含み、 60. A step of attaching a connecting member to the patterned conductor so as to integrally hold each part of the connection conductor structure formed from the patterned conductor,
前記パターン化導体の所要の部分を切除する過程は、 前記連結部材の 取り付け過程の後になされることを特徴とする請求項 5 7に記載の製造 方法。  The method according to claim 57, wherein the step of cutting off a required portion of the patterned conductor is performed after the step of attaching the connecting member.
6 1 . 前記パターン化導体の切除される部分を露出するべく前記連結 部材には少なくとも一つの穴が設けられていることを特徴とする請求項 61. The connecting member is provided with at least one hole to expose a cut portion of the patterned conductor.
6 0に記載の製造方法。 60. The production method according to 60.
6 2 . 前記光源がチップ型 L E Dを含み、 6 2. The light source includes a chip-type LED,
当該方法は、 前記チップ型 L E Dを装着するためのソケットを前記パターン化導体 に取り付ける過程を有し、 The method is Attaching a socket for mounting the chip-type LED to the patterned conductor,
前記パターン化導体の所要の部分を切除する過程は、 前記ソケットの 取り付け過程の後になされることを特徴とする請求項 5 7に記載の製造 方法。  The method according to claim 57, wherein the step of cutting off a required portion of the patterned conductor is performed after the step of attaching the socket.
6 3 . 前記光源がリード線を有する光源を含んでおり、  6 3. The light source includes a light source having a lead wire,
前記パターン化導体を前記光源に組み付ける過程が、 前記光源の前記 リード線を前記接続導体構造に設けられた対応する穴に差し込む過程を 有することを特徴とする請求項 5 7に記載の製造方法。  The method according to claim 57, wherein the step of assembling the patterned conductor to the light source comprises the step of inserting the lead wire of the light source into a corresponding hole provided in the connection conductor structure.
6 4 . 複数の光源を電気的に接続してなる光源連結体を有する発光体 装置であって、 6 4. A light emitting device having a light source connected body formed by electrically connecting a plurality of light sources,
前記光源連結体を収容する透光性を有する管状部材と、  A translucent tubular member that houses the light source connector,
前記管状部材の両端に取り付けられた一対のキャップ部材とを有し、 前記光源連結体は、 複数の前記光源を連結するべく前記光源の配列方 向に延在する接続導体構造を含み、 該接続導体構造は、 所定のパターン が形成された概ね平板なパターン化導体の所要の部分を切除することで 形成されたものであることを特徴とする発光体装置。  A pair of cap members attached to both ends of the tubular member, wherein the light source connector includes a connection conductor structure extending in the arrangement direction of the light sources to connect the plurality of light sources; A luminous device characterized in that the conductor structure is formed by cutting off a required portion of a substantially flat patterned conductor on which a predetermined pattern is formed.
6 5 . 前記パターン化導体が長寸のテープ状をなし、 且つ、 前記光源 との電気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複数の光源取り付け部と、 前記光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、 該連絡路部及び 前記光源取り付け部から幅方向に離間されて長手方向に延在する少なく とも一つの幹路部と、 該幹路部及び前記連絡路部を幅方向に連絡する複 数の枝路部とを有していることを特徴とする請求項 6 4に記載の発光体 65. The patterned conductor has a long tape shape, and a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source, and the light source mounting portion is connected in the longitudinal direction. A communication path portion, at least one trunk path portion extending in the longitudinal direction while being spaced apart in the width direction from the connection path portion and the light source mounting portion, and connecting the trunk path portion and the connection path portion in the width direction. The luminous body according to claim 64, further comprising a plurality of branch portions that communicate with each other.
6 6 . 前記一対のキヤップ部材の少なくとも一方に外部装置との電気 接続用の導電性ピンが保持されており、 前記幹路部が前記導電性ピンに 接続されていることを特徴とする請求項 6 4に記載の発光体装置。 6 6. A conductive pin for electrical connection with an external device is held on at least one of the pair of cap members, and the trunk section is connected to the conductive pin. The luminous device according to claim 64, wherein the luminous device is connected.
6 7 . 複数の光源を電気的に接続してなる光源連結体を有する発光体 装置であって、  6 7. A light emitting device having a light source connected body formed by electrically connecting a plurality of light sources,
前記光源連結体は、 複数の前記光源を連結するべく前記光源の配列方 向に延在する接続導体構造を含み、 該接続導体構造は、 所定のパターン が形成された概ね平板なパターン化導体の所要の部分を切除することで 形成されたものであり、  The light source connector includes a connection conductor structure extending in the arrangement direction of the light sources to connect the plurality of light sources, and the connection conductor structure is formed of a substantially flat patterned conductor formed with a predetermined pattern. It is formed by cutting off the required parts,
当該発光体装置は、  The luminous device is
前記光源連結体を収容する八ウジングと、  Eight housings accommodating the light source assembly,
前記光源連結体の前記接続導体構造と前記八ウジングの内面とに接触 し、 それらの間で熱を伝達する熱伝達部材とを有していることを特徴と する発光体装置。  A light emitting device, comprising: a heat transfer member that comes into contact with the connection conductor structure of the light source connection body and the inner surface of the eight housing and transfers heat therebetween.
6 8 . 前記熱伝達部材が前記光源連結体を前記ハウジング内で支持す る支持体としても働くことを特徴とする請求項 6 7に記載の発光体装置。 6 9 . 前記熱伝達部材が弾性を有しており、 前記ハウジングの内面に 圧接されていることを特徴とする請求項 6 7に記載の発光体装置。  68. The light emitting device according to claim 67, wherein the heat transfer member also functions as a support for supporting the light source connection body in the housing. 69. The light emitting device according to claim 67, wherein the heat transfer member has elasticity and is pressed against an inner surface of the housing.
7 0 . 前記ハウジングがガラスからなることを特徴とする請求項 6 7 に記載の発光体装置。  70. The light emitting device according to claim 67, wherein the housing is made of glass.
7 1 . 前記パターン化導体が長寸のテープ状をなし、 且つ、 前記光源 との電気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複数の光源取り付け部と、 前記光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、 該連絡路部及び 前記光源取り付け部から幅方向に離間されて長手方向に延在する少なく とも一つの幹路部と、 該幹路部及び前記連絡路部を幅方向に連絡する複 数の枝路部とを有し、  71. The patterned conductor has a long tape shape, and a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source, and the light source mounting portion is connected in the longitudinal direction. A communication path portion, at least one trunk path portion extending in the longitudinal direction while being spaced apart in the width direction from the connection path portion and the light source mounting portion, and connecting the trunk path portion and the connection path portion in the width direction. A plurality of branches to communicate with each other;
前記熱伝達部材が、 前記幹路部に接続されていることを特徴とする請 求項 6 7に記載の発光体装置。 The light emitting device according to claim 67, wherein said heat transfer member is connected to said trunk road portion.
7 2 . 前記接続導体構造が前記光源を直列接続するように、 前記パ夕 ーン化導体の前記幹路部の一部が切除されており、 前記幹路部の切除さ れなかった部分は前記枝路部を介して前記光源取付部に接続されたまま となっていることを特徴とする請求項 1 4に記載の光源連結体。 72. A part of the trunk road portion of the patterned conductor is cut off so that the connection conductor structure connects the light sources in series, and the uncut portion of the trunk road portion is 15. The light source connected body according to claim 14, wherein the light source connected body remains connected to the light source mounting portion via the branch portion.
7 3 . 前記絶縁性シートが前記接続導体構造の光源取付面に取り付け られていることを特徴とする請求項 2 3に記載の光源連結体。  23. The light source assembly according to claim 23, wherein the insulating sheet is mounted on a light source mounting surface of the connection conductor structure.
7 4 . 複数の光源を電気的に接続してなる光源連結体と前記光源連結 体を保持する保持体とを有する発光体装置であって、  7 4. A light-emitting device comprising: a light source connected body formed by electrically connecting a plurality of light sources; and a holder for holding the light source connected body,
前記光源連結体は、 複数の前記光源を連結するべく前記光源の配列方 向に延在する接続導体構造を含み、 該接続導体構造は、 所定のパターン が形成された概ね平板なパターン化導体の所要の部分を切除することで 形成されたものであり、  The light source connector includes a connection conductor structure extending in the arrangement direction of the light sources to connect the plurality of light sources, and the connection conductor structure is formed of a substantially flat patterned conductor formed with a predetermined pattern. It is formed by cutting off the required parts,
前記パ夕一ン化導体は長寸のテープ状をなし、 且つ、 前記光源との電 気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複数の光源取り付け部と、 前記 光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、 該連絡路部及び前記 光源取り付け部を幅方向に挟んで両側に配置され長手方向に延在する一 対の幹路部と、 該幹路部及び前記連絡路部を幅方向に連絡する複数の枝 路部とを有しており、  A plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source, the plurality of light source mounting portions being formed in a long tape shape; A communication path portion to be connected, a pair of trunk road sections disposed on both sides of the communication path section and the light source mounting section in the width direction, and extending in the longitudinal direction; and a trunk path section and the connection path section. It has a plurality of branches that communicate in the width direction,
前記保持体は、 少なくとも一面に溝が設けられ、 この溝の対向する側 壁には前記一対の幹路部に対応する長手方向に延在するガイド溝が設け られ、 前記一対の幹路部をスライドさせて前記ガイド溝に嵌め込むこと で、 前記光源連結体が前記保持体に取り付けられていることを特徴とす る発光体装置。  A groove is provided on at least one surface of the holding body, and a guide groove extending in a longitudinal direction corresponding to the pair of trunk roads is provided on opposite side walls of the groove. The light emitting device, wherein the light source connector is attached to the holder by sliding the light source into the guide groove.
7 5 . 前記保持体の両面に溝が設けられ、 各溝の対向する側壁には前 記一対の幹路部に対応する長手方向に延在するガイド溝が設けられ、 前 記一対の幹路部をスライドさせて前記ガイド溝に嵌め込むことで、 前記 保持体の両面の各々に前記光源連結体が取り付けられていることを特徴 とする請求項 7 4に記載の発光体装置。 75. A groove is provided on both surfaces of the holding body, and a guide groove extending in the longitudinal direction corresponding to the pair of trunk roads is provided on opposing side walls of each groove, and the pair of trunk roads is provided. By sliding the part into the guide groove, The illuminant device according to claim 74, wherein the light source connector is attached to each of both surfaces of the holder.
7 6 . 複数の光源を電気的に接続して光源連結体を形成するための所 定のパターンを有するテープ状のパターン化導体であって、  7 6. A tape-shaped patterned conductor having a predetermined pattern for electrically connecting a plurality of light sources to form a light source assembly,
幅方向に互いに離間され長手方向に延在する 3以上の幹路部と、 隣接する幹路部間において長手方向に配置された、 前記光源との電気 的接続のための複数の光源取り付け部と、  Three or more trunk sections that are spaced apart from each other in the width direction and extend in the longitudinal direction; and a plurality of light source attachment sections that are arranged in the longitudinal direction between adjacent trunk paths and are electrically connected to the light sources. ,
前記複数の光源取付部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、  A communication path section that connects the plurality of light source mounting sections in the longitudinal direction,
前記連絡路部の各々を幅方向に挟む前記幹路部に連絡するべく幅方向 に延在する複数の枝路部とを含むことを特徴とするテープ状パターン化 導体。  A tape-shaped patterned conductor, comprising: a plurality of branch portions extending in the width direction so as to communicate with the trunk road portions sandwiching each of the connection passage portions in the width direction.
7 7 . 複数の光源を電気的に接続してなる光源連結体を複数含む発光 体装置であって、  7 7. A light-emitting device including a plurality of light source connected bodies formed by electrically connecting a plurality of light sources,
前記光源連結体の各々は、 複数の前記光源を連結するべく前記光源の 配列方向に延在する接続導体構造を含み、 該接続導体構造は、 所定のパ ターンが形成された概ね平板なパターン化導体の所要の部分を切除する ことで前記光源を互いに並列に接続するように形成されており、  Each of the light source connectors includes a connection conductor structure extending in the arrangement direction of the light sources so as to connect the plurality of light sources, and the connection conductor structure has a substantially flat pattern formed with a predetermined pattern. The light source is formed so as to connect the light sources in parallel by cutting off a required portion of the conductor,
前記複数の光源連結体は幅方向に配列され、 隣接する光源連結体の接 続導体構造同士が接続されることで、 前記複数の光源連結体が直列接続 されていることを特徴とする発光体装置。  The plurality of light source connected bodies are arranged in the width direction, and the connection conductor structures of adjacent light source connected bodies are connected to each other, whereby the plurality of light source connected bodies are connected in series. apparatus.
7 8 . 前記光源の各々が L E Dからなり、 各 L E Dに直列に抵抗が接 続されていることを特徴とする請求項 7 7に記載の発光体装置。  78. The light emitting device according to claim 77, wherein each of the light sources is formed of an LED, and a resistor is connected in series to each LED.
7 9 . 複数の光源を電気的に接続してなる光源連結体であって、 前記光源連結体は、 複数の前記光源を連結するべく前記光源の配列方 向に延在する接続導体構造を含み、 該接続導体構造は、 所定のパターン が形成された概ね平板なパターン化導体の所要の部分を切除することで 形成されており、 79. A light source connector electrically connected to a plurality of light sources, wherein the light source connector includes a connection conductor structure extending in an arrangement direction of the light sources to connect the plurality of light sources. The connection conductor structure is formed by cutting out a required portion of a substantially flat patterned conductor on which a predetermined pattern is formed. Is formed,
前記パターン化導体は長寸のテープ状をなし、 且つ、 前記光源との電 気的接続のための長手方向に配置された複数の光源取り付け部と、 前記 光源取り付け部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部と、 該連絡路部及び前記 光源取り付け部を幅方向に挟んで両側に配置され長手方向に延在する一 対の幹路部と、 該幹路部及び前記連絡路部を幅方向に連絡する複数の枝 路部とを有し、  The patterned conductor has a long tape shape, and has a plurality of light source mounting portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for electrical connection with the light source, and a communication for connecting the light source mounting portion in the longitudinal direction. A pair of trunk roads which are arranged on both sides of the connecting road and the light source mounting portion in the width direction and extend in the longitudinal direction; and the trunk road and the connecting road in the width direction. A plurality of branches to communicate with,
前記一対の幹路部の間に並列に接続された複数の前記光源を含む光源 並列接続体が複数個形成されるように前記枝路部及び連絡路部の一部が 切除されており、 前記光源並列接続体が直列に接続されるように、 前 記一対の幹路部の一部が切断されていることを特徴とする光源連結体。 A part of the branch path and the communication path is cut off so that a plurality of light source parallel connection bodies including the plurality of light sources connected in parallel between the pair of trunk paths are formed; A light source assembly wherein a part of the pair of trunk roads is cut off so that the light source parallel connections are connected in series.
8 0 . 前記光源の各々が L E Dからなり、 80. Each of the light sources comprises an LED,
隣接する光源並列接続体に含まれる L E Dの接続の向きが逆になつて おり、 それによつて隣接する光源並列接続体の電気的に上流側の光源並 列接続体に含まれる L E Dの力ソードと下流側の光源並列接続体に含ま れる L E Dのアノードとが前記一対の幹路部の一方を介して接続されて おり、  The connection direction of the LED included in the adjacent light source parallel connection is reversed, so that the power source of the LED included in the light source parallel connection electrically upstream of the adjacent light source parallel connection is reduced. The anode of the LED included in the light source parallel connection body on the downstream side is connected through one of the pair of trunk roads,
前記一対の幹路部は、 隣接する光源並列接続体のうち上流側の光源並 列接続体に含まれる L E Dのアノードと下流側の光源並列接続体に含ま れる L E Dの力ソードとが分離されるように且つ各 L E Dの両端が短絡 しないように切断されていることを特徴とする請求項 7 9に記載の光源 連結体。  In the pair of trunk roads, the anode of the LED included in the parallel light source on the upstream side of the adjacent parallel light source and the power source of the LED included in the parallel light source on the downstream side are separated. 10. The light source assembly according to claim 79, wherein both ends of each LED are cut so as not to be short-circuited. 10.
8 1 . 前記光源の各々が L E Dからなり、  8 1. Each of the light sources is composed of LED,
隣接する光源並列接続体の電気的に上流側の光源並列接続体に含まれ る L E Dのカソ一ドと下流側の光源並列接続体に含まれる L E Dのァノ 一ドとを接続するべく前記一対の幹路部の一部が前記枝路部及び前記光 源取付部を介して互いに接続されており、 In order to connect the LED cathode included in the light source parallel connection electrically upstream of the adjacent light source parallel connection and the LED node included in the downstream light source parallel connection, the pair is connected. A part of the trunk road is the branch road and the light Are connected to each other via a source mounting part,
前記一対の幹路部は、 隣接する光源並列接続体のうち上流側の光源並 列接続体に含まれる L E Dのアノードと下流側の光源並列接続体に含ま れる L E Dのカソ一ドとが分離されるように且つ各 L E Dの両端が短絡 しないように切断されていることを特徴とする請求項 7 9に記載の光源 連結体。  In the pair of trunk roads, the anode of the LED included in the parallel light source parallel connection body of the adjacent parallel light source connection body and the cathode of the LED included in the parallel light source parallel connection downstream body are separated. 10. The light source assembly according to claim 79, wherein both ends of each LED are cut so as not to be short-circuited. 10.
8 2 . 概ね線状に配列された複数の光源を連結してなる光源連結体を 複数個含む発光体装置であって、  8 2. A luminous body device including a plurality of light source connected bodies formed by connecting a plurality of light sources arranged in a substantially linear manner,
前記複数の光源連結体は前記発光体装置の発光面の周縁部において周 方向に概ね等間隔に配置されたそれぞれの始点から中心部に向かって渦 巻きをなすように配置されていることを特徴とする発光体装置。  The plurality of light source connected bodies are arranged so as to form a spiral from respective starting points arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction at a peripheral portion of a light emitting surface of the light emitting device toward the center. Light-emitting device.
8 3 . 前記複数の光源連結体が、 異なる光色の光を発する少なくとも 8 3. At least the plurality of light source assemblies emit light of different light colors
2つの光源連結体を含んでいることを特徴とする請求項 8 2に記載の発 光体装置。 The light emitting device according to claim 82, comprising two light source connected bodies.
8 4 . 発光体装置であって、 8 4. A luminous device,
各々複数の L E Dを並列接続してなる複数の L E D並列接続体を含み、 前記複数の L E D並列接続体は直列に接続されており、  A plurality of LED parallel connection bodies each formed by connecting a plurality of LEDs in parallel, wherein the plurality of LED parallel connection bodies are connected in series;
各 L E Dに関連する抵抗が直列に接続されていることを特徴とする発 光体装置。  A light emitting device, wherein resistors associated with each LED are connected in series.
8 5 . 前記複数の光源の各々が概ね互いに平行に延在する一対のリー ド線を備え、 前記複数の光源は前記リ一ド線に概ね直交する向きに配列 されており、 8 5. Each of the plurality of light sources includes a pair of lead lines extending substantially parallel to each other, and the plurality of light sources are arranged in a direction substantially orthogonal to the lead lines;
前記接続導体構造はその主面が前記リード線に概ね沿って延在するよ うに配置され、 これらリード線に組み付けられて前記光源を連結してい ることを特徴とする請求項 1に記載の光源連結体。  2. The light source according to claim 1, wherein the connection conductor structure is arranged so that a main surface thereof extends substantially along the lead wire, and is connected to the lead wire to connect the light source. Concatenation.
8 6 . 前記パターン化導体が長寸のテープ状をなし且つ前記光源の前 記リード線に対する複数の接続部を有し、 該接続部が、 ラジアルテ一ピ ングにより保持された複数の前記光源の配列に対応して並んで配置され たことを特徴とする請求項 8 5に記載の光源連結体。 8 6. The patterned conductor has a long tape shape and is in front of the light source. The device according to claim 85, further comprising a plurality of connection portions for the lead wire, wherein the connection portions are arranged side by side corresponding to the arrangement of the plurality of light sources held by radial taping. The light source assembly according to any one of the preceding claims.
8 7 . 前記接続導体構造の長手方向に対して垂直な平面で切ったとき に現れる断面形状が屈曲されており、 それにより前記接続導体構造と前 記リ一ド線との間の不所望な接触が防止されていることを特徴とする請 求項 8 5に記載の光源連結体。 8 7. The cross-sectional shape that appears when the connection conductor structure is cut along a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal direction is bent, thereby causing an undesired portion between the connection conductor structure and the lead line. The light source assembly according to claim 85, wherein contact is prevented.
8 8 . 前記パターン化導体を前記光源に組み付ける過程の後に前記パ ターン化導体の切除過程が行われることを特徴とする請求項 5 7に記載 の製造方法。  88. The method according to claim 57, wherein a step of cutting the patterned conductor is performed after the step of assembling the patterned conductor to the light source.
8 9 . 前記組み付け過程が順送プレスによりなされることを特徴とす る請求項 5 7に記載の製造方法。  89. The method according to claim 57, wherein the assembling step is performed by a progressive press.
9 0 . 前記光源の各々が電気接続用の一対のリ一ド線を有しており、 前記組み付け過程が、 前記パターン化導体の所定の部分で前記リード線 をかしめる過程を含むことを特徴とする請求項 5 7に記載の製造方法。 9 1 . 前記パターン化導体を長手方向に延在する折り曲げ線に沿って 折り曲げる過程を更に含むことを特徴とする請求項 5 7に記載の製造方 法。  90. Each of the light sources has a pair of lead wires for electrical connection, and the assembling step includes a step of caulking the lead wire at a predetermined portion of the patterned conductor. The production method according to claim 57, wherein 91. The method according to claim 57, further comprising bending the patterned conductor along a bending line extending in a longitudinal direction.
9 2 . リード線を備えた複数の光源が前記リード線に概ね直交する向 きに並んで電気的に接続された光源連結体を製造するための方法であつ て、  9 2. A method for manufacturing a light source assembly in which a plurality of light sources having leads are electrically connected side by side in a direction substantially orthogonal to the leads,
ラジアルテーピング用のキヤリァテープにより前記リード線に直交す る向きに並べて保持された複数の前記光源を供給する過程と、  A step of supplying a plurality of the light sources held side by side in a direction perpendicular to the lead wires by a carrier tape for radial taping;
前記光源が前記キヤリァテープに保持された状態で、 前記光源の電気 的接続を行い前記光源を連続的に得る過程とを有することを特徴とする 光源連結体の製造方法。 Electrically connecting the light source while the light source is held by the carrier tape to continuously obtain the light source.
9 3 . 複数の光源を電気的に接続して光源連結体を形成するための所 定のパターンを有するテープ状のパターン化導体であって、 9 3. A tape-shaped patterned conductor having a predetermined pattern for electrically connecting a plurality of light sources to form a light source assembly,
前記パターン化導体は順送プレス機により所要部分を切除されること で、 前記光源を連結する接続導体構造を形成し、  A required portion of the patterned conductor is cut off by a progressive press to form a connection conductor structure connecting the light sources,
前記パターン化導体は、 前記順送プレス機による搬送または位置決め に用いられる複数の穴が長手方向に所定の間隔で形成されていることを 特徴とするテープ状パターン化導体。  The tape-shaped patterned conductor according to claim 1, wherein the patterned conductor has a plurality of holes formed at predetermined intervals in a longitudinal direction for use in transport or positioning by the progressive press.
9 4 . リード線を備えた複数の光源を前記リード線に概ね直交する向 きに並べ、 電気的に接続して光源連結体を形成するための所定のパター ンを有するテ一プ状パターン化導体であって、  9 4. A plurality of light sources having lead wires arranged in a direction substantially orthogonal to the lead wires, and a tape-like pattern having a predetermined pattern for electrically connecting to form a light source assembly. A conductor,
前記複数の光源の前記リ一ド線との接続のため長手方向に配置された 複数の接続部と、  A plurality of connection portions arranged in a longitudinal direction for connection of the plurality of light sources with the lead wire;
前記接続部を長手方向に連絡する連絡路部とを有し、  Having a communication path portion connecting the connection portion in the longitudinal direction,
前記連絡路部に順送プレス機のパイロットピンに係合するパイロット 穴が形成されていることを特徴とするパターン化導体。  A patterned conductor, wherein a pilot hole for engaging a pilot pin of a progressive press is formed in the communication path.
9 5 . 前記パターン化導体が長寸のテープ状をなしていることを特徴 とする請求項 1に記載の光源連結体。  95. The light source assembly according to claim 1, wherein the patterned conductor has a long tape shape.
9 6 . 前記パターン化導体が長手方向に概ね平行に延在する一対の幹 路部と、 前記一対の幹路部を互いに連結する複数の枝路部とを有し、 前 記光源は前記一対の幹路部間に接続され、 前記パターン化導体の切除さ れる部分が前記枝路部を含むことを特徴とする請求項 1に記載の光源連 結体。  9 6. The patterned conductor has a pair of trunk sections extending substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction, and a plurality of branch sections connecting the pair of trunk sections to each other. The light source coupling according to claim 1, wherein the portion of the patterned conductor that is connected between the main trunks includes the branch.
9 7 . 前記一対の幹路部の間の空隙が非直線状であることを特徴とする 請求項 9 6に記載の光源連結体。  97. The light source assembly according to claim 96, wherein a gap between the pair of trunk roads is non-linear.
9 8 . 前記複数の光源の各々がプレート状の力ソード端子及びァノ一 ド端子を有する L E Dからなり、 前記パターン化導体の各 L E Dのカソ 一ド端子が取り付けられる部分が前記 L EDのアノード端子が取り付け られる部分より大きな面積を有することを特徴とする請求項 1に記載の 光源連結体。 9 8. Each of the plurality of light sources comprises an LED having a plate-shaped power source terminal and an anode terminal, and a cathode of each LED of the patterned conductor. The light source connector according to claim 1, wherein a portion to which a single terminal is attached has a larger area than a portion to which an anode terminal of the LED is attached.
9 9. 前記パターン化導体が長手方向に概ね平行に延在する一対の幹 路部を有し、 前記 L EDは前記一対の幹路部間に接続され、 前記 L ED の力ソード端子が取り付けられる幹路部の幅が、 前記 L E Dのアノード 端子が取り付けられる幹路部の幅より大きいことを特徴とする請求項 9. 8に記載の光源連結体。  9 9. The patterned conductor has a pair of trunks extending substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction, the LED is connected between the pair of trunks, and a force sword terminal of the LED is attached. 9. The light source assembly according to claim 9.8, wherein the width of the main road is larger than the width of the main road to which the anode terminal of the LED is attached.
1 0 0. 複数の光源を電気的に接続して光源連結体を形成するための 所定のパターンを有するテープ状のパ夕一ン化導体であつて、  100. A tape-shaped patterned conductor having a predetermined pattern for electrically connecting a plurality of light sources to form a connected light source,
前記パターン化導体はその長手方向の所定の箇所に伸縮可能部を有す ることを特徴とするパターン化導体。  The patterned conductor has a stretchable portion at a predetermined position in a longitudinal direction of the patterned conductor.
1 0 1. 更に前記伸縮可能部の変形を選択的に許可するための変形阻 止部を有していることを特徴とする請求項 1 0 0に記載のパターン化導 体。  100. The patterned conductor according to claim 100, further comprising a deformation preventing portion for selectively permitting deformation of the extendable portion.
1 0 2. 前記伸縮可能部及び前記変形阻止部が打ち抜き加工により形 成されたものであることを特徴とする請求項 1 0 1に記載のパターン化 導体。  102. The patterned conductor according to claim 101, wherein the stretchable portion and the deformation preventing portion are formed by punching.
1 0 3. 前記変形阻止部を切除することで前記伸縮可能部の変形が可 能となることを特徴とする請求項 1 0 2に記載のパターン化導体。  103. The patterned conductor according to claim 102, wherein the deformable portion can be deformed by cutting off the deformation preventing portion.
1 04. 長手方向に概ね平行に延在する一対の幹路部を更に有し、 前 記複数の光源は前記一対の幹路部間に接続され、 前記伸縮可能部及び前 記変形阻止部は、 前記一対の幹路部の所定部分を打ち抜き加工して形成 されたものであることを特徴とする請求項 1 0 2に記載のパターン化導 体。  104. The vehicle further comprises a pair of trunks extending substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction, wherein the plurality of light sources are connected between the pair of trunks, and the extendable portion and the deformation prevention portion are The patterned conductor according to claim 102, wherein said patterned conductor is formed by punching a predetermined portion of said pair of trunk roads.
1 0 5. 前記伸縮可能部が前記パターン化導体の幅方向に延在する少 なくとも一つのひだ状部を有することを特徴とする請求項 1 0 0に記載 のパターン化導体。 1 0 5. The stretchable portion extends in the width direction of the patterned conductor. 110. The patterned conductor of claim 100, having at least one pleated portion.
PCT/JP2002/004100 2001-04-26 2002-04-24 Light source coupler, illuminant device, patterned conductor, and method for manufcturing light source coupler WO2002089222A1 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2002586413A JP3880522B2 (en) 2001-04-26 2002-04-24 Light source assembly, light emitter device, and method of manufacturing light source assembly
KR10-2003-7013880A KR100537897B1 (en) 2001-04-26 2002-04-24 Light source coupler, illuminant device, patterned conductor, and method for manufacturing light source coupler
US10/475,816 US7380961B2 (en) 2002-04-24 2002-04-24 Light source coupler, illuminant device, patterned conductor, and method for manufacturing light source coupler
CNB028088506A CN1306621C (en) 2001-04-26 2002-04-24 Light source coupler, illuninant device, patterned conductor and method for manufacturing light source coupler

Applications Claiming Priority (10)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2001129579 2001-04-26
JP2001-129579 2001-04-26
JP2001201436 2001-07-02
JP2001-201436 2001-07-02
JP2001-201418 2001-07-02
JP2001201418 2001-07-02
JP2001-289290 2001-09-21
JP2001289290 2001-09-21
JP2002001666 2002-01-08
JP2002-001666 2002-01-08

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2002089222A1 true WO2002089222A1 (en) 2002-11-07

Family

ID=27531879

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2002/004100 WO2002089222A1 (en) 2001-04-26 2002-04-24 Light source coupler, illuminant device, patterned conductor, and method for manufcturing light source coupler

Country Status (4)

Country Link
JP (1) JP3880522B2 (en)
KR (1) KR100537897B1 (en)
CN (1) CN1306621C (en)
WO (1) WO2002089222A1 (en)

Cited By (26)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2005050085A1 (en) * 2003-11-20 2005-06-02 Omron Corporation Surface light source unit and device using the unit
WO2005117149A1 (en) * 2004-05-26 2005-12-08 Advanex Inc. Fixing device and fixing structure for light emitting diode
JP2006041379A (en) * 2004-07-29 2006-02-09 Nippon Leiz Co Ltd Light source device
JP2006080251A (en) * 2004-09-09 2006-03-23 Nichia Chem Ind Ltd Light-emitting device and manufacturing method therefor
WO2006030733A1 (en) * 2004-09-13 2006-03-23 Rohm Co., Ltd Semiconductor light emitting device
WO2006033297A1 (en) * 2004-09-21 2006-03-30 Intellectual Property Bank Corp. Method for manufacturing unit on which led is mounted, led socket, and electronic circuit substrate for mounting led
EP1643183A1 (en) * 2004-09-30 2006-04-05 Crescent Lighting Ltd. Electrical circuit and connection method
JP2007096287A (en) * 2005-08-31 2007-04-12 Toshiba Lighting & Technology Corp Led lighting device and led substrate module
JP2007266204A (en) * 2006-03-28 2007-10-11 Denki Kagaku Kogyo Kk Metal-base circuit board and manufacturing method thereof, and led module
JP2008098343A (en) * 2006-10-11 2008-04-24 Toyoda Gosei Co Ltd Led lamp device
JP2008131027A (en) * 2006-11-22 2008-06-05 Lighthouse Technology Co Ltd Combination of high power diode holder structure and high power diode package
JP2008198949A (en) * 2007-02-15 2008-08-28 Yazaki Corp Load unit
JP2008300884A (en) * 2003-10-30 2008-12-11 Furukawa Electric Co Ltd:The Led, connection structure of led and flat cable, and led-connecting circuit structure
WO2009038071A1 (en) * 2007-09-21 2009-03-26 Showa Denko K.K. Display device, light source connector, illuminator, and light source connector manufacturing method
WO2009066646A1 (en) * 2007-11-20 2009-05-28 Showa Denko K.K. Light source connection member, light emitting device and display device
JP2009528685A (en) * 2006-09-12 2009-08-06 ポール・ロ Integrally molded integrally formed light emitting diode light wire
JP2010034369A (en) * 2008-07-30 2010-02-12 Kyocera Corp Solar cell unit and package for solar cell unit
JP2010206204A (en) * 2009-03-02 2010-09-16 Lg Innotek Co Ltd Light emitting module and light unit including same
JP2011253967A (en) * 2010-06-02 2011-12-15 Chichibu Fuji Co Ltd Aging board for semiconductor laser device
JP2012028412A (en) * 2010-07-20 2012-02-09 Furukawa Electric Co Ltd:The Two-dimensional surface emitting laser array element, surface emitting laser device, and light source
JP2012049367A (en) * 2010-08-27 2012-03-08 Kyocera Elco Corp Semiconductor light-emitting device attachment module, semiconductor light-emitting device module, semiconductor light-emitting device lighting apparatus, and manufacturing method of semiconductor light-emitting device attachment module
JP2012146794A (en) * 2011-01-11 2012-08-02 Kyocera Connector Products Corp Module for attaching semiconductor light-emitting element and semiconductor light-emitting element module
WO2012144109A1 (en) 2011-04-19 2012-10-26 日本メクトロン株式会社 Circuit board assembly and lighting device
US8562177B2 (en) 2009-12-24 2013-10-22 Nippon Mektron, Ltd. Lighting device with LEDs mounted on flexible circuit board self maintained in bellows shape and manufacturing method thereof
EP2775540A1 (en) * 2011-11-21 2014-09-10 Rongbao Li Strip led
US10680383B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2020-06-09 Apex Technologies, Inc. Linear electrode systems for module attachment with non-uniform axial spacing

Families Citing this family (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2013532A1 (en) * 2006-04-25 2009-01-14 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Led array grid, method and device for manufacturing said grid and led component for use in the same
EP2013529B1 (en) * 2006-04-25 2010-01-13 Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. Large area led array and method for its manufacture
DE102008038778A1 (en) 2008-08-12 2010-02-25 Bega Gantenbrink-Leuchten Kg Color LED Spotlight
CN101806439B (en) * 2009-02-18 2013-04-17 黄嘉宾 Heat dissipation structure of LED
TW201235609A (en) * 2010-07-13 2012-09-01 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv Low cost mounting of LEDs in TL-retrofit tubes
KR101300907B1 (en) * 2010-10-01 2013-08-27 소닉스자펜 주식회사 Lampshade connecting device, lampshade connected module and the light comprising the same
CN102200230A (en) * 2011-05-18 2011-09-28 陈建伟 LED (Light Emitting Diode) bulb
CN102974907A (en) * 2011-09-06 2013-03-20 苏州世鼎电子有限公司 Welding process method of light emitting diode (LED) assembly
CN103017108B (en) * 2011-09-27 2017-04-19 欧司朗股份有限公司 Pedestal, round tube shape casing and lamp comprising same
US9997684B2 (en) 2012-03-30 2018-06-12 Lumileds Llc Pre-rotated overmoulded bidirectional spreading lens for stretched leadframe architecture
KR101647953B1 (en) * 2014-08-26 2016-08-12 한국단자공업 주식회사 Led module and led module assembly
CN105161602B (en) * 2015-09-25 2018-03-16 临安市新三联照明电器有限公司 A kind of LED circuit board with reinforcement
CN105276534A (en) * 2015-09-25 2016-01-27 吴少健 LED circuit board
CN106382609B (en) * 2016-10-18 2023-05-30 南昌大学 LED filament strip
JP6934180B2 (en) * 2017-05-17 2021-09-15 アイリスオーヤマ株式会社 LED lamp
DE102017131063A1 (en) * 2017-12-22 2019-06-27 Ledvance Gmbh LED module with a stabilized leadframe
CN110808242B (en) * 2019-11-20 2020-12-08 博兴战新产业发展有限公司 LED lamp string and manufacturing method thereof
TWI772098B (en) * 2021-07-09 2022-07-21 聯嘉光電股份有限公司 Linear led and application apparatus thereof

Citations (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS582080A (en) * 1981-06-29 1983-01-07 Nippon Denyo Kk Lamp
JPS6132483A (en) * 1984-07-24 1986-02-15 Kimura Denki Kk Spherical luminous body using led
JPS6170306U (en) * 1984-10-16 1986-05-14
JPS6223467U (en) * 1985-07-29 1987-02-13
JPH05235413A (en) * 1992-02-21 1993-09-10 Tokai Tsushin Kogyo Kk Illuminant
JPH0715045A (en) * 1992-05-11 1995-01-17 Susumu Kurokawa Surface light emission illuminating equipment
US5519596A (en) * 1995-05-16 1996-05-21 Hewlett-Packard Company Moldable nesting frame for light emitting diode array
JPH08339707A (en) * 1995-06-09 1996-12-24 Koito Mfg Co Ltd Signal lamp for automobile
JPH11163411A (en) * 1997-11-28 1999-06-18 Dowa Mining Co Ltd Lamp device for optical communication and manufacturing method therefor
JP2000260206A (en) * 1999-03-09 2000-09-22 Stanley Electric Co Ltd Manufacture of light-emitting element module
JP3075996U (en) * 2000-08-30 2001-03-16 舶用電球株式会社 Tube type LED lamp
JP2002057371A (en) * 2000-08-15 2002-02-22 Hukuyo Denkyu Kk Chain led light source structure

Family Cites Families (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0642564B2 (en) * 1983-02-15 1994-06-01 日本デンヨ−株式会社 LED lamp
JPH0445257Y2 (en) * 1986-05-15 1992-10-23
JPH0226272U (en) * 1988-08-08 1990-02-21
JPH0235187U (en) * 1988-08-31 1990-03-07
JPH0399450U (en) * 1990-01-31 1991-10-17
US5404282A (en) * 1993-09-17 1995-04-04 Hewlett-Packard Company Multiple light emitting diode module
JP3910319B2 (en) * 1999-09-13 2007-04-25 株式会社小糸製作所 Automotive lamp

Patent Citations (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPS582080A (en) * 1981-06-29 1983-01-07 Nippon Denyo Kk Lamp
JPS6132483A (en) * 1984-07-24 1986-02-15 Kimura Denki Kk Spherical luminous body using led
JPS6170306U (en) * 1984-10-16 1986-05-14
JPS6223467U (en) * 1985-07-29 1987-02-13
JPH05235413A (en) * 1992-02-21 1993-09-10 Tokai Tsushin Kogyo Kk Illuminant
JPH0715045A (en) * 1992-05-11 1995-01-17 Susumu Kurokawa Surface light emission illuminating equipment
US5519596A (en) * 1995-05-16 1996-05-21 Hewlett-Packard Company Moldable nesting frame for light emitting diode array
JPH08339707A (en) * 1995-06-09 1996-12-24 Koito Mfg Co Ltd Signal lamp for automobile
JPH11163411A (en) * 1997-11-28 1999-06-18 Dowa Mining Co Ltd Lamp device for optical communication and manufacturing method therefor
JP2000260206A (en) * 1999-03-09 2000-09-22 Stanley Electric Co Ltd Manufacture of light-emitting element module
JP2002057371A (en) * 2000-08-15 2002-02-22 Hukuyo Denkyu Kk Chain led light source structure
JP3075996U (en) * 2000-08-30 2001-03-16 舶用電球株式会社 Tube type LED lamp

Cited By (32)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2008300884A (en) * 2003-10-30 2008-12-11 Furukawa Electric Co Ltd:The Led, connection structure of led and flat cable, and led-connecting circuit structure
WO2005050085A1 (en) * 2003-11-20 2005-06-02 Omron Corporation Surface light source unit and device using the unit
WO2005117149A1 (en) * 2004-05-26 2005-12-08 Advanex Inc. Fixing device and fixing structure for light emitting diode
JP2006041379A (en) * 2004-07-29 2006-02-09 Nippon Leiz Co Ltd Light source device
JP4556166B2 (en) * 2004-07-29 2010-10-06 ライツ・アドバンスト・テクノロジー株式会社 Light source device
JP4654639B2 (en) * 2004-09-09 2011-03-23 日亜化学工業株式会社 Light emitting device and manufacturing method thereof
JP2006080251A (en) * 2004-09-09 2006-03-23 Nichia Chem Ind Ltd Light-emitting device and manufacturing method therefor
WO2006030733A1 (en) * 2004-09-13 2006-03-23 Rohm Co., Ltd Semiconductor light emitting device
US8030669B2 (en) 2004-09-13 2011-10-04 Rohm Co., Ltd. Semiconductor light emitting device
WO2006033297A1 (en) * 2004-09-21 2006-03-30 Intellectual Property Bank Corp. Method for manufacturing unit on which led is mounted, led socket, and electronic circuit substrate for mounting led
EP1643183A1 (en) * 2004-09-30 2006-04-05 Crescent Lighting Ltd. Electrical circuit and connection method
JP2007096287A (en) * 2005-08-31 2007-04-12 Toshiba Lighting & Technology Corp Led lighting device and led substrate module
JP2007266204A (en) * 2006-03-28 2007-10-11 Denki Kagaku Kogyo Kk Metal-base circuit board and manufacturing method thereof, and led module
JP2009528685A (en) * 2006-09-12 2009-08-06 ポール・ロ Integrally molded integrally formed light emitting diode light wire
JP2008098343A (en) * 2006-10-11 2008-04-24 Toyoda Gosei Co Ltd Led lamp device
JP2008131027A (en) * 2006-11-22 2008-06-05 Lighthouse Technology Co Ltd Combination of high power diode holder structure and high power diode package
JP2008198949A (en) * 2007-02-15 2008-08-28 Yazaki Corp Load unit
WO2009038071A1 (en) * 2007-09-21 2009-03-26 Showa Denko K.K. Display device, light source connector, illuminator, and light source connector manufacturing method
WO2009066646A1 (en) * 2007-11-20 2009-05-28 Showa Denko K.K. Light source connection member, light emitting device and display device
JPWO2009066646A1 (en) * 2007-11-20 2011-04-07 昭和電工株式会社 Light source assembly, light emitting device, display device
JP2010034369A (en) * 2008-07-30 2010-02-12 Kyocera Corp Solar cell unit and package for solar cell unit
JP2010206204A (en) * 2009-03-02 2010-09-16 Lg Innotek Co Ltd Light emitting module and light unit including same
US8562177B2 (en) 2009-12-24 2013-10-22 Nippon Mektron, Ltd. Lighting device with LEDs mounted on flexible circuit board self maintained in bellows shape and manufacturing method thereof
JP2011253967A (en) * 2010-06-02 2011-12-15 Chichibu Fuji Co Ltd Aging board for semiconductor laser device
JP2012028412A (en) * 2010-07-20 2012-02-09 Furukawa Electric Co Ltd:The Two-dimensional surface emitting laser array element, surface emitting laser device, and light source
JP2012049367A (en) * 2010-08-27 2012-03-08 Kyocera Elco Corp Semiconductor light-emitting device attachment module, semiconductor light-emitting device module, semiconductor light-emitting device lighting apparatus, and manufacturing method of semiconductor light-emitting device attachment module
JP2012146794A (en) * 2011-01-11 2012-08-02 Kyocera Connector Products Corp Module for attaching semiconductor light-emitting element and semiconductor light-emitting element module
WO2012144109A1 (en) 2011-04-19 2012-10-26 日本メクトロン株式会社 Circuit board assembly and lighting device
US8545056B2 (en) 2011-04-19 2013-10-01 Nippon Mektron, Ltd. LED flexible board assembly and lighting unit
EP2775540A1 (en) * 2011-11-21 2014-09-10 Rongbao Li Strip led
EP2775540A4 (en) * 2011-11-21 2014-12-03 Rongbao Li Strip led
US10680383B2 (en) 2013-03-14 2020-06-09 Apex Technologies, Inc. Linear electrode systems for module attachment with non-uniform axial spacing

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN1529914A (en) 2004-09-15
KR100537897B1 (en) 2005-12-20
JP3880522B2 (en) 2007-02-14
CN1306621C (en) 2007-03-21
JPWO2002089222A1 (en) 2004-08-19
KR20030095400A (en) 2003-12-18

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2002089222A1 (en) Light source coupler, illuminant device, patterned conductor, and method for manufcturing light source coupler
US7380961B2 (en) Light source coupler, illuminant device, patterned conductor, and method for manufacturing light source coupler
JP3862723B2 (en) Light emitting module
US7677763B2 (en) Method and system for attachment of light emitting diodes to circuitry for use in lighting
US20190234597A1 (en) Light string and manufactruing method thereof
US7290911B2 (en) Vehicular lamp
US20040007981A1 (en) Chained led light source structure
US20080239716A1 (en) Light strip
CN109973837B (en) LED module with stabilized lead frame
CN111140773A (en) Multi-color light engine for semiconductor lamps
US20150116996A1 (en) Electric Lamps and Methods of Manufacture of Electrical Devices
GB2484152A (en) Method of manufacturing an electrical device
US20060082315A1 (en) Method and system for attachment of light emmiting diodes to circuitry for use in lighting
CN111043540A (en) LED linear light source component capable of emitting light uniformly and method
GB2483942A (en) Electric lamp
WO2011071515A1 (en) Led socket assembly
EP3627044B1 (en) Lighting device
EP1482241B1 (en) A vehicle lighting device and method of assembling a vehicle lighting device
JP4252914B2 (en) LED connection circuit structure
US11774080B2 (en) Support for light-emitting elements and lighting device
JP2003167540A (en) Light emitting body device, light source connecting body and method of manufacturing the body
JP4336185B2 (en) Electronic component or electrical component mounting wiring body
CN215682745U (en) FPC circuit board, bending lamp area and illuminator
CN215061391U (en) LED double-tube lamp
CN114992540A (en) Lighting circuit and lamp area that can tailor in optional position

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NO NZ OM PH PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): GH GM KE LS MW MZ SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE CH CY DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC NL PT SE TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2002586413

Country of ref document: JP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1020037013880

Country of ref document: KR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 028088506

Country of ref document: CN

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 10475816

Country of ref document: US

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase